JP7828002B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (also called "pachinko gaming machines" or "pachinko machines") or slot machine gaming machines (also called "pachislot machines" or "slot machines").

In typical gaming machines, gameplay is controlled according to the results of an internal lottery triggered by a specific event. Gaming machines are equipped with a main control board that controls the gameplay and a presentation control board that controls the presentation, as well as various other control boards. For example, control boards have numerous electronic components mounted on their surfaces and numerous wiring patterns formed on them, and technological improvements are being made every day (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-189634

However, there is still room for further technological improvement in gaming machines.

In light of the above-mentioned issues, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine with further technical improvements.

In order to solve such problems, the present invention provides a printed circuit board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, as a board for controlling a game, the printed circuit board having a multi-layer structure in which one or more insulating layers and one or more conductor layers are laminated, and on the board surface of the printed circuit board, outside a mounting area in which the plurality of electronic components are mounted, there is a peripheral area having a different color from the mounting area due to a laminate structure different from the mounting area, and reference holes that can be used for positioning or fixing the printed circuit board are formed in the peripheral area, and in the peripheral area, a first area corresponding to the periphery of the printed circuit board and a second area surrounding the reference holes are different from both the first area and the second area. a third region of the peripheral region having a different laminated structure from the third region of the peripheral region, the third region being formed to have a lighter color and higher transparency than the mounting region, and the first region and the second region being formed to have a lighter color and higher transparency than the third region; information relating to the layout of electronic components to be mounted can be printed on the board surface of the printed circuit board; as information relating to the layout of a predetermined electronic component having a height equal to or greater than a predetermined height among the plurality of electronic components, a first type of mark resembling an outline of the predetermined electronic component when mounted is printed in the layout region of the predetermined electronic component on the board surface of the printed circuit board; a second type of mark having an outer shape different from that of the specific electronic component when the specific electronic component is mounted is printed in an arrangement area of the specific electronic component on the board surface of the printed circuit board, and when the specific electronic component mounted in the arrangement area of the specific electronic component is viewed from above the board surface of the printed circuit board, a part of the outer shape of the second type of mark is shielded by the specific electronic component, and other parts of the outer shape of the second type of mark are exposed on both sides of the specific electronic component, sandwiching the specific electronic component; the second type of mark includes information other than the outer shape of the specific electronic component, and a mark is arranged in the area where the second type of mark is printed based on the information; a gaming machine is provided in which the type of the specific electronic component to be inserted can be identified, the plurality of electronic components include insert-mounted components that can be mounted on the printed circuit board by inserting the leads of the electronic components from a first surface of the printed circuit board into through holes formed in the printed circuit board at the assembly positions of the electronic components and soldering the leads protruding from a second surface behind the first surface, and certain of the insert-mounted components have undergone a clinching process in which the ends of the leads protruding from the second surface are bent, and no through holes other than the through holes through which the leads are inserted are formed within a predetermined distance from the ends of the leads bent by the clinching process.

This invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with further technical improvements.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the rear. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine from the front, with the glass frame open from the front frame and the front frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a glass frame, a game board, a front frame, and an outer frame, seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a glass frame, a game board, a front frame, and an outer frame, seen from the rear. FIG. This is an oblique view of the game board from the front right. FIG. This is an oblique view of the back of the game board from the rear left. This is an oblique view of the back of the game board from the rear right. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine (part 1). This is a rear view of a pachinko machine (part 2). This is a rear view of a pachinko machine (part 3). FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state shown in FIG. 17. FIG. 2 is a control block diagram showing an example of the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an example of the functions of the main control board shown in FIG. 19 . A block diagram showing an example of the function of the performance control board shown in Figure 19. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol winning/losing lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol winning symbol table. A figure showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for winning. A figure showing an example of a special pattern change pattern table for losses. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination table. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process on the main control side. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing on the main control side following Figure 27. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing on the main control side following Figure 28. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing that follows Figure 32. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start port monitoring control process. This is a flowchart showing an example of the start port monitoring control processing following Figure 34. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variation start monitoring control process. A flowchart showing an example of the special pattern variation start monitoring process shown in Figure 36. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern variation start monitoring process following Figure 37. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control general-purpose processing shown in FIG. 39. A flowchart showing an example of the special pattern variation start processing shown in Figure 40. A flowchart showing an example of processing during special pattern fluctuation shown in Figure 40. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during the display of the special symbol stop symbol shown in FIG. 40. This is a flowchart continuing from Figure 43, showing an example of processing during display of special pattern stop patterns. This is a flowchart continuing from Figure 44, showing an example of processing during display of special pattern stop patterns. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special electric device control process. This is a flowchart showing an example of special electric device control processing following Figure 46. This is a flowchart showing an example of special electric device control processing following Figure 47. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a reset start process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process on the performance control side. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 50. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the presentation state transition process shown in FIG. 51. A flowchart showing an example of the variable performance content determination process shown in Figure 51. A flowchart showing an example of the jackpot presentation content determination process shown in Figure 51. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining the content of the jackpot presentation, following Figure 54. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an image control command transmission interrupt process. 10 is a diagram for explaining the display of decorative patterns, etc. on a performance display device. FIG. A figure showing an example of screen transition before the start of a game standby demo presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a counting method of an MY counter. A figure showing an example (part 1) of the advance notification display. A figure showing an example of the advance notification display (part 2). A figure showing an example of the display of a suppression notification effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the function of the sub-control board shown in Figure 64. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a processing procedure for drawing processing. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a processing procedure for clearing a watchdog timer. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis procedure. FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 2000. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming machine 2000. A top view of a portion of the gaming machine 2000. A block diagram showing an outline of control in the gaming machine 2000. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pattern display device 2038. FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing an example of a back lamp 2310. An oblique view of the left reel 2039a. An exploded oblique view of the left reel 2039a. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement of symbols on each reel. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the display of symbols when the reels are stopped. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the vicinity of the end of the reel tape 2320. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining examples of the design of predetermined reel symbols. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of an attacker unit. 10 is a diagram for explaining the overlap of the design portion and the game ball. FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the structure of a base material of a game board on which a design is printed. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the image a player will have when visually observing a panel member that has been subjected to shrinking processing. FIG. 10 is an image diagram for explaining the structure of planting obstacle nails. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship between a peg and an electronic component. 87 is a side view schematically showing the positional relationship between the obstacle nail 3301A and the LED 3341A shown in FIG. 86. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating another example of the positional relationship between the obstacle nails and the electronic component. A cross-sectional view showing an example of the structure of a decorative accessory. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing an example of the configuration of the front surface of the board surface of the printed circuit board. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing an example of the configuration of the front surface of the board surface of the printed circuit board. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing an example of the configuration of the back surface of the printed circuit board. 91 is a plan view showing an example of a configuration in which a plurality of test points are formed in region S on the substrate surface shown in FIG. 90. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a state in which a clinching process is performed on a lead. FIG. 1A and 1B are cross-sectional views showing an example of a lead in which clinching has been performed, and a cross-sectional view showing an example of a lead in which clinching has not been performed. 93 is a plan view showing an example of a configuration in which a region U on the substrate surface shown in FIG. 92 is enlarged. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional view showing an example of how the shape of the end of a lead of an electronic component is checked with a finger. 1 is a plan view showing an example of electronic components mounted on a substrate surface and their placement marks, etc. FIG. 91 is a perspective view showing an example of a state in which components are assembled in area O on the substrate surface shown in FIG. 90. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing an example of a state in which components are not mounted on a board surface. 91 is a perspective view showing an example of how small electronic components are arranged on the substrate surface in the region P shown in FIG. 90. 10A and 10B are plan views for explaining examples of mounting different types of electronic components. 91 is a plan view showing an example of the configuration of region R on the substrate surface shown in FIG. 90. 10A and 10B are cross-sectional views showing examples of different land configurations. FIG. 10 is a plan view showing an example of the configuration of the surface of another substrate. 1 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the configuration of a mounting area and a peripheral area of a printed circuit board. 91 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration in the vicinity of the notch of the printed circuit board in the region T shown in FIG. 90. FIG. 108 is a side view showing an example of the configuration in the vicinity of the notch shown in FIG. 107.

Below, a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

1. First embodiment
<Structure of a Pachinko Machine>
Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 and subsequent figures show the pachinko machine 1 shown in Fig. 1 as viewed from other directions and disassembled. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and Fig. 4 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front with the glass frame opened from the front frame and the front frame opened from the outer frame. Fig. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, disassembled into the glass frame, game board, front frame, and outer frame. Fig. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear with the glass frame, game board, front frame, and outer frame.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in Figure 1 etc. comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in the island equipment of an amusement hall, a glass frame (door frame) 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, a front frame 4 that supports the glass frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the front frame 4 from the front, is visible through the glass frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which game balls are shot.

The outer frame 2 is rectangular, combining frames 2a and 2b that extend vertically and horizontally, and frames 2c and 2d that extend vertically and horizontally. It is equipped with hinge members 2e and 2f on the top and bottom of the left edge from the front, and the hinge members support the front frame 4 and glass frame 3 so that they can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached freely.

A glass frame 3 is attached to the front side of the front frame 4 via hinge mechanisms 3a and 3b on the left edge as viewed from the front, allowing it to be opened and closed sideways and detached. The glass frame 3 is held closed by a glass plate covering its front using a locking device 3c. A game board 5 is detachably attached to the front side of the front frame 4 in the upper half of the front frame 4, located behind the glass frame 3, and the game area 5a in front of the game board 5 can be seen through the double-pane glass of the glass frame 3, which is held closed as described above.

The glass frame 3 comprises a base unit 3e with a rectangular through-hole 3d penetrating from front to back, a tray unit 3f below the front of the base unit 3e for storing game balls, and an area 3g housing a handle 4a that can be operated by a player to shoot the game balls stored in the tray unit 3f into the game area of the game board 5. The front side of the glass frame 3 is provided with a frame lamp (LED lamp) 3h that emits light depending on the progress of the game, and a speaker 3i that outputs sound depending on the progress of the game. A performance button 3j that can be pressed by a player is provided in the center of the front of the tray unit 3f. The base of the performance button 3j has a lever structure that can be tilted toward the player (toward the player) to a predetermined angle, and functions as a second performance button 3k that can be pulled in by the player. The second effect button 3k may be designed to always allow for the pull-in operation, but considering the operability of the effect button 3j, it is preferable that it is normally fixed to the OFF side by a locking mechanism or the like, and that the lock is released when a specific effect is performed, allowing for the pull-in operation (ON operation).

The front frame 4 is insertable into the outer frame 2 and includes a frame body 4b that supports the outer periphery of the game board 5; hinges 4c and 4d that are rotatably attached to the top and bottom of the left side of the frame body 4b when viewed from the front, and to the hinges of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3; a launcher 4e that is attached to the lower front of the frame body 4b and that shoots game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5; a locking unit 4f that is attached to the right side of the frame body 4b when viewed from the front and that locks the gap between the outer frame 2 and the front frame 4 and the glass frame 3; a circuit board unit 4g that is attached to the lower rear of the frame body 4b; and a back cover 4h that is attached to the rear of the frame body 4b and covers the rear of the game board 5 attached to the frame body 4b. The circuit board unit 4g houses a speaker unit, a power supply board, an interface control board, and a payout control board that controls the payout of game balls.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the game ball launcher 4e, game balls are shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a force corresponding to the angle of the rotation. When a game ball shot into the game area 5a is received by a prize slot (ball entry slot), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to the prize slot into which the ball was received. This payout of game balls can increase the player's interest.

<Game board>
Next, the game board 5 will be described with reference to Figures 8 to 14. Figure 8 is a front view of the game board, Figure 9 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, Figure 10 is a rear view of the game board, Figure 11 is a perspective view of the rear of the game board seen from the rear left, Figure 12 is a perspective view of the rear of the game board seen from the rear right, Figure 13 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and Figure 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and seen from the rear.

The gaming board 5 has a playing area 5a into which gaming balls are shot. The gaming board 5 is composed of a front unit 100m, a back unit 200m, an LCD base 300m, and an LCD display device (performance display device) 70. The front unit 100m comprises a front member 100a that defines the outer periphery of the playing area 5a and has a roughly rectangular outline when viewed from the front, and a plate-shaped playing panel 100b that is attached to the rear side of the front member 100a and defines the rear end of the playing area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined arrangement on the front side of the playing panel 100b within the playing area 5a.

The front member 100a is equipped with a functional display unit 100c in the bottom right corner that allows the player to see the game status based on control signals from the main control unit 5b (main control board 100 that controls the overall game). The effect display device 70 is positioned in the center of the game area 5a and displays a specified effect image. A peripheral control unit 5c (effect control board 200 that controls the overall effects) is attached to the back of the effect display device 70. The LCD base 300m is open on the side facing the back unit 200m to accommodate the back unit 200m, and the effect display device 70 is attached to the back of the LCD base 300m.

The game panel 100b has an outer peripheral shape that is almost the same as that of the front member 100a, and is made of a transparent, flat panel board.It is attached to the rear side of the front member 100a and further has a holder on the rear surface to which the back unit 200m can be attached. The front member 100a is equipped with a plurality of general winning openings 66 that are always open so that they can accept game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 61 that is always open so that it can accept game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the general winning openings, a gate 63 (integrally formed in the attacca unit 500 described below) that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls, a second starting opening 62 (integrally formed in the attacca unit 500 described below) that can accept game balls depending on the result of a normal pattern lottery that is drawn when a game ball passes through the gate, and a large winning opening 64 (integrally formed in the attacca unit 500 described below) that can accept game balls depending on either the result of a first special lottery that is drawn when a game ball is accepted into the first starting opening 61 or the result of a second special lottery that is drawn when a game ball is accepted into the second starting opening. Note that the gate 63, second starting gate 62, and large prize gate 64 are located within the attacker unit 500 and are therefore not shown here.

The second starting opening is equipped with a normal electric device comprised of a movable piece and a normal electric device solenoid for opening and closing the normal electric device. Depending on the current state of the normal electric device solenoid, the normal electric device can alternate between a closed state, which makes it difficult for game balls to enter the second starting opening, and an open state, which makes it easier for game balls to enter than the closed state. The second starting opening is configured so that game balls are difficult to enter unless the normal electric device is in the open state, but are easy to enter when the normal electric device is in the open state. The front member 100a is equipped with a first outlet 29 directly below the first starting opening 61 in the left-right center. The attacca unit 500 is located at the bottom right of the front member 100a. The attacca unit 500 is primarily equipped with a movable piece serving as the special electric device 642 that opens and closes the large prize opening 64, and is an integrated unit of multiple parts.

The rear unit 200m has an opening 200a for viewing the LCD display screen at the rear. The rear unit 200m is equipped with sensors that detect game balls received in the general winning opening 66, first starting opening 61, etc., a locking mechanism for detachably attaching the LCD base 300m, and a passage for discharging game balls.

The front member 100a has a roughly square exterior when viewed from the front, and a roughly circular interior that penetrates in the front-to-back direction, with the inner periphery of the interior defining the outer periphery of the play area 5a. This front member 100a is equipped with an outer rail 100f that extends in an arc from the lower end toward the left of the center in the left-to-right direction in a front view, passing the upper center in the left-to-right direction in a front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right; an inner rail 100d that is positioned inside the front member 100a roughly along the outer rail 100f and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left-to-right direction in a front view to the upper left diagonal direction in a front view; and an out guideway 100e that is formed at the lowest point of the play area 5a to the right of the lower end of the inner rail 100d in a front view, sloping downward toward the rear.

The gaming panel 100b has a center ornament 22 that protrudes toward the front member 100a around an opening that has the same shape as the opening in the front member 100a. When the gaming panel 100b is fixed to the front member 100a, the center ornament 22 fits into the opening to match the shape of the opening in the front member 100a, decorating the area around the opening 100h of the front unit 100m. The player can see the presentation screen and the behavior of the presentation device through the opening 100h. The center ornament 22 is a type of decorative element and performs a decorative function at the center of the gaming board 5, supporting the screen of the presentation display device 70, etc. The center ornament 22 may be provided with a movable role (movable presentation device) that performs presentation operations according to the progress of the game. The movable role is operated by a drive source such as a stepping motor or solenoid. The center ornament 22 may also be provided with a lamp that lights up according to the progress of the game.

The main control unit 5b (see Figure 7) is attached to the back of the effect display device 70, below the peripheral control unit 5c. The main control unit 5b includes a main control board 100 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and a main control board case 100n that houses the main control board 100 (see Figure 16). The main control unit 5b controls the game content and the prize balls, etc.

The function display unit 100c comprises a status indicator consisting of one LED that displays the game status; a normal pattern display that displays a variable normal pattern by controlling the blinking of two LEDs based on the result of a normal pattern lottery drawn when a gaming ball passes through gate 63, and then displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode corresponding to the result of the normal pattern lottery; a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of hold indicators, which is the number of variable normal pattern indicators related to the passage of a gaming ball through gate 63 for which the conditions for starting the variable display have not yet been met; a first special pattern display that displays a variable first special pattern by controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of a first special lottery drawn when a gaming ball is received through first start port 61 (occurrence of a start winning), and then displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode corresponding to the result of the first special lottery; The device is equipped with a first special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number, which is the number of variable displays of the first special pattern related to acceptance for which the conditions for starting the variable display have not yet been met, a second special pattern display that controls the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of a second special lottery drawn upon acceptance of a gaming ball into the second starting port (occurrence of a start winning), thereby displaying the second special pattern variable, and then displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery, a second special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number, which is the number of variable displays of the second special pattern related to acceptance of a gaming ball into the second starting port for which the conditions for starting the variable display have not yet been met, and a round display consisting of four LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning port when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot" or the like. The functional display unit 100c can display the reserved number, patterns, etc. by appropriately turning the LEDs on, off, blinking, etc.

The peripheral control unit 5c is attached to the rear of the effect display device 70 and includes an effect control board 200 that controls the effects (light-emitting effects, sound effects, moving effects, etc.) presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 100, and an image control board 300 that controls image display and sound output according to the development of the game (see Figure 19). The effect display device 70 is located in the center of the game area 5a and is detachably attached to the rear surface approximately in the center of the LCD base 300m that houses the back unit 200m. When the game board 5 is assembled, the effect display device 70 can be seen from the front through the frame of the frame-shaped center ornament 22. The effect display device 70 is a full-color display device backlit by white LEDs and displays still and moving images. In this embodiment, the performance control board 200 and image control board 300 are configured as two separate boards, but the functional configuration of the CPU on each board is not limited to that described above and can be changed as appropriate (for example, sound control can be performed by the CPU on the performance control board), or all performances can be controlled by the CPU on a single board.

The effect display device 70 primarily displays effect images including decorative patterns and preview effects that change and stop in conjunction with the first or second special pattern, and also displays the first and second special patterns on hold. Specifically, the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided with a decorative pattern display section that displays decorative pattern changes and preview effects, a first special pattern reserve display section that displays the first special pattern on hold in synchronization with the first special pattern reserve lamp, and a second special pattern reserve display section that displays the second special pattern on hold in synchronization with the second special pattern reserve lamp.

The decorative symbol display section of the LCD screen has three display areas (left display area, middle display area, right display area) on a specified active line that serve as variable display areas for decorative symbols, with the left decorative symbol corresponding to the left display area, the middle decorative symbol corresponding to the middle display area, and the right decorative symbol corresponding to the right display area being displayed in a static state. In the normal display mode, the special symbol reserve display section displays a reserved image with a white circle when a special symbol activation reserved ball is generated, but when the activation reserved ball is consumed, the corresponding reserved image disappears. These reserved images are displayed in a predetermined order, such as the type of special symbol activation reserved ball and the order of occurrence (ball entry order), and up to four can be displayed on each special symbol reserve display section.

<Change settings>
The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may be equipped with a setting change function that changes the degree of advantage for the player using multiple setting values. Here, the setting value is a value for specifying the degree of advantage for the player and is managed by the main control board 100 (see FIG. 19 ). In this example, six setting values are provided, in order of decreasing advantage: "Setting 1,""Setting2," ..., "Setting 5," and "Setting 6." To vary the degree of advantage for the player depending on each setting value, for example, different odds of winning the special symbol lottery may be set for each setting value. The main control board 100 controls the progress of the game based on the setting value, and when the setting value is changed by a setting change operation (described later), the main control board 100 controls the progress of the game based on the changed setting value.

The following section will explain in detail the features of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment when it is equipped with a setting change function. In the following explanation, changing/setting a setting value will be referred to as a "setting change," and a series of operations related to a setting change will be referred to as a "setting change operation."

When performing a setting change operation on pachinko machine 1, first an operation is performed to transition the internal state controlled by main control board 100 (main control CPU 101) to a "setting change state" in which the setting value can be changed. Then, while controlled in the setting change state, an operation is performed to select and set the desired setting value (a known operating method for conventional gaming machines can be used, and a detailed explanation will be omitted), thereby changing the setting value.

The operations required to transition to the above setting change state consist of the first step (open frame) of opening the front frame 4, the second step (turn on setting key switch), the third step (turn on RAM clear switch) of performing an initialization operation on the initialization switch, and the fourth step (turn on power switch) of performing a power-on operation on the power switch. However, steps three and four must be performed in parallel.

These first to fourth steps will be explained in detail below, with reference to the characteristic structure of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

In the first step (frame opening), a door key is used to open the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2. Door keys are also called common keys, and are generally not unique to each gaming machine manufacturer or model, but are keys that can be shared with other gaming machine models to facilitate operation within gaming parlors.

To explain the frame opening procedure in more detail, for example, the front frame 4 can be released from the outer frame 2 by inserting a door key into the keyhole (not shown) of the locking device that keeps the front frame 4 closed relative to the outer frame 2 and turning it in a predetermined direction while pulling the front frame 4 toward you. Note that the keyhole into which the door key is inserted to release the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2 may also be configured to share the keyhole of the locking device 3c that keeps the glass frame 3 closed relative to the front frame 4.

In pachinko machine 1, a door-opening sensor 2p is provided on the curtain panel of outer frame 2 to detect the open/closed state of front frame 4 relative to outer frame 2. Furthermore, a door-opening detection member 4p is provided on front frame 4 at a position corresponding to the door-opening sensor 2p. For example, when front frame 4 is closed relative to outer frame 2, door-opening detection member 4p engages with door-opening sensor 2p, causing door-opening sensor 2p to detect the closed state of front frame 4 (door closed). On the other hand, when front frame 4 is open relative to outer frame 2, door-opening detection member 4p separates from door-opening sensor 2p, causing door-opening sensor 2p to detect the open state of front frame 4 (door open). Detection information from door-opening sensor 2p is output to a specified circuit board or the like and is processed as an error, if necessary. Note that the above structure is merely one example of a mechanism for detecting the open/closed state of front frame 4 relative to outer frame 2, and other known mechanisms may also be used.

Figure 15 is a rear view (part 1) of a pachinko machine. Figure 15 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 before the frame is opened, but if the outer frame 2 is removed from Figure 15, it corresponds to a rear view of the front frame 4 when it is opened relative to the outer frame 2 (frame opened). According to Figure 15, on the rear side of the front frame 4, the back cover 4h covering the rear side of the game board 5 is in a closed state. The back cover 4h is a covering member that normally covers the main control unit 5b (main control board 100) and the peripheral control unit 5c (performance control board 200). Therefore, even if the first procedure of opening the front frame 4 is performed, these covered units cannot be touched as long as the back cover 4h is in a closed state.

Note that Figure 15 also shows a RAM clear switch cover 400p that is provided on the dispensing control board 400 (dispensing control unit) and covers the RAM clear switch 400q, and a power switch cover 600p that is provided on the power supply board 600 (power supply unit) and covers the power switch 600q; details of these will be provided later.

Next, in the second step (setting key switch on), the setting key switch 100q is turned on using the setting key. Unlike the door key described above, the setting key is unique to each gaming machine manufacturer (or model) for security reasons, preventing fraudulent "settings," which have a significant impact on gaming machine performance. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the setting key switch 100q is provided on the main control unit 5b (e.g., the main control board 100). As described above with reference to Figure 15, simply releasing the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2 in the first step does not allow the setting key to be inserted into the setting key switch 100q because the main control unit 5b is covered by the back cover 4h. Therefore, when performing the second step, the back cover 4h must be opened.

Figure 16 is a rear view (part 2) of the pachinko machine. Figure 16 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 with the rear cover 4h removed from Figure 15. Removing the outer frame 2 from Figure 16 corresponds to a rear view of the front frame 4 when the second procedure is being executed (i.e., when the front frame 4 is open and the rear cover 4h is open). Figure 16 shows that the main control unit 5b (main control board 100) and peripheral control unit 5c (performance control board 200), which were covered by the rear cover 4h, are exposed. However, the setting key switch 100q has not yet appeared in a visible position.

In this embodiment, the back of the main control unit 5b is covered by a main control board case 100n, and the portion where the setting key switch 100q is provided is normally covered by an openable harness cover 100p. In other words, the setting key switch 100q is normally doubly covered by the rear cover 4h and the harness cover 100p. When performing the second procedure, it is necessary to open the rear cover 4h and then the harness cover 100p. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the rear cover 4h is designed to open and close in the left-right direction, while the harness cover 100p is designed to open and close in the up-down direction. By making the opening and closing directions of the two covers different in this way, it becomes difficult to operate the setting key switch 100q through a gap when the front frame 4 is slightly opened, thereby improving security.

Figure 17 is a rear view (part 3) of the pachinko machine. Figure 17 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 with the harness cover 100p opened from the state shown in Figure 16. Figure 18 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state shown in Figure 17. As shown in Figures 17 and 18, by opening the harness cover 100p to the rear side of the front frame 4, the setting key switch 100q located behind it is exposed and can be operated.

At this time, the person performing the setting change operation (e.g., the hall manager) can perform the second procedure of turning the setting key switch 100q on by leaving the harness cover 100p open and inserting the corresponding setting key into the setting key switch 100q from the back side of the front frame 4 and turning it in the specified direction.

Figures 17 and 18 also show the RAM clear switch cover 400p on the dispensing control unit and the power switch cover 600p on the power supply unit when open.

The RAM clear switch cover 400p is a cover that swings open and closed in the vertical direction. For example, the RAM clear switch cover 400p has a locking mechanism when closed, and can be unlocked by first moving the RAM clear switch cover 400p downward, after which it can be opened toward the front. When the RAM clear switch cover 400p is opened, the RAM clear switch 400q is exposed and can be operated.

The RAM clear switch 400q corresponds to the initialization switch operated in the third procedure, and outputs a signal to initialize (clear the RAM) the control information stored in the main control RAM 103 when a specified initialization operation is performed (for example, pressing the RAM clear switch 400q to turn it ON within a specified period after power-on). Note that the initialization operation for clearing the RAM is not limited to operating the RAM clear switch 400q alone; for example, turning on the power switch 600q while pressing the RAM clear switch 400q may also be used as an initialization operation for clearing the RAM. Furthermore, the range of information initialized when a RAM clear is performed is not limited to the control information stored in the main control RAM 103.

Therefore, after performing the second procedure, the operator performing the setting change operation can perform the third procedure (RAM clear switch ON) by opening the RAM clear switch cover 400p and performing an initialization operation (e.g., an ON operation) on the RAM clear switch 400q from the back side of the front frame 4.

Furthermore, like the RAM clear switch cover 400p described above, the power switch cover 600p is a cover that swings up and down to open and close. The power switch cover 600p may also have a locking mechanism. When the power switch cover 600p is opened, the power switch 600q is exposed and can be operated.

The power switch 600q is a power switch that changes the power supply state in the gaming machine 1 (at least the main control board 100), and outputs a signal to switch the power on/off state when a power operation is performed.

Therefore, after performing step 2, the operator performing the setting change operation can perform step 4 (power switch on) by performing the specified power operation (power on operation) on the power switch 600q from the back side of the front frame 4 with the power switch cover 600p open. As mentioned above, steps 3 and 4 must be performed simultaneously (in parallel). Then, by performing steps 1 through 4, the internal state of the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the setting change state, making it possible to select and set setting values.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the first to fourth steps for transitioning to the setting change state described above, if the first step (opening the slot) and the second step (turning on the setting key switch) are omitted and executed, an initialization operation will be performed, and if the third step (turning on the RAM clear switch) is omitted and executed, the machine will transition to a setting confirmation state in which the current game settings (setting values) are confirmed.

As described above, when changing settings on a pachinko machine 1, steps 2 to 4 must be performed from the back side of the front frame 4, with the front frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 using step 1. This prevents fraudulent behavior such as attempting to change settings while the front door (front frame 4) of the gaming machine is closed.

<Control configuration of gaming machine>
FIG. 19 is a control block diagram showing an example of the control configuration of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

<Main control board>
As shown in Figure 19, the main control board 100 comprises a main control CPU 101, a main control ROM 102, a main control RAM 103, and an I/O port circuit 104. The main control CPU 101 controls the operation of the main control program and executes various calculation processes related to the game. The main control ROM 102 stores the main control program and various data in a non-volatile manner. The main control RAM 103 functions as a work area and buffer memory used as a temporary storage area. The I/O port circuit 104 inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices such as the performance control board 200 and payout control board 400 under the control of the main control CPU 101.

The main control CPU 101 reads the main control program from the main control ROM 102 and executes each command on the main control RAM 103, thereby controlling game operations in accordance with each command in the main control program.

In addition, the main control board 100 is equipped with a clock circuit, a WDT circuit, a CTC circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc., although not shown.

The clock circuit divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock. The WDT circuit resets the main control CPU 101 to return it to normal operation if it malfunctions or goes out of control. The CTC circuit generates real-time interrupts and measures time. The random number generation circuit operates as a separate system from the program processing (software random numbers) performed by the main control CPU 101, and generates predetermined random numbers (internal random numbers). These are electrically connected to each other via an internal bus (not shown).

The main control CPU 101 reads the main control program stored in the main control ROM 102 and executes calculations based on detection information from each switch, such as the first start port switch 161, thereby performing various processes related to the main control of the game.

Furthermore, the main control CPU 101 has a presentation command output port for outputting presentation control commands to the presentation control board 200 to execute presentation operations associated with the main control of the game, as well as a payout command output port for outputting payout commands to execute the payout operation of game balls, and a strobe signal output port used to output strobe signals to determine the timing for receiving each of these transmitted commands on the target board. The main control CPU 101 also has various other output ports, and the strobe signal output port 101B actually exists as a port that outputs multiple data items combined with other output data.

The main control RAM 103 is a volatile memory device in which at least a portion of its area is backed up by the backup power generated by the power supply board 600. In the event of a power outage (hereinafter referred to as a "power outage"), the backup area of the main control RAM 103 is an area that retains the stack pointer, register data, and other data held at the time of the power outage. When the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the state of the gaming machine is restored to the state it was in before the power outage based on the information in the backup area.

The main control board 100 is electrically connected to various switches, such as a setting key switch 100q for changing setting values, a first start port switch 161 provided in the first start port 61, a second start port switch 162 provided in the second start port 62, an operating gate switch 163 provided in the gate 63, a special prize port switch 164 provided in the special prize port 64, and a general prize port switch 166 provided in the general prize port 66. In the main control board 100, detection signals from these various switches are input to the main control CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit 104.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to various display means such as the first special symbol display device 171, the second special symbol display device 172, the first special symbol hold lamp 173, the second special symbol hold lamp 174, the normal symbol display device 175, and the normal symbol hold lamp 176. This main control board 100 is electrically connected to various solenoids such as the normal electric role solenoid 123 that operates the normal electric role 622, and the special electric role solenoid 124 that operates the special electric role 642, and transmits control signals from the main control CPU 101 to these various display means and various solenoids via the I/O port circuit 104.

The main control board 100 and the performance control board 200 are connected, for example, by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe signal line, allowing communication in only one direction, from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200. In other words, while it is permitted to send various performance control commands from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200, it is not permitted to send commands or data from the performance control board 200 to the main control board 100.

The I/O port circuit 104 is located on the main control board 100 between the main control CPU 101 and the performance control board connector 109. The main control CPU 101 and the performance control board connector 109 are connected by a data bus 111 consisting of eight data lines, as well as a strobe signal bus 112 consisting of strobe signal lines. Command data sent from the I/O port circuit 104 is received by the performance control board 200 via the performance control board connector 109 under the control of the main control CPU 101, as described below.

<Performance control board>
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 19, the presentation control board 200 is equipped with a presentation control CPU 201 that executes various arithmetic processing related to game presentations based on presentation control commands from the main control board 100, a presentation control ROM 202 that stores presentation control programs and various data, a presentation control RAM 203 that functions as a work area and buffer memory as a temporary working area, and an I/O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards such as the main control board 100 and image control board 300 and each device.

The presentation control CPU 201 reads out a presentation control program stored in the presentation control ROM 202 and executes it on the presentation control RAM 203, thereby controlling presentation operations as the game progresses in accordance with this presentation control program. In addition, although not shown, the presentation control board 200 is equipped with a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, a WDT circuit that resets the presentation control CPU 201 to return it to normal if it malfunctions or goes out of control, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller that generates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on register settings and signals from the CTC circuit, a serial communications circuit for inputting and outputting serial data, and a real-time clock circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "RTC circuit") with a timing function, all of which are connected to each other via an internal bus.

In performance control processing in response to performance control commands from the main control board 100, the performance control board 200 generates image control commands that instruct the image control board 300 to output images and sounds, as well as lamp control signals (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 and drive control signals (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92. The performance control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 to enable two-way communication. Image control commands related to images and sounds are sent from the performance control board 200 to the image control board 300, and in response, the image control board 300 sends a response command (known as an ACK command) to the performance control board 200 indicating that the image control command was successfully received.

The performance control board 200 is connected to a speaker 11 that outputs sound, and the performance control CPU 201 controls the output of sound data generated by the image control board 300 to the speaker 11.

The performance control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 equipped with multiple LED drivers, and transmits lamp control signals (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. In this embodiment, the performance control board 200 and lamp connection board 91 use clock-synchronized serial communication, and the lamp control signals are transmitted bit by bit via a signal line (clock line) separate from the data line used to transmit lamp data, in synchronization with a clock signal transmitted via that data line.

The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions in response to a lamp control signal for driving the LEDs sent from the performance control board 200. The lamp connection board 91 switches on/off the switches in the circuit based on the lamp control signal, thereby supplying or cutting off the drive current to the performance lamps 10, 25, thereby controlling the lighting or extinguishing of the performance lamps 10, 25.

Furthermore, the performance control board 200 is electrically connected to multiple motor drivers 92, and outputs drive control signals (drive data) for driving the reels to the motor drivers 92 via the I/O port circuit 204. The motor drivers 92 supply or cut off drive current to the stepping motors of each movable reel by switching switches within the circuit on or off based on the drive control signals for driving the reels sent from the performance control board 200, thereby operating each movable reel. Note that a parallel communication method is used to send data to the motor drivers 92. Note that, not limited to this embodiment, if the reel has a drive source other than a stepping motor as its drive source, control signals and control data are sent to the driver IC corresponding to the drive source instead of the motor driver 92.

The image control board 300 comprises an image control CPU 301, image control ROM 304, image control RAM 305, and I/O port circuit 306. The image control CPU 301 executes various calculation processes related to image presentation based on image control commands from the presentation control board 200. The image control ROM 304 stores image control programs and various data. The image control RAM 305 functions as a temporary storage area (work area) and buffer memory. The I/O port circuit 306 inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices.

The image control CPU 301 reads the image control program from the image control ROM 304, loads it into the image control RAM 305, and executes it, thereby controlling the image display operations related to the performance in accordance with this image control program.

The image control board 300 is further equipped with a VDP 302 that generates image data in accordance with the performance content based on control signals received from the image control CPU 301, and a sound source IC 303 that generates sound data in accordance with the performance content based on control signals received from the image control CPU 301. The VDP 302 is a so-called graphics processor that reads image data stored in an image ROM (not shown) in response to instructions from the image control CPU 301, processes the image data, and outputs the generated video signal of display data to the performance display device 70. A high-speed VRAM (not shown) is connected to the VDP 302, which is used to expand and process the image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC 303 reads sound data stored in an audio ROM (not shown) in response to instructions from the image control CPU 301, and synthesizes and processes it to generate sound data. The generated sound data is output via the performance control board 200 to the speaker 11 via an amplifier.

<Dispensing control board>
The payout control board 400 comprises a payout control CPU 401, a payout control ROM 402, and a payout control RAM 403. The payout control board 400 drives the prize ball payout unit 34 based on a payout control command from the main control board 100 to control the payout operation of the game balls (prize ball operation), and also drives the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the launching mechanism 14 in synchronization with the amount of operation of the launching handle 12 to control the launching operation of the game balls.

<Power supply board>
The power supply board 600 is equipped with a normal power supply circuit, a backup power supply circuit, and a power interruption monitoring circuit. The normal power supply circuit generates normal power used by each control board based on the primary power supplied from the power supply equipment of the gaming machine island. The backup power supply circuit generates backup power. The power interruption monitoring circuit has the function of monitoring power interruptions due to voltage drops.

The power supply board 600 generates and supplies the power supply voltage required for electronic and electrical components such as each control board and gaming equipment. A power switch 600q for activating the power supply circuit is connected to the power supply board 600. When the power switch 600q is turned on while primary power is being supplied from the power supply device of the gaming machine island, a specified power is supplied to each control board, etc. from the normal power supply circuit of the power supply board 600.

The power supply board 600 has the function of detecting when the power supply from the gaming machine island's power supply is interrupted (hereinafter also referred to as "power interruption"). When a power interruption is detected, it sends a power interruption signal (NMI signal) to the main control board 100, the presentation control board 200, and the payout control board 400 to notify them. The backup power circuit is configured to charge while power is being supplied to the gaming machine from the gaming machine island's power supply. A RAM clear switch 400q and a door open sensor 2q are connected to the power supply board 600. The RAM clear switch 400q is a switch that temporarily erases the contents of the main control RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and sets the initial value when the gaming machine is powered on. The door open sensor 2q is a sensor that detects the open/closed state of the front frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2. The RAM clear switch 400q and the door open sensor 2q may be connected to other boards, such as the main control board 100, instead of the power supply board 600.

<Example of basic gaming machine operation>
In the gaming machine configured as described above, play begins with gaming balls stored in the upper ball tray 8. First, when the launch handle 12 is rotated, the gaming balls stored in the upper ball tray 8 are sent one by one to the launch mechanism 14 by the ball feed mechanism 13 provided on the back side of the glass frame 3, and are launched into the playing area 20A by the launch mechanism 14 with a launch strength according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 12.

When a game ball rolling down the game area 20A enters any of the general prize openings 66, first start opening 61, second start opening 62, and large prize opening 64, this detection signal is input to the main control board 100. In the main control board 100, the main control CPU 101 sends a payout control command to the payout control board 400 instructing the prize ball operation according to the type of prize opening. The payout control board 400 then controls the payout control command, causing the game balls in the storage tank 31 to be paid out by the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball tray 8 or the lower ball tray 9.

On the other hand, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 61 or the second starting hole 62, this detection signal is input to the main control board 100. In the main control board 100, the main control CPU 101 obtains the lottery random number value for the special pattern when it detects a ball entering the first starting hole 61 or the second starting hole 62, and temporarily stores this random number value as reserved balls for the special pattern up to a predetermined upper limit. When a predetermined variation start condition is met, the main control CPU 101 then performs a special pattern hit/miss and pattern determination on the lottery random number value for the earliest reserved ball, as well as a variation pattern determination to select a variation pattern, and displays the special pattern using the first special pattern display device 171 or the second special pattern display device 172 in a manner corresponding to the result of this determination. In addition, the main control CPU 101 sends a performance control command to the performance control board 200, causing the image control board 300 to display the decorative pattern variation and the variable performance on the performance display device 70. The variable display of the special and decorative symbols is synchronously stopped and displayed after the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern has elapsed. Here, when a ball enters the first start port 61 or the second start port 62 and various random number values are obtained, and when the obtained random number values are reserved and the variable start conditions are met, the special symbol game is played using the special symbol display device. This process, which ultimately results in the execution of the special symbol game, is referred to as the "start condition (being met)."

When the first special pattern or the second special pattern is displayed on the first special pattern display device 171 or the second special pattern display device 172 in a stopped state indicating a jackpot, the game transitions to special game, which is a game state more advantageous to the player than normal game, and the opening and closing operation of the jackpot opening 64 begins in response to the operation of the special electric device 642. On the other hand, the stopping state of the decorative pattern indicating a jackpot on the performance display device 70 is, for example, a state in which three patterns match. In this embodiment, the three special games available are 10R special game, in which the round play is set to 10 times (10 rounds), 5R special game, in which the round play is set to 5 times (5 rounds), and 2R special game, in which the round play is set to 2 times (2 rounds).

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is switched to 10R special game, 5R special game, or 2R special game, the special symbol probability fluctuation function (also referred to as "probable win") is activated over the period (also referred to as the "ST period") from the end of the special game until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined final number (also referred to as the "ST number"). In other words, in this embodiment, the special symbol probability fluctuation function does not continue until the next jackpot occurs, but is limited to until the above-mentioned ST number is reached. In this way, when the special symbol probability fluctuation function is activated, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery transitions from a low probability state to a high probability state, increasing the probability of a new jackpot occurring relatively quickly.

On the other hand, after the special game has ended, the main control CPU 101 may activate a special pattern fluctuation time reduction function (hereinafter also referred to as "time reduction"), either in conjunction with or separately from the special pattern probability fluctuation function. When the special pattern fluctuation time reduction function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special patterns (and decorative patterns) tends to be shorter than usual, increasing the number of special pattern draws per unit time and making it easier to win the next jackpot in a shorter period of time than the end of the previous jackpot.

Furthermore, when the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the main control CPU 101 also activates the so-called electric chute support function (normal electric device support function). The electric chute support function activates any one or a combination of the following functions: normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time shortening function, and normal electric device 622 opening extension function. When the normal symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning a normal symbol is increased compared to the normal state. When the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol variation time is shortened, and the opening mode of the normal electric device 622 is changed to that in the normal game state (when the electric chute support function is not activated) (for example, the opening time of the normal electric device 622 is extended more than normal), thereby creating a state in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 62 (also referred to as the "easy ball entry state"). When the opening time extension function of the normal electric device 622 is activated, the opening time of the normal electric device 622 is extended beyond its normal state. In this ball-scoring state, the operation of the normal symbol variation time shortening function increases the likelihood that the number of times the normal symbol will change per unit time will be greater than in the normal state, and the operation of the opening time extension function of the normal electric device 622 also improves the ease of balls scoring into the second start hole 62, increasing the likelihood that the number of balls scoring into the second start hole 62 will increase. Therefore, the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chute support function increases the chances of winning prize balls by scoring into the second start hole 62 during that period, allowing the player to continue playing in a state where it is less likely to lose balls than in the normal game state.

<Example of main functional configuration of gaming machine>
The outline of the gaming operation of the gaming machine according to this embodiment has been described above, and next, the main functions of the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 20 is a block diagram showing an example of the functions of the main control board 100 mounted on the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

The main control board 100 includes a ball-entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a preliminary determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, a normal symbol lottery processing means 145, a special game control means 150, a symbol display control means 155, an electric device control means 160, a game status control means 169, an error monitoring control means 170, a main information storage means 180, and a command transmission/reception means 190. Each of the above-mentioned means in the main control board 100 is composed of hardware such as a main control CPU 101, a main control ROM 102, a main control RAM 103, and electronic circuits provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a main control program stored in the main control ROM 102, etc., but is represented here as a functional block.

The ball entry determination means 110 determines whether a game ball has entered each entry port, etc., based on detection signals from the first start port switch 161, the second start port switch 162, the operating gate switch 163, the special prize port switch 164, the general prize port switch 166, and the out ball detection switch 167, etc.

The gaming lottery random number generating means 120 takes in the internal random number generated by the random number generating circuit described above and adds the software random number for special symbols described below to this to generate a random number for special symbols used in the lottery to determine whether a player wins or loses a special symbol. The gaming lottery random number generating means 120 is equipped with random number counters for generating various software random numbers through program processing by the main control CPU 101. These random number counters function as random number generating means that generate random numbers using software.

These software random numbers include special symbol software random numbers that are added to the aforementioned built-in random numbers to form special symbol random numbers; special symbol software initial value random numbers that determine the initial and ending values of the special symbol software random numbers; special symbol pattern random numbers used to determine winning symbols (symbol combinations that activate the condition device, losing symbol combinations, etc.) as special symbol stopping symbols; special symbol initial value random numbers that determine the initial and ending values of the special symbol pattern random numbers; special symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers used to select the special symbol fluctuation pattern; regular symbol random numbers used to determine whether a regular symbol wins or loses; regular symbol initial value random numbers that determine the initial and ending values of the regular symbol random numbers; and regular symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers used to select the regular symbol fluctuation pattern. Note that the winning symbol referred to above refers to the winning symbol.

These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs, and the initial value random number is updated using the remaining time in the interrupt cycle even when the timer interrupt process is not being executed (during loop processing).

The reserve control means 130 includes a special symbol reserve control means 131 and a normal symbol reserve control means 132. Triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 61 or the second start hole 62, the special symbol reserve control means 131 obtains lottery random number values related to the special symbol game, such as a special symbol random number value, a special symbol random number value, and a special symbol variation pattern random number value, and manages these random number values as activated reserved ball information for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol reserve control means 131 temporarily stores the activated reserved ball information for the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (e.g., four), respectively, in the first special symbol reserve storage area or the second special symbol reserve storage area of the main information storage means 180 so that it is linked to the order in which the reserved balls entered.

The first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area are each provided with a reserved 1 memory area (first reserved memory area), a reserved 2 memory area (second reserved memory area), a reserved 3 memory area (third reserved memory area), and a reserved 4 memory area (fourth reserved memory area) in the order of balls entering each starting port 61, 62. Each reserved memory area can store a set of activated reserved ball information, including a random number per special symbol, a symbol random number per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number. The activated reserved ball information is stored in the order of reserved 1 memory area, reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area, and is consumed in the order of reserved 1 memory area, reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area according to the so-called first-in, first-out principle. When the reserved ball information in the reserved 1 memory area is consumed, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 memory area, reserved 3 memory area, and reserved 4 memory area is shifted to the memory area with the lower number, and the contents of the reserved 4 memory area are cleared to zero.

The special symbol reserve control means 131 has a first special symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol. The special symbol reserve control means 131 updates the number of activated reserved balls of the special symbol by incrementing the corresponding counter by 1 each time an activated reserved ball of the special symbol is acquired, and decrementing the corresponding counter by 1 each time an activated reserved ball is consumed.

When the special symbol reserve control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of activated reserved balls for the first or second special symbol, it generates an effect control command (referred to as a "pattern storage number command") containing the updated number of reserved balls and temporarily stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This single command includes information on both the number of activated reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of activated reserved balls for the second special symbol. While, as a general rule, the activated reserved balls for each special symbol are consumed in the order in which they are entered, this embodiment employs a so-called priority consumption system that prioritizes the variable display of the second special symbol over the first special symbol. Therefore, as long as activated reserved balls for the second special symbol game are present, the activated reserved balls for the second special symbol game are consumed preferentially, regardless of the presence of activated reserved balls for the first special symbol game. Furthermore, under this priority consumption system, if an activation reserved ball for the second special symbol is present, the consumption of the activation reserved ball for the first special symbol will be put on hold, even if an activation reserved ball for the first special symbol is also present.

When a game ball rolling down the game area 20A passes through gate 63, the normal symbol reserve control means 132 acquires the lottery random numbers related to the normal symbol game, namely, the normal symbol random number value, the normal symbol random number value, and the normal symbol variation pattern random number value, and manages these random number values as normal symbol activation reserved ball information. The normal symbol reserve control means 132 temporarily stores up to a predetermined upper limit number (e.g., four) of normal symbol activation reserved ball information in the normal symbol reserve storage area of the main information storage means 180 so that it is linked to the ball entry order of the reserved balls. The normal symbol reserve control means 132 has a normal symbol reserved ball number counter for counting the number of normal symbol activation reserved balls. The normal symbol reserve control means 132 updates the number of reserved balls for activated normal symbols by adding 1 to the corresponding counter each time an activated reserved ball for a normal symbol is acquired, and subtracting 1 from the corresponding counter each time an activated reserved ball is consumed.

When an activated reserved ball with a special pattern is acquired at a predetermined pre-determination timing, the pre-determination means 135 performs a pre-determination for a pre-reading notice on the activated reserved ball. Examples of pre-determination timing are when any of the following conditions are met: (1) when an activated reserved ball with a first special pattern is acquired while waiting for a win and the electric chute support function is not yet activated; (2) when an activated reserved ball with a second special pattern is acquired while waiting for a win and the electric chute support function is activated; or (3) when an activated reserved ball with a second special pattern is acquired during a big win or small win. Note that the main control board 100 can perform a pre-determination and send the information to the presentation control board 200 regardless of when the activated reserved ball is acquired, and the presentation control board 200 can then make all decisions regarding whether to execute the pre-reading notice.

Specifically, the preliminary determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the currently acquired activation reserved ball from the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area of the main information storage means 180, and sequentially performs a preliminary determination of the win/lose lottery (win/lose preliminary determination), a preliminary determination of the pattern lottery (pattern preliminary determination), and a preliminary determination of the variation pattern lottery (variation pattern preliminary determination). The preliminary determination tables used for each preliminary determination are not shown, but are divided into multiple areas corresponding to the total number of random numbers in a manner similar to the lottery tables (special symbol win/lose lottery table, special symbol winning symbol table, variation pattern table) described below, and a lottery ID is assigned to each area (number of determination values). Note that the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means 135 may be based on data temporarily stored in RAM or a CPU register, rather than data stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area, as long as the preliminary determination corresponds to the random number value used in the lottery when the variation actually begins.

This lottery ID is set to a number indicating the result of the preliminary determination (also referred to as the "preliminary determination number"). The preliminary determination means 135 sequentially generates performance control commands (referred to as "preliminary determination commands") containing information on the preliminary determination results (preliminary determination numbers), and stores these in a command storage area in the main information storage means 180. Note that, unlike in this embodiment, the preliminary determination results are not necessarily transmitted as information (lottery ID) indicating which random number range they belong to; the results of a preliminary lottery may also be transmitted using a win/lose lottery table or the like that is used when the actual fluctuations begin.

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol hit/miss determination means 141, a special symbol stop symbol determination means 142, and a special symbol change pattern determination means 143. When the special symbol change start condition is met, the special symbol lottery processing means 140 reads out the special symbol random number value, special symbol pattern random number value, and special symbol change pattern random number value stored in the first memory area (reserve 1 memory area) of the special symbol reserve storage area in the main information storage means 180, and stores these in the special symbol hit/miss determination area, special symbol determination area, and special symbol change pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, "the conditions for starting the special symbol change are met" means, for example, when priority control of the second special symbol is adopted as in this embodiment, that all of the following conditions are met: (1) neither a big win nor a small win is occurring, (2) both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting to change, and (3) an activation pending ball is present in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When all of these conditions are met, it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing.

The special symbol hit/miss determination means 141 reads the special symbol hit random number value from the special symbol hit/miss determination area of the main information storage means 180, performs a hit/miss determination, and decides whether the determination result corresponds to a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. The result of this hit/miss determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data (e.g., "55H"), small hit data (e.g., "33H"), and miss data (e.g., "00H")), used in subsequent processing, and then cleared when the special symbol stops changing. The special symbol hit/miss determination means 141 references a special symbol hit/miss lottery table when making this hit/miss determination. Note that the "H" shown after each of the above data stands for "Hexadecimal," meaning that the data is expressed in hexadecimal. For example, "55H" indicates that one byte of data is "01010101B ('B' is binary)." When expressing in decimal notation, the symbol should either not be added or a "D" should be added.

Figure 22(A) shows an example of a special symbol lottery table that is referenced in the normal state, which is a so-called low probability state, and Figure 22(B) shows an example of a special symbol lottery table that is referenced in the special variable state, which is a so-called high probability state.

In this special symbol win/loss lottery table, the special symbol win random number value is associated with the judgment results of a jackpot, small win, and loss. The probability of winning a jackpot or small win is determined according to the associated random number range. As can be seen from Figures 22(A) and 22(B), in the special symbol game win/loss lottery, in the normal state (low probability state), a jackpot occurs only when the random number value falls within the range of "0 to 219." On the other hand, in the special symbol game (high probability state), the jackpot range is expanded, and a jackpot occurs not only when the random number value falls within the range of "0 to 219," but also when it falls within the range of "220 to 2184." In other words, when the special symbol probability fluctuation function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability changes from a low probability state (approximately 1/300) to a high probability state (approximately 1/30).

As such, the range that corresponds to a jackpot changes depending on the game status, but the probability of winning the jackpot is the same for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Here, even if the special symbol hit random number value does not fall within the jackpot range, it will result in a small hit if it falls within a specified range. In this embodiment, a small hit exists only for the first special symbol lottery, but it is also possible, for example, to provide a small hit for the second special symbol lottery so that the second special symbol lottery has a higher probability of a small hit than the first special symbol lottery, or to provide a small hit only for the second special symbol lottery.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can be equipped with a setting change function that changes the degree of advantage given to the player by using multiple setting values. When the setting is changed in such a pachinko machine 1, the random number range that results in a jackpot changes according to the setting (setting value). Therefore, a special symbol lottery table is prepared in which the jackpot range varies depending on the setting value. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the ratio between the jackpot lottery probability in a low-probability state and the jackpot lottery probability in a high-probability state is constant regardless of the setting value. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery probability when the setting value is "1" is 1/300 for the low-probability state and 1/30 for the high-probability state (10 times that of the low-probability state), then when the setting value is "6," the jackpot lottery probability is 1/250 for the low-probability state and 1/25 for the high-probability state (10 times that of the low-probability state).

The special symbol stopping symbol determination means 142 determines the stopping symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the symbol group to which the stopping symbol belongs, based on the result of the winning/losing lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol stopping symbol determination means 142 has a first special symbol winning symbol table and a second special symbol winning symbol table that are referenced when determining the stopping symbol and symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 23 (A), the first special symbol winning symbol table associates the random number value of the special symbol winning symbol with the stopping symbol, symbol group, and jackpot details (number of times the special symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function are activated, and the activation pattern of the large prize slot 64). Note that the number "100" in parentheses represents the number of times the special symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function are activated, i.e., the number of STs. In this table, the stopping symbols "1" to "8" for the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups, A and B, depending on the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, the winning symbol table is not shown for when the winning/losing lottery results in a loss or small win, but if the losses and small wins are all single actions, the losing symbol and small win symbol are determined uniquely without using the winning symbol table. If it is desired to give different types to losses and small wins, change the fluctuation pattern, or change the control mode of special electric devices, the winning symbol table may be used to determine the symbol even in the case of a loss or small win.

Specifically, the symbols "1," "2," "3," and "4" are associated with symbol group A (10R specific time-saving symbols), the symbols "5" and "6" are associated with symbol group B (5R specific time-saving symbols), and the symbols "7" and "8" are associated with symbol group C (2R specific time-saving symbols). In this embodiment, "specific symbols" are symbols that activate the probability fluctuation function after the special game ends, while "normal symbols" are symbols that do not activate the probability fluctuation function after the special game ends (the same applies to the second special symbol described below).

Symbol groups A and B are specific symbols that transition the game state to a probability variable state (high probability state) after the end of special play, indicating a so-called "probability variable hit." The special symbol probability variable function, variable time reduction function, and electric chute support function are granted only until the number of special symbol fluctuations ends within the ST number of times without a jackpot occurring, or until the next jackpot occurs within the ST number of times. For symbol group A, the specified number of rounds for special play is 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time for the large prize slot 64 in one round of play is approximately 30 seconds. On the other hand, for symbol group B, the specified number of rounds for special play is 5 rounds, and the maximum opening time for the large prize slot 64 in one round of play is approximately 30 seconds.

Although symbol group C differs from the "probable hit" described above in the number of times and duration for which the large prize slot 64 is opened, it is a specific symbol that indicates a so-called "sudden probability hit" that transitions the game state to a special symbol probability hit state (high probability state) after the special game ends. The special symbol probability change function, change time reduction function, and electric chute support function are granted only until the number of times the special symbol changes ends without generating a jackpot within the ST number of times, or until the next jackpot occurs within the ST number of times. The specified number of rounds for special play is two, and the maximum opening time of the large prize slot 64 during one round of play is approximately 1.8 seconds.

On the other hand, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a small win, the pattern determination using the special pattern win random number is skipped, and the pattern "9" is unambiguously assigned as the stopping pattern. This pattern "9" is associated with pattern group F (special electric activation pattern 1). Note that a small win does not trigger a change in the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time reduction function, electric chute support function) or the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the game state is maintained before and after the win/loss lottery. If the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss, the pattern "0" is unambiguously assigned as the stopping pattern.

Meanwhile, as shown in Figure 23(B), the aforementioned second special symbol winning symbol table associates the special symbol winning symbol random number value with the stopped symbol, symbol group, and jackpot details (the number of times the special symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function are activated, and the activation pattern of the special electric device 642). In this second special symbol winning symbol table, the second special symbol stopping symbols "11" to "18" are classified into two symbol groups D and E according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbols "11," "12," "13," and "14" are associated with symbol group D (10R specific time-shortened symbols), and symbols "15," "16," "17," and "18" are associated with symbol group E (5R specific time-shortened symbols).

Symbol groups D and E are specific symbols that transition the game state to a probability variable state (high probability state) after the end of special play, indicating a so-called "probability variable hit." The special symbol probability variable function, variable time shortening function, and electric chute support function can be applied only until the number of special symbol fluctuations ends within the ST number of times without a jackpot occurring, or until the next jackpot occurs within the ST number of times. For symbol group D, the specified number of rounds for special play is 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time for the large prize slot 64 in one round of play is approximately 30 seconds. For symbol group E, the specified number of rounds for special play is 5 rounds, and the maximum opening time for the large prize slot 64 in one round of play is approximately 30 seconds.

On the other hand, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a small win, the pattern determination using the special pattern win random number is skipped, and the pattern "19" is unambiguously assigned as the stopping pattern. This pattern "19" is associated with pattern group G (special electric activation pattern 2). Note that a small win does not trigger a change in the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time reduction function, electric chute support function) or the fluctuation pattern selection state. Just as in the case where the winning result is a loss before or after the win/loss lottery, a determination is made as to whether the game state termination conditions for the probability fluctuation function, etc. are met, and if the termination conditions are not met, the game state at the time when a small win was determined is maintained. If the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss, the pattern "0" is unambiguously assigned as the stopping pattern.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, three types of jackpots are available: a 10R jackpot (a 10R special time-saving symbol), a 5R jackpot (a 5R special time-saving symbol), and a 2R jackpot (a 2R special time-saving symbol). The expected value of winning prize balls in special play (expected value of winning prize balls) is 10R jackpot > 5R jackpot > 2R jackpot. Therefore, hereinafter, a 10R jackpot will also be referred to as a "high-profit jackpot," with the highest expected value of winning prize balls, and a 2R jackpot will also be referred to as a "low-profit jackpot," with the lowest expected value of winning prize balls. Furthermore, even if the same number of rounds are played, if there is a mixture of long-open round play (30 seconds) and short-open round play (1.8 seconds), the jackpot with the most long-open round play will be the "high-profit jackpot."

Specifically, special games may have a common number of execution rounds, such as 10 rounds, but may include special games in which the round game mode changes at predetermined rounds. In this case, special games may include a type of special game consisting only of short-open round games in which the large prize opening 64 is open for a relatively short time, and a type of special game that switches to long-open round games in which the large prize opening 64 is open for a relatively long time after a predetermined number of execution rounds, the latter of which constitutes a "high-profit jackpot." Even jackpots with the same number of execution rounds may be configured so that the actual profit, i.e., the expected value of winning prize balls, differs depending on the large prize opening pattern.

As can be seen from the above explanation, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that a 10R jackpot will be selected, whereas if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, there is a 75% chance that a 10R jackpot will be selected. This gives the player an advantage in that landing the game ball in the second starting hole 62 rather than the first starting hole 61 means that there is a higher chance of winning more balls. The count number (specified count number) is the maximum number of game balls that can enter the big prize hole 64 in a round of play.

The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 shown in Figure 20 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 has multiple variation pattern tables that are referenced when selecting a special symbol variation pattern, as exemplified in Figures 24 and 25 described below. The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects one of these variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state and the result of the winning/losing lottery. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern tables will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines multiple variation patterns. Note that while "selection rates" are shown in each figure for ease of explanation, in reality, a determination value (range of random number values) for determining the variation pattern is set according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value, and the variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random number value belongs to. Each type of variation pattern has a variation time set as the end condition for that pattern variation, and is specified on the assumption that pattern variations due to decorative patterns made up of multiple patterns will also be executed during that variation time. Note that, for the sake of convenience, this embodiment will only use multiple types of variation patterns as examples, but in reality, many more variation patterns exist.

Figure 24 shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table for jackpots and small jackpots. The top row (A1) is the normal fluctuation pattern table, the middle row (A2) is the probability fluctuation pattern table, and the bottom row (A3) is the special fluctuation pattern table. In this embodiment, the selected fluctuation pattern is set to differ depending on the fluctuation pattern selection state, or even if the same fluctuation pattern selection state is used, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the normal fluctuation pattern table (A1), if the jackpot type is a 10R jackpot, fluctuation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or fluctuation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected, and if it is a 5R jackpot, fluctuation pattern PY2 (normal reach A) or fluctuation pattern PY3 (super reach A) is selected. On the other hand, if it is a 2R jackpot or small jackpot, fluctuation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A) or fluctuation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. In this normal fluctuation pattern table for jackpots and small jackpots, non-reach mode fluctuation patterns are never selected, and if a jackpot or small jackpot occurs under normal conditions, only reach mode fluctuation patterns can be selected.

In the probability variable fluctuation pattern table (A2), if the jackpot type is a 10R jackpot or a 5R jackpot, only fluctuation pattern PX7 (Super Reach B) is selected. On the other hand, if it is a 2R jackpot or small jackpot, either fluctuation pattern PZ6 (Normal Reach B) or fluctuation pattern PZ8 (Super Reach D) is selected. In this probability variable fluctuation pattern table for jackpots and small jackpots, non-reach type fluctuation patterns are never selected, and if a jackpot or small jackpot occurs in a probability variable state with a special symbol, only reach type fluctuation patterns can be selected.

In the special fluctuation pattern table (A3), when the jackpot type is a 10R jackpot, only fluctuation pattern PX9 (non-reach C) is selected, and when it is a 5R jackpot, only fluctuation pattern PY10 (super reach C) is selected. On the other hand, when it is a 2R jackpot or small jackpot, only fluctuation pattern PZ10 (super reach C) is selected. Here, fluctuation pattern PX9 of the non-reach C mode is configured as an ultra-shortened fluctuation time (2 seconds), while fluctuation patterns PY10 and PZ10 of the super reach C mode are configured as relatively long fluctuation times (120 seconds).

Figure 25 shows an example of a variation pattern table for misses. The top row (B1) is the normal variation pattern table, the middle row (B2) is the probability variation pattern table, and the bottom row (B3) is the special variation pattern table. In this embodiment, the variation pattern selected is set to differ depending on the variation pattern selection status and the number of balls reserved for special symbol activation.

The normal fluctuation pattern table (B1) is designed to select the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol (because the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the main focus during normal gameplay). In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), one of the following fluctuation patterns is selected: PH1-1, PH1-2, PH1-3 corresponding to non-reach A; PH1-4, PH1-5 corresponding to non-reach B; PH2 corresponding to normal reach A (N reach A); PH3 corresponding to super reach A (SP reach A); or PH4 corresponding to super reach D (SP reach D). In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), fluctuations of non-reach A are not subject to pre-reading, and fluctuations other than non-reach A are subject to pre-reading.

In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), the selection rates of fluctuation patterns PH1-4 and PH1-5 corresponding to non-reach B may be changed depending on the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the selection rates of fluctuation patterns corresponding to reach areas (N reach A, SP reach A, SP reach D) are generally not changed depending on the number of reserved balls. However, for reach types with low expectations, such as N reach A, the selection rate may be changed depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is small, lowering the selection rates of non-reach A and non-reach B and increasing the selection rate of N reach A will lengthen the fluctuation time, thereby avoiding situations where no fluctuation display is performed and preventing a decline in interest.

The probability variation pattern table (B2) is designed to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol (because in the probability variation state, the variation of the second special symbol is the main focus). In the probability variation pattern table (B2), one of the following variation patterns is selected: PH5-1, PH5-2 corresponding to non-reach B, PH6 corresponding to normal reach B (N reach B), PH7 corresponding to super reach B (SP reach B), or PH8 corresponding to super reach D (SP reach D). In the probability variation pattern table (B2), non-reach B variations are not subject to pre-reading, and variations other than non-reach B are subject to pre-reading.

In the special fluctuation pattern table (B3), only fluctuation pattern PH9 corresponding to non-reach C is selected. Here, fluctuation pattern PH9 for the non-reach C mode is configured as an ultra-shortened fluctuation time (2 seconds). In the special fluctuation pattern table (B3), all fluctuations are excluded from pre-reading.

As shown in Figure 25, when the result of the lottery is a loss, a different variation pattern table can be set to be selected depending on the number of activated balls (0-4) for the special symbol. In other words, by using a variation pattern table according to the number of activated balls for the special symbol, the greater the number of activated balls, the higher the probability that a relatively short variation time will be selected, and conversely, the fewer the number of activated balls, the higher the probability that a relatively long variation time will be selected. It is also possible to separate variation pattern tables by type of special symbol. For example, when the electric chute support function, such as the probability variation state, is activated, the second special symbol is easily displayed, and if a jackpot with the second special symbol is more advantageous as shown in Figure 23, the variation time of the first special symbol can be lengthened to create time to accumulate the reserved second special symbol, which will be given priority in variation control.

For example, in the case of Figure 25, in the probability variation pattern table (B2) which assumes the selection of a variation pattern for the second special symbol, the selection rate for all non-Reach B (variation patterns PH5-1, PH5-2) is a constant 750/1000 regardless of the number of reserved symbols. However, when looking at the distribution of variation patterns PH5-1 and PH5-2 according to the number of reserved symbols, in situations where reserved symbols are accumulated ("reserved symbols 2 → 1," "reserved symbols 3 → 2," "reserved symbols 4 → 3"), the variation pattern PH5-1 (5 seconds), which has a short variation time, is more likely to be selected, whereas in situations where reserved symbols are not accumulated ("reserved symbols 1 → 0"), the variation pattern PH5-2 (10 seconds), which has a long variation time, is more likely to be selected. By allocating in this way, when there are fewer reserved second special symbols in a probability variable state where the second special symbols are consumed first, a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected, making it easier to expect additional reserved second special symbols, and preventing unfavorable situations such as all reserved second special symbols being consumed and the reserved first special symbols starting to be consumed.

After selecting a special symbol variation pattern, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 generates a presentation control command containing special symbol variation pattern information (referred to as a "variation pattern designation command"), a presentation control command containing information on the special symbol (symbol group) and game status (referred to as a "symbol designation command"), a presentation command containing information on the number of reserved symbols after variation has started ("symbol memory number command"), etc. (hereinafter, these presentation control commands are collectively referred to as "variation start commands"), and stores these in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180, in order to instruct the presentation control board 200 to start varying the decorative symbols.

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 has a normal symbol hit/miss determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and a normal symbol change pattern determination means 148. When the normal symbol change start conditions are met, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the normal symbol hit random number value and the normal symbol change pattern random number value stored in the earliest memory area in the normal symbol reserve storage area, and stores them in the normal symbol hit/miss determination area and the normal symbol change pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively.

The normal symbol hit/miss determination means 146 reads a normal symbol hit random number value from the normal symbol hit/miss determination area of the main information storage means 180, performs a hit/miss determination, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to a hit or a miss. The result of this hit/miss lottery is temporarily stored as a normal symbol determination flag in the main information storage means 180, is used in subsequent processing, and is cleared when the normal symbol stops changing. The normal symbol hit/miss determination means 146 holds a normal symbol hit/miss lottery table that is referenced when performing this hit/miss lottery. In a normal state (low probability state), this normal symbol hit/miss determination means 146 references a normal symbol hit/miss lottery table that results in a hit with a probability of, for example, "160/283," while in a normal symbol probability change state (high probability state), it performs the hit/miss lottery for the normal symbol by reference to a normal symbol hit/miss lottery table that results in a hit with a probability of, for example, "282/283."

In this embodiment, the normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table and selects a predetermined winning symbol if the result of the win/lose lottery is a win, or selects a predetermined losing symbol if the result is a loss. If multiple control patterns for the normal electric device are desired, the device can be designed to have multiple lottery results for the normal symbol symbol lottery table. Furthermore, even if the winning normal symbol is the same, the control pattern for the normal electric device can be made different depending on whether the game state is in operation of the opening extension function of the normal electric device.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 148 reads out a normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number value from the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table to select a relatively long fluctuation time for normal symbol fluctuation display in the normal state (for example, uniformly selecting one of the seven types: 4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds). On the other hand, in the time-saving state (easy-to-score state) for normal symbols, a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is selected.

If the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the special game control means 150 determines the demo presentation duration for the start demo presentation and the end demo presentation to be displayed on the presentation display device 70 during special game play, depending on the type of jackpot determined. The special game control means 150 generates a presentation control command (referred to as the "jackpot start demo command") that instructs the presentation control board 200 to execute the start demo presentation, and a presentation control command (referred to as the "jackpot end demo command") that instructs the presentation control board 200 to execute the end demo presentation, and stores these in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. The jackpot start demo command also serves as a trigger for the presentation control board 200 to determine the content of the series of jackpot presentations (start demo presentation, round presentation, end demo presentation) that will be played during special game play. In addition to this embodiment, the demo presentation duration determined by the special game control means 150 can also be determined based on the game state at the time of the jackpot, in addition to the type of jackpot.

When the special game control means 150 generates a presentation control command (referred to as a "round presentation designation command") for instructing the start of a round presentation corresponding to each round play during a special game, it stores this in a command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round presentation designation command includes a round start command containing information about the current round number sent at the start of the round, and a special prize opening activation command for executing a prize presentation based on the detection of the special prize opening switch 164 during a round play.

If the result of the win/lose lottery is a small win, the special game control means 150 determines the demo duration for the small win start demo effect and the small win end demo effect to be displayed on the effect display device 70, etc. during the small win game. The special game control means 150 generates a presentation control command that instructs the execution of the small win start demo effect ("small win start demo command") and a presentation control command that instructs the execution of the small win end demo effect ("small win end demo command"), and stores these in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol to be displayed variably on the first special symbol display device 171 in accordance with the variable pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and causes the first special symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after this variable display has ended. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol to be displayed variably on the second special symbol display device 172 in accordance with the variable pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and causes the second special symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after the variable display has ended. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating status of the first special symbol display device 171 and the second special symbol display device 172 is monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. When the special symbol fluctuation stops (i.e., when the special symbol game timer is managing the fluctuation time and its value reaches "0"), the special symbol display control means 156 generates a presentation control command (referred to as a "fluctuation stop command") to request the presentation control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol.

On the other hand, the normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 175 to display a changing normal symbol in accordance with the normal symbol change pattern (change time), and then causes the normal symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol after the change. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time related to the display of the normal symbol (change time, fixed display time). The operating status of the normal symbol display device 175 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

If the result of the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, the electric device control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric device solenoid 124 as special game processing, causing the special electric device 642 to open according to a predetermined operation pattern. In special games, one opening and closing operation of the special electric device 642 constitutes one round of play, and the round of play is executed consecutively for a specified number of rounds (10R, 5R, 2R in this embodiment). The electric device control means 160 maintains a large prize opening opening counter for storing the number of times the special electric device 642 has been activated (i.e., the number of rounds currently being executed). Here, if the jackpot type is a so-called 10R jackpot (symbol group A, D) or 5R jackpot (symbol group B, E), the large prize opening 64 is opened for a maximum of approximately 30 seconds during one round of play. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a so-called 2R jackpot (symbol group C), the large prize opening 64 is left open for a maximum of approximately 1.8 seconds during one round of play. Here, the conditions for closing the large prize opening 64 during special play (the conditions for ending a round of play) are when a specified number of game balls enter or the specified number of seconds for the open period have elapsed.

If the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, the electric device control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric device solenoid 124 as a small win game process, causing the special electric device 642 to open for a short period of time. A small win game is a special game consisting of a single round of play, and is distinguished from a big win game, which is a special game consisting of multiple rounds of play. In particular, both small win games and big win games are special games in which winning balls are easy to obtain based on the operation of the special electric device 642, but they are distinguished by whether or not the device continuous operation device, which enables continuous operation of the special electric device 642, is operating.

If the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric device control means 160 outputs a control signal to the normal electric device solenoid 123, causing the normal electric device 622 to open for a predetermined opening time. In the normal state, the electric device control means 160 opens the normal electric device 622 for an extremely short time (e.g., 0.2 seconds), whereas in the easy-to-score state (electric chute support state), it opens the normal electric device 622 for a relatively longer time (e.g., 4 seconds) compared to the normal state.

When the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the game state control means 169 determines the game state after the end of the special game based on the type of symbol group related to the jackpot, and switches the game state after the end of the special game. Hereinafter, of the functions related to the special and normal symbols mentioned above, 1) a game state in which the special symbol probability variation function, special symbol variation time reduction function, and electric chute support function are activated is referred to as the "probability variation state," 2) a game state in which only the special symbol variation time reduction function and electric chute support function are activated is referred to as the "time-saving state," 3) a game state in which only the special symbol probability variation function is activated is referred to as the "latent probability variation state," and 4) a state in which no functions are activated is referred to as the "normal state." It should be noted that the "probability variation state," "time-saving state," and "latent probability variation state" are all game states that are more advantageous to the player than the "normal state."

In the following, each game state will be referred to as (1) the special mode state "high probability/high base," (2) the time-saving mode "low probability/high base," (3) the latent special mode state "high probability/low base," and (4) the normal mode "low probability/low base" based on the combination of the special symbol game operation state (high probability/low probability) and the normal symbol game operation state (electric chute support function activated/electric chute support function not activated) ("Base" refers to the number of prize balls per number of balls fired, and when the electric chute support function is activated, it is referred to as a "high base," which means there is a high possibility of winning prize balls due to the operation of normal electric devices). In this embodiment, as an example, after the special game ends, the game state remains in a special variable state until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined final number of times (i.e., the aforementioned ST number) from the end of the special game (however, if the next jackpot occurs within the ST number, the special variable state ends with that change, and at the end of the jackpot game, the game transitions to the corresponding game state based on the jackpot type and jackpot symbol). Note that if a small jackpot occurs during the ST period, the ST number is not reset to 0; the ST number is continuously counted before and after the small jackpot occurs. In this embodiment, the ST number is set to 100 as an example, but may be set to another number. Note that when the special game transitions to a special variable state, the special symbol probability change function, special symbol change time reduction function, and electric chute support function are activated simultaneously, and each function continues as long as the special variable state continues.

If the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, regardless of whether the game state before the jackpot was normal or a special probability state, the game will remain normal during the special game, and will enter a special probability state uniformly after the special game, up to the number of STs. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small jackpot, and the game state before the small jackpot was normal, the game state during and after the small jackpot will also be normal. If the game state before the small jackpot was a special symbol probability state, the game state during and after the small jackpot will also be a special symbol probability state.

When the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot, the game state control means 169 determines the variation pattern selection state after the special game based on the type of jackpot (the type of symbol group A to E) and switches the variation pattern selection state after the special game. The variation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referenced when selecting the variation pattern table described above. The variation pattern selection state is switched at the end of the special game or when the final number of times for the variation pattern selection state has been reached. In this embodiment, there are three types of variation pattern selection states: "low-probability normal variation state α," "high-probability shortened variation state β," and "high-probability special variation state γ." Here, the low-probability normal variation state α is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the normal variation pattern table (A1 in Figure 24 and B1 in Figure 25) selected when the game state is normal (low-probability state). The high probability shortened variation state β is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability variation pattern table (A2 in FIG. 24 and B2 in FIG. 25) selected when the game state is a probability variation state of the special symbol (excluding the limited period described below). The high probability special variation state γ is a state in which the game state is a probability variation state of the special symbol and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the special variation pattern table (A3 in FIG. 24 and B3 in FIG. 25) that is only selectable for a certain period immediately after the end of the special game (a period spanning the number of pattern variations (4 times) corresponding to the maximum number of activation reserved balls (4) of the second special symbol: referred to as the "limited period"). In this embodiment, regardless of which of the symbol groups A to D is selected, the variation pattern selection state (1) remains in the high-probability special variation state γ for a limited period of four symbol variations immediately after the end of the special game; (2) remains in the high-probability shortened variation state β after the end of the limited period and if the number of times the special game is played is within the ST number (100 times); and (3) remains in the low-probability normal variation state α after the ST number is played, i.e., from the 101st time onwards. Of course, the low-probability normal variation state α will remain until the first win occurs. The game state control means 169 generates a presentation control command (referred to as a "game state designation command") including the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Furthermore, without being limited to this embodiment, it is also possible to have multiple special fluctuation states γ, and to refer to different special fluctuation states at different times during one fluctuation time shortened game state (for example, a special fluctuation state γ2 may be provided in which the player stays in special fluctuation state γ1 four times after the end of a jackpot, and then stays in shortened fluctuation state β 95 times, and then stays in special fluctuation state γ2 during one special symbol game).

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors input information from the I/O port circuit 104 and examines magnetic detection signals from the magnetic sensor, open/short circuit power supply abnormality signals, radio wave detection signals from the radio wave sensor, and door/frame open signals to determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If an error state is detected, it requests a presentation control command ("error presentation designation command") containing the error information to instruct the presentation control board 200 to present an error state. Although not all components are shown in Figure 19, the door open switch is a detection means for detecting whether the glass frame 3 is open, the frame open switch (door open sensor 2p) is a detection means for detecting whether the front frame 4 is open, and the back set open switch is a detection means for detecting whether the back set disc is open. The magnetic sensor and radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting fraudulent activity (so-called cheating).

The main information storage means 180 is configured to temporarily store information necessary for controlling the progress of games, such as random number information obtained in special symbol games and normal symbol games, information on the activated balls for special and normal symbol games, information on the game status (probable hit state, time-saving state, easy-to-score state) related to special symbol games and normal symbol games, information on the variation pattern selection state, information on the result of the win/loss lottery (jackpot, small hit, loss), information on the stopped symbols and variation patterns related to special and normal symbols, information on special games (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of times opened per round of play), etc.), status information indicating the operating status of the special symbol display devices 171, 172, status information indicating the operating status of the special electric device 642, and information on performance control command data, and is provided with a designated memory area for storing each piece of information.

When a command transmission request is received, the command transmission/reception means 190 is configured to transmit various performance control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the performance control board 200 via a parallel transmission method. Each performance control command consists of two bytes, including one byte of MODE data and one byte of EVENT data. To distinguish between MODE data and EVENT data, the seventh bit of the MODE data is set to "1" and the seventh bit of the EVENT data is set to "0". When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output for each of the MODE data and EVENT data.

The performance control board 200 can receive MODE data and EVENT data upon receiving the strobe signal output in this manner. As a general rule, the performance control commands generated by each process are transmitted one command at a time per interrupt cycle, with MODE data and EVENT data transmitted in the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The setting change means 195 executes a "setting change process" to change the game settings. When the front frame 4 is in the open state (the door open sensor 2p detects that the door is open) and the setting key switch 100q is in the on state, the setting change means 195 transitions to the setting change state described above when the power switch 600q is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 400q.

When the setting change means 195 transitions to the setting change state, it causes the setting display unit 197 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory (e.g., a portion of the RAM storage area provided by the main control RAM 103). The setting display unit 197 displays the setting value, for example, using a 7-segment display provided on the main control board 100. In response to pressing of a specific setting change button, the setting change means 195 changes the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 197 in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → ..., and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory to the same value displayed on the setting display unit 197. In this example, the RAM clear switch 400q is used as the setting change button, but another button may be used, or a dedicated button may be provided. When the setting key switch 100q is turned off, the setting change means 195 terminates the setting change state and turns off the setting display unit 197.

The setting confirmation means 196 executes a "setting confirmation process" to confirm game settings. When the front frame 4 is in the open state (the door open sensor 2p detects door open), the setting key switch 100q is in the on state, and the power switch 600q is turned on without the RAM clear switch 400q being pressed, the setting confirmation means 196 transitions to the setting confirmation state described above.

When the setting confirmation means 196 transitions to the setting confirmation state, it displays the setting values stored in the setting memory on the setting display unit 197. However, unlike the setting change means 195 described above, the setting confirmation means 196 does not change the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 197, nor does it change the setting values stored in the setting memory, even if a setting change button (e.g., RAM clear switch 400q) is pressed. Then, when the setting key switch 100q is turned off, the setting confirmation means 196 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 197.

The setting value data managed in the setting memory may instead be numeric values "0" through "5" rather than numeric values "1" through "6." In this case, setting value "0" may correspond to setting 1, setting value "1" to setting 2, setting value "2" to setting 3, setting value "3" to setting 4, setting value "4" to setting 5, and setting value "5" to setting 6. Using "0" as the normal value for setting value data simplifies the RAM clearing process in the event of an abnormality, since resetting the setting value data to the initial value "0" through RAM clearing in the event of a RAM abnormality will not result in an abnormality. Another advantage is that when using setting value data to perform a lottery, such as selecting different tables or data for each setting value in a look-ahead process, the offset process for that selection can be simplified. For example, when using setting value data values "1" through "6," additional processing, such as subtracting 1 from the starting address, is required to use these values directly as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data, the numerical value of the setting value data can be used as is as the offset data. When numerical values "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data, the setting change means 195 and the setting confirmation means 196 may display the numerical value of the setting value data as is on the setting display unit 197, or may display a numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the setting value data on the setting display unit 197. In the latter case, the numerical data "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of settings 1 to 6 in the game settings and displayed, making the display easy to understand for the gaming machine administrator.

Figure 21 is a functional block diagram showing an example of the functions of the presentation control board 200 in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. The presentation control board 200 includes a presentation lottery random number generation means 210, a presentation integration means 220, a lamp presentation control means 230, a role-playing device presentation control means 240, an error presentation control means 250, a presentation control information storage means 260, and a command transmission/reception means 270. Note that each of the above-mentioned means in the presentation control board 200 is a functional representation of hardware such as a presentation control CPU 201, a presentation control ROM 202, a presentation control RAM 203, and electronic circuits arranged on the presentation control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the presentation control ROM 202.

The effect lottery random number generating means 210 is equipped with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) through program processing by the effect control CPU 201. These random number counters serve as random number generating means for generating random numbers in software. These software random numbers include pre-reading notice lottery random numbers used to determine whether or not a pre-reading notice effect will be executed, pre-reading notice pattern random numbers used to select a pre-reading notice pattern, decorative pattern random numbers used to select the stopping pattern of decorative patterns, variable effect pattern random numbers used to select a variable effect pattern for decorative patterns, pre-reading notice pattern random numbers used to select a pre-reading notice pattern, jackpot effect pattern random numbers used to select a jackpot effect pattern, consecutive win effect lottery random numbers used to determine whether or not a consecutive win effect will be executed in a reserved bet, and consecutive win effect pattern random numbers used to select a consecutive win effect pattern for a reserved bet. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the effect control main processing described below. For convenience, the random numbers used in each lottery are given names, but it is also possible to have a common random number.

The performance control means 220 includes a performance mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a preview notice control means 223, a decorative pattern determination means 224, a variable performance determination means 225, a preview notice performance determination means 226, and a jackpot performance determination means 227.

The pending information display control means 222 has a first reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls for the first special pattern, and a second reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls for the second special pattern. When the reserved information display control means 222 receives a pattern memory number command from the main control board 100, it updates the values of the first reserved ball number counter and the second reserved ball number counter based on the information on the number of activated reserved balls included in the pattern memory number command. Then, based on the values of the first reserved ball number counter and the second reserved ball number counter, the pending information display control means 222 controls the display of a number of reserved images corresponding to the number of activated reserved balls for the first special pattern and a number of reserved images corresponding to the number of activated reserved balls for the second special pattern on the reserve display unit of the performance display device 70. In the normal display mode, when a special-pattern activated reserved ball appears, a white reserved image is displayed. However, when the reserved change pre-reading preview effect described below is executed, the reserved image that is the subject of the pre-reading preview can change from the normal display mode (display color) of "white" to one of the following special display modes (display colors): "blue," "green," "red," or "rainbow." The four special display modes are related to the reliability of the lottery result being a jackpot (referred to as "jackpot reliability"), with the jackpot reliability increasing by one level in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "rainbow." In this embodiment, when the reserved image changes to "rainbow," a jackpot is confirmed for the activated reserved ball that is the pre-reading target. Note that in the reserved change pre-reading preview effect, the change in the display mode of the reserved image may be expressed by a shape or pattern rather than a display color.

When the pre-reading notice control means 223 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 100, it determines by lottery whether to execute the pre-reading notice. The pre-reading notice control means 223 distinguishes between information on the pre-determination results for the first special symbol and information on the pre-determination results for the second special symbol, and temporarily stores up to a predetermined maximum number (four) of each in the pre-reading information storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 so that it is linked to the ball entry order of the activated reserved balls. This pre-reading information storage area has the same configuration as the reserved memory area of the main control board 100, and is provided with a reserved 1 memory area (first reserved memory area), a reserved 2 memory area (second reserved memory area), a reserved 3 memory area (third reserved memory area), and a reserved 4 memory area (fourth reserved memory area) in the order of ball entry into each starting port 61, 62. Each reserved memory area can store a set of information on the pre-determination results of whether the ball will be successful, the pattern preliminary determination results, and the variation pattern preliminary determination results.

When determining whether to execute a pre-reading notice, the pre-reading notice control means 223 executes a pre-reading judgment (also referred to as a "pre-reading judgment") for the activated reserved ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice, based on the results of a preliminary judgment by the main control board 100. In this embodiment, the pre-reading notice includes, in addition to the previously described reserve change pre-reading notice, a so-called continuous pre-reading effect that predicts the possibility of a jackpot win or the occurrence of a reach effect over multiple consecutive display changes of decorative symbols. If it is determined that a pre-reading notice effect (continuous pre-reading effect) can be executed, the pre-reading notice command information (the result of the preliminary judgment) and the pattern memory count command information (the number of existing activated reserved balls) from the main control board 100 are analyzed, and a pre-reading notice effect pattern is determined by lottery over multiple consecutive display changes for the activated reserved ball (referred to as a "trigger hold") that will trigger the current pre-reading notice effect. There are various variations of pre-reading notices, such as reserve change pre-reading notice effects, chance eye pre-reading notice effects, and background change pre-reading notice effects. Another type of pre-reading feature is the in-reserve consecutive win display, which suggests or notifies the player of the possibility of a working reserved ball that will result in a jackpot when a jackpot is being played or when a variation that will result in a jackpot is being executed.

Figure 26 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern pre-reading judgment table. The fluctuation pattern pre-reading judgment table shown in Figure 26 is a judgment table used in pre-reading judgment by the pre-reading notice control means 223, and the pre-reading type (A to D) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern of each fluctuation determined using the special symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 25, etc.

According to Figure 26, pre-reading type A (non-pre-reading) is selected from fluctuation patterns that are not subject to pre-reading (fluctuation patterns PH1-1, PH1-2, PH1-3, PH5-1, and PH5-2 according to Figure 25). When pre-reading type A is selected, the pre-reading effect for that fluctuation will not be executed.

Here, the selection rate of non-reach A, which is not subject to pre-reading in the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1) of Figure 25, is 750/1000 regardless of the number of reserved symbols, when the total of fluctuation patterns PH1-1, PH1-2, and PH1-3 is calculated, which matches the selection rate of pre-reading type A in Figure 26. In other words, in this example, when a non-reach A fluctuation pattern is determined during normal play (first special symbol), the pre-reading effect for that fluctuation is never executed, and all pre-reading judgment results are ID = 0. Also, in the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1) of Figure 25, only non-reach A is set so that the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern varies depending on the number of reserved symbols. For this reason, in this example, it can be said that within the range of random number values where a fluctuation pattern whose selection rate depends on the number of reserved symbols is selected, all pre-reading judgment results are ID = 0.

Prediction type B (weak prediction) is selected from the fluctuation patterns determined for non-reach (fluctuation patterns PH1-4, PH1-5) targets of prediction during normal play, or N-reach (fluctuation pattern PH6) during a special bonus. When prediction type B is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) prediction effect with a low expectation is executed for that fluctuation.

Prediction type C (medium predictive reading) is selected from the variation patterns determined for N Reach (variation pattern PH2) during normal play, or N Reach B or SP Reach B (variation patterns PH6, PH7) during special play. When predictive type C is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) predictive performance with a medium degree of expectation is executed for that variation.

Prediction type D (strong prediction) is selected from the variation patterns determined for SP Reach or higher during normal play (variation patterns PH3, PH4), or SP Reach D during a special bonus (variation pattern PH8). When prediction type D is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) prediction effect with a high degree of expectation is executed for that variation. Note that prediction effects with different degrees of expectation can be executed depending on prediction types B, C, and D by using different lottery tables for the prediction effect according to the ID of the prediction determination result on the main control board 100, or by changing the prediction effect to a higher-ranking one than the prediction effect that was won using the same table.

In the above example, the variable pattern prediction judgment table in Figure 26 was shown as a common table for normal play and special bonus play, but this embodiment is not limited to this. Different tables may be prepared for normal play and special bonus play, and different tables may be prepared for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Furthermore, a table may be prepared for predicting the variable additional patterns described below.

The presentation mode control means 221 controls the transition of presentation modes based on game state designation commands from the main control board 100, ensuring consistency with the game state and variation pattern selection state managed by the main control board 100. In this embodiment, the three presentation modes include normal presentation mode α, probability variation presentation mode β, and special presentation mode γ. Even if the special symbol variation pattern instructed by the main control board 100 is the same, the variation presentation pattern (described in detail below) that specifies the specific content of the symbol variation presentation is set to be different for each presentation mode. The presentation display device 70 displays a presentation mode notification image (in this embodiment, a background image that displays behind the decorative symbols) that corresponds to the currently active presentation mode. This background image is set to be different for each presentation mode, so the player can recognize which presentation mode they are currently in from the type of background image.

An overview of each presentation mode follows. First, normal presentation mode α is set when the low-probability normal variation state α is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100, and a "normal background" is displayed as the background image. Probability variable presentation mode β is set when the high-probability shortened variation state β is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100, and a "probability variable background" is displayed as the background image. Special presentation mode γ is set when the high-probability special variation state γ is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100. This special presentation mode remains in effect for a limited period of four times immediately after the end of special play, and transitions to probability variable presentation mode β once this limited period has elapsed. If a consecutive win presentation occurs in the reserved mode during special play, a "special background" is displayed as the background image. On the other hand, if a consecutive win presentation does not occur in the reserved mode during special play, i.e., if a continuous win presentation is not being executed, the "probability variable background" common to the probability variable presentation mode is displayed as the background image.

The decorative symbol determination means 224 determines the final combination of decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) by lottery based on the information (variation pattern information, character effect number information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. In this embodiment, three symbol rows containing multiple types of decorative symbols are configured. These decorative symbols are formed by identification elements consisting of numbers or letters, for example. In this embodiment, a total of 10 types of identification elements are set, including the numbers "1" to "9" and the letter "S." Each decorative symbol is displayed in a cyclical manner in the left display area, middle display area, and right display area, respectively, in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" → ... → "8" → "9" → "S" according to the arrangement of the symbol rows.

The decorative symbol determination means 224 holds multiple types of stopping symbol pattern tables that are referenced when determining the stopping symbol combinations (also called "stopping symbol patterns") of decorative symbols by lottery. These multiple types of tables include a stopping symbol pattern table for jackpots, a stopping symbol pattern table for small jackpots, a stopping symbol pattern table for close misses, and a stopping symbol pattern table for non-close misses. The stopping symbols of decorative symbols are formed as combinations of three symbols, including "stopping symbols indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol)" and "stopping symbols indicating a miss (miss symbol)." The jackpot symbol indicating a specific jackpot (probable jackpot) is a stopping combination of three symbols with the same odd numbers (e.g., "7-7-7"). The jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (non-probable jackpot) is a stopping combination of three symbols with the same even numbers (e.g., "2-2-2"). A losing symbol is a combination of stop patterns in which at least one of the three symbols is a different number from the others (e.g., "1, 3, 8"). Among the losing symbols, a reach-miss symbol is a combination of stop patterns in which the left and right symbols match, but only the center symbol is shifted forward or backward by several frames (e.g., "3, 1, 3"). Note that a "small win (small win symbol)" or a jackpot symbol, such as a 2R jackpot symbol, may result in a predetermined stop pattern combination, such as "3, 5, 7." In this embodiment, "S, S, S" is provided as a special jackpot symbol to definitively indicate a consecutive win within the reserved lottery. When it is determined to execute a consecutive win within the reserved lottery effect and consecutive win effect pattern PA2 is selected, the decorative symbol determination means 224 replaces the normal jackpot symbol (e.g., "3, 3, 3") with the special jackpot symbol (e.g., "S, S, S").

The variable effect determination means 225 determines a variable effect pattern that specifies the variable process (performance process) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to its stop, based on information (variation pattern information) included in the variable start command from the main control board 100. In this embodiment, the symbol variable effect (reach effect) that occurs after a reach display includes a reach effect with simple performance content (normal reach effect) and a reach effect with a progressive performance content (super reach effect). The variable effect determination means 225 holds multiple variable effect pattern tables that are referenced when selecting a variable effect pattern, and selects a variable effect pattern table from these multiple variable effect pattern tables that corresponds to the variable effect pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. In the variable effect pattern table, the variable effect pattern random number value and the variable effect pattern are associated according to the result of the special symbol variable pattern lottery (i.e., the reach type). Here, the main control board 100 determines a basic pattern of symbol change (e.g., "Normal Reach A," "Super Reach A," etc.) as a change pattern, while the effect control board 200 determines a detailed pattern of symbol change (e.g., "Normal Reach A1, A2, A3...," "Super Reach A1, A2, A3...") that defines a detailed scenario for the effect display process based on the basic pattern as a change effect pattern. In this way, the decorative symbol change effect pattern defines the decorative symbol change display mode, i.e., the scenario for the series of effect display processes from the start to the end of the decorative symbol change, and also specifies the timing for the occurrence of preview effects at each stage during the display process as a time schedule. The stopping order for the decorative symbols is predetermined for each change effect pattern. In this embodiment, the order is generally left → right → center. However, in the case of a short-time fluctuation pattern, the left, middle, and right symbols can be stopped almost simultaneously, and in the case of a specific fluctuation pattern, the symbols can be stopped in the order left → middle → right. In this case, if the stopping order is not in accordance with the above principle (left → right → middle), the likelihood of a jackpot tends to be relatively higher.

The preview effect determination means 226 determines a preview effect pattern that specifies the content of the preview effect to be executed at each stage of the decorative pattern change process in accordance with the scenario of the change effect pattern described above. Preview effect patterns include effect patterns that temporarily or gradually display images of specific characters, animations, etc., effect patterns that output specific sounds, and effect patterns that operate movable parts. Preview effects are executed in parallel with the display of decorative pattern changes and provide a preview indication that the pattern change will stop in a jackpot state and there is a high probability of a jackpot. Preview effects include preview effects that are executed before a reach state occurs (including when a reach state occurs) during the decorative pattern change process, and preview effects that are executed after a reach state occurs. Each preview effect has a different jackpot reliability, and generally, preview effects that are displayed after a reach state occurs have a relatively higher jackpot reliability than preview effects that are displayed before a reach state occurs. The preview performance determination means 226 holds preview performance pattern tables for each type of preview performance, which are referenced when selecting a preview performance pattern, and selects a preview performance pattern table corresponding to the type of preview performance that will occur in accordance with the scenario of the variable performance pattern. The preview performance determination means 226 references the preview performance pattern table selected above and selects one of multiple preview performance patterns by lottery based on the preview performance pattern random number value obtained from the performance lottery random number generation means 210. Specific preview performance patterns available include a comment preview performance pattern, a background preview performance pattern, an SU (step-up) preview performance pattern, a group preview performance pattern, a cut-in preview performance pattern, and a movable role preview performance pattern. This preview performance is basically performed by executing one or more preview performances in accordance with the variable display of decorative symbols on the performance display device 70. Therefore, even if the variable display of decorative symbols is based on the same variable performance pattern, a variety of performance styles can be generated by combining one or more preview performances.

The jackpot presentation determination means 227 determines the content of the jackpot presentation (jackpot presentation pattern) that notifies the player that a special game is in progress. The jackpot presentation includes a start demo presentation that notifies the player that a special game is in progress, a round presentation that notifies the player that a round game is in progress, and an end demo presentation that notifies the player that a special game has ended. When the jackpot presentation determination means 227 receives a jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100, it determines the jackpot presentation pattern (start demo presentation pattern, round presentation pattern, end demo presentation pattern) based on the jackpot type information stored in the presentation control information storage means 260. This jackpot presentation pattern includes a jackpot start demo presentation time, a round presentation time (presentation time according to the opening pattern of the large prize opening 64), and a jackpot end demo presentation time that are set according to the jackpot type, and a series of presentation contents are set along that time axis. The jackpot presentation determination means 227 executes a start demo presentation in accordance with the jackpot presentation pattern when it receives a jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100, executes each round presentation when it receives a round presentation designation command, and executes an end demo presentation when it receives a jackpot end demo command.

Here, in a normal jackpot start demo presentation, for example, the words "Jackpot Start" are displayed on the screen, announcing the start of the special game. In a normal round presentation, for example, the number of rounds currently being played and the number of prize balls won are displayed on the screen, along with various images (animated images, etc.) that add excitement to the special game. In a normal jackpot end demo presentation, for example, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed on the screen, announcing the end of the special game.

As described above, the performance control means 220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined performance content (prediction performance pattern, consecutive win performance pattern, variable performance pattern, advance notice performance pattern, stopping symbol pattern, jackpot performance pattern, etc.), and stores these in the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260.

The lamp performance control means 230 controls the lighting and light color of the performance lamps according to the performance content set by the performance integration means 220. The lamp performance control means 230 holds multiple types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the performance lamps 10, 25 (frame lamp 10, panel lamp 25), reads out the lamp data corresponding to the determined performance pattern, and transmits this lamp control signal (lamp data) to the lamp connection board 91.

The reel performance control means 240 controls the drive of each movable reel in accordance with the performance content set by the performance management means 220. The reel performance control means 240 holds multiple types of drive data for controlling the drive of the movable reels, and transmits drive control signals (drive data) corresponding to the determined performance pattern to the motor driver 92.

The error presentation control means 250 is configured to determine an error presentation pattern when it receives an error presentation designation command from the main control board 100, and to notify the user that an error state has occurred in the gaming machine in accordance with that error presentation pattern.

The performance control information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store information on decorative patterns, variable performance patterns, preview performance patterns, control commands, etc., and is provided with designated storage areas for storing each piece of information. For example, the command storage area includes a performance control command buffer for storing performance control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board 300, and an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from the image control board 300. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a designated number of performance control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission/reception means 270 is configured to receive performance control commands transmitted from the main control board 100 upon receiving the strobe signal that is also output, and to store these performance control commands in a performance control command buffer. Specifically, the command transmission/reception means 270 executes a reception interrupt process for the performance control command in response to an interrupt that is generated upon receiving a strobe signal from the main control board 100, and acquires various performance control commands during this reception interrupt process. Details of this reception interrupt process for the performance control command will be described later. Note that when the command transmission/reception means 270 receives a strobe signal, it executes the reception interrupt process for the performance control command with priority over other interrupt processes.

The command transmission/reception means 270 transmits image control commands stored in the performance control information storage means 260 to the image control board 300, for example using a serial communication method, to instruct the execution of the performance content (variable performance pattern information, preview performance pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the performance control means 220. As a general rule, the image control commands are transmitted at predetermined intervals (500 μs in this embodiment) in the order set in the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260.

As a result, the image control board 300 analyzes the various image control commands sent from the performance control board 200, and causes the performance display device 70 to display a changing performance image including decorative patterns in accordance with the scenario of the changing performance pattern, and also displays preview performances superimposed on the changing pattern performance at each stage of the changing display process. Furthermore, the command transmission/reception means 270 receives the ACK command sent from the image control board 300 and stores this ACK command in the ACK command buffer.

<Processing on the main control board>
27 to 48 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the operation processing on the main control board 100. The operation processing on the main control board 100 side mainly includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main control side main processing>
27, 28, and 29 are flowcharts each showing an example of main control side main processing executed on the main control board 100. In this main control side main processing, a security check of the main control CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, and then a main control program is started, and processing is executed by this main control program. Note that in the following explanation, the subject of each processing may be omitted as appropriate.

First, as the initial settings required when powering on, the stack pointer is set to the top address as the initial value of the stack area (step S1), and access to the main control RAM 103 is permitted (step S2). Next, a vector table is set that stores the top address of the main control program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs (step S3), and initial values are set in the internal registers of the main control CPU 101 (step S4).

Next, the main control CPU 101 checks the operating state of the setting key switch 100q (step S5). If the setting key switch 100q is on (YES in step S5), it checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch 400q (step S6). If the RAM clear switch 400q is on in step S6 (YES in step S6), it executes a setting change process (step S7). Details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to Figure 30, but after the setting change process is complete, it proceeds to step S13. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 400q is off in step S6 (NO in step S6), it executes a setting confirmation process (step S8). Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to Figure 31, but after the setting confirmation process is complete, it proceeds to step S10.

If the setting key switch 100q is in the OFF state in step S5 (NO in step S5), the main control CPU 101 checks the operation state of the RAM clear switch 400q (step S9). If the RAM clear switch 400q is in the ON state in step S9 (YES in step S9), the process proceeds to step S13 to perform a normal RAM clear process that does not involve a setting change. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 400q is in the OFF state in step S9 (NO in step S6), the process proceeds to step S10 without performing any special process.

In step S10, the main control CPU 101 reads the value of the power-off information flag and determines whether information indicating a normal power-off has been saved (step S10).

If information indicating normal power-off is stored, a checksum is calculated for a specified area of main control RAM 103 (step S11). It is determined whether this checksum is 0, i.e., whether the checksum is normal (step S12). Note that the checksum calculated at power-on includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described below, so if the data has been backed up correctly, the checksum at power-on will be "0". In this way, it is determined at power-on whether the information stored in main control RAM 103 before power-off has been backed up correctly.

If the checksum is normal in step S12 (YES in step S12), the process proceeds to step S16, described below, to restore the state before power was turned off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal in step S12 (NO in step S12), or after the setting change process in step S7 is completed, all areas of the main control RAM 103 that are the subject of the initialization process are cleared to zero (step S13). Note that the initialization process in step S13 does not clear specific RAM storage areas to zero. For example, the setting values stored in the setting memory are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process in step S7 are retained.

Next, power-on initialization data is set in the main control RAM 103 (step S14). Next, a performance control command ("performance initialization command") is requested from the performance control board 200 to initialize the performance display device 70, performance lamps 10 and 25, etc. (step S15).

Next, in the power failure recovery setting process, the main control RAM 103 sequentially sets normal power-on information, initializes various errors, and initializes communication with the payout control board 400 (step S16). Here, normal power-on information is set by storing normal power-on data in the power failure information flag to confirm that power was turned on correctly, and turning off the power failure confirmation flag to initialize the power failure information. Next, the data transfer source address, data transfer destination address, and number of transfer bytes are set, and the number of transfer bytes of data is transferred (step S17). The value of the special symbol game status at the time of power failure is read, and power failure recovery processing related to special symbol gameplay is executed (step S18).

Next, a request is made to send a presentation control command ("power failure recovery command") for when the main control board 100 and presentation control board 200 are powered back on (step S19). This power failure recovery command contains information about the communication line inspection, the activation status of the special symbol, the number of probability changes, the number of time-saving events, the number of times the ball is likely to score, the change pattern selection status, and the error status. Any command requests not yet sent before the power failure are cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, information about the number of activation pending balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of the power failure is read, and a presentation control command including this information about the number of activation pending balls is requested (step S20).

Next, a reset setting is performed to return the normal electric device 622 to the state it was in before the power was cut off (e.g., the second start opening 62 is open) (step S21). Furthermore, a reset setting is performed to return the special electric device 642 to the state it was in before the power was cut off (e.g., the large prize opening 64 is open) (step S22). Next, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the activation state of the special symbol probability fluctuation function in the event of a power cut is set (step S23). The special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the activation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (step S24). Next, an interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the timer interrupt process from occurring (step S25). Clear word 1 ("55H") is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (step S26).

Next, to determine whether a power outage has occurred, the value of the power outage confirmation flag is read to determine whether a power outage has occurred (step S27). If a power outage has not occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (step S28). This initial value random number update process updates the initial value random number for a normal symbol, the soft initial value random number for a special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number for a special symbol. Specifically, the value of each counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value set for each random number, it is reset to the minimum value of "0."

Next, interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur (step S29), and processing returns to the interrupt prohibition processing described above (step S25), where the loop processing from steps S25 to S29 is repeatedly executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is executed periodically at a predetermined cycle, and the processing from steps S25 to S29 is repeated using the remaining time between the completion of the previous interrupt processing and the occurrence of the next interrupt processing. If an interrupt request is made while interrupts are prohibited, the timer interrupt processing will be initiated when interrupts are permitted in step S29. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is on in step S27, i.e., if a power outage has occurred, processing proceeds to step S30, where the power-off processing described below is executed.

Next, as part of the power-off processing (steps S30-S36), first, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (step S30). Next, it is determined whether the contents of the power-off information flag indicate normal power-on data (step S31). If the power-on information indicates normal power-on, the power-off information flag is set to normal power-off data (step S32). On the other hand, if the power-on information does not indicate normal power-on, the power-off information flag is set to abnormal power-off data (step S33), and processing proceeds to step S36.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a specified area of the main control RAM 103 (excluding the checksum area) (step S34). The complement of the checksum data is calculated, and the resulting value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the main control RAM 103 (step S35). Next, access to the main control RAM 103 is prohibited (step S36), and the process is repeated until the power is cut off.

<Settings change process>
Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The series of processes shown in Fig. 30 shows in detail the setting change process of step S107 in Fig. 27, and is executed by the main control CPU 101 (main control program).

As shown in Figure 30, the main control CPU 101 first checks whether the value in the setting memory where the game setting value should be stored is normal (step S101). If the setting memory value is not normal in step S101 (NO in S101), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S102). Specifically, for example, if "1" to "6" are used as setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and if "0" to "5" are used as setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. After processing step S102, the process proceeds to step S103. On the other hand, if the setting memory value is normal in step S101 (YES in S101), the process skips step S102 and proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the system transitions to a setting change state. The setting values stored in the setting memory are then displayed on the setting display unit 197 (step S104).

Next, it is checked whether a change has been made using a setting change button (e.g., RAM clear switch 400q) (step S105). If a change has been made using the setting change button (YES in step S105), the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 197 are updated, and the setting values stored in the setting memory are also updated (step S106). If no change has been made using the setting change button (NO in step S105), the processing of step S106 is skipped.

Next, it is confirmed whether the operation state of the setting key switch 100q is in the OFF state (step S107). If the determination in step S5 of FIG. 27 is NO and the setting key switch 100q remains in the ON state (NO in step S107), the process returns to step S104 and repeats. On the other hand, if the setting key is returned to its original position and the setting key switch 100q is in the OFF state (YES in step S107), the setting display unit 197 is turned off to make the setting value invisible (not displayed) (step S108), and the process returns. As mentioned above, after the return, the process of step S13 in FIG. 27 is performed.

<Settings confirmation process>
Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The series of processes shown in Fig. 31 are a detailed description of the setting confirmation process of step S108 in Fig. 27, and are executed by the main control CPU 101 (main control program).

According to Figure 31, first, the main control CPU 101 displays the setting values stored in the setting memory on the setting display unit 197 (step S111).

Then, the main control CPU 101 checks whether the setting key switch 100q is in the OFF state (step S112). If the setting key switch 100q remains ON after determining NO in step S5 of FIG. 27 (NO in step S112), the process returns to step S111 and repeats, continuing to display the setting value. On the other hand, if the setting key is returned to its original position and the setting key switch 100q is in the OFF state (YES in step S112), the setting display unit 197 is turned off, making the setting value invisible (non-display) (step S113), and then returns. As mentioned above, after returning, the process of step S10 of FIG. 27 is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the first step, frame opening, is included as a condition for transitioning to the setting change process and setting confirmation process described above, in order to enhance security. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 27, when the operation state of the setting key switch 100q is determined to be on in step S5 (YES in step S5), the state of the frame open switch (door open sensor 2p) is also checked, and only if the frame is in an open state (door open) does the machine proceed to step S6. Even if the setting key switch 100q is in the on state when determined in step S5, if the frame is not in an open state (door closed), this indicates a suspected fraud or abnormality, and the machine does not proceed to step S6, which proceeds to the setting change process (step S7) or setting confirmation process (step S8). Instead, the machine waits until the setting key switch 100q is in the off state, and if it is switched to the off state, the machine proceeds to step S9.

<Main control side timer interrupt processing>
Next, the relationship between the various figures for explaining the main control timer interruption processing will be described. First, FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the timer interruption processing executed in the main control board 100. FIGS. 34 and 35 are flowcharts showing details of the start gate monitoring control processing shown in FIG. 32. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control processing shown in FIG. 33, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring processing shown in FIG. 36. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control processing shown in FIG. 33. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing details of the general special symbol control processing shown in FIG. 39. FIGS. 41 to 45 are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol variation start processing, special symbol variation processing, and special symbol stop symbol display processing shown in FIG. 40. FIGS. 46 to 48 are flowcharts showing details of the special electric device control processing shown in FIG. 33.

First, the timer interrupt process shown in Figure 32 is executed by interrupting the main control main process when a timer interrupt occurs in response to a clock pulse from the CTC circuit mentioned above at regular intervals (for example, every 4 ms). Note that the terms "condition device" and "continuous device for operating special features" used below refer to conceptual control devices. A "condition device" operates when a jackpot occurs in a special symbol game, and a "continuous device for operating special features" can operate a "special electric feature" multiple times in succession.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the main control CPU 101 (data used during main control main processing) are saved to the stack area of the main control RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation conditions are set (step S51). Next, the interrupt operation condition setting value is set in the interrupt control register (step S52). Next, clear word 2 is set (step S53).

Next, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (step S54). At this time, clear word 1 and clear word 2 are written in sequence to the WDT clear register of the main control CPU 101 within the preset timeout period, clearing and restarting the watchdog timer. In other words, when the main control CPU 101 is executing the main control program normally, clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, clearing and restarting the watchdog timer before it times out. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, input processing is executed (step S55). In this input processing, information on the various switches connected to the main control board 100, except for the RAM clear switch, is read. That is, input information is read from the first start gate switch 161, second start gate switch 162, activation gate switch 163, large prize gate switch 164, and out ball detection switch 167, as well as the door open switch, frame open switch, back set open switch, magnetic sensor, and radio wave sensor (not shown), and their status is determined before this detection information is stored.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (step S56). In this various random number update process, normal symbol variation pattern random numbers and special symbol variation pattern random numbers that do not use initial value random numbers are updated. For normal symbol variation pattern random numbers, the value of the random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0". On the other hand, for special symbol variation pattern random numbers, a predetermined value (e.g., 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the result of the subtraction is less than 0, a predetermined value (e.g., 50,000) is added to the subtraction result.

Next, an initial value update type random number update process is executed (step S57). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random number per normal symbol, the soft random number per special symbol, and the symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value of "0". When the counter value has completed one cycle (when it has reached the value set as the initial value), the value of the initial value random number corresponding to the random number value at which the counter value has completed one cycle at that time is set as the new initial value.

Next, the initial value random number update process is executed (step S58). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value predetermined for each random number, it is reset to the minimum value of "0."

Next, a timer subtraction process is executed (step S59). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used to control the game operation of the gaming machine are subtracted and updated. Note that these timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the special symbol display devices 171, 172, a timer for controlling the operation pattern of the special electric device 642, and timers used for various controls such as normal symbols and normal electric devices.

Next, the second start port validity period setting process is executed (step S60). In this second start port validity period setting process, the winning validity period and winning invalidity period for the second start port 62 are determined, and the validity period data or invalidity period data for the second start port 62 is set as the result of this determination.

Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (step S61). In this winning monitoring process, a switch passage inspection of the game ball is performed based on the detection information of the first start gate switch 161, second start gate switch 162, operating gate switch 163, special prize gate switch 164, general prize gate switch 166, and out ball detection switch 167 in the input process described above (step S55). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through each switch, a request is made to send a performance control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (step S62). This prize ball control process determines whether the winning prize is valid or invalid, sends a payout control command to the payout control board 400 to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning prize, and performs a communication test with the payout control board 400 by monitoring data received from the payout control board 400.

Next, the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process is executed (step S63). This normal symbol activation gate monitoring process monitors the passage of game balls through gate 63, and if it is determined that a game ball has passed through gate 63, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is obtained as activation pending ball information, the number of activation pending balls is updated up to a maximum of four, and the random number related to the normal symbol lottery is stored.

Next, normal symbol control processing is executed (step S64). In this normal symbol control processing, a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 175 or normal electric device 622 are executed, and depending on the value of the normal symbol game status, normal symbol changing processing, normal symbol stop symbol display processing, normal electric device operation processing, normal electric device operation end demo processing, etc. are executed. Note that in the normal symbol changing processing, normal symbol display pattern number data is created (updated) to display the normal symbol changing or confirmed.

Next, the normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (Step S65). In this normal symbol change start monitoring process, the operating status of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol change start conditions are met, one of the normal symbol activation pending balls is consumed, and the following steps are performed in order: determining whether the normal symbol is correct, determining the symbol, determining the change pattern, setting the change time, etc.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (step S66). This start port monitoring control process monitors the entry of game balls into the first start port 61 and the second start port 62, and when a game ball is detected to have entered, command requests are sequentially made to the performance control board 200, including commands containing information necessary for the performance control board 200, such as updating the number of reserved balls, storing random numbers related to the special symbol lottery, pre-determination for advance notice and the number of symbols stored, etc.

Next, special symbol control processing is executed (step S67). In this special symbol control processing, a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 171, 172 are executed depending on the value of the special symbol game status, such as special symbol change start processing (see step S420 in FIG. 40 described later), special symbol change processing (see step S430 in FIG. 40 described later), and special symbol stop symbol display processing (see step S440 in FIG. 40 described later).

Next, the special electric device control process is executed (step S68). In this process, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "big win" or "small win," the operation process related to the special electric device 642 is executed in the following order: setting the start and end of operation of the special electric device 642, updating the opening time and number of times the big prize opening 64 is opened, setting the start of operation of the probability fluctuation function, setting the start of operation of the fluctuation time reduction function, setting the fluctuation pattern selection status, etc.

Next, the special prize opening valid period setting process is executed (step S69). In this special prize opening valid period setting process, the special prize opening 64's valid prize period and invalid prize period are determined, and the special prize opening 64's valid period data or invalid period data is set as the result of this determination.

Next, the special symbol change start monitoring and control process is executed (Step S70). In this special symbol change start monitoring and control process, if there is a reserved activation ball for the first special symbol or second special symbol, one reserved ball is consumed, and the following steps are performed in order: request a command for the number of symbols stored, determine whether the special symbol is a hit or miss, determine the symbol of the special symbol, determine the probability variation function, determine the time reduction function, set the activation pattern of the special electric device, and set the demo performance time.

Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (step S71). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information from the input process described above (step S55), the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, the open/short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor, the door/frame open signal, etc. are sequentially inspected to determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If an error state is detected, a presentation control command ("error presentation designation command") containing the error information is generated to request the presentation control board 200 to display an error.

Next, the ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (step S72). In this ball passing time abnormality detection process, if the ON signal of the winning detection switch is detected continuously for a predetermined period of time or longer, a ball passing time abnormality is set, a performance control command ("error performance designation command") containing the error information is requested, and a security signal is requested to be output to an external terminal.

Next, the game status display process is executed (step S73). This game status display process creates display data such as the number of times the special electric device 642 has been activated in succession (prescribed number of rounds), the number of activated balls for normal and special symbols, and other information. Display data is also created to display information about the error state detected in the abnormality detection process described above on the status indicator light on the main control board 100.

Next, the steering wheel state signal inspection process is executed (step S74). In this steering wheel state signal inspection process, the steering wheel state signal is inspected.

Next, LED output processing is executed (step S75). In this LED output processing, display data created by the special symbol control processing (step S85), abnormality detection processing (step S89), and game status display processing (step S73) described above is output to the special symbol display devices 171, 172, the normal symbol display device 175, the special symbol hold lamps 173, 174, the normal symbol hold lamp 176, the status indicator lamp on the main control board 100, etc., in order to display special and normal symbols, the number of reserved balls, the number of consecutive activations of the special electric device, and errors, and the displays on these various display devices are initialized.

Next, a launch control signal output process is executed (step S76). In this launch control signal output process, if no communication abnormality or disconnection/short circuit/power supply abnormality with the payout control board 400 is detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to permit the launch of game balls, whereas if a communication abnormality or disconnection/short circuit/power supply abnormality with the payout control board 400 is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of game balls.

Next, the test signal output process is executed (step S77). In this test signal output process, various test data are created and then an error check process is performed. If an error is detected as a result, the various test data are output to each test signal output port.

Next, solenoid output processing is executed (step S78). In this solenoid output processing, excitation signals are output to the electric role solenoids 123 and 124 based on the control data acquired in the normal symbol control processing (step S82) and the special electric role control processing (step S86) to activate the normal electric role 622 and the special electric role 642.

Next, a performance control command transmission process is executed (step S79). In this performance control command transmission process, as described above, the performance control commands stored in the ring buffer specified by the pointer are read out for each MODE data and EVENT data from among the performance control commands stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180, and are transmitted to the performance control board 200 as described below.

Next, an external information output process is executed (step S80). In this external information output process, the gaming machine's operating status information is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer or data counter via the external terminal board.

Next, the saved register contents are restored, and the main control CPU 101 is set to an interrupt-enabled state (step S81). This ends the main control timer interrupt processing, and the main control CPU returns to the main control main processing, which is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a drop in supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during main control main processing or interrupt processing, it generates a non-maskable interrupt and turns on the power outage confirmation flag. After returning to the original processing, the previously described power outage processing (steps S27 to S33) is executed.

<Special symbol game processing>
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be explained. The processes related to the special symbol game include the above-mentioned start gate monitoring control process (step S84), special symbol control process (step S85), special electric device control process (step S86), and special symbol variation start monitoring control process (step S88).

<Start port monitoring control process>
34, it is determined whether or not a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 61 (step S201). If a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 61, it is determined whether or not the number of activation balls for the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of four (step S202).

If the number of activated balls for the first special symbol is less than four, the following random numbers are obtained as lottery random numbers for the first special symbol game: a random number value for the special symbol, a random number value for the symbol for the special symbol, and a random number value for the special symbol variation pattern. These random number values are stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of ball entry (step S203). The number of activated balls for the first special symbol is updated by adding 1 to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter (step S204), and the winning check for the first starting port 61 is completed.

Next, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second start opening 62 (step S205). If a game ball has entered the second start opening 62, it is determined whether the number of activated balls for the second special symbol is less than the upper limit of four (step S206). If the number of activated balls for the second special symbol is less than four, the random number value for the special symbol, the random number value for the symbol for the special symbol, and the random number value for the special symbol variation pattern are obtained as the lottery random numbers for the second special symbol game, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of ball entry (step S207). To update the number of activated balls for the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter is incremented by one (step S208), and the winning check for the second start opening 62 is completed.

Next, it is determined whether the number of pending activation balls for the first special pattern or the second special pattern has been updated, i.e., whether the number of pending activation balls for the first special pattern or the second special pattern has been increased in step S204 or step S208 (step S209). If the number of pending activation balls has been updated (step S209), a symbol memory number command containing information on the number of pending activation balls for the first special pattern and the second special pattern is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is checked to determine whether it is time for a pre-determination (step S211). If it is time for a pre-determination (step S211), the random number value for the special symbol win is read from the win random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and a pre-determination of whether it is a win or a loss is performed (step S212). A pre-determination command containing information on the pre-determination result (win/loss pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S213).

The random number value of the special symbol winning pattern is read from the winning pattern random number buffer in the reserved n memory area, and a preliminary pattern determination is made (step S214). A pattern preliminary determination command containing information on the preliminary determination result (pattern preliminary determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S215). Furthermore, the random number value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern is read from the fluctuation pattern random number buffer in the reserved n memory area, and a preliminary fluctuation pattern determination is made (step S216). A fluctuation pattern preliminary determination command containing information on the preliminary determination result (fluctuation pattern preliminary determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S217).

<Special symbol variation start monitoring control process>
In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (step S88) shown in Figure 36, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (step S310) described below is executed for the special symbol side of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that satisfies the variation start condition. Note that, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the variation start condition, as described above, as an example, the process on the second special symbol side is executed preferentially.

First, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is occurring (step S301). Next, it is determined whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting to change, i.e., whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting to change)" (step S302).

Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved activation balls for the second special pattern is "0" (step S303). If the number of reserved balls is not "0," it is assumed that the condition for starting the change of the second special pattern is met, and after setting the address of the second special pattern change start monitoring table (the addresses of various tables used in subsequent processes and the address of the RAM storage area) (step S304), the process proceeds to the special pattern change start monitoring process for the second special pattern (step S310). In other words, in this embodiment, if there is a reserved activation ball for the second special pattern, the reserved activation ball for the second special pattern is consumed first, regardless of whether there is a reserved activation ball for the first special pattern. Details of this special pattern change start monitoring process will be explained below using Figures 37 and 38.

On the other hand, if the number of pending activation balls for the second special symbol is "0," it is determined whether the number of pending activation balls for the first special symbol is "0" (step S305). If the number of pending balls is not "0," it is assumed that the condition for starting the change of the first special symbol is met, and after setting the address of the first special symbol change start monitoring table (the addresses of various tables used in subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (step S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process for the first special symbol (step S310).

If the conditions for starting the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not met (steps S301, S302, S305), the special symbol change start monitoring process (step S310) is omitted.

<Special symbol variation start monitoring process>
In the special symbol variation start monitoring process (step S310), the first special symbol variation start monitoring table or the second special symbol variation start monitoring table set in the above-mentioned step S304 or step S306 is referenced to execute the processing of the special symbol side that is the target of this variation start. Note that, since the processing contents are almost the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, unless otherwise specified, the processing will be explained together without distinguishing between the processing for the first special symbol side and the processing for the second special symbol side.

First, as shown in FIG. 37, the number of activated balls on the special symbol side that is the target of this fluctuation is decremented by 1 (step S311). A symbol memory number command containing information on the number of activated balls for the first and second special symbols after the decrement is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S312). Next, the special symbol reservation storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of this fluctuation is accessed, and the random number values for the special symbol, the symbol random number values for the special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number values stored in the earliest reservation storage area (reserve 1 storage area) are read in order. These random number values are transferred to the special symbol hit/miss determination area, special symbol determination area, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 for use in the special symbol hit/miss determination process (step S320), the symbol determination process (step S330), and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S423 in FIG. 41, described below) (step S313). To update the reserved memory area, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 to reserved 4 memory areas is shifted sequentially to the reserved 1 to reserved 3 memory areas, and the reserved 4 memory area is cleared to zero (step S314).

Next, the special symbol hit/miss determination process is executed (step S320). In the special symbol hit/miss determination process, first, a special symbol hit/miss lottery table is obtained. At this time, if the gaming state is a special symbol probability variable state, a high-probability hit/miss lottery table is obtained, and if the gaming state is a normal state, a low-probability hit/miss lottery table is obtained. Next, a special symbol hit random number value is read from the special symbol hit/miss determination area of the main information storage means 180. By referring to the special symbol hit/miss lottery table, a hit/miss determination of the special symbol is executed based on the hit random number value. A value corresponding to this hit/miss determination result (big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H") is stored as a special symbol determination flag in the main information storage means 180.

Next, a pattern determination process is executed (step S330). In the pattern determination process, the stopping pattern of the special pattern, the type of pattern group, and the character effect number (variable additional pattern information) are determined depending on the result of the win/loss determination. The stopping pattern of the special pattern, the type of pattern group, and the character effect number determined this time are stored in a pattern storage area in the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is determined from a total of 28 patterns based on the combination of the type of pattern group determined (seven patterns of pattern groups A to G) and the operating status of the probability variation function of the special and normal patterns (four patterns: special pattern probability variable on/special pattern probability variable off/normal pattern probability variable on/normal pattern probability variable off). If the result of the win/loss determination is a loss, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination corresponds to a small hit (step S341), and it is also determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination corresponds to a big hit (step S342). If the result of the hit/miss determination is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S346, whereas if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, the process proceeds to step S349.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot, a determination is made as to whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function for the special symbol as the post-special game state based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in step S330 (step S343). That is, if the type of symbol group (jackpot type) indicates a specific symbol, a determination is made to activate the probability fluctuation function, and probability fluctuation activation data (ST count) "64H" is stored in the probability fluctuation count counter of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if the type of symbol group indicates a normal symbol, a determination is made not to activate the probability fluctuation function, and probability fluctuation non-activation data "00H" is stored in the probability fluctuation count counter (step S344). This determination result is stored in the probability fluctuation determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in step S330, the number of times the variable time reduction function will be activated is determined as the game state after the special game (step S345), and the number of times the electric chute support function will be activated is also determined (step S346). The results of this determination (information on the number of times the variable time reduction function has been activated (hereinafter referred to as "variable time reduction number information") and information on the number of times the electric chute support function has been activated (hereinafter referred to as "easy ball scoring state number information")) are stored in the corresponding time reduction number storage area and easy ball scoring state number storage area of the main information storage means 180, respectively.

Next, based on the type of symbol group (big win type, small win type) determined in step S330, the operation pattern of the special electric device 642 is set (step S347). Specifically, the operation pattern of the special electric device 642 is set to the specified number of rounds for round play (in this embodiment, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, 1.8 seconds), etc.

Next, the variation pattern selection state after the special game ends is set based on the type of symbol group determined in step S330 and the current game state (step S348). While the above explanation illustrates a special variation state determined according to the big win symbol, the variation pattern selection state may also be changed to a special one in step S348 even in the case of a small win. Next, returning to the flow, the special game demo presentation time (win start demo time and win end demo time) is set based on the type of symbol group determined in step S330 (step S349). Next, the special symbol win/loss determination area and special symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the special symbol win/loss determination process (step S320) and the symbol determination process (step S330) are cleared (step S351). The special symbol game status of the special symbol that is the target of this change is transitioned from "00H (standby)" to "01H (change start)" (step S351).

<Special symbol control processing>
Next, the special symbol control process (step S85) shown in Fig. 39 will be described. First, it is determined whether the special electric device 642 is not in operation, that is, whether the special electric device play status is "00H (waiting for a win)" (step S401). Next, if the special electric device 642 is not in operation (step S401), it is determined whether the second special symbol play status is not "00H (waiting)" (step S402).

If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)", a second special symbol control table (addresses of various tables used in subsequent processing and RAM storage area addresses) is set (step S403) to execute processing related to the second special symbol, and the process proceeds to general special symbol control processing (step S410). On the other hand, if the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)", a first special symbol control table (addresses of various tables used in subsequent processing and RAM storage area addresses) is set (step S404) to execute processing related to the first special symbol, and the process proceeds to general special symbol control processing (step S410).

In the general special symbol control processing described below, the processing of the special symbol that is the subject of this change is carried out using the first or second special symbol control table set in step S403 or step S404 described above. However, since the processing method is the same for both the first and second special symbol sides, unless otherwise specified, the processing will be described together without distinguishing between the processing of the first special symbol side and the processing of the second special symbol side. Details of this general special symbol control processing will be given later.

<Special symbol control general-purpose processing>
In the general special symbol control process (step S410) shown in FIG. 40, branching processes (steps S411 to S414) are executed to transition to a process corresponding to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H"). First, it is determined whether the special symbol game status of the special symbol to be changed this time is 0 (step S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (step S411), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (change started)" (step S412). If the special symbol game status is "01H", the process transitions to the special symbol change start process (step S420). Details of this special symbol change start process will be explained later using FIG. 41. On the other hand, if the special symbol game status is not "01H" in step S412, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "02H (changing)" (step S413). If the special symbol game status is "02H", the process proceeds to special symbol variable processing (step S430). Details of this special symbol variable processing will be explained later using FIG. 42. If the special symbol game status is not "02H" in step S413, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "03H (stopped symbol is being displayed)" (step S414). If the special symbol game status is "03H", the process proceeds to special symbol stopped symbol display processing (step S440). Details of this special symbol stopped symbol display processing will be explained later using FIG. 43.

<Special symbol variation start processing>
First, as shown in Fig. 41, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the winning/losing lottery, the winning symbol, the number of reserved symbols, the type of special symbol, and the variation pattern selection state (step S421). Next, a special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (step S422). With reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of multiple variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value (step S423).

Next, a change time corresponding to the currently selected change pattern is set (step S424). To set the start of special symbol change, the change time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 155 (step S425), and a change start command is generated for the performance control board 200 (step S426). As the change start command, a change pattern designation command and a symbol designation command are generated in order to start the symbol change performance in the performance display device 70, and these are stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

Next, the contents of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used to determine the fluctuation pattern are cleared (step S427). The special symbol game status is transitioned from "01H (fluctuation started)" to "02H (fluctuation in progress)" (step S428).

<Special pattern change processing>
First, as shown in Fig. 42, in order to display the special symbol in a variable manner, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed (step S431). In this display pattern number switching process, the display pattern number data of the special symbol is updated at every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 in an LED output process (step S76) in order to display the special symbol in a variable manner or a fixed manner, and a display indicating that the special symbol is being changed is executed by flashing a specific display unit on the special symbol display device during the variable display at every predetermined switching time, or by sequentially lighting up individual LEDs on the display unit.

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)," i.e., whether the special symbol variation time has expired (step S432). If the special symbol variation time has expired, the stop symbol of the special symbol to be displayed as confirmed is set on the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 (step S433). Next, a variation stop command is generated to instruct the performance control board 200 to display the decorative symbol as confirmed, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S434).

Next, the special symbol game timer is set to "125," which corresponds to 500 ms as the confirmed display time (step S435). Note that the "confirmed display time" is the time required for the stopped symbol to be displayed as a fixed symbol when the special symbol stops changing. The special symbol game status is transitioned from "02H (changing)" to "03H (stopped symbol displayed)" (step S436).

<Processing during display of special symbol stop symbol>
43, it is determined whether the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)," i.e., whether the fixed display time of the special symbol (stopped symbol) has expired (step S441). If the fixed display time of the special symbol has expired, the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (displaying stopped symbol)" to "00H (standby)" (step S442).

Next, it is determined whether the hit/miss determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag in the main information storage means 180 is jackpot data "55H" (step S443). If the hit/miss determination data is jackpot data, the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (step S444), the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function is stopped (step S445), and the operation of the electric chute support function is stopped (step S446), in that order.

Next, as part of the special game start demo setting process, the start demo display time is set and a presentation control command (jackpot start demo command) is generated to instruct the start demo presentation to begin (step S447). Next, the number of times the variable pattern selection state has been executed (variable pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (step S448). The special electric device play status is transitioned from "00H (waiting for win)" to "01H (special game)" (step S449). The win/loss determination flag is set to "00H" to clear the contents (step S450).

On the other hand, if the hit/miss determination data is not jackpot data (step S443), it is determined whether the probability fluctuation function for the special symbol is in operation (step S451). As shown in FIG. 44, if the probability fluctuation function for the special symbol is in operation (step S451), the probability fluctuation count counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 to represent the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated this time (step S452). Next, it is determined whether the probability fluctuation count counter is zero (step S453). If the probability fluctuation count counter is zero, the operation of the probability fluctuation function for the special symbol is stopped (step S454). On the other hand, if the probability fluctuation count counter after the decrement is not zero, step S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S455.

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is in operation (step S455). If the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is in operation, the time reduction counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 to represent the number of times the special symbol has fluctuated this time (step S456). Next, it is determined whether the time reduction counter is zero (step S457). If the time reduction counter is zero, it is determined that the number of times the special symbol time reduction state has ended has been reached, and the operation of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is stopped (step S458). On the other hand, if the time reduction counter after decrement is not zero, step S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S459.

Next, it is determined whether the electric chute support function is operating (step S459). If the electric chute support function is operating, the easy-to-score state counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 to represent the number of times the special symbol has changed this time (step S460). Next, it is determined whether the easy-to-score state counter is zero (step S461). If the easy-to-score state counter is zero, it is determined that the number of times the easy-to-score state has ended has been reached, and the operation of the electric chute support function is stopped (step S462). On the other hand, if the easy-to-score state counter after the decrement is not zero, step S462 is skipped and the program proceeds to step S463.

Next, the variation pattern selection state count counter in the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 (step S463). The variation pattern selection state is updated (step S464). Specifically, the variation pattern selection state count counter in the main information storage means 180 is referenced to determine whether the number of times the current variation pattern selection state has been executed has reached a preset number of terminations, and if so, the state switches to the next specified variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the number of terminations has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, a presentation control command (game state designation command) is generated that includes the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information updated in steps S451 to S464 described above, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S465). The presentation control board 200 then sets and updates the presentation mode based on the information in this game state designation command.

Next, it is determined whether small win data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (step S466). If small win data is stored, the start demo display time is set as the start demo setting process for small win gameplay, and a performance control command (small win start demo command) is generated to instruct the start demo performance to begin (step S467). Next, the special electric device play status is transitioned from "00H (waiting for win)" to "02H (small win gameplay)" (step S468). The win/loss determination flag is set to "00H" to clear the contents (step S469).

On the other hand, if the small win data "33H" is not stored in the special symbol determination flag, i.e., if the loss data "00H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag, steps S467 to S469 are omitted. Note that if the special symbol determination flag is loss data, the process of clearing the contents of the flag is not performed because the loss data "00H" is originally stored in the special symbol determination flag.

<Special electric device control processing>
First, as shown in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the special electric device play status is "01H (special game: jackpot)" (step S501). If the special electric device play status is "01H", special game processing is executed in the subsequent processing. In this special game processing, it is first determined whether the special electric device 642 is in operation (step S502). If the special electric device 642 is not in operation, it is determined whether it is time to start operating the special electric device 642 (step S503). The operation start time of the special electric device 642 is the timing at which the operation of the special electric device 642 starts in each round of play.

If it is time for the special electric device 642 to start operating, a performance control command (round performance designation command) is generated to start the round performance, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S504). The performance control board 200 executes the round performance corresponding to each round of play during the special game based on the information in this round performance designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). The operation of the special electric device 642 is initiated (step S505), and steps S506 to S510 are executed as processing during the operation of the special electric device 642.

As processing during operation of the special electric device 642, it is determined whether the maximum number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 64 (step S506), and it is also determined whether the operation time (open time) of the special electric device 642 has elapsed (step S507). At this time, if the maximum number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 64 or if the operation time of the special electric device 642 has elapsed, the operation of the special electric device 642 is stopped (step S508). It is determined whether the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 642 has reached a predetermined specified number of rounds (step S509). If the number of consecutive operations has not reached the specified number of rounds, the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 642 is incremented by 1 (step S510).

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive operations of the special electric device 642 has reached the specified number of rounds, the process proceeds to step S511 shown in FIG. 47, where the special game hit end demo setting process sets the end demo display time and generates a presentation control command (jackpot end demo command) that instructs the start of the end demo presentation (step S511).

Next, the probability change count information set in step S344 above is stored in the probability change count counter (step S512). The time reduction count information set in step S345 above is stored in the time reduction count counter (step S513). The easy goal scoring state count information set in step S346 above is stored in the easy goal scoring state count counter (step S514).

Next, by referring to the contents of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in step S343, it is determined whether the probability fluctuation count information stored in the probability fluctuation count counter is probability fluctuation function data ("64H") (step S515). If the probability fluctuation count information is probability fluctuation function data, the operation of the probability fluctuation function for the special symbol is initiated (step S516). On the other hand, if the probability fluctuation count information is not probability fluctuation function data (if step S515 is NO), execution of step S516 is omitted.

Next, it is determined whether the variable time reduction count information stored in the time reduction count counter is variable time reduction function activation data (data other than "00H") (step S517). If it is variable time reduction function activation data, operation of the variable time reduction function for the special symbol is initiated (step S518). On the other hand, if it is not variable time reduction function activation data, execution of step S518 is omitted.

Next, it is determined whether the easy-to-score state count information stored in the easy-to-score state count counter is electric chute support function activation data (data other than "00H") (step S519). If it is electric chute support function activation data, the electric chute support function is activated (steps S520 to S522). That is, the normal symbol probability variation function is activated (step S520), the normal symbol variation time reduction function is activated (step S521), and the opening extension function of the normal electric device 622 is activated (step S522), in that order. On the other hand, if it is not electric chute support function activation data, steps S520 to S522 are omitted.

Next, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in step S347 (step S523). Next, a presentation control command (game state designation command) is generated, including the post-special game game state information and variation pattern selection state information set in steps S512 to S523, and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S524). The presentation control board 200 sets the post-special game presentation mode based on the information in this game state designation command. The special electric device game status is transitioned from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting for win)" (step S525).

On the other hand, if the special electric device play status is not "01H" (step S501), the process proceeds to step S530, where it is determined whether the special electric device play status is "02H (special play: small win play)" (step S530). If the special electric device play status is "02H", small win play processing is executed in the subsequent processing.

In the small win game processing, first, it is determined whether the special electric device 642 is in operation (step S531). If the special electric device 642 is not in operation, operation of the special electric device 642 begins (step S532). On the other hand, if the special electric device 642 is in operation, execution of step S532 is omitted.

Next, as processing during operation of the special electric device 642, it is determined whether the maximum number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 64 (step S533), and it is also determined whether the operation time (open time) of the special electric device 642 has elapsed (step S534). At this time, if the maximum number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 64 or if the operation time of the special electric device 642 has elapsed, the operation of the special electric device 642 is stopped (step S535).

Next, as part of the end demo setting process for the small win game, the end demo display time is set and a presentation control command (small win end demo command) is generated to instruct the start of the end demo presentation (step S536). Next, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in step S347 above (step S537). Next, a presentation control command (game state designation command) is generated that includes the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in step S537, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S538). This game state designation command is used on the presentation control board 200 side, for example, to determine the trigger for transitioning between presentation modes and to identify the presentation mode to transition to. The special electric device play status is transitioned from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting for win)" (step S539).

<Processing on the performance control board>
Next, the processing procedure on the performance control board 200 side will be explained with reference to Figures 49 to 57. Note that, although the main focus below is the performance control program, the main focus will be omitted as appropriate. The processing on the performance control board 200 side includes reset start processing (including performance control side main processing) that is executed when the performance control CPU 201 is reset, such as after power is turned on, performance control side timer interrupt processing that is started at regular intervals, performance control command reception interrupt processing that is executed in response to the receipt of a strobe signal from the main control board 100, lamp performance interrupt processing that is started in response to the arrival of a predetermined occurrence time defined in the time schedule of the variable performance pattern, and image control command transmission interrupt processing that is started in regular intervals.

Each interrupt process (exception process) has a priority level that indicates its priority when multiple interrupt processes occur simultaneously. In this embodiment, the priority levels are assigned in the following order: "Reset start process due to power reset (Fig. 49): highest priority," "Reset start process due to various abnormalities (Fig. 49): highest priority," "Performance control command reception interrupt process (Fig. 57): level 7," "WDT (runaway detection) reset start process (Fig. 49): level 3," "Image control command transmission interrupt process (Fig. 50): level 2," and "Performance control timer interrupt process (Fig. 56): level 1." Note that "Reset start process due to various abnormalities" is initiated, for example, when the performance control CPU 201 executes an invalid command, when the performance control CPU 201 attempts to access an invalid area or by an invalid method, or when an error occurs during DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer. While this embodiment illustrates the above multiple types of interrupt processes, other types of interrupt processes may actually exist.

The main processing on the performance control side basically proceeds with all interrupts prohibited, or with all interrupts other than the performance control command reception interrupt prohibited. If the main processing on the performance control side then enters an interrupt-enabled state, the main processing is suspended and each interrupt processing is executed. When a request for another interrupt processing occurs during the execution of each interrupt processing (multiple interrupts occur), the interrupt request is generally permitted if it has a higher priority than the currently executing interrupt processing. However, if the interrupt processing has a lower priority than the currently executing interrupt processing or the same priority level as the currently executing interrupt processing, the interrupt request is prohibited. In other words, each interrupt processing proceeds with other interrupts of the same or lower priority level prohibited. Each interrupt processing returns to the main processing on the performance control side with all interrupts permitted. The priority (priority level) of such interrupt causes is determined by the register settings of the interrupt controller described above.

<Reset start processing>
49 is a flowchart showing an example of the reset start process of the performance control board 200. This reset start process is started by resetting when the power is turned on, resetting due to various abnormalities, or resetting due to WDT (when a runaway is detected), and after a security check of the performance control CPU 201 is performed, the program starts and processing from step S801 onwards begins.

First, as an initial setting required when powering on, the stack pointer is set to the top address as the initial value of the stack area (step S801). All interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are complete (step S802).

Next, as basic hardware settings, initial values are set in the built-in registers provided in the performance control CPU 201, and the I/O port circuit 204 is initialized (step S803). Furthermore, the memory area in the performance control RAM 203 is initialized (step S804). Here, initial values are set for variables with initial values, and variables without initial values are initialized by clearing them to 0. The performance control CPU 201 appropriately deploys the control program stored in the performance control ROM 202 to the performance control RAM 203.

Next, all interrupts other than the interrupt process for receiving the performance control command are prohibited (step S805). Next, a process is executed to set the type of error that should be enabled for that model from the various errors that have been set in advance for each model (step S806). Furthermore, a light-off request is issued to turn off all performance lamps 10 and 25 (frame lamp 10, board lamp 25) (step S807). A watchdog timer is activated to monitor for runaway of the performance control CPU 201 (step S808).

Next, the performance control side main processing is executed (step S809). Details of this performance control side main processing are explained using Figure 50. Note that once the performance control side main processing is entered in the aforementioned step S809, it is not normally possible to return to the reset start processing. However, in the unlikely event that a program bug or similar occurs and the system returns to this reset start processing, the system will transition to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is reduced compared to normal operation.

<Main processing on the performance control side>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing details of the performance control side main processing (step S809) shown in FIG.

First, the main processing on the performance control side obtains the address (the starting address where the performance control program is deployed) to start checking whether the performance control program is correctly deployed in the performance control RAM 203 (step S811). Next, all interrupts are permitted, i.e., various interrupt processes are permitted to be started (step S812).

Next, the device initialization operation is performed (step S813). This initialization operation is performed only once when the gaming machine is powered on (when the reset begins), and is performed for the purpose of confirming the position information required to control the operation of the movable parts using devices such as motors and solenoids. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable parts return to their pre-set initial position (reference position).

Next, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart it (step S814). At this time, if the performance control CPU 201 is executing the performance program normally, a specified clear word is written to the WDT clear register of the performance control CPU 201 within a preset timeout period, clearing and restarting the watchdog timer. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, input port check processing is executed (step S815). In this input port check processing, the port input/output processing (step S1112) in the performance control timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 56), which will be described later, monitors the reading of the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) each time an interrupt occurs. After multiple (e.g., four) monitoring sessions, if the input port status is all "1", the signal level is changed to "1 (H level)". If the input port status is all "0", the signal level is changed to "0 (L level)". If the input port status is anything other than this, the signal level is not changed (this determines the input signal).

Next, the error presentation management process is executed (step S816). This error presentation management process initiates error presentations using various devices based on the error presentation pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (step S820). Furthermore, the error presentation management process sets an initial value (error presentation time) in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error presentation. This error management timer is updated and decremented every 16 ms in the error management timer update process (step S1120) of the presentation control timer interrupt process. If the error management timer times out, the error presentation is terminated.

Next, the effect button monitoring and control process is executed (step S817). In this effect button monitoring and control process, if a button preview effect is incorporated during the pattern change, the input state of the effect button 15 during the valid operation time is monitored, and the effect content corresponding to the input state of the effect button 15 is determined from multiple effect contents pre-set according to the button preview effect. The button input operation itself by the player is monitored in the port input process (step S1112) in the effect control timer interrupt process described below, and the effect button monitoring and control process determines whether a flag indicating a valid button operation or a flag for effect switching is set, and controls the execution of the effect based on the button press.

Next, a preview lottery management process is executed (step S818). In this preview lottery management process, a preview performance pattern (preview performance number) that defines the content of the preview performance that occurs at each stage of the decorative pattern fluctuation process is determined by lottery in accordance with the scenario of the fluctuation performance pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (step S820). The preview performance number determined here is temporarily stored in the preview performance number storage area of the performance control information storage means 260. An image control command is generated to specify this preview performance number to the image control board 300, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the performance control information storage means 260. At this time, if a role preview performance pattern (role preview performance number) is selected as the preview performance pattern, a role request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable role object is identified in the subsequent device management process (step S819). In this embodiment, rather than drawing lots for all of the multiple preview effects (preview effect patterns) that occur within one decorative pattern change within a single main loop, in order to improve the efficiency of the main loop processing, the preview effects are divided into periods when they occur (for example, the change start stage, the reach occurrence stage, the change stop stage, and when the effect button 15 is operated effectively), and drawn across multiple main loop processing. In this case, for preview effects that occur at the decorative pattern change start stage, they must be synchronized with the start of the decorative pattern change (the image control command must be sent immediately), so the drawing is carried out within the main loop processing described above.

Next, the device management process is executed (step S819). In this device management process, if a request for device operation (lamp request, prop request) is received in the command analysis process (step S820) described below, the device management process identifies the pattern data corresponding to the prop number (lamp prop number, prop preview prop number) from among the multiple types of pattern data (lamp patterns, drive patterns) stored in the performance control ROM 202, and begins control of the target device. The lamp pattern data for the performance lamps 10 and 25 contains lamp data associated with each frame time (16 ms, the time required to update one image frame) as schedule data. In this embodiment, one frame time corresponds to the time required to process one frame when the performance display device 70 is drawing at approximately 60 frames per second (approximately 60 fps). Similarly, the drive pattern data for the movable props contains drive data associated with each interrupt period (1 ms) as schedule data. As a result, in the performance control timer interrupt process described below, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals, causing the target device to begin operation. Meanwhile, in the performance control timer interrupt process described below, when the output of all control data (lamp data, drive data) is complete, the performance lamps 10 and 25 are turned off, or the operation of the movable props is stopped, and control of the target device is terminated.

Next, a command analysis process (step S820) is executed. This command analysis process monitors whether a performance control command is stored in the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260, and if a performance control command is stored, this performance control command is read out and performance control processing corresponding to the type of this performance control command is executed. Details of this command analysis process will be explained later using Figure 51.

During the loop processing of the main effect processing for the current cycle, it is determined whether or not analysis of the effect control command (hereinafter referred to as "command analysis") has been performed (step S821). If command analysis has been performed, the process returns to step S814, and steps S814 to S821 are repeatedly performed. On the other hand, if command analysis has not been performed, an effect lottery random number update process is performed (step S822). This effect lottery random number update process updates effect lottery random numbers such as the pre-reading notice lottery random number, decorative pattern random number, variable effect pattern random number, and notice effect pattern random number. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and if the value exceeds the maximum value, it is reset to the minimum value.

<Command analysis process>
Fig. 51 is a flowchart showing the details of the command analysis process (step S820) shown in Fig. 50. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the performance control command held in the output port of the main control board 100 has been taken into the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 as shown below, and if the performance control command has been taken in and stored, it executes a performance control process corresponding to the type of this performance control command.

First, it is determined whether a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S831). If a game state designation command is stored, the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (step S832). In this effect state transition process, a process to transition the effect mode is executed based on the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command. Details of this effect state transition process will be explained later using Figure 52.

Next, it is determined whether a hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 (step S833). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol memory count command and a pre-determination command. If such a hold-related command is stored, the process proceeds to the hold information management process (step S834). In this hold information management process, the symbol memory count command or pre-determination command is read from the performance control information storage means 260, and a pre-reading determination is made based on the information from the pre-determination result, as well as processing to update the number of hold images displayed and the display mode (display color, etc.) displayed on the hold display unit (not shown) of the performance display device 70.

Next, it is determined whether a pattern change-related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S835). Here, the pattern change-related command includes a change start command and a change stop command. If a pattern change-related command is stored, the process proceeds to a change effect content determination process (step S836). In this change effect content determination process, if the received pattern change-related command is a change start command, a process is executed to start the pattern change effect, and if the received pattern change-related command is a change stop command, a process is executed to end the ongoing pattern change effect. Details of this change effect content determination process will be explained using Figure 53 below.

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S837). Here, the jackpot effect-related commands include a jackpot start demo effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demo effect command. If a jackpot effect-related command is stored, the process proceeds to the jackpot effect content determination process (step S838). In this jackpot effect content determination process, processing is carried out to execute the start demo effect, round effect, and end demo effect. Details of this jackpot effect content determination process will be explained later using Figures 54 and 55.

Next, it is determined whether or not a small win effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S839). Here, small win effect-related commands include a small win start demo effect command and a small win end demo effect command. If a small win effect-related command is stored, the process proceeds to the small win effect content determination process (step S840). In this small win effect content determination process, processing is carried out to execute the small win start demo effect and the small win end demo effect.

Next, it is determined whether an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S841). If this error effect designation command is stored, the process proceeds to the error effect content determination process (step S842). In this error effect content determination process, the error effect designation command is read from the effect control information storage means 260, and an error effect pattern for notifying an error state is determined by the image displayed on the effect display device 70, the light emission mode of the effect lamps 10 and 25, etc.

If no effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S831, S833, S835, S837, S839, or S841, the command analysis process is terminated. The loop process of the effect control main process (steps S814 to S822) is synchronized with the image display cycle (1 frame = 16 ms) of the image control CPU 301, so the command analysis process of step S821 and the effect lottery random number update process of step S822 are repeatedly executed, and if 16 ms is exceeded, the process returns to step S814.

<Rendering state transition processing>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the details of the rendering state transition process (step S832) shown in FIG.

First, the game state designation command from the main control board 100 is analyzed, and information regarding the variation pattern selection state contained in the command is obtained (step S901). Next, based on the information regarding the variation pattern selection state obtained in step S901, it is determined whether a trigger for transitioning to a presentation mode has arrived (step S902). If a trigger for transitioning to a presentation mode has arrived, a transition to a specified presentation mode is set in step S903 and subsequent steps. The triggers for transitioning to a presentation mode are generally linked to the activation of the probability variation function, variation time reduction function, and electric chute support function after the end of a special game, as well as the transition trigger for the variation pattern selection state. For example, this occurs when a special game ends or when the number of times the variation pattern selection state has ended is reached. The number of times the variation pattern selection state has ended is the number of times the special symbol has changed.

First, it is determined whether the destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state managed by the main control board 100 is the low-probability normal fluctuation state α (step S903). If the destination is the low-probability normal fluctuation state α, the normal fluctuation mode Mα is set as the destination of the presentation mode (step S904). Upon transition to this normal fluctuation mode Mα, a normal background data number is set in the background data storage area of the presentation control information storage means 260 (step S905). In normal fluctuation mode Mα, a normal background image representing, for example, a "wildness" is displayed on the presentation display device 70 from the next pattern fluctuation. On the other hand, if the destination is not the low-probability normal fluctuation state α (step S903), it is determined whether the destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high-probability time-saving fluctuation state β (step S906). If the destination is the high-probability time-saving fluctuation state β, the guaranteed variable fluctuation mode Mβ is set as the destination of the presentation mode (step S907). When the game transitions to this probability variation mode A, a probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S908). In probability variation mode Mβ, from the next symbol change, a probability variation background image representing, for example, a "fortress" is displayed on the effect display device 70.

If the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is not the high-probability time-saving fluctuation state β (step S906), it is determined whether the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high-probability special fluctuation state γ (step S909). If the transition destination is the high-probability special fluctuation state γ, the special fluctuation mode Mγ is set as the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state (step S910). Next, it is determined whether the special continuous fluctuation flag in the fluctuation control information storage means 260 is ON (step S911). The special continuous fluctuation flag is a flag that is ON when a special continuous fluctuation is executed. If the special continuous fluctuation flag is ON, a special background data number is set in the background data storage area of the fluctuation control information storage means 260 (step S912). In the special fluctuation mode Mγ, a special background image representing, for example, a "starry sky" is displayed on the fluctuation display device 70 from the next pattern fluctuation. On the other hand, if the special continuous fluctuation flag is OFF, a probability fluctuation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the fluctuation control information storage means 260 (step S913). In special effect mode Mγ, a variable probability background image (substantially the same background image as in variable probability effect mode Mβ) representing, for example, a "fortress" is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol change. Next, an image control command is generated to instruct the display of the effect content (background image) determined in this process, and this is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S921). In addition, there are also changes in the effect mode that are determined by the effect control board 200, rather than based on the game state of the main control board 100. For example, when the normal game state (low probability/low base) on the main control board 100 has continued for a predetermined number of times, when a pre-reading lottery for executing a special effect mode is won, or when a timer value or RTC circuit measuring the elapsed time since power-on has determined that a predetermined time has arrived, a special effect is executed.

<Variable performance content determination process>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the details of the variable presentation content determination process (step S836) shown in FIG.

First, it is determined whether a fluctuation start command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S931). If a fluctuation start command is stored, the contents of this fluctuation start command (fluctuation pattern designation command, variable additional symbol information designation command, character effect number designation command) are analyzed, and information contained in the contents of this command indicating the result of the winning/losing lottery, symbol group, fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), game status, etc. is obtained (step S932). This obtained information is stored in the fluctuation effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260.

Next, a variable presentation pattern selection process is executed (step S933). In this variable presentation pattern selection process, a variable presentation pattern table is obtained based on the variable presentation pattern information obtained in step S932 and the presentation mode set in the presentation state transition process in step S832. A variable presentation pattern random number value is obtained from the presentation lottery random number generation means 210, and one of the variable presentation patterns is selected by lottery from among multiple variable presentation patterns. The variable presentation pattern constitutes a scenario for the presentation display process that specifies the variation mode of the decorative symbols, the type and occurrence time of reach presentations, and the type and occurrence time of preview presentations. The variable presentation pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variable presentation pattern storage area of the presentation control information storage means 260. A lamp presentation number corresponding to the selected variable presentation pattern number is requested, and this requested lamp presentation number is set in the lamp request storage area of the presentation control information storage means 260.

Next, a decorative symbol stopping symbol selection process is executed (step S934). In this decorative symbol stopping symbol selection process, the final decorative symbol stopping symbol combinations (left symbol, center symbol, right symbol) are determined by lottery based on the symbol group information and variation pattern information acquired in step S932. The decorative symbol combination numbers determined here are temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the performance control information storage means 260.

Next, the pre-read information storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 is updated by shifting the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 memory area to the reserved 4 memory area to a lower reserved memory area, and clearing the reserved 4 memory area to zero (step S935).

Based on the effect information acquired in steps S933 to S935, an image control command (variation effect start command) required to start the decorative pattern variation is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S939).

On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command is not stored (step S931), it is determined whether a fluctuation stop command is stored in the performance control information storage means 260 (step S940). If a fluctuation stop command is stored (step S940), the contents of the fluctuation stop command are analyzed, and the pattern stop information contained in the contents of this command is obtained (step S941). An image control command (fluctuating performance stop command) required to stop the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 (step S942).

<Jackpot performance content determination process>
54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the details of the big win presentation content determination process (step S836) shown in FIG.

First, it is determined whether a start demo command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1001). If a start demo command is stored, the contents of the start demo command are analyzed, and information indicating the type of jackpot, etc., contained in the contents of this command is obtained (step S1002). This obtained information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260. Next, a consecutive win counter for counting the number of consecutive wins is updated (step S1003). Specifically, if the current jackpot is a normal jackpot (referred to as a "first win"), the consecutive win counter is set to "1", and if it is a consecutive win, the consecutive win counter is incremented by "1".

Next, a jackpot presentation pattern selection process is executed to determine the contents of the jackpot presentation pattern (start demo presentation pattern, round presentation pattern, end demo presentation pattern) (step S1004). In this jackpot presentation pattern selection process, a jackpot presentation pattern table (not shown) is obtained, and a jackpot presentation pattern random number value is obtained from the presentation lottery random number generation means 210, and one of the jackpot presentation patterns is determined by lottery from among multiple jackpot presentation patterns. The jackpot presentation pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the jackpot presentation pattern storage area of the presentation control information storage means 260. This jackpot presentation pattern number includes, for example, a start demo pattern number, a round presentation pattern number, and an end demo pattern number.

Next, a process for determining whether a consecutive win effect will occur within the reserved balls is executed (step S1005). In this process, if there is a reserved ball that will result in a jackpot in the game state after the jackpot ends (particularly in a special probability game state) within the reserved balls that exist when the jackpot game is executed, a determination is made as to whether a consecutive win effect within the reserved balls can be executed, and if it is determined that a consecutive win effect will be executed within the reserved balls, a special consecutive win effect flag is turned on and a consecutive win effect pattern is selected.

Next, the jackpot effect replacement process is executed (step S1006). In this jackpot effect replacement process, when a consecutive win effect (special consecutive win effect) is executed within the reserved ball, the normal start demo effect pattern and the normal end demo effect pattern are replaced with a special start demo effect pattern and a special end demo effect pattern. Note that in this embodiment, the target of the pre-reading judgment in the consecutive win effect within the reserved ball is the subsequent activated reserved ball that exists at the start of the special game (at the end of the corresponding variation) when the preceding activated reserved ball results in a jackpot. Therefore, even if the activated reserved ball generated during the special game is a specific reserved ball, the consecutive win effect determination process within the reserved ball (step S1005) and the replacement process (step S1006) are not executed. However, if a specific reserved ball occurs during the special game, the consecutive win effect determination process within the reserved ball and the replacement process may be executed even during the special game, and the jackpot effect data set at the start of the special game may be replaced.

The start demo effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 above is transferred to the start demo effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, and the start of the start demo effect is set (step S1007).

Next, it is determined whether a round effect designation command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1011). If a round effect designation command is stored (step S1007), the contents of the round effect designation command are analyzed, and information indicating the number of rounds and the number of wins into the special prize opening 64 included in the contents of this command is obtained (step S1012). This obtained information is stored in a jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260. Next, based on the information obtained in step S1012, the round number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 is updated (step S1013), and the special prize number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 is updated (step S1014). In this embodiment, since 14 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball enters the special prize opening 64, the number of prize balls won is calculated by multiplying the number of wins into the special prize opening 64 by 14.

Next, it is determined whether the pseudo count flag in the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1015). The pseudo count flag is a flag that is turned on when a pseudo count effect is executed, in which the number of rounds and the number of prize balls won in the previous special game are added to the number of rounds and the number of prize balls won in the subsequent special game and announced. If the pseudo count flag is on, that is, if a round effect (pseudo count effect) is scheduled to be executed for the subsequent jackpot, a round number pseudo addition process is executed (step S1016). In this round number pseudo addition process, the number of round games executed in the previous special game (number of rounds: 10R) is added to the number of round games executed (number of rounds: 1R to 10R) stored in the round number counter. As a result, the first round of round play in the subsequent special game is announced as the 11th round of round play in the special consecutive effect.

Next, a pseudo-addition process for the number of prize balls acquired is executed (step S1017). In this pseudo-addition process, the number of prizes entered into the large prize slot in the previous special game is added to the number of prizes stored in the large prize counter. As a result, in the special consecutive presentation, the number of prize balls acquired in the subsequent special game is announced as the total number of prize balls acquired in the previous and subsequent special games.

The round effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 above is transferred to the round effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, along with the values of the round number counter and the jackpot number counter, to set the start of the round effect (step S1018).

Next, it is determined whether an end demo command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1021). If an end demo command is stored, the contents of the end demo command are analyzed, and the information contained in the contents of this command is obtained (step S1022). This obtained information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260. Next, it is determined whether the special consecutive effect flag in the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1023), and it is determined whether to execute a consecutive win effect within the reserve. If the special consecutive effect flag is on, the value of the round number counter (number of rounds) and the value of the big prize number counter (number of big prizes) are temporarily stored in the jackpot memory area ahead of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1024). This is because, if the current jackpot corresponds to a previous jackpot in a special consecutive effect, the final number of rounds and number of jackpots from the previous jackpot are intended to be used in the pseudo-addition process (steps S1016 and S1017) in the subsequent jackpot effect, and are therefore stored as recorded information for the previous special game. Therefore, in the pseudo-addition process in steps S1016 and S1017, the values (number of rounds and number of jackpots) stored in the previous jackpot memory area are added. Next, the round number counter and jackpot number counter in the effect control information storage means 260 are cleared (steps S1025 and S1026).

Next, it is determined whether the pseudo count flag in the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1027). If the pseudo count flag is on, the pseudo count flag is turned off (step S1028). Next, it is determined whether the reserved consecutive win effect flag in the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1035). If the reserved consecutive win effect flag is on, the reserved consecutive win effect flag in the effect control information storage means 260 is turned off (step S1036).

Next, the end demo effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 above is transferred to the end demo effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, setting the start of the end demo effect (step S1037). Based on the effect information acquired in steps S1005, S1007, S1018, and S1037 above, an image control command required for the jackpot effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1038).

<Timer interrupt processing on the performance control side>
56 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing on the performance control side. This timer interrupt processing is started by a clock pulse at regular intervals and is executed to interrupt the main processing on the performance control side described above.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the performance control CPU 201 are saved to the stack area of the performance control RAM 203, and then the processing from step S1111 onwards is executed sequentially. During this timer interrupt processing, interrupts with priority level 2 or higher, such as performance control command reception interrupts from the main control board 100 and watchdog timer interrupts, are permitted (step S1111).

Next, port input/output processing is executed (step S1112). In this port input/output processing, input processing of input data and output processing of output data are executed using the I/O port circuit 204. In the input processing, various signals input to the I/O port circuit 204 are read and stored as input information. On the other hand, in the output processing, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the performance control information storage means 260 are read and output from the I/O port circuit 204.

Next, device control data output processing is executed (step S1113). In this device control data output processing, drive data for a predetermined time period is read from the drive pattern data identified in the device management processing (step S819) described above, and set in the drive data storage area of the performance control information storage means 260. The drive data set in this processing is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt period. Once the drive data is set in this processing, the drive data is output from the I/O port circuit 204 to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in this device control data output processing, the drive data is switched every interrupt period (1 ms) in accordance with the drive pattern data.

Next, a performance timer update process is executed (step S1114). In this performance timer update process, the values of various performance timers used to control performance operation are updated by subtracting them at an interrupt period (e.g., 1 ms). Performance timers include a timer for managing the variable time of decorative symbols and a timer for managing the timing of preview performance occurrences. These performance timers manage the time schedule for the variable performance pattern, and manage the timing of the operation of movable parts and the lighting of performance lamps 10 and 25 on this time axis. The performance timers are also used in the device control data output process (step S1113) and lamp data update process (step S1118) within this performance control timer interrupt process.

Next, a button control timer update process is executed (step S1115). The value of the valid time management timer, which manages the valid operation time of the effect button 15, is updated by subtracting it at the interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The valid operation time is the time during which operation input of the effect button 15 is valid. Then, if there is effect information obtained according to the timer value updated in steps S1114 and S1115 above, an image control command required for the target effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1116).

Next, the task control counter update process is executed (step S1117). In this task control counter update process, the task counter value ("0" to "15") is updated at each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the task counter value is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the task counter value is "15", it is reset to "0". In other words, this task counter can have a cyclic cycle of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processes) are assigned corresponding to the updated task counter value, and various processes such as the lamp control task (lamp data update process in step S1118), runaway monitoring task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in step S1119), and error management task (error management timer update process in step S1120) are executed depending on the task counter value. In this embodiment, of the task counter values ("0" to "15"), one value is assigned to the lamp control task, the other two values (values spaced 8 ms apart from each other) are assigned to the runaway monitoring task, and one value is assigned to the error management task (description of the other tasks is omitted). As mentioned above, the task counter circulation period is set to 16 ms to match the minimum unit of 16 ms for switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25. This minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25 corresponds to one frame time of an image frame, achieving synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

Next, the lamp data update process is executed (step S1118). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined period of time is read and set from the lamp pattern data identified by the device management process (step S819) described above. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the smallest unit of switching control for the performance lamps 10 and 25. Once the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output to the lamp connection board 91 via serial transfer from the output port (serial port). This lamp data output process is configured as a serial communication interrupt process and is achieved by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmit buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serializes the lamp data in the transmit buffer on a byte-by-byte basis and outputs it to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmit buffer is empty, resulting in the output of all lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmit buffer. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and this lamp data is output by serial transfer to the lamp connection board 91. Note that this lamp data update process is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (a value indicating the lamp control task) in the task control counter update process (step S1117) described above (i.e., it is executed every 16 ms).

Next, image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed (step S1119). This image CPU runaway monitoring processing monitors the toggle signal input from image control board 300. If the toggle signal does not change continuously for 800 to 1600 ms (approximately 50 to 100 frames), it is determined that image control CPU 301 of image control board 300 is running out of control, and a reset signal is sent from performance control board 200 to image control board 300. This causes image control board 300 to execute a specified reset process when image control CPU 301 enters a reset state. Note that a toggle signal is a signal with a waveform that alternates between H level and L level every frame time. Note that this image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed when the task counter value reaches a specified value (a value indicating the image monitoring task) in the task control counter update processing described above (step S1117).

Next, error management timer processing is executed (step S1120). In this error management timer processing, the value of the error presentation timer for managing the error presentation time, which was set in the error presentation management processing (step S817) described above, is decremented and updated. Note that this error management timer processing is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (a value indicating the error management task) in the task control counter update processing (step S1117) described above. After enabling all interrupts and restoring the contents of the saved registers, the presentation control timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the original state before the interrupt occurred.

<Image control command transmission interrupt processing>
57 is a flowchart showing an example of an interrupt process for transmitting an image control command. This interrupt process for transmitting an image control command occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs).

In this image control command transmission interrupt process, the image control command buffer in the performance control information storage means 260 is first checked (step S1131). Next, a read pointer is obtained from the image control command buffer (step S1132), and it is determined whether an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (step S1133). Whether an image control command is stored can be confirmed, for example, using the read pointer and write pointer. If the read pointer and write pointer match, no image control command is stored. If an image control command is stored (step S1133), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (step S1134). This read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit (not shown) specified as the output destination (step S1135). This causes the image control command to be serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (the command data stored in the aforementioned step S1135) is cleared (step S1136). Next, the read pointer is updated by incrementing it by 1 (step S1137). The transmission interrupt process for the image command will end and the system will return to the original process before the interrupt.

<Production display>
As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect display device 70 mainly displays decorative patterns that change in conjunction with the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and images of various effects including preview effects, as well as displays the first special pattern and the second special pattern on hold.

In pachinko machine 1, decorative symbols are provided as symbols that clearly display the game results indicated by the special symbols to the player. The decorative symbols are displayed on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700) by the decorative symbol control of the effect control board 200 while the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol control of the main control board 100. The decorative symbols include at least the normal decorative symbols (main decorative symbols) that are displayed as the main symbols on the effect display device 70 when the special symbols stop, as well as simplified decorative symbols (sub-decorative symbols) that are displayed in a more simplified form than the normal decorative symbols when the normal decorative symbols are difficult for the player to see. In this explanation, as an example, the main decorative symbols are composed of three symbols: a left symbol, a center symbol, and a right symbol. After the variable display, they are stopped one by one in principle, and the game result is indicated by the display mode of the three symbols when they stop changing. For example, if three symbols stop fluctuating in the same pattern, it indicates that the game result is a jackpot. Meanwhile, sub-decorative symbols are also made up of three symbols, and the game result is indicated by the display mode when the three symbols stop fluctuating, but they differ from main decorative symbols in that all three symbols stop simultaneously after the fluctuating display. The combinations of symbols that are displayed when the sub-decorative symbols stop are the same as the combinations of symbols that are displayed when the main decorative symbols stop.

In regards to the display of decorative patterns on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700), the effect control board 200 may be configured to display the main decorative pattern in a smaller size (or display an alternative pattern) for at least a portion of the period during the execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined preview effect that may occur before the reach state is established, or a predetermined reach effect that may occur after the reach state is established), or the main decorative pattern may be hidden (or the alternative pattern may not be displayed), but even in such a situation, the sub-decorative pattern is always displayed in a variable manner.

Figure 58 is a diagram for explaining the display of decorative patterns, etc. on the performance display device. Figure 58 shows the specific display areas for decorative patterns and variable hold icons in the image display area 700 of the performance display device 70.

In the case of Figure 58, three columns of display areas that serve as the changing display areas for the main decorative pattern 710 are provided near the center of the image display area 700 of the performance display device 70, and from left to right, a left pattern 711, a middle pattern 712, and a right pattern 713 are displayed. In the following explanation, the main decorative pattern 710 may be abbreviated to decorative pattern 710. When a pattern is represented by an arrow, such as the middle pattern 712 in Figure 58, this means that the target pattern is currently changing.

Also, as shown in Figure 58, the upper right corner of the image display area 700 is provided with a display area for the sub-decorative pattern 720, which is smaller than the display area for the main decorative pattern 710. The sub-decorative pattern displays a changing pattern while the special pattern is changing and a stationary pattern while the special pattern is stationary. Like the main decorative pattern 710, the sub-decorative pattern displays three changing and stationary patterns. By providing this sub-decorative pattern 720, it is possible to notify the player that the main decorative pattern 710 is changing (in other words, that the winning or losing result has not been determined) even in situations where the player wants to make the main decorative pattern 710 smaller or hide it. For example, in an SP reach effect (details will be described later), when an effect image is displayed in front of the main decorative pattern 710, the effect control board 200 can turn off the display of the main decorative pattern 710, while maintaining the display of the sub-decorative pattern 720. In other words, the sub decorative pattern 720 can be said to be a pattern for display security (to compensate for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710).

It is preferable that the sub-decorative pattern 720 continue to change from the time the special pattern starts to change until it stops. That is, even if the main decorative pattern 710 temporarily stops midway (for example, when a special main decorative pattern 710 displaying characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-stop pattern effect described below), it is preferable that the sub-decorative pattern 720 be configured so that it does not temporarily stop midway. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sub-decorative pattern 720 does not have a special pattern such as a "NEXT" pattern, and the sub-decorative pattern 720 only stops to confirm the change. Furthermore, it is preferable that the sub-decorative pattern 720 maintains the pattern combination that indicates a loss to the player, whether it is a loss or a win, to prevent the player from mistaking a loss for a jackpot and to prevent the player from noticing a jackpot in advance in the case of a jackpot. Specifically, for example, if the symbol type of the sub-decorative symbol 720 is "1-7," the symbol combination of the sub-decorative symbol 720 is displayed changing as follows: "123" → "234" → ... → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ... Note that a "confirmed stop" refers to the decorative symbol stopping definitively when one special symbol change ends and the special symbol stops (in other words, a stop mode in which there is no further change and the symbol combination of the decorative symbol does not change any more), and a "provisional stop" and a "provisional stop" refer to one or more decorative symbols stopping provisionally with slight fluctuations at a timing prior to the "confirmed stop" during one special symbol change.

Furthermore, when the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720 begin to change from a fixed state, the starting symbol combination for the main decorative pattern 710 (the first symbol combination immediately after the change begins) will be a symbol combination that is one symbol ahead of the symbol combination at the time of the fixed state, whereas the starting symbol combination for the sub-decorative pattern 720 will be a predetermined symbol combination, regardless of the symbol combination at the time of the fixed state. Specifically, for example, when the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720 begin to change from a fixed state with the symbol combination "243," the starting symbol combination for the main decorative pattern 710 will be "354," whereas the starting symbol combination for the sub-decorative pattern 720 will be fixed at "123" (an example of a default value). For example, if the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720 both stop at the fixed pattern combination of "333" and then start to change, the starting pattern combination for the main decorative pattern 710 will be "444", but the starting pattern combination for the sub-decorative pattern 720 will be fixed at "123" (an example of a default value), as in the example described above.

The decorative patterns (main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720) have been described in detail above, but the decorative patterns in this embodiment may also be configured to have the following features (1) to (9) in addition to those described above. By configuring them in this way, the roles of the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative patterns can be clearly differentiated.

(1) The display area of the main decorative pattern 710, which is easier for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720, which is used to guarantee display. This is not limited to situations where the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 are fixed and stopped, or situations where the sub-decorative pattern 720 is being displayed in a variable manner immediately after the main decorative pattern 710 has formed a reach state (a reach state that has not yet developed into an SP reach performance, for example, during a normal reach), but is preferably configured in the same way even in situations where the main decorative pattern 710 is displayed as a small pattern and the sub-decorative pattern 720 is being displayed in a variable manner, such as during an SP reach performance.

(2) The display position of the main decorative pattern 710 can be set to different positions depending on whether the mode is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby achieving a variety of presentations using the main decorative pattern 710 depending on the presentation mode. On the other hand, since the sub-decorative pattern 720 only needs to fulfill its role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is preferable to display it in the same position regardless of whether the mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design burdens. Note that the "presentation mode" here refers to multiple types of presentation modes prepared in advance to provide different combinations of presentations that can be executed. These modes may be selectable by a player through a predetermined operation, or may be configured to automatically switch (transition) under predetermined conditions. When multiple presentation modes are prepared for the pachinko machine 1, it is determined which type of presentation can be executed for each presentation mode. Furthermore, a predetermined game presentation may be displayed with different presentation content depending on the presentation mode.

(3) The display mode of the main decorative pattern 710 can be different depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby realizing durability of the presentation by the main decorative pattern 710 depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the first presentation mode, the main decorative pattern 710 is composed only of numerical patterns (main decorative patterns 710 such as "1," "2," ..., "7"), and in the second presentation mode, the main decorative pattern 710 is composed of a combination of numerical patterns and patterns of ally characters (main decorative patterns 710 such as "1" + "character a," "2" + "character b," ..., "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since the sub decorative pattern 720 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design burdens by configuring it to have the same display format (for example, only numerical patterns) regardless of whether it is the first or second presentation mode.

(4) The display area of the main decorative pattern 710 can be varied (moved or turned into a small pattern) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether or not a normal reach is in progress, whether or not an SP reach is in progress, etc.), thereby adding variety to the presentation of the main decorative pattern 710. On the other hand, since the sub-decorative pattern 720 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is preferable to avoid imposing unnecessary development and design burdens by making the display area not vary (not move or turn into a small pattern) depending on the changing situation.

(5) The main decorative pattern 710 can have its speed of change varied between slow, medium, fast, and ultra-fast depending on the change situation (e.g., whether it is at the start of the change, midway through the change, or about to end the change, etc.), thereby adding variety to the presentation of the main decorative pattern 710. On the other hand, since the sub-decorative pattern 720 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is preferable that the speed of change not be varied depending on the change situation, or that the number of stages in which it is varied be reduced (e.g., only slow and fast), thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design burdens.

(6) The main decorative pattern 710 is temporarily stopped (a temporary stop (provisional stop) while the special pattern is changing, with slight fluctuations) before it is fixed (a stop at the timing when the special pattern stops), and at that time, by temporarily stopping a specific pattern of the main decorative pattern 710 other than a number (for example, a main decorative pattern 710 with the word "Super" written on it, which predicts development into an SP reach effect), it is possible to create a correlation between the effect of the main decorative pattern 710 and other effects. On the other hand, since the sub decorative pattern 720 only needs to fulfill its role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is preferable not only not to temporarily stop the specific pattern, but also not to temporarily stop it at all, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design burdens.

(7) The main decorative pattern 710 may overlap, i.e., be superimposed on, the display area of other preview effects (e.g., step-up effects, icon change effects due to pre-reading effects, etc.). In pachinko machine 1, the above-described superimposed display is permitted in order to use as much of the image display area 700 of the effect display device 70 as possible to create powerful effects. However, with regard to the sub-decorative pattern 720, in order to compensate for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, it is desirable to design the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720 so that it does not overlap (is not superimposed on) the display area of the other preview effects. However, in relation to special preview effects where overlap is unavoidable (e.g., a group preview effect displayed across the entire image display area 700, a stage change effect that is a background preview effect suggesting or announcing a change in the presentation stage, etc.), it is preferable to set the display priority of the sub-decorative pattern 720 higher than the display priority of the special preview effect (i.e., set the sub-decorative pattern 720 to be displayed in front of the special preview effect). Furthermore, it is desirable that the right-hit notification image (an image displayed during a high base state, which prompts the player to aim and fire the game ball at the right-hand game area where the second starting hole 62 (in this embodiment, the second starting hole 62 is located in the right-hand game area) is located) be visible to the player at all times. Therefore, it is desirable to design the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720 and the display area of the right-hit notification image so that they do not overlap (are not superimposed). However, if the display area of the main decorative pattern 710 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720 and the display area of the right-hit notification image may overlap (be superimposed). In such a case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the main decorative pattern 710 lower than that of the right-hit notification image (i.e., set the main decorative pattern 710 so that it is displayed behind the right-hit notification image).

(8) During a special game, the main decorative symbol 710 may display only one symbol instead of a combination of three symbols. For example, if the main decorative symbol 710 is fixed to stop with the symbol combination "777" and a special game is executed, "7" is displayed during the special game. If the main decorative symbol 710 is fixed to stop with the symbol combination "222" and a special game is executed, "2" is displayed during the special game. This allows the player to recognize which main decorative symbol 710 resulted in a jackpot during the special game. As a variant, a single symbol may be displayed during the special game only when a symbol combination of the main decorative symbol 710 corresponding to a highly advantageous jackpot (e.g., "333," "555," "777," etc., indicating a jackpot of 5 rounds or more or a jackpot of 10 rounds) is fixed to stop. The display area displaying the main decorative pattern 710 using one symbol during a special game should preferably be configured so as not to overlap (be superimposed on) other display areas during the special game, including the round display area (the area displaying the round display indicating which round the currently active special game has progressed to), the right-hit display area (the area displaying an image displayed during the special game encouraging the player to aim the game ball at the right-hand game area where the large prize opening 64 (in this embodiment, the large prize opening 64 is located in the right-hand game area) is located), the prize ball acquisition display area (the area displaying the number of prize balls acquired in the currently active special game (one special game)), and the cumulative prize ball count display area (the area displaying the number of prize balls acquired (acquired in consecutive games) in one or more special games, including at least the currently active special game). However, the highlighting may be superimposed on the main decorative pattern 710, in which case the highlighting preferably has a higher display priority than the main decorative pattern 710. Additionally, since the sub-decorative pattern 720 does not change display during special play, it is preferable that it is not displayed during special play, but it may also be configured to be displayed during special play. When the sub-decorative pattern 720 is displayed during special play, it is preferable that it is configured so that it does not overlap (is not superimposed on) the other display areas during special play, which are the round display area, right-hit display area, prize ball acquisition display area, and cumulative prize ball count display area, and it is also preferable that it is not superimposed on the highlight display.

(9) In addition to changing (for example, moving from top to bottom in the image display area 700), the main decorative pattern 710 may be displayed with a predetermined action in certain situations, such as when the change starts, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is achieved, or during a temporary stop. The predetermined actions in each of the above situations are referred to as the action at the start of the change, the action at a temporary stop, the action at the achievement of a reach, and the swinging action. Specifically, for example, in the case of a non-reach situation (for example, when the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed as "624" at the time of the final stop), the main decorative pattern 710 begins to change by expanding the left, middle, and right patterns 711, 712, and 713, respectively; then, when the left pattern 711 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "6" temporarily stops and continues swinging; then, when the right pattern 713 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "4" temporarily stops and continues swinging; then, when the middle pattern 712 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "2" temporarily stops and swings slightly; then, at the time of the final stop, all of the movements of all the patterns end. In this case, the sub-decorative pattern 720 does not perform any of the above-mentioned actions. Also, in the case of a normal reach (for example, when the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub decorative pattern 720 are displayed as "212" at the time of the final stop), when the main decorative pattern 710 starts to change, the left pattern 711, middle pattern 712, and right pattern 713 all expand, and then the change begins; then, when the left pattern 711 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "2" pattern temporarily stops, and then continues its swinging motion; then, when the right pattern 713 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "2" pattern temporarily stops, and then continues its swinging motion; then, to indicate that a reach has occurred, the left pattern 711 and the right pattern 713 make a rotating motion, and then continue their swinging motion again; then, when the middle pattern 712 temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and the "1" pattern temporarily stops, and then makes a short swinging motion; then, at the final stop timing, all of the movements of all the patterns end (the middle pattern 712 does not make a rotating motion). In this case, the sub-decorative symbol 720 does not perform any of the above-mentioned operations. Also, when the game develops into an SP reach performance (for example, when the main decorative symbol 710 and the sub-decorative symbol 720 are displayed as "232" at the time of the fixed stop), the main decorative symbol 710 starts to change after performing an operation in which all of the left symbol 711, the middle symbol 712, and the right symbol 713 expand at the start of the change, and then when the left symbol 711 temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation, and the "2" symbol temporarily stops, and then it continues to swing, and then when the right symbol 713 temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation, and the "2" symbol temporarily stops, and then it continues to swing, and then the left symbol 711 and the right symbol 712 move together to notify that it is a reach. The symbol 3 rotates and then continues to swing again. Then, while the left and right symbols 711 and 713 are swinging, the center symbol 712 changes (at this point, the center symbol 712 expands and moves from top to bottom, overlapping (or overlapping at a higher rate) with the left and right symbols that previously did not overlap (or had a lower rate of overlap)). The background then transitions from the normal background to the reach background to execute the SP reach effect. After the transition, all symbols continue swinging for a predetermined period of time. Then, at the final stop timing, all movements of all symbols end (the center symbol 712 neither bounces nor rotates). In this case, the sub-decorative symbol 720 does not perform any of the above-mentioned movements. This configuration allows for greater diversity in the effects of the main decorative symbol 710. On the other hand, since the sub-decorative symbol 720 only needs to compensate for the display state of the main decorative symbol 710, it is preferable to configure it so that it does not perform any special operation, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design burdens. Furthermore, even between the time when the fluctuation stops and the time when the game standby demo effect (described below with reference to FIG. 59) is displayed, the main decorative symbol 710 may be configured to perform a shaking motion after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation stops. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the sub-decorative symbol 720 not perform any movement. This configuration can stimulate the player's desire to play even during game standby (when the symbols are stopped), and by not performing a shaking motion, the sub-decorative symbol 720 can ensure that the player is notified that the game is in standby mode. Furthermore, when the game standby demo effect is displayed, the main decorative symbol 710 may be hidden, but the sub-decorative symbol 720 may remain displayed. This configuration can emphasize the screen display due to the game standby demo effect while ensuring that the displayed symbol is displayed. However, since no game is being played during the game standby demo effect, the sub-decorative symbol 720 may also be hidden. Furthermore, certain symbols among the main decorative symbols 710 (e.g., the "7" symbol in the middle symbol 712) may be configured to not perform a predetermined action (or to perform it with a lower probability) compared to other symbols. The predetermined action may be, for example, the aforementioned temporary stop action (a bouncing action) (particularly suitable for the "7" symbol in the middle symbol 712 after a reach is achieved). This configuration can increase the rarity of the action for certain symbols. In addition, when the main decorative pattern 710 is formed by combining a number design and an ally character design (such as a main decorative pattern 710 such as "1" + "character a," "2" + "character b," ..., "7" + "character g"), both the number design and the ally character design will sway in the main decorative pattern 710, but the swing amplitude (the swing distance; for example, if swinging up and down, the distance between when the main decorative pattern 710 is displayed at the top and when it is displayed at the bottom) may be varied to achieve a more dynamic swing motion. In such a configuration, the swing amplitude of the number design may be made smaller than the swing amplitude of the ally character design, or the number design may not swing and only the ally character design may swing.

Also, as shown in Figure 58, the bottom edge of the image display area 700 is provided with a display area displaying the current special symbol change (also referred to as the change) and pending changes (also simply referred to as pending) as icons. More specifically, a display area is provided for displaying the change icon, which indicates that the special symbol is currently changing, and a pending icon, which indicates that there is a pending change for which the conditions for starting the change display have not yet been met. For simplicity, the following discussion will omit the second special symbol and only discuss the first special symbol. However, in reality, it can be assumed that the second special symbol will also have a similar configuration to the first special symbol. As shown in Figure 58, a change icon 750 is provided as the icon corresponding to the change, and pending icons 760 (individually, the first pending icon 761, the second pending icon 762, the third pending icon 763, and the fourth pending icon 764, in order of closest to completion of the pending) are provided as icons corresponding to up to four pending changes of the first special symbol. The hold icon 760 displays the hold of the first special symbol in synchronization with the first special symbol hold lamp. In addition, in a low base, when the first special symbol is changing and there is a hold of the first special symbol, the variable icon and hold icon of the first special symbol can be displayed, but even if the second special symbol is changing and there is a hold of the second special symbol, neither the variable icon nor the hold icon of the second special symbol is displayed. In addition, in a high base, when the second special symbol is changing and there is a hold of the second special symbol, the variable icon and hold icon of the second special symbol can be displayed, but even if the first special symbol is changing and there is a hold of the first special symbol, neither the variable icon nor the hold icon of the first special symbol is displayed. As a variant, the variable icons for the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to be displayed at both a low base and a high base, unlike the reserved icon for the first special symbol and the reserved icon for the second special symbol. During the SP reach performance, the variable icons and reserved icons may be hidden, or the variable icons may be displayed and the reserved icons may be hidden.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 58, a display area for the reserved number display 770 is provided below the sub-decorative symbol 720 in the upper right corner of the image display area 700. The reserved number display 770 displays the number of reserved variable balls for the first special symbol in small letters using numbers or the like, and is displayed at least during periods when the reserved ball icon 760 is not displayed even though a reserved variable ball exists. For example, in Figure 58, the reserved number display 770 displays "2," which means that the reserved variable ball number for the first special symbol is "2," and corresponds to the first reserved icon 761 and the second reserved icon 762 being lit (blacked out in the figure) in the reserved ball icon 760. Furthermore, as mentioned above, in an actual pachinko machine 1, a display area for displaying the reserved variable ball number is also provided for the second special symbol. Here, both the reserved number display showing the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number display showing the reserved number of the first special symbol may be displayed simultaneously (for example, the reserved number display showing the reserved number of the first special symbol may be displayed in red numbers, and the reserved number display showing the reserved number of the second special symbol may be displayed in blue numbers). Note that the reserved number displays (reserved number display for the first special symbol, reserved number display for the second special symbol) are not hidden even when the reserved number is 0, but are displayed as "0". For example, if the reserved number of the first special symbol is "0" and the reserved number of the second special symbol is "3", the reserved number display for the first special symbol will be displayed as "0", and the reserved number display for the second special symbol will be displayed as "3". Furthermore, the reserved number display is always displayed not only while the special symbols are changing but also while the special symbols are stopped (for example, it is always displayed regardless of whether an SP reach effect is being performed or whether a decorative device is in operation or not), but it is desirable that it is not displayed while a special game is being performed or a game standby demo effect is being performed. However, the reserved number display may be displayed even while a special game is being performed or a game standby demo effect is being performed, but in that case, since both the variable reserved number of the first special symbol and the variable reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" during the game standby demo effect, the reserved number display of the first special symbol and the reserved number display of the second special symbol will always be displayed as "0" (during the execution of a special game, there may be a variable reserved number immediately before the special game starts, so a value other than "0" may be displayed). Additionally, while both the reserved number display for the first special pattern and the reserved number display for the second special pattern may be superimposed with a specific effect, the display priority for the reserved number display for the first special pattern and the reserved number display for the second special pattern is higher. Additionally, both the reserved number display for the first special pattern and the reserved number display for the second special pattern may be configured not to be superimposed with a specific effect.

<Demo effect while waiting to play>
59 is a diagram showing an example of a screen transition before the start of the game standby demo effect. In FIG. 59, the special symbol is not changing, and there is no change pending.

Figure 59 (A) shows the state immediately after a special symbol stops when there are no pending changes. In the image display area 700 shown in Figure 59 (A), the main decorative symbol 710 and the sub-decorative symbol 720 are displayed stationary without changing. After the state shown in Figure 59 (A) continues for a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds) or after the effect button 3j is operated, an effect setting adjustment screen is displayed in the image display area 700, as shown in Figure 59 (B). The effect setting adjustment screen is a screen for adjusting the settings of predetermined functions through player operation. As a specific example of the effect setting adjustment screen, Figure 59 shows an automatic operation setting (B1) that sets whether or not to automatically process operations on the effect input device (e.g., effect button 3j or second effect button 3k) required by the player during an effect, a volume setting (B2) that sets the volume output in conjunction with the effect, and a light intensity setting (B3) that sets the light intensity of the effect display device 70, etc. The volume setting and the volume setting adjustment screen, and the light intensity setting and the light intensity setting adjustment screen can be displayed even while the special symbols are fluctuating or while a special game is being played. The effect settings may also have a setting function and setting screen for setting the frequency of specific effects. For example, the frequency of effects related to premium characters may be settable. Specifically, the frequency of effects related to premium characters may be settable to one of "0.1% at the time of a jackpot," "10% at the time of a jackpot," "100% at the time of a jackpot," or "100% at the time of a special jackpot (not occurring at a normal jackpot)." The effect setting adjustment screen may not be automatically displayed after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 20 seconds) but may be displayed after the effect button 3j is operated. Furthermore, decorative pattern 710 may be configured to include not only numbers but also characters (for example, character B may have a "7" attached, or character H may have a "2" attached), and in such a configuration, immediately after the fluctuation stops, the display will stop with the numbers and characters combined, and neither the numbers nor the characters will move at all, but after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed, the numbers will be erased and the display will change to show only the characters, and the stopped state will be maintained, or both the numbers and characters may move slightly, and the stopped state will be maintained, or the display will change to show the numbers, characters, and even the character's name combined, and the stopped state will be maintained.

Then, if a predetermined time (e.g., 120 seconds) elapses from the state shown in Figure 59(B) without any occurrence of a game ball entering the starting hole, the state transitions to Figure 59(C). Upon transitioning to the state shown in Figure 59(C), the effect control board 200 begins displaying a pre-prepared demo image (demo movie) in the image display area 700 (start of the game standby demo effect). Note that, because the execution of the game standby demo effect is limited to periods when the special symbols do not change, in the case of Figure 59, both the main decorative symbol 710 and the sub-decorative symbol 720 are hidden from view from Figure 59(C) until the game standby demo effect ends. However, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may be configured to continue displaying the sub-decorative symbol 720 even during the execution of the game standby demo effect. Then, if a game ball enters the starting hole after the game standby demo effect is executed, the effect control board 200 immediately suspends the game standby demo effect at that point, and begins displaying the main decorative pattern 710 and sub-decorative pattern 720 in the image display area 700.

The demo effects executed by the pachinko machine 1 during game standby typically introduce the theme of the pachinko machine 1, such as the worldview or characters, or introduce parts of the game effects that may appear during play on the pachinko machine 1, but may also introduce other information. Specifically, for example, they may introduce a specific pattern indicating high expectations (for example, a unique design used by a gaming machine manufacturer for all of its in-house gaming machines, known as a "manufacturer pattern"). In the pachinko machine 1, the manufacturer pattern may be displayed at any time during the game effect, and when the manufacturer pattern is displayed, it indicates high expectations for a game result (jackpot, special jackpot) or game development (such as the development of an SP reach) that is favorable to the player. While the occurrence of this manufacturer pattern in normal mode does not necessarily guarantee a jackpot, it does indicate a high level of jackpot expectation, while its occurrence in special jackpot mode or time-saving mode ideally guarantees a jackpot.

Note that from the above-mentioned <Control Configuration of Gaming Machine> up to this point, the presentation has been explained in the case of mainstream LCD machines, but the above explanation of this embodiment is not limited to LCD machines and can also be applied to gaming machines equipped with other presentation display means (for example, a drum-type presentation display device that produces presentations using one or more rotatable reels (drums)).

<Suppression function>
A suppression function that can be installed in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to this embodiment will be described. As will be described in detail later, the "suppression function" refers to a function that stops play and issues an alert when a predetermined count value "MY" reaches a predetermined value in the gaming machine. The MY counter is a counter for counting MY. "MY" is a count value expressed by the relationship "MY = number of safes (number of expected winning balls) - number of outs (number of balls played)." It is a count value based on the difference in balls between the number of safes and the number of outs, and is an indicator of the number of game value (balls held by the player or balls dispensed by the gaming machine) awarded to the player. The suppression function is managed by the main control board 100, and data related to the suppression function (e.g., the MY counter) is also stored in a memory area within the main control board 100. The suppression function-related effects executed in connection with the suppression function are executed by the effect control board 200 based on information notified by the main control board 100.

The suppression function activation flag is provided as a flag indicating that the count value of the MY counter has reached a predetermined threshold (the specified value of "95,000" described below), i.e., that the suppression function activation conditions described below have been met. The suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the suppression function activation conditions are met. The suppression function activation flag is also turned OFF when power is turned on with RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch). The MY counter is updated (added or subtracted) when a game ball enters each winning slot or outlet. Specifically, the safe number is added to the count value of the MY counter. The "safe number" refers to the number of game balls (safe balls) scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering each winning slot, i.e., the planned number of prize balls. In other words, the safe number is not the actual number of prize balls actually paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, but the planned number of prize balls determined to be paid out. When one game ball enters the first start port, the MY counter adds "3" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when one game ball enters the first start port. When one game ball enters the second start port, the MY counter adds "1" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when a game ball enters the second start port. When one game ball enters the general prize port, the MY counter adds "3" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when a game ball enters the general prize port. When one game ball enters the special prize port, the MY counter adds "15" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when a game ball enters the special prize port. The MY counter also subtracts the number of outs from the count value of the MY counter. The "number of outs" refers to the number of game balls (out balls) that have been launched into the game area and used in play, i.e., the number of game balls (out balls) that have entered each winning slot (first starting slot, second starting slot, general winning slot, large winning slot, etc.) in the game area or the out slot and been ejected to the back side of the game board. The MY counter subtracts "1" from the number of outs each time a game ball enters an out slot (referred to as an out ball or played ball). However, if the MY counter is "0," the MY counter is not subtracted even if an out ball (played ball) is detected. In other words, the count value of the MY counter does not become a number less than "0" (a negative number). Even if an out ball (played ball) occurs when the MY counter's count value is "0," the number corresponding to the number of outs is not subtracted, and the MY counter's count value remains "0." Each time the MY counter is updated, an effect command (called a "ball difference signal") is generated and output to specify the count value of the MY counter. Based on this ball difference signal, the suppression function-related effects (pre-alert effect, suppression notification effect) described below are executed.

Figure 60 is a diagram explaining the counting method of the MY Counter. Figure 60(A) is a diagram conceptually illustrating the count value of the MY Counter, with the horizontal axis representing time and the vertical axis representing the count value of the MY Counter. Figure 60(B) is a diagram conceptually illustrating the actual cumulative value of the difference in ball count in a form corresponding to the time series of Figure 60(A), with the horizontal axis representing time and the vertical axis representing the actual cumulative value of the difference in ball count. Figure 60(A) shows an example of the time series change until the count value of the MY Counter reaches a predetermined threshold (prescribed value = "95,000") based on the above-mentioned control. The relationship between Figures 60(A) and 60(B) shows that even if the actual cumulative value of the difference in ball count updates to a negative value during play, the count value of the MY Counter can accurately count to the predetermined value when the actual cumulative value of the difference in ball count reaches the predetermined threshold (prescribed value = "95,000").

The suppression function is activated when the MY counter count reaches a predetermined threshold (referred to as the "predetermined value"). That is, the condition for the suppression function (referred to as the "suppression function activation condition") is that the MY counter count reaches the predetermined value. The predetermined value is set to "95,000," and the suppression function activation condition is met when the MY counter count reaches the predetermined value of "95,000." As mentioned above, when the suppression function activation condition is met, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON. Furthermore, when the MY counter count reaches the predetermined value of "95,000" and the suppression function activation condition is met, the MY counter count is not updated (added or subtracted) even if a safe ball or an out ball occurs until the suppression function is deactivated (until the suppression function activation flag is turned OFF), and the MY counter count remains at the predetermined value of "95,000." In other words, the upper limit value of the MY counter is "95000", and even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter will not be updated from "95000". Additionally, even if MY falls below "95000" after reaching or exceeding "95000", the value of the MY counter will not be updated from "95000". In other words, before MY reaches "95000", the MY counter will be updated in conjunction with the update of MY. As a variant, even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter may also be updated in conjunction, i.e., updated to exceed "95000", or even if MY reaches or exceeds "95000" and then falls below "95000", the value of the MY counter may also be updated in conjunction, i.e., updated to fall below "95000". Even with this configuration, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the MY counter reaches "95000", so the suppression function can be reliably activated. As another variation, when MY exceeds "95000", the MY counter value can be set to "95000" and then switched to "0" (initialized (cleared)), and the MY counter can be configured not to be updated (fixed at "0"). Even with this configuration, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the MY counter reaches "95000", so the suppression function can be reliably activated.

When the suppression function is activated, the game transitions to a game stop state, and the game progress is halted. As an example, when the suppression function is activated, special symbol win/loss determination, symbol determination, and variation pattern determination are not performed, and easy-to-win states (also known as high base states) and special games are not executed. Furthermore, when the suppression function is activated, the operation of the launching device is restricted, and the launching of game balls is halted regardless of how the launching device is operated. However, even when the suppression function is activated, if there are game balls to be paid out (prize balls based on winning before the suppression function was activated), the payout operation is permitted, and the game balls are paid out without delay. In other words, since the MY counter is incremented based on the planned number of prize balls to be paid out, rather than the actual number of prize balls actually paid out, even in a situation where all of the prize balls corresponding to the planned number of prize balls have not been paid out, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to the increment of the planned number of prize balls, the suppression function will be activated (because the suppression function activation condition is naturally met), but even in that case, the remaining part of the planned number of prize balls (the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out when the suppression function starts to operate) will be paid out to the end. Therefore, as will be described in detail later, even while the suppression function is operating, a prize ball error (the above-mentioned game ball payout error) may occur in the gaming machine due to the payout of game balls during the operation of the suppression function, and in that case, an error notification corresponding to the prize ball error will be executed. Even when a special game is not being played, if the MY Counter's count reaches the specified value of 95,000 (for example, when the MY Counter's count is 94,998 and a game ball enters the general prize slot, three prize balls are paid out), the prize balls that cause the MY Counter's count to exceed the specified value of 95,000 (the remaining one prize ball in the above example) will be paid out until the end (however, of course, no prize balls will be paid out based on subsequent wins). When the suppression function is activated, the game stops and the firing stops, but this configuration is not limited to this; the suppression function may be configured to enter the game stop state but not the firing stops.

Furthermore, the timing of the suppression function activation differs between when the MY counter count reaches the specified value of "95,000" while special play is not being played (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied) and when the MY counter count reaches the specified value of "95,000" while special play is being played (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied). If the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while special play is not being played, the suppression function activates simultaneously or approximately simultaneously with the satisfaction of this suppression function activation condition. In other words, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while special play is not being played, the satisfaction of this suppression function activation condition and the activation of the suppression function will be substantially the same timing. If the suppression function activation condition is satisfied while a symbol is changing and a miss is displayed, the suppression function will activate when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the MY counter count reaches the specified value of "95,000"), regardless of whether the change display is a miss or a jackpot. Therefore, if the suppression function activation condition is met during the display of the changing symbols, the suppression function is activated at the time the suppression function activation condition is met, without waiting for the changing symbols to stop (even before the changing symbols stop), and the changing symbols are forcibly terminated midway. Therefore, if the suppression function activation condition is met during the execution of the jackpot changing symbols, the player will not be able to enjoy the special game that would normally be played after the changing symbols end, and will not be able to earn the profits (prize balls) that would be obtained in the special game. The reason for this is that even if the game is forcibly stopped midway through the changing symbols of a jackpot, the player will not know the result of the game (that he or she has won a jackpot) at this point, so even if the game suddenly stops midway through the changing symbols, the player is unlikely to feel dissatisfied or distrustful. In addition, even if the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to a winning ball entering the second starting port while the second starting port is open once every four seconds in the easy-to-enter state, or if the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to a winning ball entering another general entry port, it is preferable to forcibly close the second starting port (even if the opening time remains) when the specified value is reached. On the other hand, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function will not be activated until the end of the special game (the jackpot end demo period in which the jackpot end demo effect is executed), and will be activated after the end of the special game (the jackpot end demo period). In other words, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, game play can be continued from the time the suppression function activation condition is satisfied until the end of the special game, and the timing of the suppression function activation will be substantially different from the timing of the suppression function activation. The reason for this is that if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, even if the special game is continued without immediately stopping, the player will only acquire a limited number of prize balls in the remaining rounds (unit games), and the player will not gain excessive profits (there will be no sense of unfairness with other players). Furthermore, if the suppression function is suddenly activated during the execution of a special game and the game is stopped, it may cause the player to feel distrustful or dissatisfied. As a variant, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may not be activated until the end of the final round of the special game, and the suppression function may be activated after the end of the final round. Alternatively, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may not be activated until the start of the jackpot end demo period of the special game, and the suppression function may be activated after the start of the jackpot end demo period. As a further modification, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95,000" during the execution of a special game (even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the count value of the MY counter may be updated if a safe ball or an out ball occurs until the special game ends (until the suppression function is activated). In this case, even if the count value of the MY counter falls below the specified value "95,000" after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (even if it returns to the state before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the suppression function may be activated after the special game ends. In other words, once the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may be guaranteed to be activated when the special game ends, even if the count value of the MY counter increases or decreases from the specified value "95,000" until the special game ends. Note that even in this modification, after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, prize balls can be paid out based on the entry of game balls into the large prize slot, etc., until the special game ends.

Next, we will explain how to disable the suppression function. If the suppression function is activated, it can be deactivated by clearing the RAM when the power is turned on. That is, if the suppression function is activated, the suppression function activation flag can be switched from ON to OFF by turning off the power to the gaming machine and then restoring power with a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), thereby deactivating the suppression function. Here, a power restoration with a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch) refers to a power restoration that transitions to "RAM clear mode" (a mode in which a RAM clear process is executed, and which automatically transitions to "game mode," described below, upon completion of the RAM clear process) as the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored). Furthermore, a power restoration without a RAM clear refers to a power restoration that transitions to "game mode" (a mode in which play is possible, such as determining whether a special symbol is a hit or miss, determining symbols, and determining variation patterns) as the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored). In addition, if the suppression function is activated and the gaming machine is powered off and then power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will not switch from ON to OFF, and the suppression function will not be released. In that case, the suppression function will remain activated even after power is restored, and the game and firing states will continue. Also, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a special game (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is turned off before the special game ends and power is restored with RAM clearing (operating the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will switch from ON to OFF when power is restored, and the suppression function will not be activated even if the special game resumed after power is restored ends. On the other hand, if the suppression function activation conditions are met while a special game is being played (the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is turned off before the special game ends and then restored without clearing the RAM (by operating the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will not switch from ON to OFF when the power is restored, and the suppression function will be activated when the special game resumes after the power is restored and ends.

Next, we will explain how to initialize the MY counter. If the gaming machine is powered off and then powered back on before the suppression function activation conditions are met (when the suppression function activation flag is OFF), the MY counter will be cleared (the MY counter will become "0") when power is restored, whether the power is restored with or without a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch). In other words, before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter will be cleared (the count value before the power was cut off) when the gaming machine is powered on, regardless of whether the RAM clear switch was operated when the power was turned on. Therefore, before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter will be cleared when power is restored, regardless of whether the transition mode when power is restored (when power is turned on) is the RAM clear mode or the game mode described above. On the other hand, if the gaming machine is powered off and then powered back on after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the MY counter is not cleared upon power restoration, and the count value before power restoration (95,000) is retained. Furthermore, if the gaming machine is powered off and powered back on after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the MY counter is cleared upon power restoration (the count value before power restoration is erased). As a variant, the MY counter may be configured to be initialized (cleared) when its count value reaches a specified value of "95,000," i.e., when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied. As a further variant, an operating means (referred to as a "count continuation switch") for prohibiting initialization of the MY counter may be installed. For example, if the power is cut off before the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of the advance notification effect described below and the power is restored without clearing the RAM, if the power is restored while the count continuation switch is operated (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, and the count value before the power was cut off will continue.

Next, we will explain external information signals related to the suppression function. External information signals (also referred to as external signals or external information) related to the suppression function include a suppression function pre-activation signal and a suppression function activation signal. The suppression function pre-activation signal indicates that the suppression function is scheduled to activate soon. The suppression function pre-activation signal is output continuously for a fixed period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) at a predetermined trigger before the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000." The predetermined trigger is when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specific value (e.g., any number greater than or equal to 90,000 and less than 95,000 can be applied). For example, the specific value is "94,500," which is 500 times before the specified value of "95,000." Therefore, the timing at which the suppression function pre-activation signal starts to be output is not the same as or approximately the same as (not substantially the same as) the timing at which the advance notification effect described below starts to be executed. As a variant, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "90000," a suppression function pre-activation signal may be output, and the output timing of the suppression function pre-activation signal may be the same or approximately the same as the execution timing of the advance notification effect described below (they may be substantially the same timing). The suppression function activation signal is an external information signal indicating that the suppression function is activated. The suppression function activation signal is output continuously from the time the suppression function is activated until the activation of the suppression function is deactivated. In other words, the suppression function activation signal begins to be output when the suppression function is activated, and stops being output when power is restored accompanied by RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch). Therefore, the output timing of the suppression function activation signal is the same or approximately the same as the time when the suppression function starts to activate (they are substantially the same timing).

Next, we will explain the content of the suppression function-related effects. Suppression function-related effects include advance notification effects (notification effects before the suppression function is activated) and suppression notification effects (notification effects when the suppression function is activated). Advance notification effects are executed before the suppression function is activated, and suggest or notify that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon. Advance notification effects are executed when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value. In other words, the execution condition for the advance notification effect (referred to as the "advance notification condition") is met when the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value. "90000" is set as the predetermined value. The predetermined value, which is the count value of the MY counter ("95000") that is the execution condition for the suppression notification, may be referred to as the first predetermined value, and the predetermined value, which is the count value of the MY counter ("90000" in this case) that is the advance notification condition, may be referred to as the second predetermined value. The predetermined value is not limited to "90000" and can be set by the administrator at will (however, it is preferable that the predetermined value be "90000" or less). In other words, the conditions for executing the advance notification effect (advance notification conditions) are set as variable conditions (fluid conditions) that can be set by the administrator at will. On the other hand, the predetermined value is limited to "95000" and cannot be set by the administrator at will. In other words, the conditions for activating the suppression function (suppression function activation conditions) are set as fixed conditions that cannot be set by the player at will. The term "administrator" refers to a person who manages gaming machines, typically a store clerk at a gaming parlor or an employee of a gaming machine manufacturer. Advance notification effects include advance notification display effects and advance notification sound output effects. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the term "advance notification effect" refers to either "advance notification display effects only" or "advance notification effects and advance notification sound output effects."

The advance notification display includes, as image displays, a first message display stating, "When today's ball output reaches 95,000, the suppression function will be activated. After activation, play will end and firing will stop," and a second message display stating, "Approximately **** balls remaining until activation." Note that "****" indicates the MY value remaining until the suppression function is activated. This "****" value is updated based on the ball difference signal. The first and second message displays will continue to be displayed from the time the advance notification conditions are met until the suppression function is activated (except when the MY counter count value falls to the specified lower limit of "89,000," described below). The first message display is always a fixed message display while this advance notification display (advance notification display display) is being executed, regardless of whether the MY counter increases or decreases (the first message display does not change). On the other hand, the second message display is updated and displayed every time the count value of the MY counter increases by 500, starting from when the advance notification condition is satisfied (when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "90000"). In other words, the second message display is a message display that depends on the count value of the MY counter, and the "****" portion is updated and displayed every time "500" is added from the specified value "90000". Specifically, first, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "90,000," the second message display displays the message "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation," and when the count value of the MY counter reaches "90,500," the second message display switches to "Approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation," and when the count value of the MY counter reaches "91,000," the second message display switches to "Approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation," and when the count value of the MY counter reaches "91,500," the second message display switches to "Approximately 3,500 shots remaining until activation," and similarly, the second message display switches every time the count value of the MY counter is increased by "500," and finally, when the count value of the MY counter reaches "94,500," the second message display switches to "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation." Although the second message display is updated in units of 500, it is not limited to this configuration and may be updated in units of a different number (for example, in units of 1, 10, 100, 1000, etc.). Furthermore, the advance notification display effect does not have a dedicated background image, and a background image according to the current game situation (a stage background image that is a background image corresponding to the stage currently in progress, a reach background image that is a background image corresponding to the reach effect currently being executed, and a jackpot background image that is a background image corresponding to the jackpot effect currently being executed) is displayed behind the first message display and the second message display. The display priority of this advance notification display effect (layer priority, the priority of whether to display it on the front or back compared to other images) is set higher than the display priority of the background image and main decorative pattern 710 according to the current game status described above, and lower than the priority (layer priority) of the right-hit notification image (text effect suggesting the recommended firing position, such as "right hit"), sub-decorative pattern 720, and variable right display (icon display indicating a hold, which can display up to four hold icons corresponding to up to four holds, and variable icon, which is an icon display that is displayed when the first hold icon moves after the hold is consumed, and can display only one icon indicating that the game is changing). Furthermore, when a player performs a volume adjustment operation or a light intensity adjustment operation, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the volume setting adjustment screen (a screen showing the current volume level, a screen in which the display mode of the image showing the volume level changes in response to the volume adjustment operation, for example, a screen in which a musical note mark image is accompanied by one of number images 1 to 5 indicating the current volume level, and the number in the number image changes in response to the volume adjustment operation) and the light intensity setting adjustment screen (a screen showing the current light intensity level, a screen in which the display mode of the image showing the light intensity level changes in response to the light intensity adjustment operation, for example, a screen in which a light bulb mark image is accompanied by one of number images 1 to 5 indicating the current light intensity level, and the number in the number image changes in response to the light intensity adjustment operation). Furthermore, when a predetermined error occurs in the gaming machine, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the error notification image (an image that notifies the user that an error has occurred and is displayed in a manner that allows the user to determine the type of error currently occurring; for example, if magnetism is detected, a text image of "Magnetic Sensor Error" is displayed; if a door opening is detected, a text image of "Door Open Error" is displayed; and if prize ball payout has stopped, a text image of "Game Ball Payout Error" is displayed). Note that while the main decorative pattern 710 can be superimposed on the advance notification display effect, it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect be set higher. Therefore, when the advance notification display effect is executed while the main decorative pattern 710 is performing the movement at the start of fluctuation, the movement at the temporary stop, the movement at the time of reach, or the swinging movement, the display of each movement and the display of the advance notification display effect are superimposed, but the advance notification display effect is displayed in the foreground because of its higher display priority (layer priority). However, it is preferable that the sub-decorative pattern 720 not be superimposed on the advance notification display effect. Furthermore, the aforementioned waiting demo effect (a screen displayed when the fluctuation has stopped and there are no reserved balls for a predetermined period of time, such as 255 seconds, indicating that the game is in waiting mode; also referred to as the waiting demo effect) can be superimposed on the advance notification display effect, but it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect be set higher. It is preferable that the volume setting adjustment screen, the light intensity setting adjustment screen, and the right-hit notification image not be superimposed on the advance notification display effect. The volume adjustment operation involves operating the left and right arrow keys. Operating the right key increases the volume level and increases the number image on the volume setting adjustment screen, for example, from 3 to 4, while operating the left key decreases the volume level and decreases the number image on the volume setting adjustment screen, for example, from 3 to 2. Additionally, the light intensity adjustment operation involves operating the up and down arrow keys; operating the up key increases the light intensity level and increases the displayed number image on the light intensity setting adjustment screen from 3 to 4, for example; operating the down key decreases the light intensity level and decreases the displayed number image on the light intensity setting adjustment screen from 3 to 2, for example.

Figures 61 and 62 show examples (parts 1 and 2) of pre-announcement display. Specifically, Figure 61 shows an example of the pre-announcement display when the MY counter count reaches "90,000" immediately after the start of a jackpot game (first round). Figure 62 shows an example of the pre-announcement display when the MY counter count reaches "91,000" during the easy-to-score state after the jackpot game ends. Note that in Figures 61 and 62, as explained above, the first specified value, which is the MY counter count that serves as the suppression function activation condition, is set to "95,000," the second specified value, which is the MY counter count that serves as the pre-announcement condition, is set to "90,000," and the second message display is updated and displayed in units of 500. Figure 61 shows that when the MY counter count reaches the second specified value, the first and second message displays are displayed as images for the pre-announcement display. The "94,500 points" shown in the lower right of FIG. 61 corresponds to the cumulative prize ball count display when the prize ball count-up effect is executed. The prize ball count-up effect is an effect that counts up and displays the cumulative prize ball count in a predetermined advantageous play area. The prize ball count-up effect and cumulative prize ball display may count up and display the prize balls in individual special games (e.g., jackpot games) (each special game may be considered an advantageous play area), or may count up and display the prize balls in one or more special games and advantageous states after the special games (specifically, for example, a probability fluctuation state, a fluctuation time reduction state, an electric chute support state, a small win rush, etc.) (a series of play areas consisting of one or more special games and advantageous states after the special games may be considered an advantageous play area). In the case of FIG. 61, "94,500 points" means that the cumulative prize ball count in the series of play areas is "approximately 94,500 balls." Furthermore, Figure 62 shows that the count value of the MY counter has increased from the state in Figure 61, causing the second text display in the advance notification effect image display to be updated.

The pre-alarm sound output effect is an effect in which a predetermined pre-alarm sound is output from the speaker. The pre-alarm sound may be, for example, "The suppression function will be activated with **** shots remaining." Note that "****" represents the remaining MY (number of balls remaining) value until the suppression function is activated, and corresponds to the "****" in the second message display. This pre-alarm sound is output from the speaker one or more times when the MY counter count reaches "90000," "90500," "91000," "91500," "92000," "92500," "93000," "93500," "94000," or "94500," i.e., when the second message display is updated. While this pre-alarm sound is being output, i.e., while the first and second message displays are being displayed and the pre-alarm sound is being output, other audio effects (such as background music and sound effects) are muted. After the advance warning sound is output, i.e., while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is not being output, the original sound effects (such as background music or sound effects) are restored. As a variation, while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is being output, other sound effects (such as background music or sound effects) may be simultaneously played. In such a configuration, while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is being output, the volume of the other sound effects (such as background music or sound effects) may be reduced to make the advance warning sound easier to hear (after the advance warning sound is output, i.e., while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is not being output, the original volume is restored).

This advance notification effect ends when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000" (when the suppression function activation conditions are met). In other words, when the suppression function activation conditions are met, the advance notification effect switches to the suppression notification effect. However, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000" while special play is being played (when the suppression function activation conditions are met), the advance notification effect will continue to be executed until the end of the special play, and when the special play ends, the advance notification effect will end and the suppression notification effect will begin. As a modified example, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specified value of "95,000" during the execution of a special game (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the MY counter's count value reaching the specified value of "95,000" may be triggered by the occurrence of the trigger, and the pre-announcement display effect may be switched to a special message stating, "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, so the game will end after the special game ends and ball firing will stop." This special message may be configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the special game. This special message is also a type of pre-announcement effect and may be referred to as a special pre-announcement effect (special pre-announcement display effect). As a further modified example, the pre-announcement effect may be configured not to be executed during the execution of a special game. In other words, if a special game starts during the execution of a pre-announcement effect, the pre-announcement effect being executed may be interrupted when the special game starts, and the interrupted pre-announcement effect may be resumed when the special game ends. In such a configuration, it is preferable to resume the advance notification effect in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter after the special game has ended. Furthermore, if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the advance notification effect may not be started during the execution of the special game (the execution of the advance notification effect may be delayed until the end of the special game), and the advance notification effect may be started after the end of the special game. In such a configuration, it is preferable to start the advance notification effect in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter after the end of the special game. Furthermore, the advance notification effect also ends when the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit (e.g., "89000"). In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" and the advance notification effect is started, if the count value of the MY counter falls to or below the predetermined lower limit "89000" without reaching the specified value "95000," the advance notification effect ends without progressing to the suppressed notification effect. Here, when the advance notification effect is started, even if the count value of the MY counter falls below the predetermined value "90000" without reaching the specified value "95000", the advance notification effect continues to be executed until it falls below the predetermined lower limit value "89000". Note that if the count value of the MY counter falls to the predetermined lower limit value "89000", the advance notification effect will not be executed again even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" again. However, if a special condition is satisfied after the count value of the MY counter falls to the predetermined lower limit value "89000" and before the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" again, the advance notification effect may be executed again when the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" again. For example, if the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit of "89000," the special condition may be satisfied when the count value of the MY counter subsequently falls to "80000," which is a value even smaller than the predetermined lower limit of "89000." When the count value of the MY counter then reaches the predetermined value of "90000" again, the advance notification effect may be executed again. As another variation, if the count value of the MY counter falls to the predetermined lower limit of "89000," the special condition may be satisfied when the count value of the MY counter subsequently falls to the initial value of "0" (when the bottom value at which MY is not subtracted even if an out ball is hit, or when the count value is cleared), and when the count value of the MY counter then reaches the predetermined value of "90000" again, the advance notification effect may be executed again. In addition, if the count value of the MY counter falls below the predetermined value "90000" and before it falls to the predetermined lower limit value "89000," a so-called consecutive win break occurs (when the consecutive win state ends), even if the count value of the MY counter has not fallen to the predetermined lower limit value "89000." Here, consecutive wins (consecutive win state) refer to a state in which the easy-to-score state continues without returning to the normal game state after the occurrence of a first win that triggers a transition from the normal game state (low base state) to the easy-to-score state (high base state) (a state in which jackpots occur consecutively in the easy-to-score state starting from the first win), or a state in which the high-probability state continues without returning to the normal state after the occurrence of a first win that triggers a transition from the normal state (low probability state) to the high-probability state (a state in which jackpots occur consecutively in the high-probability state starting from the first win). As a further variant, without requiring any special conditions, when the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit value of "89000", if the count value of the MY counter again reaches the predetermined value of "90000", a pre-announcement effect may be executed again. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the second message display is updated (by adding "500" to the difference between the thresholds) every time the count value of the MY counter reaches each threshold (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers an update to the advance notification display, but conversely, the second message display is also updated (by subtracting "500" from the difference between the thresholds) when the count value of the MY counter falls below each threshold (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers an update to the advance notification display. For example, if the MY counter is subtracted from "91,000" to "90,999," the second message display is updated (decremented) from "Approximately 3,500 shots remaining until activation" to "Approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation." However, even if the count value of the MY counter falls below the specified value of "90,000," the second message display is not updated and continues to display "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation" until it falls below the specified lower limit of "89,000." In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter is subtracted from "90,000" to "89,999," the second message display continues to display "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation" (until it falls below the specified lower limit of "89,000"). As a modified example, when the count value of the MY counter falls below each threshold value (90,000, 90,500, 91,000, 91,500, 92,000, 92,500, 93,000, 93,500, 94,000, 94,500) that triggers an update of the advance notification effect, the second message display may not be updated, and the current display (original display) may be continued. For convenience, in the following description, 500 MYs, which are the update cycle of the second message display, are considered as one unit, and the advance notification effect that occurs when the count value of the MY counter is between "90,000" and "90,499" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) among the series of advance notification effects may be referred to as the "first unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "90500" and "90999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "second unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "91000" and "91499" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "third unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "91500" and "91999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "fourth unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "92000" and "92499" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 3000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "fifth unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "92500" and "92999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 2500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "sixth unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "93000" and "93499" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 2000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "seventh unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is displayed when the MY counter count value is between "93,500" and "93,999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 1,500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "8th unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is displayed when the MY counter count value is between "94,000" and "94,499" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 1,000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "9th unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is displayed when the MY counter count value is between "94,500" and "94,999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "10th unit notification effect."

The suppression notification effect is an effect that suggests or notifies that the MY counter's count value has reached the specified value of "95,000," i.e., that the suppression function has been activated and the game has transitioned to a stopped state. This suppression notification effect is executed when the suppression function is activated. Specifically, if the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" while a special game is not being played, the suppression notification effect is executed when the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000." If the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" while a special game is being played, the suppression notification effect is executed after the special game ends. The suppression notification effect includes a suppression notification image display effect and a suppression notification sound output effect. Note that, while the suppression notification effect is being executed, the frame lamp (the lamp located on the frame) is fully lit (or fully flashing) in red, and the board lamp (the lamp located on the game board) is turned off, although this is not shown in the figure. As a variant, both the frame lamp and the board lamp may be turned off during the suppression notification effect. The suppression notification display effect displays a dedicated screen (suppression screen) to notify players that the suppression function has been activated. This suppression screen includes a special message display and a special background image. The special message display includes a message such as, "Today's ball output has reached 95,000. The suppression function has been activated. Today's game will end. Please be careful not to forget to remove your cards." The special background image is a special background image displayed behind the special message display, and is composed of, for example, a blackout image. The display priority of this suppression screen is set higher than the display priority of any other effect image (i.e., it is set as the highest priority layer). When this suppression screen is displayed, any other effect image (normal game screen) becomes invisible or difficult to see. When a specific error (e.g., an error of high priority or importance) occurs, an error notification image corresponding to the specific error may be displayed in front of the suppression screen. The suppression notification sound output effect is an effect in which a suppression notification sound is output from a speaker. The suppression notification sound is, for example, a sound saying "The suppression function has been activated." This suppression notification sound output effect repeatedly outputs the suppression notification sound while the suppression function is activated. Note that the suppression notification sound output effect may be configured to output a specific error sound for a short period of time, followed by repeatedly outputting the suppression notification sound. The suppression notification effect ends when the suppression function is deactivated. In other words, by performing a RAM clear operation when the power is turned on, the suppression function is deactivated and the suppression notification effect ends. Note that while the suppression notification display effect continues until the suppression function is deactivated, the suppression notification sound output effect may continue for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the suppression function is activated. In this case, if a power outage occurs before a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the suppression notification effect was executed, and power is restored without clearing the RAM (by operating the RAM clear switch), it is preferable that after power is restored, the suppression notification display effect continues to be executed, but the suppression notification sound output effect is not executed (even if there is time remaining in the predetermined time).

Figure 63 is a diagram showing an example of the display of a suppression notification effect. Specifically, Figure 63 shows an example of the display of a suppression notification effect when the count value of the MY counter reaches the first specified value of "95,000," which is the condition for activating the suppression function. Figure 63 shows that, when the condition for activating the suppression function is met, the display switches from the advance notification effect exemplified in Figures 61 and 62 to the display screen for the suppression notification effect (suppression screen), and that the display priority of the suppression screen is set to the highest priority.

When a special game is not being played (when the symbol is being displayed), if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of 95,000 (for example, if the specified value of 95,000 is reached upon winning a prize at the general prize slot), a suppression notification effect is executed, suggesting or informing the player that the suppression function has been activated. The game state immediately before this suppression function is activated is an easy-to-score state, and activation of the suppression function ends this easy-to-score state. Therefore, when the suppression function is activated, the flag indicating the easy-to-score state is turned OFF, and if the second starting port is open, it is forcibly closed in the middle of the process, and the variable display in the easy-to-score state (the variable display currently being executed) is forcibly ended. Furthermore, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during a round of play in a special game, the suppression function will not be activated until the end of the special game (jackpot end demo period), and the advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect) will continue to be executed until the end of the special game (jackpot end demo period). Note that if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of a special game, the count value of the MY counter will not be updated even if safe balls (the number of expected winning balls) and out balls (played balls) are generated until the end of the special game (the count value of the MY counter will maintain the specified value "95000"). Furthermore, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met while a special game is being played (if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000"), the most recent advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect: approximately 500 balls remaining until activation) will continue to be displayed until the end of the special game, but this configuration is not limited to this, and for example, it is also possible to display a message saying "The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends," or, as mentioned above, the advance notification display effect may be switched to a special message saying "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, so play will end after the special game ends and firing will stop," and this special message may continue to be displayed until the end of the special game. When configured in this manner, the advance notification effect (tenth unit notification effect) continues to be executed even in the tenth round (final round). However, this is not limited to a configuration in which the advance notification effect (tenth unit notification effect) continues to be executed. For example, a message saying "The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends" may be displayed, or, as described above, the advance notification display may be switched to special message saying "Today's ball output has reached 95,000, so play will end after the special game ends and firing will stop," and this special message may be displayed continuously until the special game ends. Thereafter, when the special game ends, a suppression notification effect is executed, suggesting or informing the player that the suppression function has been activated.

The cumulative prize ball count display area displays the cumulative number of prize balls (cumulative prize ball count) won up to the present time based on game balls entering the large prize slot during special games during consecutive wins, and this cumulative prize ball value (cumulative prize ball display) is updated and displayed by executing the prize ball count-up effect (also simply referred to as the count-up effect). The prize ball count-up effect is an effect in which, when a game ball enters the large prize slot during special games during consecutive wins, the value of the cumulative prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area is added to the value of the number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball entering the large prize slot. Because the system is designed so that 15 prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the large prize slot (the unit prize ball count for the large prize slot is 15), when a game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area is counted up in units of 15 (a prize ball count-up effect is performed in which "15" is added to the cumulative prize ball count). Here, the cumulative prize ball count display area can display five-digit numbers, and more specifically, the cumulative prize ball count display can display 100,000 numbers from "0" to "99,999." Therefore, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display is "99,999." In this case, if the cumulative prize ball count display has reached the upper limit of "99,999," even if a game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative prize ball count display does not change and maintains the upper limit of "99,999." In this way, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display, "99999," is set to a value greater than the specified value of "95000," which is the upper limit of MY. In other words, the cumulative prize ball count display when the upper limit of "99999" is reached can be greater than the specified value of MY of "95000" notified in advance in the advance notification effect. This allows accurate notification that the number of prize balls won by the player has exceeded the specified value of MY of "95000," thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment. Furthermore, since the cumulative prize ball count display is a value that does not take into account outgoing balls and can be a value that exceeds the specified value of MY of "95000," it is preferable to configure it to be able to display up to the upper limit of "99999." As a variant, even if the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," a pseudo prize ball count-up effect (variable display of the cumulative prize ball count display) may be executed when a game ball enters the large prize slot. A pseudo prize ball count-up effect may be, for example, 99999 → 91111 → 92222 → 93333 → ... → 98888 → 99999, where the initial value (99999) and the final value (99999) are the same, but the values between them are displayed randomly, making it appear as if the cumulative prize ball count is being counted up. As a further variation, when the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," if a new prize ball is paid out (when a gaming ball enters a big prize), "FFFFF" may be displayed as the cumulative prize ball count display to suggest or notify that the cumulative prize ball count display has exceeded the display limit (is in an overflow state). As a further variation, when the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," or when a new prize ball payout occurs after the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," the display may be switched to "FFFFF" (without displaying "99999" thereafter), and the "FFFFF" display may be maintained regardless of whether a new prize ball payout occurs thereafter. As a further variation, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to "94999," which is the number just before the MY default value of "95000." When this number is exceeded, a text image "Limit Reached" may be displayed, and thereafter the cumulative prize ball count display may not be updated, but the text image "Limit Break" may continue to be displayed. As a variation, when this number is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead the text image "Limit Break" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was previously displayed. Similarly, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to "95,000," which is the same as the MY default value of "95,000." If the value is exceeded, the text image "Limit Reached" is displayed, and the cumulative prize ball count display is not updated thereafter, but the text image "Limit Breaking" continues to be displayed. Even in this configuration, if the value is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead the text image "Limit Breaking" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was previously displayed. As a further variation, in order to prevent players from being overly gambling-minded, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to a value (e.g., "50,000") sufficiently smaller than the default value of "95,000." If the value is exceeded, the text image "Limit Reached" is displayed, and the cumulative prize ball count display is not updated thereafter, but the text image "Limit Breaking" continues to be displayed. Even with this configuration, if the cumulative prize ball count exceeds that value, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden and instead a "Break the Limit" text image may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was previously displayed. The display conditions for "Break the Limit" can be set as appropriate, but while "Break the Limit" is displayed, it is preferable not to execute the highlight effect (a display that notifies players that the cumulative prize ball count has reached a predetermined specific value when a game ball enters a special prize ball slot during special play, and displays the aforementioned highlight effect) even if the cumulative prize ball count value is a specific value. Furthermore, if the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit and another ball subsequently enters the special prize ball slot, the cumulative prize ball display does not display a value exceeding the upper limit, while the MY counter count is incremented.

The highlight effect is an effect that notifies players that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a predetermined specific value when a game ball enters the big prize slot during a special game. It is an effect that can simultaneously display a prize ball count corresponding to the specific value (for example, a prize ball count display such as "2500" or "35000" displayed in a larger size than the cumulative prize ball count display, and unlike the cumulative prize ball count display, a count-up effect is not performed, but a fixed value that is a multiple of 2500, such as "2500" or "35000," is displayed for a certain period of time and then disappears) in addition to the cumulative prize ball count display. Here, the highlight effect may be configured to include specific characters in addition to the numerical value, such as "2500 GET" or "35000 GET." The specific value corresponds to a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (2,500), and is set in increments of 2,500, such as "2,500," "5,000," "7,500," "10,000," "12,500," etc. The value of the predetermined number of prize balls, "2,500," is set to a value smaller than the difference value "5,000" obtained by subtracting the predetermined value "90,000" from the MY default value "95,000." As a result, during the period from when the count value of the MY counter, which is updated in response to a ball entering the large prize slot during a special game during a consecutive win, reaches the scheduled value "90,000" to when it reaches the default value "95,000," i.e., from when the advance notification effect begins until the suppression function is activated, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value (the multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls) at least once, and the highlight effect will be executed at least once. This ensures that at least one highlight effect will be executed even if the suppression function is about to be activated, and gives the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment.

Even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect during special play and the suppression function activation condition is met, the prize ball count-up effect will continue without being interrupted. In other words, even if the suppression function activation condition is met during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), the suppression function will not be activated (the suppression screen will not be displayed) until the end of the special play, and the special play will continue as is. Therefore, the prize ball count-up effect will not be interrupted midway, but will be completed (executed to the end). Although details will be described later, if a subsequent prize ball count-up effect is executed based on a second game ball entering the first large prize slot (a prize that triggers the MY counter's count value to reach the specified value of 95,000) while a previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first large prize slot, the previous prize ball count-up effect and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up effects are configured as continuous and integrated count-up effects. Therefore, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect, the currently executing prize ball count-up effect can be continued without interruption. This allows the player to see the prize ball count-up effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's motivation to play even after the MY counter's count value has reached the specified value of 95,000. In other words, if the count value of the MY Counter reaches the specified value of "95000" while a special game is being played, the game will not be immediately stopped (the suppression function will not be immediately activated), but the special game will continue as is, so no actual harm will occur even if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is allowed. On the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced. Note that although the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the specified value of "95000" is "a game ball entering the large prize slot," this is not limited to this configuration, and the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the specified value of "95000" may also be "a game ball entering the general prize slot."

Even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90,000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect during special play and the advance notification condition is satisfied, the prize ball count-up effect in progress is not interrupted and the ongoing prize ball count-up effect continues. In other words, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (the advance notification effect has begun), the ongoing prize ball count-up effect is not terminated midway, but is completed (executed to the end) so that the special play continues as is. In this case, if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game but the suppression function activation condition is not satisfied, the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) not only during the execution of the special game but also after the special game has ended, and the advance notification effect is executed throughout the execution and after the special game has ended. Although details will be described later, if a subsequent prize ball count-up effect is executed based on a game ball entering a second large prize entry slot (a prize that triggers the count value of the MY counter to reach the predetermined value "90,000") while a previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first large prize entry slot, the previous prize ball count-up effect and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up effects are configured as continuous and integrated count-up effects. Therefore, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect, the currently executing prize ball count-up effect can be continued without interruption. This allows the player to see the prize ball count-up effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's motivation to play even after the count value of the MY counter has reached the predetermined value "90,000." In other words, even if the count value of the MY Counter reaches the predetermined value "90,000" during the execution of a special game, the special game will continue as is until the suppression function is activated, so there is no real harm caused by allowing the execution of the prize ball count-up effect. On the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is hindered, the player's motivation to play may be reduced. When the prize ball count-up effect and the advance notification effect are displayed overlapping each other, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the prize ball count-up effect, and the advance notification effect is displayed in front of the prize ball count-up effect. Note that the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the predetermined value "90,000" is "a game ball entering the large prize entry slot," but this configuration is not limited thereto. The winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the predetermined value "90,000" may also be "a game ball entering the general prize entry slot."

Even if the MY counter count reaches the specified value of 95,000 during the execution of an emphasis effect during a special game and the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect will continue without being interrupted. In other words, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of an emphasis effect (the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), the suppression function will not be activated (the suppression screen will not be displayed) until the end of the special game, and the special game will continue as is. Therefore, the emphasis effect will not be interrupted midway, but will be completed (executed to the end). This allows the player to see the emphasis effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's desire to play even after the MY counter count reaches the specified value of 95,000. In other words, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000" while a special game is being played, the game will not be immediately stopped (the suppression function will not be immediately activated), but the special game will continue as is, so even if the execution of the emphasis effect is permitted, no real harm will occur. On the contrary, if the execution of the emphasis effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced.

Even if the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90,000" during the execution of a special game and the advance notification condition is met, the ongoing emphasis effect continues without interruption. In other words, even if the advance notification condition is met during the execution of an emphasis effect (the execution of an advance notification effect has begun), the ongoing emphasis effect is not terminated midway and is completed (executed to the end) to allow the special game to continue. In this case, if the advance notification condition is met during the execution of a special game but the suppression function activation condition is not met, the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) not only during the execution of the special game but also after the special game has ended, and the advance notification effect is executed throughout the execution of the special game and after its end. This allows the player to view the emphasis effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's desire to play even after the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90,000." In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "90000" during the execution of a special game, the special game will continue as is until the suppression function is activated, so no actual harm will occur even if the execution of the emphasis effect is allowed. On the contrary, if the execution of the emphasis effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced. Furthermore, when the emphasis effect and the advance notification effect are displayed overlapping each other, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the emphasis effect, and the advance notification effect is displayed in front of the emphasis effect.

The count-up display time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to 0.03 seconds. In other words, the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area is counted up in increments of 0.03 seconds. Therefore, the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect, which is performed when one game ball enters the large prize opening, is calculated by multiplying the time required to count up one prize ball by the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize opening. In other words, the execution time of this prize ball count-up effect (the time from the start to the end of one prize ball count-up effect) is 15 (unit prize ball number) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds. The execution time of the highlighting effect (the period from the start of display to the end of display) is the time value from the start of displaying the highlighting display (enlarged display image) of the cumulative number of prize balls to the end, and the execution time of the highlighting effect is set to "3 seconds" regardless of which specific value the cumulative number of prize balls reaches (2500, 5000, 7500, 10000...). The execution time of this highlighting effect (3 seconds) is set longer than the execution time (0.45 seconds) of the prize ball count-up effect corresponding to the entry of one game ball into the big prize slot. Therefore, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value upon the entry of one gaming ball into the large prize opening, the prize ball count-up effect and the emphasis effect are executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, but by setting the execution time of the emphasis effect to be longer than the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect executed in response to the entry of one gaming ball into the large prize opening, it is possible to make the emphasis effect, which is rare, stand out even when the emphasis effect and the prize ball count-up effect are executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, thereby further improving the player's sense of satisfaction and accomplishment when the emphasis effect occurs. Note that when the emphasis effect and the prize ball count-up effect are displayed overlapping each other, the display priority (layer priority) of the emphasis effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the prize ball count-up effect, and the emphasis effect is displayed in front of the prize ball count-up effect. Additionally, the inter-round time (the time during which the large prize opening closes upon completion of the Nth round of play and remains closed until the N+1th round of play begins) may be set to a time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) longer than the execution time (0.45 seconds) of the prize ball count-up effect corresponding to one game ball entering the large prize opening, but shorter than the execution time (3 seconds) of the emphasis effect.

The execution time of a pre-announcement effect is the time value from the start to the end of one pre-announcement effect, and is the time value from when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "90000" to when it reaches the specified value of "95000". However, this execution time of the pre-announcement effect does not include the execution time of the pre-announcement effect when the MY counter reaches the specified value of "90000" but then falls below the specified lower limit value of "89000" without reaching the specified value of "95000". In other words, the execution time of the pre-announcement effect here is the execution time when the pre-announcement effect is completed by reaching the specified value. The execution time of this advance notification effect is the time it takes for the MY counter count to increase by 5,000 (95,000 - 90,000 = 5,000) from the predetermined value of 90,000. This 5,000 increase requires the number of prize balls obtained through multiple special games (for example, approximately 1,500 balls x 3 or more in the case of a 10R jackpot). Therefore, it basically takes the execution time of multiple special games from the start to the end of one advance notification effect. Therefore, the execution time of the advance notification effect is significantly longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds). Therefore, even if the advance notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed simultaneously, the advance notification effect, which is a continuous display, is prioritized over the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, thereby increasing the player's attention to the advance notification effect. This allows the player to reliably understand the current game situation (that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon). The advance notification effect described here is an advance notification display effect, but it has a similar relationship when compared with the execution time of the advance notification sound output effect (e.g., 5 seconds of audio output). Furthermore, as mentioned above, the advance notification effect is updated and displayed each time the MY counter count value is incremented by 500 from the predetermined value "90000," progressing in the order of the first unit notification effect → the second unit notification effect → the third unit notification effect → ... → the tenth unit notification effect. The execution time of any of the unit notification effects from the first unit notification effect to the tenth unit notification effect that make up this advance notification effect is longer than the execution time (3 seconds) of the emphasis effect. In other words, the execution time of each unit notification effect is the time value until the MY counter count value increases by 500. This increase of 500 balls requires the number of prize balls obtained through multiple rounds of play (e.g., approximately 150 balls x 3 or more rounds). Therefore, it basically takes the execution time of multiple rounds of play from the start to the end of one unit notification effect. Therefore, the execution time of the unit notification effect is longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds). Therefore, even if the unit notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed at the same time, the unit notification effect, which is a continuous display, is made to stand out preferentially over the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, and the player's attention to the unit notification effect can be increased, so that the player can reliably know how many shots are left until the suppression function is activated each time the unit notification effect (second message display) changes. Note that because the highlighting effects are executed in units of 2500 earned prize balls, the highlighting effects are executed at most once (although at most one type of highlighting effect is displayed per special game) during one special game (for example, a 10R special game: number of earnable prize balls = approximately 1500), but because the unit notification effects are executed in units of 500 MY, the unit notification effects can be executed multiple times (multiple types of unit notification effects can be displayed per special game) during one special game (for example, a 10R special game: number of earnable prize balls = approximately 1500). This allows the player to see multiple types of unit notification effects during one special game, further increasing the player's attention to the advance notification effects.

When the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the large prize opening switch (also called the large prize detection device) detects the entry of the first game ball, a prize ball count-up effect based on this first entry (called the "previous prize ball count-up effect") begins. If a second game ball (a new game ball) enters the large prize opening while the previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed and the large prize opening switch detects the entry of the second game ball, the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted and a prize ball count-up effect based on the second entry (called the "later prize ball count-up effect") begins. Specifically, in a previous prize ball count-up effect, if a count-up display from "1000" to "1015" is originally scheduled, and a new game ball enters the special prize entry slot while the previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed and is detected by the special prize entry slot switch, the previous prize ball count-up effect being executed will be terminated midway (for example, the count-up display will be interrupted at "1010"), and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect will begin. Then, in the subsequent prize ball count-up effect, the remaining portion of the previous prize ball count-up effect (the count-up display from "1011" to "1015") will be omitted, and the count-up display will continue from the final value "1015" and continue from "1016" to "1030". Note that although some of the count-up displays of the previous prize ball count-up effect (count-up displays from "1011" to "1015") are omitted, the end (interruption) of the previous prize ball count-up effect and the start of the subsequent prize ball count-up effect are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up effects are configured as a continuous and integrated count-up display. In this way, of the two prize ball count-up effects, the later prize ball count-up effect is set to have a higher priority than the previous prize ball count-up effect, and if the end of the previous prize ball count-up effect and the start of the subsequent prize ball count-up effect overlap in time, the execution of the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect is given priority. Therefore, even if game balls continuously enter the large prize entry port and two prize ball count-up effects are executed consecutively, the first and second prize ball count-up effects can be executed smoothly without any delay, preventing a timing discrepancy between the entry of game balls into the large prize entry port and the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (which would cause a player to feel uncomfortable), and enabling the prize ball count-up effect to be properly completed during the execution of the special game (round game). As a variant, when the execution of the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted, the count-up display may be forcibly switched to the final value "1015" (i.e., if the execution was interrupted at "1010," the count-up display may be switched from "1010" to the final value "1015" in one go), and the count-up display of the subsequent prize ball count-up effect (a count-up display from "1016" to "1030") may be started from this final value. As a further variation, even if a second game ball (a new game ball) enters the large prize entrance while the previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed and the large prize entrance switch detects the entry of the second game ball, the previous prize ball count-up effect will not be interrupted, and the previous prize ball count-up effect will be executed in its entirety before the next prize ball count-up effect begins (for example, even if the second game ball enters the large prize entrance when the count-up display shows "1010," the remaining part of the previous prize ball count-up effect, "1011" to "1015," may be executed, followed by the next prize ball count-up effect, "1016" to "1030").

If one more game ball enters the large prize opening during the execution of a special game, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). However, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before one more game ball enters the large prize opening, there is a situation (referred to as a "specific situation") in which the cumulative number of prize balls does not reach the specific value and the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000." Specifically, in a specific situation where the cumulative number of prize balls is "97,485" during the execution of a special game and the count value of the MY counter is "94,998," if one more game ball enters the large prize opening (if 15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97,500" and an emphasis effect will be executed. On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before the last game ball enters the large prize opening (if three prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97,500," and the count value of the MY counter will reach the specified value of "95,000" (number of safes = 3, number of outs = 1, difference in number of balls = 3 - 1 = 2, MY = 94,998 + 2 = 95,000), thereby satisfying the suppression function activation condition (the suppression function activation flag will be turned ON). In this particular situation, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was running at the time of the power outage will resume after power is restored. When the special game resumes, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching a specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, if the power is cut off and then restored (power restored without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), and after the power is restored, the MY counter will start counting again from the initial value "0." Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter at the time of the power cut reaches the specified value "95,000" when one more game ball enters the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart from the initial value "0," and even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the count value of the MY counter will not reach the specified value "95,000," and the suppression function activation conditions will not be satisfied (the suppression function activation flag will not be turned ON). Therefore, when the special game resumes after the power is restored, even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the special advance notification effect (special advance notification display effect) will not be executed, which contains the special message "Today's ball output has reached 95,000, so the game will end after the special game ends and ball firing will stop." However, even if the MY counter returns to its initial value of "0," if the MY counter count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" by continuing play after the power is restored, the suppression function activation condition will be met (the suppression function activation flag will be turned ON).

If one more game ball enters the large prize opening during the execution of a special game, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). However, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before one more game ball enters the large prize opening, there is a situation (referred to as a "specified situation") in which the cumulative number of prize balls does not reach the specific value and the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "90000." Specifically, in a predetermined situation where the cumulative number of prize balls is "97,485" during the execution of a special game and the count value of the MY counter is "89,998," if one more game ball enters the large prize opening (if 15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97,500" and an emphasis effect will be executed, whereas if one game ball enters the general prize opening before the last game ball enters the large prize opening (if three prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97,500," and the count value of the MY counter will reach the specified value of "90,000" (number of safes = 3, number of outs = 1, difference in number of balls = 3 - 1 = 2, MY = 89,998 + 2 = 90,000), thereby satisfying the advance notification condition. In this predetermined situation, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was running at the time of the power outage will resume after power is restored. When the special game resumes, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching a specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, if the power is turned off and then restored (without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), and after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart counting from its initial value of "0." Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter at the time of the power outage reaches the predetermined value of "90000" when one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the MY counter will restart from its initial value of "0" when the special game resumes after the power is restored. Therefore, even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the count value of the MY counter will not reach the predetermined value of "90000," and the advance notification condition will not be met. Therefore, in the special game resumed after the power is restored, the advance notification display effect (the first and second message displays) will not be executed, even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot. However, even if the MY counter returns to the initial value "0," if the game is continued after the power is restored and the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000," the advance notification condition will be satisfied. As a modified example, in a case where the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is installed, if the power is turned off before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied and the power is restored while operating the count continuation switch (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but the advance notification effect may not be resumed immediately after the power is restored. For example, if the power is cut off while the second unit notification display (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) is being executed (power is cut off when the MY counter count value is between "90,500" and "90,999"), and the count continuation switch is operated to restore power (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when power is restored, but the second unit notification display (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) will not be resumed immediately after power is restored, and then, when the MY counter count value reaches "91,000", the advance notification display may be resumed from the third unit notification display (approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation). As a further variation, when the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is installed, if the power is turned off before the suppression function activation conditions are met and then power is restored while the count continuation switch is being operated (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when power is restored, but the advance notification effect will not resume immediately after power is restored. For example, if the power is turned off while the second unit notification effect (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) is being executed (power is turned off when the MY counter count value is between "90,500" and "90,999"), and the count continuation switch is operated to restore power (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when power is restored, and the second unit notification effect (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) will resume immediately after power is restored.

During the execution of a special game, after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (after the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), there is a situation (referred to as "Situation A") in which the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of 2500) when one more game ball enters the large prize opening. Specifically, in Situation A, during the execution of a special game, if the count value of the MY counter has already reached the specified value of "95000" and the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485," which is 15 balls less than the predetermined specific value of "97500," when one more game ball enters the large prize opening (15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97500" and an emphasis effect will be executed. In this situation A, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was being played before the power outage will resume. However, after the special game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the cumulative prize ball count will not reach the predetermined value of "97,500," and the highlight effect that was scheduled before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be played when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value of "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching the specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, in this situation A, if power is restored without clearing the RAM (if power is restored without clearing the RAM after the suppression function activation conditions are met), the MY counter is not initialized (the MY counter's count value of "95,000" is not cleared) and the suppression function activation flag remains ON. Therefore, in the special game resumed after power is restored, a special advance notification effect (special advance notification display effect) is executed, which contains special wording stating, "Today's ball output has reached 95,000 balls, so the game will end after the special game ends and ball firing will stop." In addition, when the special game resumed after power is restored (the jackpot end demo period) ends, the suppression function is activated, and the suppression notification effect is executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously. As a variant, in the special game resumed after power is restored, the suppression function is activated when the special game (the jackpot end demo period) ends without executing the special advance notification effect (special advance notification display effect), and the suppression notification effect is executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously.

During the execution of a special game, after the advance notification conditions are satisfied, i.e., after the advance notification effect has begun, there is a situation (referred to as "Situation B") in which the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of 2500) when one more game ball enters the large prize slot. Specifically, in Situation B, during the execution of a special game, the count value of the MY counter has already reached the specified value of "90000" (however, it is preferable that the count value of the MY counter be "90000" or "90500" or the like, with some margin before reaching the specified value of "95000"), and the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485," which is 15 balls less than the specified value of "97500." When one more game ball enters the large prize slot (and 15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97500," and an emphasis effect will be executed. In this situation B, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was being played before the power outage will resume. However, after the special game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the cumulative prize ball count will not reach the predetermined value of "97,500," and the highlight effect that was scheduled before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be played when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value of "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching the specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, even if the pre-alarm conditions are met, if the power is turned off and then restored (without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Therefore, when special gameplay resumes after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart counting from its initial value of "0." Therefore, after the power is restored, the pre-alarm conditions are no longer met, and the pre-alarm effect that was running at the time of the most recent power outage will not resume after the power is restored (special gameplay resumed after the power is restored). (The pre-alarm effect will not be executed; more specifically, the first and second message displays will not be executed.) However, even if the MY counter returns to its initial value of "0," if gameplay continues after the power is restored, and the MY counter's count value reaches the predetermined value of "90,000" (if the pre-alarm conditions are met), the pre-alarm effect will be executed.

The system is configured so that volume and light intensity settings are disabled while the suppression function is activated (while the suppression notification effect is being executed). In other words, when the suppression function is activated and the game is transitioned to a stopped state, even if a volume adjustment operation is performed, the volume level does not change (the volume operation is disabled). Therefore, even if a volume adjustment operation is performed during the execution of the suppression notification effect, the volume level of the suppression notification sound (the voice saying "The suppression function has been activated") does not change, and the suppression notification sound is always output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume). Furthermore, even if a volume adjustment operation is performed, the volume setting adjustment screen is not displayed. Alternatively, the suppression notification sound may be output in an output mode corresponding to the set volume level. Similarly, when the suppression function is activated and the game is transitioned to a stopped state, even if a light intensity adjustment operation is performed, the light intensity level does not change (the light intensity operation is disabled). Therefore, even if a light intensity adjustment operation is performed during the execution of the suppression notification effect, the light intensity of the frame lamp related to the suppression notification when fully lit does not change. Furthermore, even if a light intensity adjustment operation is performed, the light intensity setting adjustment screen is not displayed. However, even if the suppression function activation conditions are met, if a special game is being played, the suppression function is not activated (the suppression notification effect is not being executed), so volume and light intensity settings are possible during the special game, and a volume setting adjustment screen based on the volume adjustment operation and a light intensity setting adjustment screen based on the light intensity adjustment operation are displayed. Note that, if a pre-notification effect is being played, whether during a variable or special game, a volume adjustment operation changes the volume level (the volume operation is enabled), and a light intensity adjustment operation changes the light level (the light operation is enabled), and a volume setting adjustment screen based on the volume adjustment operation and a light intensity setting adjustment screen based on the light intensity adjustment operation are displayed. Here, the pre-notification sound output effect may be configured to always output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume) rather than in an output mode corresponding to the set volume level, or may be configured to output in an output mode corresponding to the set volume level.

The relationship between the various effects (standby demo effects, effect button operations, and specified operations of the main decorative pattern 710) and the suppression function is as follows. Details of the effect button operations will be described later. The standby demo effect can be executed (started) even while a pre-announcement effect is being executed, but the standby demo effect will not be executed (started) while a suppression notification effect is being executed. The pre-announcement effect can be executed (started) even while a standby demo effect is being executed, and can be executed in parallel, but the suppression notification effect can be executed (started) even while a standby demo effect is being executed, but the standby demo effect will be forcibly terminated. The effect button operation can be executed (started) even while a pre-announcement effect is being executed, but the effect button operation will not be executed (started) while a suppression notification effect is being executed. Note that advance notification effects can be executed (started) even while effect button operations are being executed, and can be executed in parallel; however, while effect button operations are being executed, suppression notification effects can be executed (started), while effect button operations are forcibly terminated (however, as a variant, even if suppression notification effects are started during execution of effect button operations, effect button operations may continue and end at the original end timing). Also, while advance notification effects are being executed, predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 (operation at the start of fluctuation, operation at temporary stop, operation at the establishment of a reach, and swinging operation) can be executed (started), but the predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 are not executed (started) while suppression notification effects are being executed. Note that advance notification effects can be executed (started), while predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 are being executed, and can be executed in parallel; however, while predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 are being executed, suppression notification effects can be executed (started), while predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 are being executed, while predetermined operations of the main decorative pattern 710 are being executed,

The aforementioned effect button operation will now be described in detail. In this embodiment, the effect button is configured so that its internal mechanism can vibrate or rotate a movable object inside the effect button. In this way, the effect button is configured so that not only can the player's operation affect the effect content displayed on the effect display device 70, but also the operation of the effect button itself can suggest or notify the player of the likelihood of a jackpot. Such effect button operation is referred to as effect button operation. This effect button operation can be performed during variable display or jackpot play. During variable display, it is performed to suggest or notify a player that a jackpot expectation is very high (for example, it may be performed in conjunction with the execution of a specific preview effect executed by the effect display device 70, or it may be performed suddenly regardless of the execution of such a specific preview effect). During jackpot play, it is performed in conjunction with the execution of the aforementioned consecutive wins within the reserved mode or promotion effect (for example, during special play, an effect that appears to be a 5R jackpot in the early stages and then notifies the player that it is a 10R jackpot in the middle stages). More specifically, during the variable display, the effect button operation is executed in the middle of the variable display (before the mid-way point, i.e., before the reach is reached), and is simultaneously executed when the next preview effect, which is a specific preview effect that displays the character string "next preview" (a preview effect with a high probability of a jackpot that suggests or notifies of future performance developments), is executed, and when the hit/lose branching device effect (which can be executed at a later timing than the movable device effect described above) that notifies of a jackpot win is executed in the middle of the variable display (after the reach is reached, i.e., at the end), which is executed (the effect button operation associated with the preview effect). Note that, during one variation (jackpot variation), both the next preview effect and the hit/lose branching device effect that notifies of a jackpot win are executed, but the execution time of the effect button operation is longer when the hit/lose branching device effect that notifies of a jackpot win is executed (for example, 8 seconds for the former and 15 seconds for the latter). Here, if the effect button action is an intermittent effect button action (an action in which an intermittent pattern in which the effect button action is stopped and then resumed is repeated one or more times), the total execution time of the intermittent effect button action is the execution time of the effect button action. Note that, although predetermined preview effects other than specific preview effects (for example, dialogue effects, etc.) are configured so that they are not associated with and executed by effect button actions, their execution timing may overlap with the effect button action at the start of the variation as a pre-read, which will be described later, and they may happen to be executed simultaneously. Also, as a pre-read preview effect, a pre-read preview effect is performed immediately after the start of the variation display related to the activated reserved ball that is consumed before the target of the pre-read preview effect (for example, an activated reserved ball related to a high expectation variation such as the above-mentioned next preview effect or a win/lose branching role effect that notifies of a jackpot win). When this effect button operation as a pre-reading notice (pre-reading effect button operation at the start of a variation) is executed, even at the start of the variation display related to the activated reserved ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect that arrived via the pre-reading notice effect, the effect button operation is not a pre-reading notice, but is executed as a notice effect that suggests or notifies the expected probability of a jackpot for that variation (pre-reading effect button operation at the start of a variation). Note that the pre-reading effect button operation at the start of a variation and the pre-reading effect button operation at the start of a variation are configured to have a shorter execution time (for example, 1 second) than the effect button operation associated with the above-mentioned notice effect. Note that the effect button operation is completed during one variation display and does not continue to be executed across two or more variation displays (for example, it is not configured so that the vibration of the effect button continues from the end of a certain variation display to the beginning of the next variation display after that certain variation display). Furthermore, during jackpot play, it is executed in association with the execution of promotion effects or consecutive win effects within the reserved slot, and is executed in association with the execution of the aforementioned jackpot role effects (effect button operation during jackpot). Note that effect button operation during jackpot play is configured to be executable across multiple rounds of play (for example, the effect button is configured to continue vibrating from the end of a certain round of play to the beginning of the next round of play following that certain round of play).

Here, effect button actions can be broadly divided into those that are executed based on the player's operation of the effect button and those that are not executed based on the player's operation of the effect button. In other words, they can be broadly divided into those that are executed immediately when the player operates the effect button and those that do not require the player to operate the effect button at all. The effect button actions during a jackpot described above and those associated with the win/lose branching device effect that notifies the player of a jackpot win are executed immediately when the player operates the effect button (in other words, the player operates the effect button to execute a promotion effect, a consecutive win effect in a reserved jackpot, or a win/lose branching device effect that notifies the player of a jackpot win). The effect button actions associated with the above-mentioned start-of-variation effect button action as a pre-read, the start-of-variation effect button action via pre-read, and the next preview effect are executed without the player having to operate the effect button (in other words, the start-of-variation effect button action, the start-of-variation effect button action via pre-read, and the next preview effect are executed without the player having to operate the effect button). As a variant, even if a jackpot variable display is being displayed, if the player operates a function button, the win/lose branching device effect that notifies the player of a jackpot win may not be executed, and the corresponding function button operation may not be executed (indicating a loss in the win/lose branching scene). In such a case, the same variable display may be configured to display the word "Revival!" at a timing later than the timing at which a loss is suggested in the win/lose branching scene, to suggest or notify the player of a jackpot. In such a configuration, the function button operation is executed even during the effect in which the word "Revival!" is displayed (also called the resurrection effect or reversal effect), and this function button operation is configured to be executed without the player having to operate the function button in the first place.

Furthermore, when an effect button operation is performed, the frame lamp 10 and the aforementioned board lamp 25 are configured to emit light in a specific manner. The light emission mode (light color) is configured to differ depending on the effect situation when the effect button operation is performed. Specifically, when a promotion effect, a consecutive win in a reserved lottery effect, a win/lose branching role effect that notifies a jackpot win, or a revival effect is performed, the light is emitted in rainbow colors, and when a variation start effect button operation, a variation start effect button operation via a pre-reading, or a next preview effect is performed, the light is emitted in blue. However, in any case, if an error state occurs during rainbow or blue light emission due to effect button operation, the light is always configured to switch to red light (a light emission mode different from the red light emission during the suppression notification effect; for example, it is desirable for the flashing cycle to be different or for the brightness to be higher than the red light emission during the suppression notification effect).

Furthermore, if a selection operation to transition to RAM clear mode or game mode is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, a button action is executed after powering on as a confirmation of operation, rather than as a presentation. In this case, the button action is executed in a relatively short time (e.g., 5 seconds) (shorter than the button action associated with the win/lose branching device presentation that notifies the player of a win), and the frame lamp 10 and the aforementioned board lamp 25 also emit red light. If a variable display begins during the button action, a button image prompting the player to press a button may be displayed. However, even during this button action, button operation can change the presentation display on the presentation display device 70 (e.g., pressing a button can erase the button image and display a dialogue presentation). Furthermore, if a selection operation to transition to the setting change state (also referred to as setting change mode) or setting confirmation state (also referred to as setting confirmation mode) is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, the button action as a confirmation of operation is not executed after powering on. This makes it possible to omit the button action as a confirmation of operation. As a variant, it may be possible to execute a button action as an operation confirmation by exiting the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

2. Second embodiment
The following describes a pachinko machine 1000 as a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 1000 according to the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the functions (performance control means, image control means) of the performance control CPU 201 of the performance control board 200 and the image control CPU 301 of the image control board 300 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment are realized by a single CPU (MPU) mounted on a single board (the sub-control CPU 1201 of the sub-control board 1200 shown in FIG. 64). In the following description, a configuration in which the performance control means and image control means are realized by a single CPU (MPU), as in the second embodiment, is referred to as a "single-chip configuration," and a configuration in which the performance control means and image control means are realized by multiple CPUs (MPUs), as in the performance control CPU 201 and image control CPU 301 of the first embodiment, is referred to as a "multiple-chip configuration."

<Sub-control board with one-chip configuration>
Figure 64 is a diagram showing an example of the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. The configuration of the pachinko machine 1000 shown in Figure 64 is the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 shown in Figure 19, except for the configuration related to the sub-control board 1200 which has a one-chip configuration. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the configuration and processing unique to the sub-control board 1200 will be described in detail, and descriptions of other common parts will be omitted.

The sub-control board 1200 is composed of one sub-control CPU 1201, one or more sub-control ROMs 1202, one or more sub-control RAMs 1203, one or more I/O port circuits 1204, and an image control device 1205.

The sub-control CPU 1201 is realized, for example, by mounting an enhanced graphics processor (VDP) on the sub-control board 1200. The sub-control CPU 1201 is a multi-core CPU with multiple CPU cores that can execute processes independently and in parallel. In this example, the sub-control CPU 1201 has four CPU cores, each represented by a CPU number "CPU0" to "CPU3."

The sub-control ROM 1202 is a storage means for storing programs executed by each CPU core, as well as image data and motion data used for effect display, and is accessible from each CPU core. The sub-control ROM 1202 may be composed of one or more storage devices, and may be installed inside or outside the VDP. In particular, the sub-control ROM 1202 that stores image data (CG data) that is the source data for the images (effect images) displayed on the effect display device 70 is referred to as "CG ROM." The CG ROM may also store vertex data related to motion data that indicates the movement of objects in the video.

The secondary control RAM 1203 is a storage means (RWM) that stores programs executed by each CPU core of the secondary control CPU 1201 and temporary data associated with the operation of each CPU core. At least a portion of its storage area is set as a shared area accessible by each CPU core, allowing it to operate as a "shared memory." The secondary control RAM 1203 does not have to be set as a shared area; dedicated areas for each CPU core may be set, and a spare storage area may also be set. The shared area (shared memory) may also be limited to the CPU cores that can access it (for example, accessible by CPU1 and CPU3). The secondary control RAM 1203 may be composed of one or more storage devices, and may be installed inside or outside the VDP. For example, the CPU's built-in RAM is the secondary control RAM 1203 built into the secondary control CPU 1201. However, other RAM may also be used, such as a VRAM built into the VDP or an expansion RAM installed outside the VDP. In this case, the shared area is preferably set in the VRAM, the expansion RAM, or both.

The CPU's built-in RAM is memory (SRAM) used exclusively by the CPU core operating as the host CPU, and can be used as a DMA (Direct Memory Access) mapped space from the host CPU. The VRAM is memory (DRAM) primarily used by the image control circuit (details described below), and stores copies of CG data (read cache data), display data (frame data) drawn using CG data, and other reference data. The VRAM can also be used as a work area for the CPU's built-in RAM. The extended RAM is memory (DRAM) with a larger capacity than the VRAM. While generally slower than the VRAM, it is faster than the secondary control ROM 1202. The extended RAM stores data that does not fit into the VRAM (examples are similar to those of the VRAM) and data for purposes other than those of the VRAM (such as data used by processes other than the image control circuit). Like the VRAM, the extended RAM can also be used as a cache destination for CG ROM data.

In response to instructions from the sub-control CPU 1201 (particularly the image control process described below), the image control device 1205 reads image data stored in the CGROM, performs image processing such as drawing based on this image data to generate display data, and outputs the resulting video signal to the performance display device 70. In addition, in response to instructions from the sub-control CPU 1201 (particularly the image control process), the image control device 1205 reads sound data stored in the audio ROM, synthesizes this data to generate sound data, and outputs it to the speaker 11.

The image control device 1205 is a device that provides functions similar to those of the VDP 302 and sound source IC 303 shown in FIG. 19 in the first embodiment. Note that in FIG. 65, the image control device 1205 is shown as an independent component on the sub-control board 1200. In this case, the image control device 1205 may be configured to have its own CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. inside it. Also, in this embodiment, the image control device 1205 may be configured as an integral part of at least one of the other components on the sub-control board 1200. For example, the functions realized by the image control device 1205 may be realized by software processing executed by the sub-control CPU 1201 (particularly the image control process) using the sub-control ROM 1202 and sub-control RAM 1203.

The sub-control board 1200 provides functions (performance control means, image control means) equivalent to those of the performance control board 200 and image control board 300 shown in Figure 19. In other words, one sub-control CPU 1201 has functions equivalent to those of the performance control CPU 201 and image control CPU 301. As mentioned above, if the image control device 1205 is configured as an integrated unit with the sub-control CPU 1201, it also has functions equivalent to those of the VDP 302 and sound source IC 303. Similarly, one or more sub-control ROMs 1202 have functions equivalent to those of the performance control ROM 202 and image control ROM 304. Furthermore, one or more sub-control RAMs 1203 have functions equivalent to those of the performance control RAM 203 and image control RAM 305. The method by which the sub-control board 1200 realizes the performance control means and image control means is explained in detail below.

In the sub-control board 1200, the sub-control ROM 1202 stores, in the form of control files (application files), a group of programs (hereinafter referred to as OS processes) for the OS (Operating System) functions that are executed to control the entire sub-control board 800. Similarly, the sub-control ROM 1202 stores, in the form of control files (application files), a group of programs corresponding to the processing processes executed by the performance control CPU 201 in the first embodiment (hereinafter referred to as performance control processes), and a group of programs corresponding to the processing processes executed by the image control CPU 301 in the first embodiment (hereinafter referred to as image control processes).

In the sub-control board 1080, the sub-control CPU 1201 assigns the above-mentioned OS process, performance control process, and image control process to separate CPU cores on a process-by-process basis and runs them.

Specifically, for example, after a hardware reset of the sub-control board 1080 is performed as a result of powering on, the sub-control CPU 1201 runs each process, including the OS process, on the CPU core of CPU0 when it starts up, and then, using the OS functions, assigns execution rights for the control file corresponding to the performance control process to the CPU core of CPU3, and assigns execution rights for the control file corresponding to the image control process to the CPU core of CPU1, and starts up each CPU core.

When started, CPU1 and CPU3 share a portion of sub-control RAM 1203 as shared memory between processes, and execute processes assigned to each CPU core (effect control process, image control process) while reading various programs and data from sub-control ROM 1202. Specifically, CPU3 reads control files from sub-control ROM 1202, including effect pattern data (data defining the effect process), display pattern data (data defining the effect image display process), and audio pattern data (data defining the effect audio output process), and executes effect control using the effect control process. Furthermore, CPU1 executes image control by reading image data from sub-control ROM 1202 (CGROM 1221) in accordance with the effect control determined by the effect control process, drawing an effect image using a drawing process, storing the drawn effect image in sub-control RAM 1203 (VRAM, expansion RAM), and outputting it to the effect display device 70. The image control process may execute audio control by reading audio data from the sub-control ROM 1202, generating audio data for output, and outputting it to the speaker 11 in accordance with the performance control determined by the performance control process. Light emission control for the performance lamps 10 and 25 and operation control for the movable prop 24 can also be similarly executed by the sub-control board 1200, but details are omitted here.

Furthermore, when the performance control process (CPU3) sends a command to the image control process (CPU1) to instruct performance control, the performance control process stores data including the command (or command message) in a shared area (shared memory) of sub-control RAM 1203, and the image control process accesses the shared memory and reads the data, thereby passing the data including the command (message transfer). In the following explanation, when we refer to sending a command from the performance control process to the image control process, we are referring to sending and receiving data by passing it via the shared memory of sub-control RAM 1203. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the command transmission between the performance control board 200 and image control board 300 described in the first embodiment is realized by passing data via the shared memory of sub-control RAM 1203.

By executing the above processing, on the one-chip sub-control board 1080, CPU0 can execute the OS process, CPU3 can execute the performance control process (performance control means), and CPU1 can execute the image control process (image control means), all independently and in parallel. Furthermore, CPU2, which is free, can be kept as a spare, and if, for example, the processing load of the image control process on CPU1 becomes excessively large compared to the other CPU cores, part of the image control process can be assigned to CPU2 for use as well.

In this way, the single-chip sub-control board 1080 allocates processes to each CPU core of the multi-core CPU on a process-by-process basis, which has the effect of minimizing the impact on the processing of other CPU cores even if one CPU core becomes heavy. In other words, OS control by CPU0, performance control by CPU3, and image control by CPU1 can be executed without affecting the computational load on the other CPU cores.

In addition, the CPU core of CPU3 (corresponding to performance control means 87), to which the performance control process is assigned, and the CPU core of CPU1 (corresponding to image control means 1088), to which the image control process is assigned, can share RWM 1083 and ROM 1084, so communication between the CPU cores (such as sending and receiving commands) is achieved by message transfer via reading and writing to shared memory, or by inter-processor interrupts. As a result, compared to serial communication between boards in a multi-chip configuration in which the performance control CPU 1085 and image control CPU 1086 are mounted on separate boards, command sending and receiving and interrupts between CPU cores (between processes) can be achieved with processing that has less delay.

Figure 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the functionality of the sub-control board shown in Figure 64.

As shown in Figure 65, the sub-control CPU 1201 has an OS process, a performance control process, and an image control process that are assigned to each process and launched. The performance control process functions as performance control means 1211 by executing its program. The image control process functions as image control means 1212 by executing its program.

The presentation control means 1211, like the presentation control board 200 (presentation control CPU 201) described in the first embodiment, executes various calculation processes related to game presentations based on presentation control commands from the main control board 100. Details will be omitted as they would be a repetition of the explanation of the presentation control board 200, but in the presentation control processing in response to the presentation control commands from the main control board 100, the presentation control means 1211 generates image control commands that instruct the image control board 300 to output images and sounds, just like the presentation integration means 220. The presentation control means 1211 also generates lamp control signals (lamp data), drive control signals (drive data), and other signals, and determines error presentation patterns, all of which are functions similar to those of the various means of the presentation control board 200 (see Figure 21).

However, in the pachinko machine 1000, the presentation control means 1211 (presentation control process) and the image control means 1212 (image control process) are realized on a single sub-control board 1200 having a single sub-control CPU 1201, and therefore information communication between the presentation control means 1211 (presentation control process) and the image control means 1212 (image control process) is realized by exchanging data via the shared memory 1231, rather than by sending and receiving via serial communication as with the command sending and receiving means 270 in the first embodiment (details will be described later).

The sub-control ROM 1202 stores the various pattern data mentioned above, as well as a CG ROM 1221 that stores image data (CG data) and motion data, and an audio ROM 1222 that stores audio data.

The sub-control RAM 1203 includes, according to its intended use, a shared memory (shared area) 1231 that stores data shared by the performance control process and image control process; a frame buffer 1232 that temporarily stores frame data of moving images to be output to the performance display device 70; a command buffer 1233 that stores various commands (performance control commands, image control commands, ACK commands, etc.); and a read cache 1234 that temporarily stores a copy of CG data to be used for drawing (read cache data). The command buffer 1233 is a storage area equivalent to the command storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 described in the first embodiment, and may utilize work memory or the like provided within the image control device 1205. The frame buffer 1232 has a memory area capable of storing at least one frame's worth of display data (frame data), and in the case of a double buffer as described below, has a memory area capable of storing two frames' worth of frame data (in the case of a triple buffer, has a memory area for three frames).

As mentioned above, image data (CG data) stored in CGROM 1221 is read by the preloader circuit 1256 and prefetch circuit 1258 (described below), and a copy of this data is transferred as cache data to the read cache 1234 of the secondary control RAM 1203. Here, NAND-type flash memory (e.g., SATA-standard ROM), which is primarily used as the secondary control ROM 1202 including CGROM 1221, is characterized by high speed for continuous access but low speed for random access. On the other hand, DRAM, which is primarily used as the secondary control RAM 1203 including the read cache 1234, is characterized by high random access performance. It is known that when the image control device 1205 uses image data to draw display data, many random accesses occur.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the storage destination for image data (CG data) via read cache is VRAM (or extended RAM), each piece of image data can be configured to be stored in a first storage area or a second storage area within VRAM (or extended RAM) based on its characteristics.

The first and second storage areas in the VRAM (or expansion RAM) are set as storage areas that do not overlap each other. It is preferable that the first and second storage areas each consist of contiguous storage areas, but they may also consist of multiple contiguous storage areas. That is, multiple contiguous storage areas that serve as the first storage area may be set with other storage areas in between, and the same applies to the second storage area. The third storage area, which will be described later, may also be configured in the same way as the first and second storage areas.

The first storage area of the VRAM (or expansion RAM) stores, for example, image data (CG data) for a predetermined first-type image whose display content changes each time a pattern change is performed. Image data for the first-type image, such as image data for decorative patterns or image data for pending change displays, is specified at the time of design. Additionally, other image data for the first-type image may also be specified, such as the most recently accessed image data for image formation.

The second storage area of the VRAM (or expansion RAM) stores, for example, data (CG data) for a predetermined second type of image that can remain displayed across multiple symbol variations. Image data for the second type of image is specified at the time of design, for example, image data for the normal background displayed as the background during normal play, or image data for the mode background displayed as the background during a predetermined game mode. It should be noted that other image data for the second type of image may also be specified, such as image data for forming a predetermined image that is accessed relatively frequently.

As a further variation, a third storage area may be provided in the VRAM (or extended RAM) in addition to the first and second storage areas, and cached data for image data for highly frequently used third-type images may be constantly stored in the third storage area. Alternatively, a third storage area may not be provided separately, and image data for the third-type images may be constantly stored in the second storage area. For example, image data for decorative patterns may be specified at the time of design as image data for the third-type images. By constantly reading and caching image data for the highly frequently used third-type images, the drawing processing speed can be improved.

As described above, image data stored in CGROM 1221 can be cached in a specified storage area of VRAM or expansion RAM based on its characteristics, enabling high-speed reading of image formation data. The first to third storage areas may also be used as areas for preferentially storing various types of specified image data, and in that case, if there is free space, cached data for other image data may also be stored.

The image control device 1205 has an image control circuit 1251 that reads image data required for image output based on image control commands from the sub-control CPU 1201 (particularly the image control process), performs image processing such as drawing based on this image data to generate display data, and outputs the video signal to the performance display device 70, and an audio control circuit 1259 that reads sound data stored in the audio ROM 1222 required for audio output in response to image control commands from the sub-control CPU 1201 (particularly the image control process), synthesizes this to generate sound data, and outputs it to the speaker 11.

The image control circuit 1251 includes an index table circuit 1252, a drawing circuit 1253, an image filter circuit 1254, an image decoder circuit 1255, a preloader circuit 1256, a display circuit 1257, and a prefetch circuit 1258. Note that the image control circuit 1251 may not include at least one of these circuits, or may include additional circuits not shown. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the image control device 1205 may be implemented by software processing that executes a program, and therefore each circuit is not limited to being an electronic component, and may be, for example, a program module. Therefore, when various implementation forms are taken into consideration, the term "circuit" can be read as "means," etc.

The index table circuit 1252 divides a specified memory area (page area) in VRAM or expansion RAM into arbitrary areas, assigns numbers to them, and manages them in an index table. The logical space of the memory area managed by the index table is called the index space, and access to the VRAM (or expansion RAM) from various controllers and modules is performed by referencing the index table.

The drawing circuit 1253 executes drawing processing to draw an image for display while controlling the index table circuit 1252, image filter circuit 1254, and image decoder circuit 1255 in response to instructions from the image control process (image control means 1212). In the drawing processing, the drawing circuit 1253 reads the necessary image data from the CGROM 1221 in accordance with the drawing commands contained in the display list of the image control command, and draws the display data (frame data) in the frame buffer 1232. The display list lists the commands that control drawing (drawing commands) in the order of execution, and is included in the image control command generated by the image control process. The image control command is generated by the image control process in response to a request for performance execution from the performance control process (reception of a performance control command), and is received by the image control circuit 1251 (drawing circuit 1253) via storage in the command buffer 1233.

The image filter circuit 1254 performs any of several types of filter processing on image data stored in the VRAM or expansion RAM used in the drawing process. Filter processing is performed for purposes such as noise reduction and edge emphasis. The processing by the image filter circuit 1254 and the processing by the drawing circuit 1253 can be performed independently and in parallel.

The image decoder circuit 1255 decodes encoded (including compressed) image data used in the drawing process (image data stored in CGROM 1221) and stores it in VRAM or expansion RAM.

The preloader circuit 1256 analyzes the display list and transfers the CG data (including vertex data) referenced in the display list to VRAM or expansion RAM, and outputs a display list in which the reference destination of the CG data is rewritten to the address after transfer. At this time, it is preferable for the preloader circuit 1256 to transfer the CG data in a way that ensures as continuous read access as possible after transfer.

When the drawing circuit 1253 is performing drawing or analyzing the display list, random access to CG data occurs frequently. Therefore, if CG data is directly referenced from CGROM 1221, image data wait times may occur, which can degrade drawing processing performance. Therefore, the preloader function of the preloader circuit 1256 caches CG data referenced by drawing commands in VRAM or expansion RAM and rewrites the reference address in the display list. This prevents image data wait times even when random access to image data occurs during display list analysis or drawing command execution, improving drawing performance. Furthermore, if the CG data transfer destination is determined based on the results of display list command analysis, taking into account consecutive read accesses, access efficiency to image data can be further improved during preloader execution.

The display circuit 1257 executes display processing by reading display images (frame data) stored in the frame buffer 1232 of the VRAM or expansion RAM through the drawing processing performed by the drawing circuit 1253 and outputting them externally (to the performance display device 70) in the form of video signals. When the frame buffer 1232 is configured as a double buffer, the image control circuit 1251 performs display processing using one frame buffer as a display frame buffer and another frame buffer as a drawing frame buffer, thereby enabling display processing and drawing processing to be executed in parallel. Specifically, as the display frame buffer and drawing frame buffer are switched (swapped) for each frame, while the display circuit 1257 outputs the drawn display image (frame data) from the display frame buffer, the drawing circuit 1253 generates and draws the next display image (frame data) in the drawing frame buffer. The display circuit 1257 can also independently output up to a predetermined number of display screens (e.g., three screens) simultaneously, as determined by the specifications of the sub-control board 1200.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 1000 according to this embodiment, the sub-control board 1200 has a single sub-control CPU 1201 (single chip) equipped with a single effect control process and an image control process that operate independently on different CPU cores, thereby realizing effect control means 1211 and image control means 1212. In this single-chip configuration, even if one CPU core's processing load increases, the other CPU core's arithmetic processing is not affected, and the processing in that CPU core can be executed. Furthermore, while a multi-chip configuration would require not only a CPU but also ROM and RAM on each board, a single-chip configuration allows ROM and RAM to be consolidated into one (or in one location), thereby reducing the number of components and improving the efficiency of assembly work. Furthermore, a board that realizes a single-chip configuration can also share the connection lines (buses) that connect the mounted components to enable communication.

<Inter-process communication via shared memory>
In the above-mentioned one-chip configuration, communication between the performance control process and the image control process is carried out via a shared memory 1231 that is accessible to both, allowing commands to be sent and received faster and without delay than serial communication, etc., carried out between boards.

Here, communication between the effect control process and the image control process via shared memory 1231 will be explained using the example of processing a Vsync interrupt. A Vsync interrupt is an interrupt related to the Vsync (vertical synchronization) signal used to determine the timing for starting to rewrite the display screen (the timing for sending the drawing signal). When a Vsync interrupt occurs, it must be processed promptly and without delay. A Vsync interrupt is also called a V-blank interrupt. Since the Vsync interrupt itself is a technology commonly used in the field of video display control, a detailed explanation will be omitted. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the Vsync interrupt is used by both the effect control process and the image control process, and is executed with priority over most programs executed in both processes, so it is strongly required that it be processed without delay.

In the case of a multiple-chip configuration like the first embodiment, the CPUs of each board (performance control CPU 201 and image control CPU 301) each register a callback function, which is an interrupt function, with the source of detection of the Vsync signal (for example, a CPU with OS functionality), and when a Vsync interrupt occurs, the CPUs of each board detect the occurrence of the Vsync interrupt by executing the callback function via serial communication between the boards.

On the other hand, in a one-chip configuration like this embodiment, the image control process registers a callback function for Vsync interrupts generated by the OS process, but the performance control process can detect the occurrence of a Vsync interrupt from the image control process via shared memory 1231. More specifically, when the image control process detects a Vsync interrupt from the OS process by executing the callback function, it sets an interrupt occurrence flag corresponding to the Vsync interrupt in shared memory 1231. The performance control process can then immediately detect the occurrence of a Vsync interrupt by periodically monitoring the interrupt occurrence flag. Thus, between the image control process and the performance control process, interrupt occurrences can be detected with almost no delay by monitoring the flag in shared memory 1231, without using serial communication, etc. Furthermore, processing using such memory flags has the advantage of significantly reducing the processing load compared to sending and receiving message queues, etc. via serial communication.

The periodic monitoring of the interrupt occurrence flag by the performance control process is performed, for example, by timer interrupt processing in the performance control process. The timer interrupt processing in the performance control process is realized using a CTC circuit (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 1200, and its cycle is, for example, approximately 16 ms (16.6 ms (60 fps) to be precise). This 16 ms cycle is the same as the frame time required for the drawing process of one frame, and is synchronized with the cycle of image display controlled by the image control process. Furthermore, it may be synchronized with the cycle for obtaining commands from the command buffer 1233. The cycle of the timer interrupt processing in the performance control process may also be the same as the cycle of the timer interrupt processing on the performance control side in the first embodiment. Furthermore, even when the image control process monitors a specified flag in the shared memory 1231, it may be performed at the same cycle as the monitoring of the shared memory 1231 (interrupt occurrence flag) by the performance control process. Furthermore, the interrupt period of the CTC circuit used in the main control side main processing by the main control board 100 is 4 ms, which is shorter than the 16 ms mentioned above. However, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 1200 (performance control process or image control process) may be configured to monitor the shared memory 1231 at a shorter period than the period of the "predetermined" interrupt processing on the main control board 100, for reasons such as the need to perform image drawing processing. Alternatively, conversely, the "predetermined" interrupt processing on the main control board 100 may be configured at a shorter period than the interrupt processing for monitoring the shared memory 1231 on the sub-control board 1200 (performance control process or image control process). For example, in a configuration where the main control side (main control board or payout control board) needs to communicate frequently, such as in a managed gaming machine (not only pachinko machines but also slot machines, etc.), it may be preferable for the main control side to be configured to be able to execute the predetermined interrupt processing at a relatively shorter period than the sub-control side.

Furthermore, the inter-process communication method via shared memory 1231 on the sub-control board 1200 can be applied to methods other than the Vsync interrupt described above. For example, in a multi-chip configuration where only the image control board 300 is equipped with a fan, if a fan error occurs due to temperature rise or other reasons, the image control CPU 301 of the image control board 300 must detect the error and then transmit the error to the performance control board 200 via inter-board communication such as serial communication. Regarding such fan error notification, in a single-chip configuration, when a fan error occurs in the fan equipped in the image control circuit 1251, the image control process can notify the performance control process of the error without delay by monitoring the flag in shared memory 1231, without inter-board communication. For example, in a multi-chip configuration, if the image control means 1212 (image control board 300) needs to notify the performance control means 1211 (performance control board 200) of its status after startup, inter-board communication such as serial communication must be used. With regard to such status notifications, if the configuration is one chip, the image control means process writes a flag to shared memory 1231 indicating that its own process has started up, and the performance control process checks the flag in shared memory 1231, allowing status notifications between processes to be sent without delay.

<Unused error>
A gaming machine may be provided with one or more special errors (hereinafter referred to as unused errors) that are detected as errors during the development stage but are not generally used when the machine is operated as a product. In order to detect such unused errors that are not used when the machine is operated as a product, the pachinko machine 1000 according to this embodiment may be configured as follows.

When the pachinko machine 1000 was developed, an output device such as a seven-segment display was connected to a specific port on the sub-control board 1200. If the presentation control process or image control process (which may be the image control device 1205) detected an unused error, the image control process (which may be the image control device 1205) wrote an error code (an error code not used in play) to the specific port, and the error was reported from the output device. Writing the error code to the specific port is performed by setting a predetermined value in the sub-control RAM 1203, and by storing the predetermined value in the shared memory 1231 described above, the presentation control process and the image control process can share the detection of unused errors. Note that if an unused error is detected in a gaming machine with a multiple-chip configuration that does not have the shared memory 1231, such as the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment, the image control CPU 301 simply writes an error code to a register corresponding to the specific port.

Specific examples of non-use errors include the following first to third non-use errors:

The first unused error indicates that a drawing command was issued while a command was being received. As explained in the command analysis section below, when a series of commands that collectively have a single meaning are received from the command buffer across frames (this is called "frame-spanning command reception"), it is preferable that the command processing corresponding to those commands cannot be executed, or is not executed, until the series of commands is received. In particular, if the received commands are drawing commands, abnormalities may occur in the drawn image. Therefore, when a frame-spanning command is received, it is preferable that the command processing (drawing execution) is not executed until the series of commands is received. Therefore, if a drawing command is issued internally while a command is being received, the performance control process or image control process (or image control device 1205) detects this, and the image control process (which may also be image control device 1205) writes an error code corresponding to the first unused error to a designated port (specific port). The output device then notifies the developer by displaying a segment display or the like, allowing the developer to take design action. Note that this type of non-use error for "receiving a command across frames" may also be set in the first embodiment, in which commands are received via serial communication between boards.

The second unused error indicates the detection of data corruption in display image data stored in memory (specifically, for example, frame data stored in frame buffer 1232 of sub-control RAM 1203). Display data (frame data) created by image control device 1205 based on instructions from the image control process is stored in frame buffer 1232, and the performance control process or image control process (which may be image control device 1205) has the function of detecting corruption of this display data. The data corruption detection function is a well-known technology, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Therefore, when the performance control process or image control process (or image control device 1205) detects data corruption in the display data, the image control process (which may be image control device 1205) writes an error code corresponding to the second unused error to a designated port (specific port), and the output device notifies the developer by displaying a segment display or the like, allowing the developer to take appropriate design action. Note that detection of a second unused error in response to such data corruption in display data may be configured in a similar manner in the first embodiment.

The third unused error is an error indicating that a program error has occurred. When a program error occurs, an abort function may be called to abnormally terminate the program. When the abort function is called, the image control process (which may be the image control device 1205) writes an error code corresponding to the third unused error to a designated port (specific port), and the output device notifies the developer by displaying a segment display or the like, allowing the developer to take appropriate design action. Note that detection of such a third unused error in response to a program error may be configured in a similar manner in the first embodiment.

Regarding the above-mentioned unused error, the pachinko machine 1000 according to this embodiment (or the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment) is configured to write an error code (an error code not used in play) corresponding to the specific port when the error is detected, even during product operation. In this case, because an output device such as a 7-segment display is not connected to the specific port during product operation, no error notification is output. However, an error code can be left in the specific port (shared memory 1231 or a register) as a record of the detected unused error. This error code record can then be used, for example, for analysis when a malfunction occurs. Furthermore, when the gaming machine is tested by a designated inspection agency, the detected unused error may be output to a device externally connected to the specific port. Note that this configuration for unused errors is not limited to the sub-control board 1200 (performance control board 200, image control board 300), but can also be configured in the main control board 100 or other boards.

<CG data>
The following describes the image data (CG data) stored in the CGROM 1221. The CG data is image data that is the basis for the display image data (display data) generated by the image control circuit 1251, and includes moving images. The CG data is data encoded into an image format that can be processed by the image control device 1205, and is written to the CGROM 1221 when the pachinko machine 1000 is manufactured. The images represented by the CGROM data are diverse, specifically, background images displayed on the effect display device 70, images of decorative symbols, images for hold displays, images related to various effects executed during pattern fluctuations, dedicated images displayed during jackpot play, images for demo effects while waiting to play, etc.

When the image control circuit 1251 receives an image control command generated by the image control process (image control means 1212) via the command buffer 1233, it reads one or more CG data required to generate display data based on the display list included in the image control command, and generates display data by performing the necessary image processing, etc. Note that at least a portion of the CG data stored in the CG ROM 1221 is pre-copied to the read cache 1234 of the secondary control RAM, which has a faster access speed than the secondary control ROM 1202, using functions provided by the preloader circuit 1256, prefetch circuit 1258, etc. (read cache). The image control circuit 1251 analyzes the display list to create a display list that appropriately changes the access destination of the CG data to an address in the read cache 1234, and then prioritizes reading the CG data from the read cache 1234 over that from the CG ROM 1221 according to this display list, thereby improving the speed of the drawing process.

The image data stored in CGROM 1221 is encoded into an image format that can be processed by the image control device 1205 (particularly the image decoder circuit 1255). When the image control circuit 1251 reads CG data (including access for read cache), the target image data is decoded by the image decoder circuit 1255, and the decoded image data is stored in VRAM or extended RAM.

Here, in the sub-control board 1200 according to this embodiment, the upper limit of the image size that the image decoder circuit 1255 can process is specified as, for example, "2048 x 2048 [unit: pixel (picture element)]" (the above specified size is an example and may change depending on the performance of the image control device 1205).

For this reason, image data written to CGROM 1221 must also be at an image size that can be processed by image decoder circuit 1255. However, in cases where the resolution is high, the original image data (hereinafter also referred to as raw image data) may be a "large-size image" that exceeds the specified size, and therefore must be saved using an encoder before being written (saved) to CGROM 1221. Below, we will explain a method of saving image data that can be executed by image control device 1205 equipped with an encoder circuit (not shown). Note that the encoder circuit may be an electronic component with encoder functionality mounted on sub-control board 1200, separate from image control device 1205. Alternatively, it may be an encoder implemented in an external computer or the like that is not installed in the pachinko machine 1000 when manufactured.

In the first storage method, the encoder circuit encodes the original image data (hereinafter referred to as raw image data) into a predetermined first format in container form and stores it in CGROM 1221. If the raw image data is a large-sized image (i.e., an image size equal to or larger than the specified size of 2048 x 2048), the raw material is divided into multiple pieces and placed in a single container, and that single container is stored in CGROM 1221. In this case, the size of each individual piece may be equal to or larger than the specified size. According to this first storage method, even if the raw image data is a large-sized image, storing it in container format in CGROM 1221 allows the image decoder circuit 1255 to decode the image data stored in CGROM 1221.

However, in the case of the first storage method, the "predetermined first format" to be encoded is a format specified by the manufacturer of the image control device 1205 (hereinafter referred to as the VDP manufacturer), and is generally a format proprietary to the manufacturer. Furthermore, when the image decoder circuit 1255 decodes image data in this first format, a library (proprietary library) based on the VDP manufacturer's proprietary specifications is required. The proprietary library may be configured to process everything from reading into CGROM 1221 to rendering in one go. Furthermore, this proprietary library is required not only when the image control device 1205 reads from CGROM 1221, but also in all situations where image data encoded in the first format specified by the VDP manufacturer is used, such as when used with tools other than those of the VDP manufacturer (specifically, during the development phase, previewing using an external computer, operating an emulator, creating serial number data, etc.). These could pose significant constraints, especially during the development phase.

The second storage method does not use a container format, and the encoder circuit encodes the raw image data using a specified second format and stores it in CGROM 1221. Here, the specified second format can be a general-purpose format such as PNG (the use of a manufacturer's proprietary format is also not excluded). In the second storage method, if the raw image data is a large-sized image, the encoder circuit divides it into multiple image data pieces that do not exceed a specified size, and encodes each piece of divided data into the second format before storing it in CGROM 1221.

This second storage method is more restrictive than the first storage method, requiring different processing depending on whether the image size of the raw image data is equal to or larger than a specified size, and also requiring processing to divide the raw image data into pieces of data within the specified size. However, because the image data (CG data) stored in CGROM 1221 using the second storage method is not in a container format and is equal to or smaller than a specified size, the image decoder circuit 1255 can decode it using a widely known standard library without using a proprietary library. When decoding CG data in which a large image is divided into multiple pieces, for example, decoding can be performed so that each piece of CG data is connected and displayed in the motion data. Another decoding method is to use a program to directly render multiple pieces of CG data as if they were connected, but this increases the amount of program code, which raises concerns about increased labor costs. Additionally, by being able to use a general-purpose format for the second format, even in situations where encoded image data is used with tools other than those from the VDP manufacturer, there is no need to use the VDP manufacturer's proprietary library (standard libraries can be used), which has the added benefit of easing constraints on development work using tools.

As described above, compared to the first storage method, the second storage method is subject to processing restrictions depending on the image size of the raw image data, but can be said to be more convenient when using the data after storage. In light of these factors, in the pachinko machine 1000 according to this embodiment, it is recommended that image data of at least specific images (for example, display images of decorative patterns) be stored (written) to CGROM 1221 using the second storage method, regardless of the image size of the raw image data.

Next, we will explain the image quality of the CG data written to CGROM 1221.

Traditionally, the SDR (Standard Dynamic Range) standard has been known as a technical standard for representing images (including video). The SDR standard defines a contrast of 256 levels and a maximum brightness of 100 nits, and has also been used as a display standard for images in gaming machines. However, in recent years, the HDR (High Dynamic Range) standard has become more popular as a technical standard with higher quality than the SDR standard. For example, the HDR10 standard defines a contrast of 1024 levels and a maximum brightness of 10,000 nits, providing a wider dynamic range than the SDR standard and allowing for more vivid representation of light and dark.

However, rendering at a quality conforming to the SDR standard (first quality) requires image data created in the SDR standard (SDR material), and rendering at a quality conforming to the HDR standard (second quality) requires image data created in the HDR standard (HDR material). Furthermore, to actually display image data (display data) rendered at the first quality at the first quality, the display device (monitor) must be compatible with the SDR standard, and to actually display image data (display data) rendered at the second quality at the second quality, the display device (monitor) must be compatible with the HDR standard. It is known that when image data rendered at the second quality conforming to the HDR standard is displayed on a non-HDR display that does not support the HDR standard, "blown-out highlights" can occur, in which bright parts of the image appear washed out.

The sub-control board 1200 (image etc. control device 1205) according to this embodiment has the function of executing a drawing process at a first quality using SDR material stored in CGROM 1221, and the function of executing a drawing process at a second quality using HDR material stored in CGROM 1221. The encoder mounted inside or on an external computer of the sub-control board 1200 (image etc. control device 1205) has the function of writing SDR or HDR material raw image data to CGROM 1221 as CG data without changing the corresponding standard, as well as the function of converting raw image data created in the HDR standard, which is a high-quality (second-quality) standard, into raw image data created in the SDR standard, which is a low-quality (first-quality) standard, and writing the CG data to CGROM 1221. Therefore, when CG data created in the HDR standard is stored in CGROM 1221, the sub-control board 1200 (image control device 1205) can perform drawing at the high-quality second quality.

However, in this embodiment, it is preferable that, among the images (including moving images) to be displayed, at least the raw image data that is the source of the "predetermined image" is converted to SDR standard raw image data before being written to CGROM 1221, even if the raw image data is HDR standard CG data that can be created. As a result, even if the original raw image data is HDR material, image control device 1205 generates display data by treating it as SDR material in the drawing process using CG data, and performance display device 70 to which the display data is sent displays the image at the first quality that conforms to the SDR standard.

As described above, even HDR material can be converted to SDR material and stored in CGROM 1221. This allows the pachinko machine 1000 according to this embodiment to send display image data created in the SDR standard to the effect display device 70, preventing overexposure when the effect display device 70 does not support the HDR standard. The reason for this configuration is that the LCD display used in the effect display device 70 supports the SDR standard but does not necessarily support the HDR standard. Furthermore, for example, when a gaming machine is reused, it may be combined with an LCD display with different performance, reducing the risk of overexposure occurring when combined with the effect display device 70.

Note that "predetermined images" that are HDR material but are to be converted to SDR material specifically refer to, for example, moving images displayed during a jackpot (special game). Long live-action movies (several minutes long) are sometimes used for moving images displayed during a jackpot, and this is because the raw image data for such moving images is often shot in HDR format. It may also be applied to images displayed under specific circumstances that are relatively rarely combined with dynamically changing images such as changing symbols, such as moving images displayed during gameplay demo effects or images on the result screen displayed at the end of a jackpot or rush. Alternatively, CG data in SDR format may be stored for all images used in effect displays.

Furthermore, while the sub-control board 1200 (image control device 1205) has been described as having the functionality to render images at a quality conforming to the SDR standard (first quality) and a quality conforming to the HDR standard (second quality), this embodiment is not limited to a combination of the SDR standard and the HDR standard, and when multiple standards with different image qualities are supported, an image conforming to a high-quality standard may be converted into an image conforming to a lower-quality standard and then stored in the CGROM 1221.

<Drawing process>
The following describes in detail how the image control circuit 1251 draws display data when it receives an image control command from the image control process (image control means 1212) in the pachinko machine 1000 equipped with the one-chip sub-control board 1200. As described above, the image control command is stored in the command buffer 1233 of the sub-control RAM 1203, and the image control circuit 1251 can receive various commands included in the image control command by accessing the command buffer 1233.

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing procedure for drawing processing. Figure 66 shows the processing executed during one frame. Figure 68 shows a detailed processing procedure for command analysis in step S1202. In the following explanation, as an example, we will explain a case where the frame buffer 1232 has a double buffer configuration (a configuration in which parallel processing is performed while switching between the display frame buffer and the drawing frame buffer), but the pachinko machine 1000 according to this embodiment may also be configured to use a frame buffer that can store frame data for three or more frames.

The processes shown in Figure 66 are mainly executed by the drawing circuit 1253. If the drawing circuit 1253 is divided into a drawing control means that controls the progress of the drawing process and a drawing execution means that actually executes the drawing, the processes of steps S1201 to S1207 on the left side of Figure 66 are drawing control processes executed by the drawing control means, and the processes of steps S1211 to S1212 on the right side are drawing execution processes executed by the drawing execution means. As shown in Figure 66, the drawing control processes and drawing execution processes are executed in parallel within one frame. Note that if the image control device 1205 is implemented by software processing, the drawing control means may be implemented by, for example, a CPU (or CPU process), and the drawing execution means may be implemented by, for example, a GPU.

In the drawing circuit 1253, when a new frame begins, the drawing control means passes the display list created in step S1204 for the previous frame to the drawing execution means and commands it to start drawing in the drawing frame buffer (step S1201). The drawing frame buffer for this frame is frame buffer 1232, which was the display frame buffer for the previous frame (see step S1207, described below). Upon receiving the command in step S1201, the drawing execution means creates a display image (frame data) in the drawing frame buffer by sequentially executing the drawing codes written in the display list (step S1211).

Following step S1201, the drawing control means accesses the command buffer 1233 and analyzes one or more commands stored in the command buffer 1233 (step S1202). That is, command analysis is performed once per frame. The detailed processing procedure for command analysis is shown in Figure 68, but in command analysis for commands related to the display of effect images (effect commands and some trigger commands), the reference address of the CG data to be used when setting effect data or scene data is set. At this time, the preloader circuit 1256 is called, and if the target CG data is stored in CGROM 1221, the CG data, etc. (including vertex data) is transferred to the read cache 1234, and the transfer destination is set as the reference address of the CG data, etc. (preloader function).

Next, the preloader circuit 1256 recalculates the display list based on the results of the command analysis in step S1202 (step S1203). Specifically, since the command analysis in step S1202 determines that the CG data targeted by the rendering commands included in the display list has been transferred to the read cache 1234, the preloader circuit 1256 rewrites the reference address of the CG data in the display list to the transfer destination address of the read cache 1234 and outputs the re-created display list.

Next, when the drawing control means receives the output of the display list recreated by the preloader circuit 1256 (step S1204), it queries the drawing execution means and waits until the drawing execution commanded in step S1201 is completed (step S1205).

When drawing execution is complete, the drawing control means waits for the execution of a V blank interrupt (same as a Vsync interrupt, vertical synchronization interrupt) (step S1206). For example, after the time for two V blanks (2V blanks) has elapsed, the drawing control means instructs the drawing execution means to execute a V blank interrupt, and the drawing execution means generates a V blank interrupt (step S1212). Note that the time for one V blank (1V blank) is 1/60 seconds if the vertical scanning frequency (refresh rate) is 60 Hz, for example. In this case, 2V blanks is 1/30 seconds.

Finally, the drawing control means swaps the display frame buffer and drawing frame buffer in the frame buffer 1232 (step S1207), and when the next frame starts, returns to step S1201.

To summarize the progress of the drawing process over time, in the first frame when a display list (drawing command) is received, the command is analyzed and the display list is recreated. In the second frame, frame data is drawn in the drawing frame buffer based on the display list created in the first frame, while in parallel with this, the command analysis associated with the reception of the next display list (drawing command) occurs and the display list for the next frame is recreated. Then, at the end of the second frame, the drawing frame buffer becomes the display frame buffer through a frame buffer swap. In the third frame, the frame data in the display frame buffer (the frame data drawn in the second frame) is displayed on the performance display device 70 by the display circuit 1257, and the frame data for the next frame is drawn in the new drawing frame buffer based on the display list recreated in the second frame, and the display list for the next frame is also recreated.

As described above, in this embodiment, the drawing control process and the drawing execution process are executed in parallel on a frame-by-frame basis, and the double-buffer configuration allows the frame buffers (drawing frame buffer and display frame buffer) to be swapped for each frame. The drawing execution process for the current frame is performed in accordance with the display list created by the drawing control process for the previous frame. This allows display data to be drawn without delay when displaying performance images in consecutive frames, and as a result, it is expected that the output of display data by the display circuit 1257 (image display on the performance display device 70) will proceed without delay between frames.

Incidentally, the sub-control CPU 1201 (performance control process, image control process) of the sub-control board 1200 according to this embodiment, like the performance control CPU 201 of the performance control board 200 in the first embodiment, uses a watchdog timer to monitor the execution of software processing and hardware failures, etc. The watchdog timer can be periodically reset (cleared) to monitor the continuity of the target function. In the first embodiment, the performance control side main processing by the performance control CPU 201 clears the watchdog timer (step S814 in Figure 49) during loop processing in units of one frame time (steps S814 to S822 in Figure 49). In this embodiment as well, it is necessary to clear the watchdog timer every time one frame time has elapsed.

Figure 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing procedure for clearing the watchdog timer. Below, we will explain an example of the watchdog timer clearing process performed by the sub-control CPU 1201 (image control process) of this embodiment, with reference to Figure 67.

The processing shown in Figure 67 is executed by the image control process between the execution of step S1207 in Figure 66 for a certain frame and step S1201, when the drawing processing for the next frame begins.

As described in the drawing process of Figure 66, when frame buffer swapping is performed in the drawing circuit 1253 (step S1207), the image control process disables interrupts as preprocessing for clearing the watchdog timer (step S1221).

Next, the image control process clears the watchdog timer (step S1222). The watchdog timer is cleared, for example, by writing a specified clear word (value) to a specific port (WDT clear register) in shared memory 1231.

Next, the image control process executes other update processes, other than clearing the watchdog timer, that write values while interrupts are disabled (step S1223). Examples of such update processes include updating flag values for fan error detection.

Finally, the image control process disables interrupts (step S1224) and loop processing for the next frame begins.

According to the processing procedure shown in Figure 67, no drawing-related commands are executed between the execution of a frame buffer swap (screen swap command) and the clearing of the watchdog timer. Thus, by clearing the watchdog timer at a predetermined timing between drawing processes that are repeatedly executed on a frame-by-frame basis, it is possible to achieve appropriate program abnormality monitoring using the watchdog timer even in gaming machines that perform drawing processes using a double-buffer configuration. Note that the clearing timing shown in Figure 67 is just one example, and any other predetermined timing may be used as long as it is every frame time and is a timing when drawing-related processes are not being executed.

Figure 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing procedure for command analysis. The command analysis shown in Figure 68 corresponds to the processing of step S1202 in Figure 66. The command analysis may be configured to be performed by the control means in the image control device 1205, or may be configured to be performed by the image control process (image control means 1212).

As shown in FIG. 68, the drawing control means accesses the command buffer 1233 and repeats steps S1302 to S1353 until there are no more unprocessed commands in the command buffer 1233 (steps S1301 and S1305). When there are no more unprocessed commands in the command buffer 1233 in step S1305, command analysis ends. The processing of steps S1302 to S1353 is described below.

First, the drawing control means retrieves one unprocessed command from the command buffer 1233 in the order in which it was stored in the command buffer 1233 (step S1302).

Here, command buffer 1233 stores multiple commands. These multiple commands can be either a single command with a single meaning or a series of multiple commands that collectively have a single meaning. Such a series of commands (including those consisting of a single command) with a single meaning is called a command set. In this embodiment, a specific command (called a key command) is set to distinguish between command sets that collectively have a single meaning, at least for a series of multiple commands. That is, a command set that has a single meaning consists of a key command and other commands (hereinafter also referred to as entity commands). Note that a command set that has a single meaning consisting of a single entity command does not need to have a key command set if it can be distinguished as consisting of a single command, but a key command may be set in the same way as a command set that has multiple entity commands. In the processing example shown in FIG. 68, a key command is written after (i.e., at the end of) one or more entity commands that make up a command set.

Next, the drawing control means determines whether the command acquired in step S1302 (hereinafter, the acquired command) is a key command (step S1303). If the acquired command is a key command (YES in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1311. If the acquired command is a command other than a key command (a real command) (NO in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, the drawing control means temporarily stores the acquired commands in work memory or the like, and then performs the determination in step S1305. Note that in step S1304, the acquired commands are temporarily stored in a format (e.g., list format) that allows the saved order to be maintained. Therefore, in the following explanation, this temporary storage destination will be referred to as the "tentative list."

As mentioned above, a command set consisting of multiple commands has a key command written at the end. Therefore, when multiple commands that make up a command set are sequentially retrieved from command buffer 1233, steps S1302, S1303, and S1304 are repeated until the final key command is retrieved, and one or more entity commands other than the key command in the command set are temporarily saved in the provisional list in the order in which they are written in the command set.

When a key command is acquired as the final command in the command set, step S1303 returns YES, and processing from step S1311 onwards is executed for one or more entity commands held in the temporary list in the order they were held.

In step S1311, the drawing control means checks the type of each command for one or more entity commands held in the temporary list in the order they are held in the temporary list, and executes the processing of steps S1312 to S1353 corresponding to the type.

If the command type is determined to be a system command in step S1311, the library processing (error or inspection processing) specified by the command is executed (step S1312). Then, proceed to step S1305.

If the command type is a sound command related to audio output in step S1311, the audio control circuit 1259 registers the command or information based on the command in a write buffer (not shown) for writing data to the port that executes sound output (step S1321). When the data is written to the write buffer in step S1321, the audio control circuit 1259 retrieves compressed audio data from the audio ROM 1222 based on the registered data, decodes it, performs effect processing, and then sends it to the speaker 11 via the sound I/F (not shown) to output audio. After step S1321, the process proceeds to step S1305.

If the command type is a numerical command related to numerical setting in step S1311, the numerical information indicated by the command is updated in the secondary control RAM 1203 (step S1331). Then, proceed to step S1305.

If the command type in step S1311 is an effect command related to image output, effect data corresponding to that command is set. The effect data is a collection of scene data that is played at each trigger of the game, and the CG data, motion data, etc. used for each scene data are set in the effect data set (step S1341). Then, proceed to step S1305.

If the command type is a trigger command indicating a specific trigger in step S1311, it is checked whether scene data for the trigger corresponding to the command exists (step S1351), and if so, playback of that scene data is set (step S1352). Scene data is a collection of video and audio data that is played in response to a trigger. After processing step S1351 to determine whether a corresponding trigger exists or step S1352, it is checked whether the command is a frame update target command (step S1353). A frame update target command is a specified command that ends command analysis for the same frame at that point and skips to the next process. If it is not a frame update target command, proceed to step S1305; if it is a frame update target command, command analysis for the frame ends.

If the process proceeds to step S1305, it checks whether there are any unprocessed commands remaining in the command buffer 1233, and if there are, it returns to step S1302; if there are no unprocessed commands remaining, it ends command analysis for that frame.

As described above, in this embodiment, a specific command (key command) is set at the end of the command set registered in the command buffer 1233, and in the command analysis process, a command is obtained from the command buffer 1233 once per frame time, and the key command is first confirmed. Then, until a key command appears among the obtained commands, the commands obtained from the command buffer 1233 are temporarily saved in a temporary list, and only after the key command is confirmed is analysis processing performed on the series of commands (actual commands) temporarily saved in the temporary list.

This type of command analysis allows one or more commands that make up a command set to be analyzed in the same frame. For example, during command analysis in a certain frame, if one frame of time elapses while multiple commands that make up a single command set are retrieved one by one from command buffer 1233, the multiple commands that make up the single command set will be retrieved across frames (cross-frame command reception). When this cross-frame command reception occurs, conventional command analysis processing would perform command analysis on the commands retrieved in that frame, resulting in command analysis being performed separately for the previous and subsequent frames for the multiple actual commands that make up a single command set. As a result, image control processing such as drawing may be performed in an unintended combination, potentially causing abnormalities in the output image (including audio and error notifications). The command analysis in this embodiment can solve these problems by not analyzing individual commands until all of the multiple commands that have a single meaning as a whole (multiple entity commands that make up a single command set) have been retrieved from the command buffer 1233, and by analyzing the commands in the same frame when a key command is confirmed, it is possible to prevent output abnormalities caused by image control processing such as unintended drawing.

As a variant, in the game standby state, interrupt processing does not occur due to pattern changes triggered by the game ball entering the game, and design adjustments are relatively easy. Therefore, in the game standby state, the number and length of multiple commands included in one command set can be adjusted so that the multiple commands that make up one command set are not acquired across frames.

Furthermore, according to the command analysis in this embodiment, commands related to drawing (performance commands, trigger commands related to scene data playback) are not actually drawn at the end of command analysis, but are output to the display list as drawing candidates. On the other hand, other related commands can be subjected to predetermined processing at the end of command analysis.

Furthermore, according to the command analysis in this embodiment, the actual commands stored in the command buffer 1233 are analyzed in the order in which they were stored, so the execution order of the drawing commands is maintained even after analysis, and the drawing priority in the display list is determined.

In this embodiment, a key command may be written in the first command constituting a command set and stored in the command buffer 1233. In this case, one or more commands acquired between the time a new key command is found and the time the next key command is found are temporarily saved in a temporary list, and when the next key command is found, the processing of steps S1311 to S1353 is executed for one or more commands temporarily saved in the temporary list. In addition, command analysis of entity commands other than key commands may be executed first.

<Drawing transparent images>
The effect image displayed on the effect display device 70 is a result of superimposing images on multiple layers, such as a display of decorative pattern changes and display of pending changes, in front of a background image. The CG data stored in the CG ROM 1221 is the raw image data that is the source of the images on each layer, so when drawing display data (frame data) in the drawing process, a process of superimposing multiple CG data is performed.

Each piece of CG data has a transparency (alpha value) set on a pixel-by-pixel basis that indicates the degree of transparency of the image that overlaps behind it. When multiple pieces of CG data are overlaid, the composite image must be drawn by proportionally dividing the color tone and brightness of the front and back images on a pixel-by-pixel basis in the overlapping areas, depending on the transparency of the front image. On the other hand, if the transparency of the front image is 0%, there is no need to draw the image that overlaps behind it in the composite image. Hereinafter, an image that needs to have the back image transparent will be called a transparent image, and an image that does not need to have the back image transparent will be called an opaque image.

However, when drawing a composite image using transparent images, as mentioned above, it is necessary to draw both the foreground and background images, which creates the problem of a larger data size for the composite image than when it is composed of a single image. Also, if the resolution of the two images before compositing is high, the processing required for compositing can take a long time.

To address this issue, the pachinko machine 1000 according to this embodiment can employ an appropriate combination of the following methods 1 to 3 in the drawing process. The following compression is performed on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

(Method 1) When a specific first presentation image (CG data) is drawn in front of another second presentation image (CG data), if the transparency of the first presentation image is less than a specific level (e.g., 80%), at least one of the first or second presentation images is compressed at a compression rate that varies based on the transparency of the first presentation image, and then a composite image is drawn in which the first and second presentation images are combined according to that transparency.

In the case of Method 1, for example, the first image for presentation is compressed using a compression rate that increases as the transparency of the first image for presentation increases, and a composite image is drawn by adjusting the color tone and brightness of the target pixels of the compressed first image for presentation and the target pixels of the uncompressed second image for presentation (which may be compressed at a lower compression rate than the first image for presentation) in proportion to the transparency of the first image for presentation.

If the transparency of the first effect image, which is a transparent image, is relatively low, when it is overlaid on the second effect image, at least one of the images becomes difficult to see in the composite image. Therefore, even if the original images in the overlapping areas are compressed, as in Method 1, the impact on the appearance of the composite image can be minimized. More specifically, if the transparency of the first effect image is high, the second effect image becomes easily visible in the composite image, so the first effect image does not need to be displayed as clearly (i.e., a high compression rate can be set). On the other hand, since the second effect image is easily visible in the composite image, it is preferable not to compress it, or if compressed, to set a low compression rate. Thus, Method 1 can increase the compression rate of the entire composite image while minimizing the impact on the appearance of the composite image, which is also expected to have the effect of reducing the image size of the composite image. While the specific degree of change in compression rate based on transparency is not particularly limited, maintaining a linear or logarithmic relationship between transparency and compression rate can prevent the composite image from appearing unnatural, even when adjacent pixels with continuously changing transparency are present.

(Method 2) When a specific first presentation image (CG data) is drawn in front of another second presentation image (CG data), if the transparency of the first presentation image exceeds a specific level (e.g., 80%), the transparency of the first presentation image is treated as a specific high transparency (e.g., 100%), and at least one of the first or second presentation images is compressed at a compression rate corresponding to this high transparency, after which a composite image is drawn in which the first and second presentation images are combined according to that transparency.

When the transparency of the first presentation image exceeds a predetermined level, the appearance of the composite image overlaid with the second presentation image becomes less different from the appearance of the composite image at 100% transparency, and the second presentation image must be displayed clearly. Therefore, in Method 2, when the transparency of the first presentation image exceeds a predetermined level, the transparency of the first presentation image is uniformly treated as a high transparency close to 100%, and at least the first or second presentation image is compressed at a compression rate corresponding to that high transparency. In this case, the visibility of the first presentation image in the composite image is significantly lower than that of the second presentation image (it may be barely visible), so even if the first presentation image is compressed at a fairly high compression rate, the impact on the appearance of the composite image can be minimized. On the other hand, the second presentation image is uncompressed or compressed at a low rate because it must be displayed clearly in the composite image. According to Method 2, like Method 1, the first or second effect image can be compressed based on the transparency of the first effect image, which not only increases the compression rate of the entire composite image, but also reduces the processing load by performing uniform processing with the transparency of the first effect image set to a specific high transparency.

Note that the "predetermined first effect image" in Methods 1 and 2 above can be selected from any of the transparent effect images displayed during gameplay effects, but an effect image that suggests the degree of expectation through color (hues) is particularly suitable. More specifically, it is an effect image that is displayed on all or part of the display screen during symbol fluctuations, etc., in any of several colors (including color patterns such as rainbow colors or manufacturer patterns). This could include effect images for so-called chance-up effects, as well as effect images that show changes in the state of the variable hold display (such as a change to red hold or a change to a manufacturer pattern). Since effect images that suggest the degree of expectation through color (hues) like this are displayed at various times during gameplay effects, reducing the image size of the composite image to be drawn can contribute to reducing processing load.

(Method 3) When a specific image indicating a game mode is drawn in front of another image, a composite image is drawn without changing the compression rate of the specific image and the other image depending on the transparency of the specific image. It is preferable that the compression rate of the specific image drawn in front is equal to or lower than the compression rate of the other image drawn in the back (it may be 0). The compression rates of the specific image and the other image do not have to be 0 (i.e., no compression), but are preferably lower than the lower limit of the compression rate that can be determined by Method 1.

Unlike Method 1, Method 3 reduces the processing load of the compression process for drawing the composite image by setting the compression level of the overlaid images (specific image and separate image) so that it does not change depending on the transparency of the foreground image. Specifically, in Method 3, a "specific image instructing a game play method" is, for example, an information image that advises "hit right" or "hit left" as the recommended launch position for the game ball, or, in the case of a slot machine, an information image for push order navigation that instructs the order in which to press the stop buttons. Such specific images have a high notification priority to the player, and because their display priority is high even when they overlap with another image, the compression level is not changed based on the transparency, and the composite image is drawn while maintaining the definition of the specific image.

<CG data prefetch>
In the above description of the drawing process, the preloader circuit 1256 executes a preloader as a function to prevent image data waits due to read latency from the CGROM 1221 during display list analysis or drawing command execution. The preloader analyzes the display list in advance, spending one frame before executing a drawing command, and performs read caching of CG data to speed up read access, thereby rewriting reference addresses in the display list. However, because the preloader requires one frame, image display resulting from the execution of a drawing command is delayed by one frame compared to audio output (including lamp illumination) executed based on a sound command obtained from the command buffer 1233 in the same frame. However, even if the image display is delayed by one frame, the delay is not noticeable to the player.

Here, the pachinko machine 1000 according to this embodiment may be configured to execute the prefetching process described below as an alternative to the preloader process described above.

Prefetching is a command process that is executed in response to the reception of a prefetch command equivalent to a drawing command, and is executed by the prefetch circuit 1258. If a prefetch command is executed while the drawing circuit 1253 is analyzing a subsequent display list, the prefetch circuit 1258 executes a process to copy CG data from the CGROM 1221 to the read cache 1234.

In other words, prefetching can be performed in parallel with the subsequent analysis of the display list by the drawing circuit 1253, and furthermore, during prefetching processing, drawing processes unrelated to prefetching (specifically, decoding movies or textures that do not access CG data in CGROM 1221) can be performed in parallel. Note that the CG data read and cached by prefetching may be any type of image data, but can, for example, at least be "predetermined effect images that are displayed on the screen as the patterns change," such as images for hold displays or background images.

By performing prefetching as described above, the CG data targeted by the drawing commands included in the display list will hit the read cache during the drawing process after prefetching, allowing the display list to be analyzed with shorter latency than when drawing is performed using a preloader.

The above has described the characteristic configurations and processes that can be realized by the one-chip sub-control board 1200 in the pachinko machine 1000 according to this embodiment, including the method for setting the read cache destination for CG data, the processing method when an unused error is detected, the method for saving large-sized images to CGROM, the method for saving HDR material to CGROM, and various processing methods related to drawing processing using a double buffer configuration. These configurations and processes can also be realized in the pachinko machine 1000 according to the first embodiment, as long as it is equipped with corresponding configurations (for example, a preloader circuit and a prefetch circuit). However, this does not apply to configurations and processes that require the shared memory 1231.

3. Third embodiment (slot machine)
A gaming machine 2000 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. The gaming machine 2000 is a slot machine in which games are played by betting gaming media (game value) such as gaming medals. The gaming machine 2000 may also be a controlled gaming machine (sometimes referred to as an enclosed gaming machine or medal-less gaming machine) that does not use physical gaming media, in which case the gaming media (game value) used for playing games is electronic information. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the gaming machine 2000 is a slot machine that uses gaming medals as gaming media.

<Configuration of slot machine>
FIG. 69 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 2000.

As shown in Figure 69, the cabinet of the gaming machine 2000 is composed of a base 2001 and a front door 2002 (also called a front cover or front door) that uses an opening/closing axis as a support axis to open/close the front face of the base 2001. Although not shown in Figure 69, when the front door 2002 is opened, the opening is detected by a door switch 2015, which will be described later.

The base 2001 houses a power supply unit including a power switch 2011, a medal payout device 2049 including a hopper 2050, and a symbol display device 2038 including three reels 2039 (individually, a left reel 2039a, a center reel 2039b, and a right reel 2039c, corresponding to the left and right arrangement when the gaming machine 2000 is viewed from the front). The medal payout device 2049 can pay out medals from a payout opening 2053 (see Figure 70).

In addition, a main control board case 2016 that houses a main control board 2060 is attached to the rear surface on the inner side of the base 2001. The main control board case 2016 and main control board 2060 are attached in a relatively visible position above the pattern display device 2038 so that the state of the crimped portion of the main control board case 2016 can be easily visually confirmed when the front door 2002 is opened.

Main control board case 2016 is provided with a crimped portion as a sealing member for sealing the mounting surface of main control board 2060. Main control board case 2016, which is fixed in a closed state and covers the mounting surface of main control board 2060, is configured so that it cannot be opened (sealed) unless the crimped portion is destroyed. In other words, main control board 2060 cannot be physically accessed from the outside unless the crimped portion is destroyed. Furthermore, because main control board case 2016 is made of a transparent material (e.g., transparent plastic resin), the mounting surface of main control board 2060 remains sealed and visible from the outside. By providing a crimped portion in this manner, a high level of security is ensured for main control board 2060. In addition, a sticker (e.g., a sticker recording the opening of the crimped portion) is affixed to the surface of main control board case 2016 to certify that the main control board housed therein is a genuine main control board 2060.

Also, as shown in FIG. 69, a transparent board case that houses a sub-control board 2080 is attached above the display window 2017 on the back side of the front door 2002 (near the back side of the image display device 2021 shown in FIG. 70). The sub-control board 2080 is electrically connected to the main control board 2060 by a harness or optical fiber (neither of which are shown).

Figure 70 is a front view of the gaming machine 2000.

As shown in FIG. 70, a display window 2017 is provided near the center of the front of the gaming machine 2000 so that part of the reel 2039 (symbols) can be seen. Above the display window 2017, an image display device 2021 is provided to perform effects (display images). Also, below the display window 2017, a start switch 2034 and a stop switch 2035 (left stop switch 2035a, middle stop switch 2035b, right stop switch 2035c) are provided. Furthermore, above the start switch 2034 and stop switch 2035, and in the portion protruding from the bottom of the display window 2017, various operation switches and the like to be operated by the player are provided.

Figure 71 is a top view of a portion of the gaming machine 2000. Figure 71 shows the area of the gaming machine 2000 where various operation switches and other components are located, as viewed from above.

As shown in Figure 71, from the left side of the figure, there are arranged display devices (stored coin count display LED 2045, acquired coin count display LED 2047, status display LED 2048), some of the operation switches (1 bet switch 2033a, 3 bet switch 2033b, settlement switch 2036), a cross key (also called a "cursor key") 2022, a menu button 2023, a performance button 2024, and a game medal insertion slot 2026.

Note that the arrangement of each component shown in Figures 69 to 71 is merely an example of an arrangement in the gaming machine 2000 according to this embodiment, and the components do not necessarily need to be arranged in the illustrated locations and may be changed to any location. Specifically, for example, the display device may be arranged to the left of the display window 2017. Furthermore, all of the components shown in Figures 70 and 71 do not necessarily need to be arranged. Specifically, for example, if the effect button 2024 also serves the function of the menu button 2023, the menu button 2023 need not be arranged. In this way, reducing the number of components by sharing functions not only has the effect of reducing the manufacturing costs of parts, but also has the effect of preventing erroneous operation by the player by spacing out the operation switches. Furthermore, the number of reels 2039 in the symbol display device 2038 is not limited to three as in this example, and may be two, four, or the like (however, multiple reels are preferable). Details of the reel 2039 (symbol display device 2038) will be described later with reference to Figure 73 and subsequent drawings.

Figure 72 is a block diagram showing an overview of the controls in the gaming machine 2000. Figure 72 shows representative examples of the components required to perform each control in the gaming machine 2000, and each of these components will be described in detail. Note that in Figure 72, solid arrows connecting components indicate the input/output direction of signals, etc.

The gaming machine 2000 is equipped with, as representative control boards, a main control board (also referred to as a "main control board," "main control means," or "main control means") 2060 that controls the game, and a sub-control board (also referred to as a "sub-control board," "sub-control means," or "sub-control means") 2080 that controls the presentation, etc.

<Main control board>
The main control board 2060 includes an input port 2061, an output port 2062, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 2063, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 2064, and a main control CPU (Central Processing Unit) 2065. Note that Fig. 72 is merely an example, and the configuration of the main control board 2060 is not limited to this.

The input port 2061 is a connection point through which signals are input to the main control CPU 2065 from gaming peripheral devices (for example, various operation switches such as the bet switch 2033). Generally, the input port 2061 is made up of multiple ports.

The output port 2062 is a connection section through which signals are output from the main control CPU 2065 to peripheral gaming devices (e.g., motor 2040, etc.). In other words, the main control board 2060 (main control CPU 2065) and these peripheral gaming devices are electrically connected via the input port 2061 and output port 2062. Like the input port 2061, the output port 2062 generally consists of multiple ports.

RAM 2063 is a storage device (also called "storage means") that can read and write data, and stores various data (e.g., timer values) necessary for the main control CPU 2065 (main control board 2060) to control the game. RAM 2063 is also called main memory.

ROM 2064 is a read-only memory device (also referred to as "storage means") that stores programs and various data (e.g., data tables) necessary for the main control CPU 2065 (main control board 2060) to control the game.

The main control CPU 2065 refers to the CPU mounted on the main control board 2060, and controls the game (for example, drawing winning roles) according to the programs stored in the ROM 2064. The main control CPU 2065 also has multiple built-in registers, such as A register through L register (also called general-purpose registers) and a data transmission register (also called built-in register).

The main control board 2060 of the gaming machine 2000 is equipped with an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) that includes RAM 2063, ROM 2064, and a main control CPU 2065. It should be noted that RAM 2063 and ROM 2064 may also be installed outside the MPU (but on the main control board 2060). Similarly, the sub-control board 2080 (described below) is equipped with an MPU that includes RAM 2083, ROM 2084, a performance control CPU 2085, and an image control CPU 2086, but RAM 2083 and ROM 2084 may also be installed outside the MPU (but on the sub-control board 2080).

On the main control board 2060, the game is controlled by the operation of the main control CPU 2065 (which may also be considered an MPU), and each of the means of the main control board 2060 shown in FIG. 72 (role selection means 2069, reel control means 2070, display determination means 2071, payout means 2072, RT control means 2075, external signal transmission means 2077, control command transmission means 2078, etc.) is realized.

An overview of each of the above means will be provided below. The winning combination lottery means 2069 extracts a random number generated by the random number generation means for the lottery in a game played using a predetermined amount of gaming value at a predetermined timing operated by the player (for example, when the start switch 2034 is turned on), and determines whether or not a winning combination has been achieved, and what kind of combination has been achieved, based on the value of the extracted random number.

When the start switch 2034 is turned on, the reel control means 2070 drives the motor 2040 to rotate the reel 2039. Then, when one of the stop switches 2035 is operated after the reel 2039 has reached a certain speed, the reel control means 2070 determines the stop position of the reel 2039 corresponding to that stop switch 2035 based on the result of the role selection by the role selection means 2069, and drives the motor 2040 to stop the rotation of that reel 2039 at the determined stop position.

The display determination means 2071 determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the pay line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination when all reels 2039 have stopped.

When the display determination means determines that the combination of symbols displayed on the active line matches a combination of symbols corresponding to a minor win, the payout means 2072 pays out an amount of game value (e.g., a predetermined number of game medals) corresponding to the combination of symbols. Note that if the combination of symbols displayed on the active line matches a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay, the payout means 2072 may automatically bet an amount of game value equal to the game value bet on the game.

The RT control means 2075 determines whether the RT (replay time) transition conditions are met based on the results of the role selection by the role selection means 2069 and the results of the judgment by the display judgment means 2071, and transitions to RT when it is determined that the RT transition conditions are met (including transitions from RT state to non-RT state, and vice versa).

The external signal transmitting means 2077 transmits external signals to the external terminal board 2100. For example, information regarding the operation of special devices and continuous device operation devices, information regarding RT and AT, error information, information regarding the payout of game value and bets, etc., are transmitted as external signals from the output port 2062. When the external signal transmitted from the output port 2062 is input to the external terminal board 2100, it is transmitted to an external device (e.g., the hall computer 2200) connected to the external terminal board 2100. As a result, the hall computer 2200 can obtain game information of the gaming machine 2000 (e.g., activation and continuation of AT, payout of game medals, etc.) from the received external signal, which can be useful for managing the gaming machine 2000. Furthermore, the hall computer 2200 can output game information of the gaming machine 2000 to a data counter or the like based on the received external signal. In addition, in the case of a data counter or the like located near the gaming machine 2000, it may be connected to the external terminal board 2100 and receive external signals directly from the external terminal board 2100.

The control command transmitting means 2078 transmits various information (control commands) required for the sub-control board 2080 to control effects, etc. from the main control board 2060 to the sub-control board 2080. Information transmitted by the control command transmitting means 2078 includes information that game value has been bet, information based on the lottery results for roles (winning roles), information that the reels 2039 have started to spin, information related to the operation of the stop switch 2035, information that the reels 2039 have stopped, information on the stopping positions of each reel 2039 (the symbols that stopped on the pay line), information on winning roles, the game status (for example, the presence or absence of AT or ART), and information on the internal status.

<Gaming peripherals>
Among the peripheral gaming devices connected to the main control board 2060, the gaming medal selector 2027 will be described.

The game medal insertion slot 2026 shown in Figure 72 is an insertion slot that accepts game medals that have been inserted. The inserted game medals are sent to the inside of the game medal selector 2027. The game medal selector 2027 is equipped with a passage sensor 2028, a blocker 2029, and an insertion sensor 2030, and is electrically connected to the main control board 2060. Note that in Figure 72, the dashed line with an arrow shown near the game medal selector 2027 indicates the processing flow when a game medal is inserted.

Game medals received through the game medal insertion port 2026 are guided through a series of passages (game medal passages) formed inside the gaming machine 2000 and pass through the game medal selector 2027. Game medals that flow down the game medal passages are eventually sent to the hopper 2050 or returned from the payout outlet 2053.

To explain in more detail, the treated game medals are guided into the game medal selector 2027 from its entrance and are first detected by a path sensor (sometimes called a selector path sensor) 2028. Here, the gaming machine 2000 has two game medal paths (game medal paths) for the inserted game medals, depending on whether or not the game medal is permitted to be accepted (permitted/not permitted). The permitted/not permitted status is determined by a blocker 2029 located downstream of the path sensor 2028.

When the blocker 2029 is in a state that permits the acceptance of game medals (permitted position), the inserted game medal is guided to a permitted game medal passage. At this time, the game medal detected by the passage sensor 2028 flows down the permitted game medal passage and is detected by an insertion sensor 2030 (e.g., multiple optical sensors) located further downstream of the blocker 2029. After that, the game medal is sent out from the exit of the game medal selector 2027 and sent to the hopper 2050. On the other hand, when the blocker 2029 is in a state that does not permit the acceptance of game medals (disallowed position), the inserted game medal is guided to a disallowed game medal passage. At this time, the game medal detected by the passage sensor 2028 flows down the disallowed game medal passage, is sent out from another exit of the game medal selector without being detected by the insertion sensor 2030, and is returned from the payout outlet 2053.

In the gaming machine 2000, the blocker 2029 does not allow the acceptance of gaming medals (is in a non-permitted state) during play (from the time the reel 2039 starts spinning until all reels 2039 stop spinning (or until the end of the payout of gaming medals, if gaming medals are being paid out)). In other words, the blocker 2029 allows the acceptance of gaming medals (is in a permitted state) at least when no game is being played.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine 2000 is a managed gaming machine that does not use physical gaming media (gaming medals), there is no need to physically insert gaming medals, so the gaming medal insertion slot 2026 and gaming medal selector 2027 are not required. Furthermore, since gaming medals are not paid out, the gaming medal payout device 2049 is also not required. However, if the gaming machine 2000 is a managed gaming machine, a means is required to manage the number of held, number of bets, number of payouts, etc., for the gaming value of the electronic information used instead of gaming medals.

Among the gaming peripherals connected to the main control board 2060, we will explain the operation switch 2032.

The main control board 2060 is electrically connected to the operation switches 2032 operated by the player, including the bet switch 2033 (1 bet switch 2033a, 3 bet switch 2033b), start switch 2034, stop switch 2035 (left stop switch 2035a, middle stop switch 2035b, right stop switch 2035c), and settlement switch 2036.

The bet switch 2033 is a switch operated by the player when betting accumulated gaming medals. The gaming machine 2000 includes, as examples of bet switches 2033, a 1 bet switch 2033a for betting one gaming medal and a 3 bet switch (MAX bet switch) 2033b for betting three (prescribed number, maximum number) gaming medals, but is not limited to this configuration. For example, a 2 bet switch for betting two gaming medals may also be included, or any one bet switch may be included.

Note that by operating the 1 bet switch 2033a multiple times, multiple game medals can be bet. Specifically, by operating the 1 bet switch 2033a twice, two game medals can be bet, and by operating the 1 bet switch 2033a three times, three game medals can be bet. Furthermore, if the 3 bet switch 2033b is operated (pressed) when one or more game medals (but less than three) have been bet, the number of game medals that is three minus the number already bet can be bet. Specifically, for example, if the 3 bet switch 2033b is operated when one game medal has been bet, two game medals will be bet.

The start switch 2034 is a switch operated by the player to spin the reels 2039 (left reel 2039a, center reel 2039b, right reel 2039c). In other words, it is a switch operated by the player to start playing.

The stop switches 2035 are switches operated by the player to stop the rotation of the reels 2039. In this embodiment, three stop switches 2035 are provided (left stop switch 2035a, middle stop switch 2035b, and right stop switch 2035c). The three stop switches 2035 correspond one-to-one to the three reels 2039 (left reel 2039a, middle reel 2039b, and right reel 2039c). For example, the left stop switch 2035a is a switch operated to stop the rotation of the left reel 2039a. The player can operate the three corresponding stop switches 2035 in any order to stop the rotation of the three reels 2039. However, when the instruction function is activated, the player is required to operate the stop switches 2035 in the instructed order to play normally.

The settlement switch 2036 is a switch operated by the player when paying back betted game medals and/or settling accumulated game medals.

Among the gaming peripheral devices connected to the main control board 2060, we will explain the gaming medal display device 2043.

The game medal display device 2043 is a device primarily for displaying information related to game medals, and is configured with a display board 2044. The display board 2044 is electrically connected to the main control board 2060. Although not shown, in reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 2060 and the display board 2044, connecting the main control board 2060 to the relay board, and connecting the relay board to the display board 2044. Alternatively, the main control board 2060 and the display board 2044 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed between them. This can also be applied to other control boards such as those illustrated in FIG. 72. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be used in which one or more other boards (e.g., relay boards) are interposed between the main control board 2060 and the sub-control board 2080.

The display board 2044 is equipped with a stored medal count display LED 2045, an acquired medal count display LED 2047, and a status display LED 2048. Each of these LEDs is located near the operation switch operated by the player, in a position that is always visible to the player. The stored medal count display LED 2045 is a display device that displays the number of stored medals. The acquired medal count display LED 2047 is a display device that displays the number of acquired (paid-out) medals. Note that the acquired medal count display LED 2047 may function as an error information display LED that displays information (error information) indicating the detected error when an error is detected. Furthermore, the acquired medal count display LED 2047 may function as an instruction information display LED that displays information (push order instruction information) for instructing an advantageous operation mode (correct button press order) when the instruction function is activated. The status display LED 2048 is a display device that displays the game status, etc. of the gaming machine 2000, and is composed of, for example, multiple LEDs. Specific examples of "game status, etc." that can be displayed by the status display LED 2048 include "status in which game medals can be inserted," "settlement processing in progress," "status in which game medals have been inserted and the start switch 2034 can be operated," "number of game medals bet," "current setting values when checking or changing settings," and "specified management information."

Of the gaming peripheral devices connected to the main control board 2060, the symbol display device 2038 will be described in detail later, with reference to Figure 73, etc.

Among the gaming peripheral devices connected to the main control board 2060, we will explain the gaming medal payout device 2049.

As shown in Figure 72, the main control board 2060 is electrically connected to the game medal payout device 2049. The game medal payout device 2049 is equipped with a hopper 2050 for storing game medals, a hopper motor 2051 that is driven to pay out game medals stored in the hopper 2050, and a payout sensor 2052 that detects game medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 2051. As mentioned above, game medals inserted (accepted) through the game medal insertion port 2026 are sent to a specified game medal passage and then sent to the hopper 2050.

The payout sensors 2052 are a pair of optical sensors (two sensors) spaced a predetermined distance apart. A paid-out medal is detected by one payout sensor 2052 a predetermined time after it is detected by the other payout sensor 2052, and the main control board 2060 determines whether the medal has been paid out correctly based on the signals from each payout sensor 2052.

For example, if the hopper motor 2051 is driving but the signals from all of the payout sensors 2052 are off, the main control board 2060 will determine that the hopper 2050 is empty, indicating a hopper error (game medals are not being paid out correctly). Also, for example, if the signal from at least one of the payout sensors 2052 remains on, the main control board 2060 will determine that the hopper is clogged with game medals (game medals are not being paid out correctly).

In addition, although not shown in Figure 72, the gaming machine 2000 may be equipped with a sub-tank for storing gaming medals that have overflowed from the hopper 2050, and may further be provided with multiple full sensors for detecting when the sub-tank is full of gaming medals. The full sensor may, for example, be composed of a circuit that energizes multiple full detection sensors when the gaming medals contained in the sub-tank come into contact with them, and a signal (full detection signal) detected by the full sensor is sent to the main control board 2060 (making it possible to implement a full error).

<Switches, external terminal boards>
As shown in FIG. 72, the main control board 2060 is electrically connected to a power switch 2011, a setting key switch 2012, a setting change/reset switch 2013, a setting door switch 2014, a door switch 2015, and an external terminal board 2100.

The power switch 2011 is a switch operated by a hall attendant to turn the gaming machine 2000 on and off.

The setting key switch 2012 is a switch operated by a waiter when checking or changing settings. For example, when a waiter checks a setting, the power is on, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (to the right). Also, when a waiter changes a setting, the power is off, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, rotated 90 degrees clockwise (to the right), and then the power is turned on.

The setting change/reset switch 2013 is a single switch that functions as both a setting change switch (setting switch) and a reset switch. However, these switches may also be provided separately.

The setting change switch is used to change the setting value of the gaming machine 2000. When the setting change/reset switch 2013 is used as a setting change switch, for example, the setting change/reset switch 2013 is operated until the desired setting is reached, and then the start switch 2034 is operated. Note that each time the setting change/reset switch 2013 is operated, the setting value is incremented by "1" ("1" → "2" → ... → "6" → "1" → ...). In the gaming machine 2000 according to this embodiment, the setting value is set to "6 levels," for example, from setting 1 to setting 6.

The reset switch is used to initialize (reset) specific data (e.g., error data) stored in RAM 2063. When the setting change/reset switch 2013 is used as a reset switch, for example, when the setting change/reset switch 2013 is turned on while the power is on, a reset is performed.

The setting door switch 2014 is a switch that detects the opening and closing of a door (not shown) that covers the setting key switch 2012 and the setting change/reset switch 2013. For example, if the setting door switch 2014 is off (closed) and the setting key switch 2012 is on (setting key inserted), an error occurs.

The door switch 2015 is used to detect whether the front door 2002 is open or closed. For example, when the front door 2002 is open (the front of the base is open), the door switch 2015 is turned on.

The external terminal board 2100 is a board that relays and transfers external signals (external end signals) output from part of the output port 2062 to the outside of the gaming machine 2000. This "external signal" is a signal that is output via the external terminal board 2100 to the outside of the gaming machine 2000 (for example, the hall computer 2200 or a data counter installed in the hall). Specifically, information related to the game, such as the bonus status, AT status, number of gaming medals bet and number of medals paid out, as well as information related to the gaming machine, such as errors and power outages, are output as external signals. The external signal is output by the main control board 2060 (external signal transmitting means 2077) and transmitted to the outside via the external terminal board 2100.

<Pattern display device, reel>
In the following, the symbol display device 2038 equipped with a plurality of reels 2039 in the gaming machine 2000 according to this embodiment will be described in detail.

As shown in Figure 72, the motor 2040 of the pattern display device 2038 is electrically connected to the main control board 2060.

Figure 73 is a perspective view of the pattern display device 2038. As shown in Figure 73, the pattern display device 2038 is composed of three reels 2039 (left reel 2039a, center reel 2039b, and right reel 2039c), motors 2040 (see Figure 75) that drive each of the reels 2039, and reel sensors 2041 (see Figure 75) for detecting the position of the reels 2039. The motors 2040 are, for example, stepping motors, and one stepping motor is associated with each reel 2039 to rotate the associated reel 2039. The shafts of each reel 2039, the motors 2040, the reel sensors 2041, etc. are attached and fixed to a reel bracket 2301, which is a support member for the pattern display device 2038.

The symbol display device 2038 also has a back lamp 2310 disposed on the inner surface of each reel 2039 near the reel window (display window 2017 shown in Figure 78). The back lamp 2310 is also attached and fixed to the reel bracket 2301. The back lamp 2310 illuminates each reel 2039 (more precisely, the reel tape 2320) from the inner circumferential surface, thereby prominently displaying the symbols depicted on each reel 2039 while it is rotating and when it is stopped. In particular, when the rotation of the reel 2039 stops, the back lamp 2310 illuminates the inner circumferential surface of the reel 2039 (reel tape 2320), thereby easily displaying the three symbols (nine symbols for the three reels in total) of the reel 2039 that have stopped at the positions corresponding to the top, middle, and bottom rows of the reel window (display window 2017) so that they are easily visible to the player.

Figure 74 is a perspective view showing an example of a back lamp 2310. As shown in Figure 74, the back lamp 2310 is configured as a back lamp unit having a back lamp house 2311, a back lamp board 2312 attached to the back side of the back lamp house 2311, and an attachment member 2313 for attaching the back lamp house 2311 to the reel bracket 2301.

The back lamp board 2312 is mounted with multiple LED elements 2314 that can emit light toward the inner surface of the reel 2039 (reel tape 2320) at positions facing the reel window in order to illuminate the symbols on the reel 2039 within the reel window. In the case of Figure 74, six LED elements 2314 are mounted on each back lamp board 2312 in order to illuminate the symbols on each row of the reel window (i.e., 18 LED elements 2314 are mounted on one back lamp board 2312). Note that the number and arrangement of LED elements 2314 mounted on the back lamp board 2312 are not limited to this example.

Next, the reel 2039 will be described in detail. In the following explanation, the left reel 2039a will be used as an example, but unless otherwise noted, the center reel 2039b and right reel 2039c can be considered to be configured in the same way as the left reel 2039a.

Figure 75 is a perspective view of the left reel 2039a, and Figure 76 is an exploded perspective view of the left reel 2039a. As shown in Figures 75 and 76, the reel 2039 (e.g., the left reel 2039a) is configured as a unit (reel unit) having a reel tape 2320, a reel wheel 2330, and a reel frame 2340.

The reel tape 2320 is a translucent film material formed in a long, narrow strip, with a fixed width in the short direction as the reel width. The reel tape 2320 has multiple designs printed on it that are visible from its outer periphery, and the longitudinal ends are overlapped to form an annular (ring-shaped) shape. Note that the multiple designs printed on the reel tape 2320 may be printed on either the front or back side of the film material constituting the reel tape 2320, as long as they are visible from the outer periphery. Specifically, for example, the designs may be printed on the front (outer periphery) of the film material and then a transparent coating may be applied over it, or the designs may be printed on the bottom layer of the back (inner periphery) of the film material. Specific designs will be described later, but in this specification, when we say "designs on the reel 2039," we strictly mean "designs printed on the reel tape 2320."

In addition, for each reel 2039, the reel tape 2320 has one index (or two or more) provided at a predetermined position. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side (edge) of the reel tape 2320, and is used to detect whether the reel 2039 has passed a predetermined position while rotating, or whether it has made one rotation. Each index is detected by a reel sensor 2041, and the signal from the reel sensor 2041 is electrically connected to the main control board 2060. When the reel sensor 2041 detects an index (the index turns off the reel sensor 2041), the input signal is input to the main control board 2060, and it is detected that the reel 2039 has passed the predetermined position.

In addition, the symbol at the reference position at the moment the reel sensor 2041 detects the index of the reel 2039 is pre-stored in ROM 2064. This allows the main control board 2060 (main control CPU 2065) to detect the symbol at the reference position at the moment the index is detected.

As shown in Figures 75 and 76, the reel wheel 2330 is a generally disc-shaped member made of, for example, a resin material. The reel wheel 2330 has a wheel outer periphery 2331 formed in an annular shape near the outer periphery of the generally disc-shaped member, an axle 2332 formed in the center of the generally disc-shaped member, and a support 2333 connecting the axle and outer periphery. The axle 2332 of the reel wheel 2330 is connected to the output shaft of the stepping motor (motor 2040) via a predetermined connecting mechanism or the like so as to transmit rotational force therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 76, the reel frame 2340 is a substantially disc-shaped member that is positioned opposite the reel wheel 2330 across the reel tape 2320 when the reel tape 2320 is formed into a ring shape. The reel frame 2340 is made of, for example, a resin material. The reel frame 2340 has a frame outer periphery 2341 that is formed in a ring shape near the outer periphery of the substantially disc shape.

When the reel tape 2320 is formed into a ring shape by overlapping the longitudinal ends, one side (wheel-side peripheral portion 2321a) of the peripheral portion 2321, which is the end (short-side end) of the reel width of the reel tape 2320, is wound around the wheel outer periphery 2331, and the other side (frame-side peripheral portion 2321b) is wound around the frame outer periphery 2341. Each peripheral portion 2321 of the reel tape 2320 is coated with adhesive (e.g., pressure-sensitive adhesive tape) to secure the wound reel tape 2320 to the wheel outer periphery 2331 and the frame outer periphery 2341. It is preferable that the width of the adhesive applied in the reel width direction be narrower than the widths of the wheel outer periphery 2331 and the frame outer periphery 2341. This not only prevents the adhesive from spilling outside the wheel outer periphery 2331 and the frame outer periphery 2341 during bonding, which could result in assembly problems, but also contributes to a cleaner appearance. As a result of the above configuration, one reel 2039 has a cylindrical shape, with the reel wheel 2330 and reel frame 2340 as its bottom surface and the reel tape 2320 as its side surface (circumferential surface). When the motor 2040 is operated, the reel 2039 can rotate around the axis of the reel wheel 2330. Note that in this description, two components with different shapes and names, the reel wheel 2330 (wheel outer periphery 2331) and the reel frame 2340 (frame outer periphery 2341), are given as the components to which the reel tape 2320 is adhered. However, from the perspective of being components around which the reel tape 2320 is wound, the reel wheel 2330 and the reel frame 2340 may be considered to be similar components, and the reel wheel 2330 and the reel frame 2340 may both be considered a "reel frame" or a "reel wheel."

Figure 77 is a diagram explaining the arrangement of the symbols on each reel. Figure 77(A) shows the arrangement of the symbols on each reel 2039 (left reel 2039a, center reel 2039b, right reel 2039c). Figure 77(B) also lists each symbol and its name. Figure 77(A) also shows the number (symbol number) that indicates each symbol. Incidentally, "blank" in Figure 77 does not mean a blank space where no symbol is printed, but rather refers to a "blank symbol," which is one type of symbol.

In the case of Figure 77, each reel 2039 (reel tape 2320) is divided into 20 equal frames, and a predetermined pattern is printed on each frame. In other words, each reel tape 2320 has 20 patterns (pattern numbers "0" to "19") printed on it.

Figure 78 is a diagram explaining the symbol display when the reels stop. Figure 78(A) is a diagram explaining the symbol display position, and Figure 78(B) is a diagram explaining the active lines.

As shown in Figure 78 (A), when the reels 2039 are stopped, nine symbols (three consecutive symbols on each reel 2039) are visible to the player through the display window 2017 provided in the front door 2002. At this time, the display positions of the three consecutive symbols on the left reel 2039a visible through the display window 2017 are referred to, from top to bottom, as the "upper left," "middle left," and "lower left," the display positions of the three consecutive symbols on the middle reel 2039b are referred to, from top to bottom, as the "upper middle," "middle middle," and "lower middle," and the display positions of the three consecutive symbols on the right reel 2039c are referred to, from top to bottom, as the "upper right," "middle right," and "lower right."

Figure 78 (B) shows an example of a state in which all reels 2039 have stopped spinning, with the pay lines indicated by dashed lines. In this embodiment, the linear display lines spanning the three reels 2039a-2039c include the upper left-upper middle-upper right display line, the middle left-middle-middle-middle right display line, the lower left-lower middle-lower right display line, the upper left-middle-middle-lower right display line, and the lower left-middle-middle-upper right display line. Note that non-linear display lines (for example, the upper left-middle-middle-upper right display line) may also be present.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78(B), the display lines in the upper left, middle middle, and lower right rows are set as active lines, and all other display lines are set as "inactive lines." Note that the display lines set as active lines are not limited to the upper left, middle middle, and lower right rows; other display lines (for example, the upper left, upper middle, and upper right rows) may also be set as active lines. Furthermore, multiple display lines (for example, the upper left, upper middle, and upper right rows and the upper left, middle middle, and lower right rows) may also be set as active lines.

When all reels 2039 have stopped spinning, the main control board 2060 (display determination means 2071) determines whether the symbol combination displayed on the active line corresponds to a predetermined condition device. In the case of Figure 78 (B), "Blue Seven - Blue Seven - Blue Seven" is displayed on the active line, and at this time, the main control board 2060 (display determination means 2071) determines that a symbol combination corresponding to, for example, a Type 1 BB is displayed on the active line. Condition devices can be broadly divided into condition devices related to the operation of a reel or a reel continuous operation device, condition devices related to replays, and condition devices related to winning, but detailed explanations of these will be omitted.

<Reel tape>
Because the reel tape 2320 is made of a transparent film material, multiple designs (see FIG. 77 ) are printed in a design area near the center of the reel width, and a predetermined background is printed in the surrounding background area. In conventional gaming machines, the background is printed in a light-blocking color such as silver on the backing of the reel tape (so-called silver-stop). However, in the gaming machine 2000 according to this embodiment, the reel tape 2320 is not silver-stopped, and both the designs and the background are configured to be transparent to light emitted from the back lamp 2310. Therefore, at least the back side (inner peripheral surface) of the background area of the reel tape 2320 is printed with ink of a predetermined, highly translucent color (hereinafter also referred to as background color) (background color printing). Specifically, white or nearly white is preferred as the background color. Silkscreen printing, for example, is a preferred printing method for the background color, but other printing methods that ensure translucency are also acceptable. In addition, in the reel tape 2320, the above-mentioned "background color printing" on the back side of the background area may also be performed to cover the design area (all or part of its surface).

In addition, the background area may be printed in a background color on the back side (inner peripheral side), while the area visible from the front side (outer peripheral side) may be printed in a color or pattern different from the background color. In this case, a printing layer representing the color or pattern to be displayed on the front side of the background area may be formed on the back side of the reel tape 2320, and then background color printing may be performed separately to form a background color printing layer. When printing the design and background on the reel tape 2320, the design and background to be visible from the front side may be printed as a single printing pattern on the back side of the reel tape 2320, or the design and background to be visible from the front side may be printed separately on the back side of the reel tape 2320. In either case, after the printing layers for the design and background to be visible from the front side are formed, background color printing is performed to form the background color printing layer. In order to ensure the translucency of the reel tape 2320, it is preferable that the ink used to print the designs and backgrounds that are to be visible from the front side also be a color with relatively high translucency (it does not have to be as translucent as the "background color"). Up to this point, it has been stated that printing on the reel tape 2320 is performed on the back side of the reel tape 2320, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and one or more of the multiple printing layers may be formed on the front side of the reel tape 2320.

As described above, by printing the background color with transparency (translucency), when the reel tape 2320 is illuminated by the back lamp 2310, the LED elements 2314 emitting light from the back lamp 2310 can be illuminated across the entire reel width without coming into contact with the player's eyes, thereby improving the visibility of the symbols. Furthermore, if the background color printing is done so that it does not overlap with the symbol area, the transparency of the symbols illuminated by the back lamp 2310 is not reduced by the background color printing layer, which is expected to have the effect of further improving the visibility of the symbols compared to the background.

Figure 79 is a diagram illustrating the vicinity of the end of the reel tape 2320. Figure 79(A) shows both longitudinal ends of the reel tape 2320 of the left reel 2039a when viewed from the back side (inner surface side), and Figure 79(B) is an enlarged view of one end. Note that in Figure 79(B), the overall background is light black to clearly show the transparent parts.

In Figure 79(A), adhesive portion 2322 is a portion where adhesive is applied to secure wound reel tape 2320 to wheel outer periphery 2331 and frame outer periphery 2341. Because adhesive is applied to the portion where reel tape 2320 contacts wheel outer periphery 2331 or frame outer periphery 2341, adhesive portion 2322 can be considered to be substantially the same as peripheral portion 2321. In Figure 79(A), adhesive portion 2322 and peripheral portion 2321 show the same portion. However, as mentioned above, it is preferable that the applied width of adhesive in the reel width direction (i.e., the length of adhesive portion 2322 in the reel width direction) be narrower (shorter) than the widths of wheel outer periphery 2331 and frame outer periphery 2341.

As shown in Figure 79 (B), the reel tape 2320 has a pattern background area 2323 printed with ink indicating a pattern or background, and a surplus area 2324 that overlaps with the pattern background area 2323 when the reel tape 2320 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel frame (wheel outer peripheral portion 2331 and frame outer peripheral portion 2341). Furthermore, the surplus area 2324 has a boundary area 2325 near the boundary with the pattern background area 2323. For convenience of explanation, the boundary area 2325 is shown as part of the surplus area 2324, but it is also acceptable to treat the boundary area 2325 as part of the pattern background area 2323 or as an area independent of the pattern background area 2323 and surplus area 2324.

The excess area 2324 includes one longitudinal end of the reel tape 2320 and is the overlapping portion where the reel tape 2320 overlaps when wound around the wheel outer periphery 2331 and the frame outer periphery 2341. It is configured to have at least a border area 2325, which is a printed area where ink is printed (a gradation printed area described below), and a non-printed area where ink is not printed.

When the reel tape 2320 shown in Figure 79 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of a reel frame to form a ring shape, the pattern background area 2323 at the upper end (near the pattern with pattern number 19) is overlapped on top of the excess area 2324 at the lower end (the side of the pattern with pattern number 0). This connects the upper and lower pattern background areas 2323, with the boundary area 2325 as the boundary, and makes them visible from the outer peripheral surface. In other words, when the reel tape 2320 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel frame, the pattern background area 2323 is visible from the outer peripheral surface, while the excess area 2324 is "almost" invisible from the outer peripheral surface. We say "almost" because, as will be described later, there is a possibility that part of the boundary area 2325 will be exposed on the outer peripheral surface due to individual differences when attaching the reel tape 2320.

When the upper and lower ends of the pattern background area 2323 are joined to form the reel tape 2320 in a ring shape as described above, it is expected that the ink-printed areas will overlap at the boundary where the upper and lower ends join (i.e., near the boundary area 2325 of the excess area 2324). This is because if a gap is left in the pattern background area 2323 when the upper and lower ends are joined, the light emitted by the back lamp 2310 will be emitted directly into the display window 2017, so it is preferable to slightly overlap the ink-printed areas. Specifically, in the case of the reel tape 2320 shown in Figure 79, the pattern background area 2323 at the upper end of the reel tape 2320 overlaps the boundary area 2325 at the lower end of the reel tape 2320. In this case, the pattern background area 2323 and boundary area 2325 corresponding to the overlapping portion are both printed with ink that transmits the light emitted by the back lamp 2310, so the transmittance (light transmittance) of the overlapping portion is lower than that of the other pattern background area 2323. As a result, when the reel tape 2320 illuminated from the inner periphery by the back lamp 2310 is viewed through the display window 2017, the background, which is painted white (or nearly white), appears darker than the other portions in the overlapping portion, like a shadow, which could reduce the visibility of the pattern on the reel 2039 (reel tape 2320).

In the gaming machine 2000 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a white (or nearly white) print layer is formed in the boundary area 2325 so that the transparency (translucency) of the background color gradually increases (i.e., a gradation) from the side of the pattern background area 2323 toward the end of the reel tape 2320 where no ink is printed. The method for forming the gradation print layer in the boundary area 2325 from the printed area where ink is printed to the non-printed area where ink is not printed is not particularly limited. For example, in the case of silk screen printing, the density of the white (or nearly white) halftone dots can be changed in multiple stages, and the ink can be printed so that the density decreases from the printed area to the non-printed area. Alternatively, the size of the halftone dots can be changed in multiple stages so that the halftone dots become smaller from the printed area to the non-printed area, or ink of the same color but different densities (brightness) can be used to print so that the density decreases from the printed area to the non-printed area.

In this way, by forming the printing layer in the boundary region 2325 so that the transmittance (light transmittance) gradually increases toward the end, when the reel tape 2320 is formed into a ring, even if the pattern background region 2323 overlaps the boundary region 2325, the decrease in transmittance of the overlapping portion can be suppressed. This prevents shadows from being created when illuminated by the back lamp 2310, and prevents the visibility of the pattern on the reel 2039 from being reduced due to the creation of shadows.

Furthermore, at one end (the lower end in this example) of the reel tape 2320 having the excess area 2324, a transparent non-printed area is provided following the boundary area 2325 where the gradation printed layer is formed. This allows the other end of the reel tape 2320 to be overlapped up to the transparent non-printed area when forming the reel tape 2320 into a ring shape without having to worry about a decrease in transparency (translucency). As a result, a sufficient adhesive area can be secured to maintain the reel tape 2320 in a ring shape.

In this example, the surplus area 2324 including the boundary area 2325 is located at the bottom end of the reel tape 2320, but the configuration of the gaming machine 2000 is not limited to this, and the surplus area 2324 including the boundary area 2325 may be located at the top end of the reel tape 2320. Also, the boundary area 2325 where the gradation print layer is formed may be located at the top or bottom end of the pattern background area 2323, but even in this case, the non-printed area of the surplus area 2324 is located only at one end.

In Figure 79 (B), identification information 2326 consisting of the string "■1st" is printed in the surplus area 2324. The identification information 2326 is an identification mark that makes it possible to identify which of the multiple reels 2039 (reel tapes 2320) the main reel 2039 (main reel tape 2320) is.

Specific examples of the identification information 2326 include different character strings (including letters, symbols, and combinations thereof) for each reel (each reel tape), such as "A," "B," "C," or "■," "▲," and "●" for the left reel 2039a, center reel 2039b, and right reel 2039c, respectively. Furthermore, rather than simply using "different character strings," each identification information 2326 may use "different character strings" with a specific meaning corresponding to each reel 2039. Specifically, examples include "1st," "2nd," and "3rd," which represent the recommended push order in normal gameplay, and "left," "center," and "right," which directly identify the position of each reel (or a serial number for each reel tape). Furthermore, the features of the identification information 2326 that enable identification of the corresponding reel 2039 (reel tape 2320) are not limited to the "different character strings" described above; for example, "different colors" could also be used (which may be combined with different character strings).

The identification information 2326 needs to be printed in at least one location in the excess area 2324, but it may also be printed in multiple locations. Also, in the case of Figure 79 (B), the identification information 2326 is printed in the adhesive portion 2322 in the excess area 2324, but the identification information 2326 may also be printed in the excess area 2324 other than the adhesive portion 2322.

When the identification information 2326 is printed on the adhesive portion 2322 in the excess area 2324, by printing it on the edge of the reel width, if the wheel outer periphery 2331 and frame outer periphery 2341 to which the adhesive portion 2322 is adhered are made of transparent materials, the identification information 2326 can be seen simply by looking in from the edge of the reel 2039 when the reel tape 2320 is assembled to the pattern display device 2038 (or, of course, even before assembly). Furthermore, if the identification information 2326 protrudes even slightly from the adhesive surface between the adhesive portion 2322 and the wheel outer periphery 2331 and frame outer periphery 2341, the identification information 2326 can be seen from the inner periphery of the reel 2039, even if the wheel outer periphery 2331 and frame outer periphery 2341 are not made of transparent materials.

When the identification information 2326 is printed in the excess area 2324 other than the adhesive portion 2322, by printing it outside the adhesive portion 2322, when the reel tape 2320 adhered to the wheel outer periphery 2331 and the frame outer periphery 2341 is assembled to the pattern display device 2038 (or, of course, even before assembly), the identification information 2326 can be seen by looking at the back of the reel tape 2320.

In other words, the identification information 2326 not only makes it possible to confirm which reel 2039 the reel tape 2320 corresponds to before assembling it to the pattern display device 2038, but also makes it possible to confirm which reel 2039 the reel tape 2320 corresponds to without removing the reel tape 2320 even after the reel tape 2320 has been attached, formed into a ring, and assembled to the pattern display device 2038, thereby preventing mix-ups before assembly and making it easier to check for assembly defects after assembly.

Furthermore, if the identification information 2326 uses simple character strings (including characters, symbols, and combinations thereof) that allow easy identification of the corresponding reel, such as push orders such as "1st," "2nd," and "3rd," or symbols such as "■," "▲," and "●," it becomes easier to identify the reels than when the serial number of the reel tape is used, and even workers without detailed knowledge can accurately check the assembly. Furthermore, if the identification information 2326 is printed in a different color for each reel, this has the effect of allowing workers to easily identify the corresponding reel even in environments where it is difficult to distinguish character strings, such as when the inside of the pattern display device 2038 is dark.

Figure 80 is a diagram illustrating example designs of predetermined reel symbols. Figure 80(A) shows a first design example of a bar symbol, and Figure 80(B) shows a second design example of a bar symbol. The reel symbol arrangements shown in Figures 80(A) and 80(B) are both the symbol numbers 3 to 5 on the left reel 2039a in Figure 77. In other words, the "bar symbol" corresponds to the "bar (BAR)" symbol in Figure 77, which explains the symbol arrangement of each reel. Note that Figure 80 uses a "bar symbol" as an example of a predetermined reel symbol, but symbols other than a "bar symbol" may be used as long as they have the characteristics described below.

The bar pattern 2351A shown in Figure 80 (A) has a pattern portion 2352A in which the word "BAR" is drawn, marks 2353A in which long linear marks are drawn in the vertical direction (the direction of reel rotation) on both sides of the pattern portion 2352A, and a background portion 2354A which is the remaining area (the area other than the pattern portion 2352A and marks 2353A in the bar pattern 2351A).

The bar design 2351B shown in Figure 80 (B) has a design portion 2352B in which the word "BAR" is drawn, marks 2353B in which long strip-shaped marks are drawn in the vertical direction (the direction of reel rotation) on both sides of the design portion 2352B, and a background portion 2354B which is the remaining area (the area other than the design portion 2352B and marks 2353B in the bar design 2351B).

In the following explanation, bar patterns 2351A and 2351B may be collectively referred to as bar pattern 2351, pattern portions 2352A and 2352B may be collectively referred to as pattern portion 2352, marks 2353A and 2353B may be collectively referred to as mark 2353, and background portions 2354A and 2354B may be collectively referred to as background portion 2354.

In the gaming machine 2000 according to this embodiment, the "base color" of the "predetermined reel pattern (in this example, a bar pattern)" is black or a color similar thereto, accounting for the majority (e.g., 50% or more) of the color scheme of the pattern. A color similar to black may also be called nearly black, and specifically refers to a color that may include colors other than black, but whose brightness is below a predetermined reference value (e.g., brightness 2 or less).

In the case of bar design 2351A shown in Figure 80(A), its base color is the black (or a similar color) used for most of background portion 2354A. In the case of bar design 2351B shown in Figure 80(B), its base color is also the black (or a similar color) used for background portion 2354B. Note that in cases like bar designs 2351A and 2351B, where the base color is black (or a similar color) due to the color scheme of background portion 2354, which makes up the majority of the design, any other color may be used for design portion 2352, etc.

As described above, because the base color of the bar symbol 2351 is black (or a color similar thereto) and the background color of the symbol background area 2323 of the reel tape 2320 is white (or nearly white), the bar symbol 2351 can be made to stand out more than other symbols that do not have a base color of black (or a color similar thereto) when the reel 2039 is spinning, thereby improving the visibility of the bar symbol 2351. Specifically, when the bar symbol 2351 passes through the display window 2017 while the reel 2039 is spinning, the effect of the base color makes the bar symbol 2351 appear as a black block, making it easier for the player to see the bar symbol 2351. Therefore, when a player attempts to aim at the bar symbol 2351 and stop it within the display window 2017 while the reel 2039 is spinning, this has the effect of assisting the operation.

In addition, in the gaming machine 2000 according to this embodiment, the "predetermined reel pattern (in this example, a bar pattern)" has a linear or band-shaped mark that extends in the direction of reel rotation and is made up of a predetermined color that is brighter than the base color. A predetermined color that is brighter than the base color is, for example, white or a color similar to white (such as a light blue), and the brightness may be set to a predetermined reference value (for example, brightness 7 or higher). A "mark extending in the direction of reel rotation" means that the length of the mark in the direction of reel rotation is at least a predetermined percentage of the pattern length L of the same pattern (bar pattern 2351) in the direction of reel rotation; the predetermined percentage may be, for example, 50% (although other percentages may also be set).

In the case of bar design 2351A shown in Figure 80(A), three white lines are drawn as mark 2353A on each side of design portion 2352A (two of which are solid lines and one is dashed line). The length of each of these multiple marks 2353A in the reel rotation direction is 50% or more of the design length L of bar design 2351A in the reel rotation direction. Also, in the case of bar design 2351B shown in Figure 80(B), two white bands are drawn as mark 2353B on each side of design portion 2352A (for example, the inner band is shorter than the outer band). The length of each of these multiple marks 2353B in the reel rotation direction is 50% or more of the design length L of bar design 2351B in the reel rotation direction.

In addition, in both Figures 80(A) and 80(B), the color used for marks 2353A and 2353B is white, which is clearly brighter than the base color of black (or a similar color). The color used for each mark need not necessarily be limited to white, as long as it is a "predetermined color" that is brighter than the base color. In other words, a color other than white, such as light blue or silver, may be used as the "predetermined color" of mark 2353. However, to make the contrast between the "predetermined color" and the base color more noticeable, a predetermined reference value (for example, a brightness of 7 or higher) may be set for the brightness of the "predetermined color."

As described above, the bar design 2351 has marks 2353 drawn in a predetermined color brighter than the base color, which makes the marks 2353 stand out among the bar design 2351, which is mostly black (or a similar color), resulting in the bar design 2351 as a whole being more noticeable (improved appearance). In particular, when the marks 2353 are positioned on both sides of the design portion 2352, they can also draw attention to the design portion 2352 sandwiched between them. Furthermore, because the marks 2353 are in the form of lines or strips extending in the direction of reel rotation, when the bar design 2351 passes through the display window 2017 while the reels 2039 are rotating, the marks 2353 in a "predetermined color" that contrasts with the base color can be made to look like a shining white line within the bar design 2351, which appears as a black block due to its base color. This further improves the player's visibility of the bar design 2351.

Comparing the position of adhesive portion 2322 shown in Figure 79 with the position of marks 2353 (2353A, 2353B) shown in Figure 80, adhesive portion 2322 is located outside the design, and mark 2353 is located inside the design. In other words, on reel tape 2320, mark 2353 is formed in a non-overlapping position inside adhesive portion 2322 (a position on reel tape 2320 that does not face each other across the film material).

In addition, in the example of Figure 80, the bar design 2351 has multiple marks 2353 on each side of the design portion 2352, but the number of marks 2353 is not limited to this, and there may be one on each side, for example. In addition, when multiple marks 2353 are provided, the lengths of the marks may or may not be the same.

In addition, in the gaming machine 2000, the two marks 2353 provided on both sides of the pattern portion 2352 in a specified pattern (in this example, the bar pattern 2351) may be formed so that, from the perspective of their position visible in the display window 2017 when the reels are rotating, they do not overlap, at least on both sides, with the watermark areas provided in other patterns (i.e., neither of the two marks 2353 overlaps with the watermark areas).

A watermark area is an area of a given reel symbol that is formed to have relatively high transparency (translucency). The watermark area easily transmits light from the back lamp 2310, thereby enhancing the visibility of the reel symbol. "Relatively high transparency (translucency)" may mean that the transparency (translucency) is higher than that of other areas of the reel symbol, or that the transparency (translucency) is higher than that of the symbol background region 2323. Generally, watermark areas are often provided in wide symbols such as the "Blue Seven" and "Red Seven" shown in FIG. 7. These symbols are often reel symbols that form a combination of symbols corresponding to the conditional devices related to the operation of the role or role continuous operation device. The method of forming the watermark area is not particularly limited. For example, the watermark area may be formed by printing a specific ink with relatively high transparency (translucency), or by partially excluding one or more printing layers from a multi-layer printing on the reel tape 2320.

Both the marks 2353 and the watermark areas have the effect of enhancing the distinctiveness of the symbol as the reels spin. However, if the two marks 2353 of a predetermined symbol (bar symbol 2351) and the watermark areas of other symbols are positioned so that they overlap in the short-side reel width, they will be displayed overlapping in the same position in the display window 2017 as the reels spin, making it difficult to distinguish between the two symbols and reducing distinctiveness. Therefore, as described above, the gaming machine 2000 ensures that the two marks 2353 on both sides of the symbol portion 2352 of the predetermined symbol (bar symbol 2351) do not overlap with the watermark areas of other symbols. This prevents a player from gazing at the edge of the symbol width as the reels spin, as the perceived transparency differs when the predetermined symbol (bar symbol 2351) passes by and when the "other symbol" passes by, thereby minimizing a reduction in distinctiveness of the two symbols.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 2000, the characteristics of the bar symbol 2351 described above may be applied to symbols other than bar symbols. However, if there are too many symbols with the characteristics described above among the multiple symbols displayed on one reel 2039, there will be too many symbols that appear as black blocks when the reel 2039 spins, which may actually impair the visibility of the individual symbols. Therefore, certain restrictions may be placed on the application of the characteristics (for example, limiting the number of symbols to five or less out of 20, or not applying the characteristics to symbols that are arranged three or more consecutively, etc.).

The characteristic configuration of the gaming machine 2000 described above (particularly the configuration of the symbol display device 2038) can be applied as appropriate not only to slot machines, where games are played by betting on gaming media such as gaming medals, but also to managed gaming machines that do not use physical gaming media. Furthermore, the characteristic configuration of the symbol display device 2038 can also be applied as appropriate to drum-type effect display devices, such as those installed in pachinko machines, that produce effects by rotating a drum (reel).

<Sub-control board>
The sub-control board 2080 controls effects and the like during play and game standby. The sub-control board 2080 is electrically connected to the main control board 2060, and information (control commands) necessary for outputting effects is transmitted from the main control board 2060 (particularly the control command transmission means 2078) to the sub-control board 2080 via one-way parallel communication. Note that the connection between the main control board 2060 and the sub-control board 2080 is not limited to electrical connection, and may also be made using optical communication means. Furthermore, in either the case of electrical connection or optical communication connection, it is not limited to parallel communication, and may also be serial communication, or both types of communication may be used in combination.

The sub-control board 2080 is equipped with an input port 2081, an output port 2082, RAM 2083, ROM 2084, a performance control CPU 2085, and an image control CPU 2086. Each of the above components (input port 2081 and output port 2082 may be excluded) is mounted on the MPU on the sub-control board 2080. Furthermore, in addition to the RAM built into the MPU, the sub-control board 2080 is also equipped with RAM external to the MPU (external RAM). Hereinafter, when we refer to RAM 2083, it can include both the RAM built into the MPU and external RAM. The same applies to ROM 2084.

The input port 2081 is a connection section through which signals are input to the performance control CPU 2085 from the control command transmission means 2078 of the main control board 2060 and from peripheral devices for performance (for example, various operation switches such as the cross key 2022 and performance buttons 2024). Furthermore, the output port 2082 is a connection section through which signals are output from the performance control CPU 2085 to peripheral devices for performance (for example, the speaker 2020 and image display device 2021). In other words, the sub-control board 2080 and these peripheral devices for performance are electrically connected via the input port 2081 and output port 2082.

RAM 2083 is a storage device (also referred to as "storage means") that can read and write data, and stores various data necessary for the performance control CPU 2085 (performance control means 2087) to control performances, etc. (for example, parameters related to the display of the performance screen on the image display device 2021, etc.), as well as various data necessary for image control by the image control CPU 2086 (image control means 2088) (for example, drawing data drawn as a performance screen, etc.). As will be described later, if the sub-control board 2080 has a multi-chip configuration in which the performance control means 2087 and image control means 2088 are realized by multiple CPUs (performance control CPU 2085, image control CPU 2086), the RAM 2083 used by performance control CPU 2085 and the RAM 2083 used by image control CPU 2086 are implemented separately on the boards on which each CPU is mounted.

ROM 2084 is a read-only storage device (also referred to as "storage means") that stores programs and various data (for example, performance data and data tables for performing lotteries related to performances) necessary for the performance control CPU 2085 to control performances, etc., as well as various data (for example, image data that is the basis for drawing the performance screen) necessary for the image control CPU (image control means 2088) to generate performance screens, etc. As with RAM 2083, if the sub-control board 2080 has a multi-chip configuration, the ROM 2084 used by the performance control CPU 2085 and the ROM 2084 used by the image control CPU 2086 are implemented separately on the boards on which each CPU is mounted.

The effect control CPU 2085 is a CPU (or MPU) mounted on one of the boards included in the sub-control board 2080, and operates using the programs and data stored in the ROM 2084 mounted on the same board to realize the effect control means 2087, which controls the effects. Based on the control commands (specifically, for example, RT number, push order instruction number, effect group number, reel condition device number, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 2060 by the control command transmission means 2078, the effect control means 2087 determines by lottery what effect will be output by the effect peripherals (for example, how the effect lamp 2019 will be turned on, blinking, or extinguished, what sound will be output from the speaker 2020, and what image will be displayed on the image display device 2021) and at what timing (for example, when the start switch 2034 or each stop switch 2035 is operated) depending on the winning combination and game status, etc.

The image control CPU 2086 is a CPU (or MPU) mounted on one of the boards included in the sub-control board 2080, and operates using the programs and data stored in the ROM 2084 mounted on the same board to realize the image control means 2088, which controls the generation of images, etc. The image control means 2088 generates images, etc. (including sound) for presentation in accordance with the presentation control of the presentation control means 2087, and outputs them to the corresponding peripheral devices for presentation. Furthermore, during advantageous playing states such as during Type 1 BB play or AT (ART), the image control means 2088 notifies the player of the recommended order in which to press the stop switch 2035 using images, sound, etc., and displays images of the number of coins won, the number of remaining plays, etc., in accordance with the presentation control of the presentation control means 2087.

<Peripheral equipment for performance>
Below, we will explain various peripheral devices for performance that are connected to the sub-control board 2080.

The effect lamps 2019 are composed of, for example, LEDs, and light up in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. The effect lamps 2019 include back lamps 2310 located on the inner periphery of each reel 2039, fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reels 2039 from above the reels 2039, and frame lamps that are located in front of the front door 2002 of the gaming machine 2000 and flash at predetermined timing. Of these, the back lamps 2310 of the reels 2039 illuminate the symbols displayed on the reels 2039 from behind, thereby improving the visibility of the symbols on the reels 2039 (the symbols on the upper, middle, and lower rows) that can be seen through the display window 2017.

The speaker 2020 outputs predetermined sounds in response to the execution of various effects during gameplay or game standby.

The image display device 2021 is a display device that displays various effect images during play (for example, correct button press sequences and effects corresponding to the lottery results of winning roles) and game information (for example, when a role device is activated, the number of plays during AT, and the number of coins won, etc.) in accordance with image data input from the sub-control board 2080 (image control means 2088). The image display device 2021 is composed of an LCD display, an organic EL display, a dot display, or the like. Note that the display by the image display device 2021 is not limited to during play, and can also display information while waiting to play.

The cross key 2022 and menu button 2023 are used when the player wants to display information (for example, a two-dimensional code containing the player's playing history) (e.g., equivalent to operating the "menu screen," details of which will be described later), or when the hall manager wants to change various settings.

<Sub-control board with one-chip configuration>
The explanation so far has been given taking as an example of a hardware configuration that can be implemented in the gaming machine 2000 a case in which the sub-control board 2080 is composed of multiple boards (for example, a performance control board and an image control board), and the performance control means 2087 and the image control means 2088 are realized by multiple CPUs mounted on these multiple boards (hereinafter also referred to as a multiple-chip configuration). When the sub-control board 2080 has a multiple-chip configuration, each board is provided with an MPU (CPU), and message transfer (command transmission and reception) between the MPU of the performance control board and the MPU of the image control board is performed by serial communication or the like via a cable connecting the two boards. The performance control board is a board that realizes functions related to performance control (performance control functions), and its MPU is equipped with a performance control CPU 2085, RAM, ROM, etc. The image control board is a board that realizes the function (image control function) of generating or reading images (which may include audio) for performance and outputting them to the image display device 2021, etc., in accordance with the control of the performance control board (performance control CPU 2085), and the image control board has an image control CPU 2086, RAM, ROM, etc. mounted on its MPU. Furthermore, the performance control board and image control board may also be equipped with separate RAM and ROM outside the MPU on their own boards.

In recent years, however, another example of a hardware configuration has been proposed in which the functions of an MPU that performs performance control or image control (which may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), an MPU that performs image control in particular) are realized by a single CPU (MPU) on a single sub-control board 2080 (hereinafter referred to as a one-chip configuration). With such a one-chip configuration, the performance control function (performance control means 2087) and the image control function (image control means 2088) can be realized in an integrated manner by a single CPU (MPU) mounted on the sub-control board 2080.

The following provides a detailed explanation of the single-chip sub-control board 2080, focusing on the differences from the multi-chip sub-control board 2080 described above.

The single-chip sub-control board 2080 is equipped with one sub-control CPU, which is a multi-core CPU with multiple CPU cores that can execute processes independently and in parallel, and RAM 2083 and ROM 2084 that can be accessed from each CPU core. In this example, the multi-core CPU has four CPU cores, each of which is designated by a CPU number, CPU0 to CPU3.

RAM 2083 in a one-chip configuration is memory that stores programs executed by each CPU core and temporary data associated with the operation of each CPU core, and can operate as shared memory in which a shared area accessible from each CPU core is set. Note that this RAM 2083 may have a dedicated area for each CPU core set apart from the shared area. Also, ROM 2084 in a one-chip configuration is memory that stores programs executed by each CPU core and image data, etc., and is accessible from each CPU core. Note that in a one-chip configuration, RAM 2083 and ROM 2084 may be installed externally, rather than being internal memory of the sub-control CPU.

In the single-chip sub-control board 2080, the performance control CPU 2085 in the multi-chip configuration is stored as a performance control process equivalent to the processing process executed by the performance control CPU 2085, and the image control CPU 2086 in the multi-chip configuration is stored as an image control process equivalent to the processing process executed by the image control CPU 2086, both in the form of control files (application files) in ROM 2084. In addition, the processing process (OS process) of the OS (Operating System) function executed by the sub-control CPU to manage overall control is also stored in the form of a control file (application file) in ROM 2084.

In the single-chip sub-control board 2080, the sub-control CPU assigns the above-mentioned OS process, performance control process, and image control process to separate CPU cores on a process-by-process basis.

Specifically, for example, after a hardware reset of the sub-control CPU is performed as a result of powering on, the sub-control CPU runs each process, including the OS process, on the CPU core of CPU0 when it starts up, and then, using the OS functions, assigns execution rights for the control file corresponding to the performance control process to the CPU core of, for example, CPU3, and assigns execution rights for the control file corresponding to the image control process to the CPU core of, for example, CPU1, and starts up each CPU core.

CPU1 and CPU3 share part of RAM 2083 as shared memory between processes, and execute performance control and image control while reading various programs and data from ROM 2084. A portion of RAM 2083 is allocated as a shared area (shared memory) shared by the performance control process (CPU3) and the image control process (CPU1).

The performance control process of CPU3 then reads a control file containing performance pattern data, display pattern data, audio pattern data, etc. from ROM2084, and executes performance control by the performance control process. Furthermore, the image control process of CPU1 executes image control by reading image data from ROM2084 to draw an image for performance in accordance with the performance control determined by the performance control process, storing the drawn image in a drawing memory, and outputting it to the image display device 2021. Furthermore, the image control process can also execute audio control by reading audio data from ROM2084 to generate audio data for performance in accordance with the performance control determined by the performance control process, and outputting it to the speaker 2020.

In addition, when the performance control process (CPU3) sends a command to the image control process (CPU1) to instruct performance control, the performance control process stores data including the command in a shared area (shared memory) of RAM 2083, and the image control process accesses the shared memory and reads the data, thereby transferring the data including the command.

By executing the above processing, the single-chip sub-control board 2080 allows the sub-control CPU to have multiple CPU cores that run the OS process on CPU0, the performance control process on CPU3, and the image control process on CPU1, all independently and in parallel. Furthermore, CPU2, which is free, can be kept as a spare, and if, for example, the processing load of the image control process on CPU1 becomes excessively large compared to the other CPU cores, part of the image control process can be assigned to CPU2 for use.

In this way, in the single-chip sub-control board 2080, by allocating processes to each CPU core of the multi-core CPU (sub-control CPU) on a process-by-process basis, even if one CPU core's processing becomes heavy, the impact on the processing of the other CPU cores is minimized. In other words, OS control by CPU0, performance control by CPU3, and image control by CPU1 can be executed without affecting the computational load on the other CPU cores.

In addition, the CPU core of CPU3 (corresponding to performance control means 2087), to which the performance control process is assigned, and the CPU core of CPU1 (corresponding to image control means 2088), to which the image control process is assigned, can share RAM 2083 and ROM 2084, so communication between the CPU cores (such as sending and receiving commands) is achieved by message transfer via reading and writing to shared memory, or by inter-processor interrupts. As a result, command sending and receiving and interrupts between CPU cores (between processes) can be achieved with processing that has less delay than serial communication between boards in a multi-chip configuration in which the performance control CPU 2085 and image control CPU 2086 are mounted on separate boards.

Incidentally, when the sub-control board 2080 in the gaming machine 2000 of this embodiment has a single-chip configuration, the various configurations and processes in the sub-control board 2080 are common to many parts with the various configurations and processes in the sub-control board 1200 of the pachinko machine 1000 of the second embodiment. Also, when the sub-control board 2080 in the gaming machine 2000 has a multiple-chip configuration, the various configurations and processes in the sub-control board 2080 are common to many parts with the various configurations and processes in the performance control board 200 and image control board 300 of the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment. Also, in the gaming machine 2000, the various configurations and processes in the main control board 2060 are common to many parts with the various configurations and processes in the main control board 100 of the pachinko machine 1, 1000 of the first or second embodiment. Therefore, the contents explained in the first or second embodiment regarding the pachinko machine 1, 1000 can also be applied to the gaming machine 2000 as appropriate.

4. Fourth Embodiment
Below, a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, features related to the design applied to the gaming machine in the range visible to the player and features related to conductive measures against static electricity and the like that may be applied to the components of the gaming machine will be described. This embodiment can be applied to the gaming machines of each of the above-mentioned embodiments as appropriate, and in the description, the components described in the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment may be reused.

<Design display of the large prize entrance unit>
Figure 81 shows an example of an attacca unit. Similar to the attacca unit 500 shown in the first embodiment, the attacca unit 3100 is a unit in which multiple parts, including a large prize opening 3110, are integrated. By being set in the lower right area of the game board (front member 100a), the attacca unit 3100 also forms a game area near the large prize opening 3110. Also shown in Figure 81 as one of the parts of the attacca unit 3100 is a gate 3120 that detects the passage of a game ball 3101 and draws a normal symbol. The attacca unit 3100 also includes a second starting opening (not shown in Figure 81) that allows game balls to be received depending on the results of the normal symbol drawing. The large prize opening 3110 opens and closes when the result of a special lottery that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 3101 into the first start opening or the second start opening is a jackpot or the like, thereby allowing the game ball 3101 to be received (a prize), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out upon entry. A specific area (not shown) that transitions to a favorable game state when the game ball 3101 passes through may be provided inside the large prize opening 3110.

In Figure 81, the divider 3102 defines an area (game area) in which the game ball 3101 can roll, and the game ball 3101 that flows down into the inside of the attacker unit 3100 rolls in an area not defined by the divider 3102. The big prize opening 3110 is closed except at specific times such as a jackpot, and in the closed state, it defines an area in which the game ball 3101 can roll, just like the divider 3102.

The attacca unit 3100 has a hollow structure with an area through which the gaming ball 3101 can pass, and is primarily made of a transparent material such as acrylic resin. By providing this type of unit structure, the attacca unit 3100 can be provided with a design section 3130 that displays designs such as letters and pictures in front of the gaming ball 3101 when viewed from the player (i.e., between the gaming board and the glass plate). In the case of the attacca unit 3100 shown in Figure 81, as an example, the design section 3130 is shown to decoratively display the words "Strong Enemy." Below, the features of the design display in the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained in detail using the design section 3130.

The design section 3130 is constructed, for example, by attaching a design sheet with a predetermined design printed on it to the acrylic resin or the like of the attacca unit 3100. Therefore, by changing the type of ink used for printing in each area of the design (using inks with different transmittances), the light transmittance of the design section 3130 can be adjusted as desired. In Figure 81 and Figure 82, described below, areas of low light transmittance (no light transmittance or poor light transmittance) in the decorated "Strong Enemy" characters are shown shaded.

Figure 82 is a diagram illustrating the overlap between the design section and the game ball. Figure 82(A) shows an example of a situation in which the game ball 3101 passes behind the design section 3130, and Figure 82(B) shows an example of a situation in which the game ball 3101 passes through the gate 3120.

In Figure 82 (A), the dashed line crossing the word "Strong Enemy" corresponds to a line including the top edge of the large prize opening 3110. The area above the dashed line is the area in which the game ball 3101 can roll (hereinafter referred to as the "rollable area"), and the area below the dashed line is the area in which the game ball 3101 cannot roll when the large prize opening 3110 is closed (hereinafter referred to as the "non-rollable area"), as shown shaded in Figure 81.

As shown in Figure 82 (A), the decorative text for "Strong Enemy" in the design section 3130 includes a first area 3131, a second area 3132, a third area 3133, and a fourth area 3134. Note that the colors of each area described below are examples, and the colors available in the design section 3130 according to this embodiment are not limited to these.

The first area 3131 corresponds to the outer edge of the characters, and is printed, for example, in black using non-transparent ink (light transmittance of 0% or lower than a specified standard) to enhance the design's distinctiveness.

The second region 3132 is an area that outlines the characters inside the first region 3131, and is printed in a different color from the first region 3131, for example, white, using non-transparent ink (with a light transmittance of 0% or lower than a predetermined standard) in the hopes of enhancing the distinctiveness of the design. The predetermined standard for light transmittance in the second region 3132 may be the same as or different from the predetermined standard for light transmittance in the first region 3131. When a different standard is used, for example, if a black-based color is used in the first region 3131, the predetermined standard for light transmittance in the second region 3132 may be set to a higher standard value (i.e., a higher light transmittance) than that of the first region 3131.

The third region 3133 is a central region of the characters located more inward than the second region 3132, and its back surface is a rollable region. Unlike the first region 3131 and the second region 3132, the third region 3133 has a high light transmittance in order to ensure visibility of the game ball 3101 as it rolls on its back surface.

The light transmittance in the third region 3133 may be a high level or higher that is almost completely transparent (e.g., 80% or higher), or a medium level or higher that is almost completely transparent (semi-transparent) (e.g., 50% or higher). However, for simplicity of explanation, hereafter, unless otherwise specified, the degree of light transmittance in the third region 3133 will be referred to as "semi-transparent."

The fourth area 3134 is a central area of the characters located inside the second area 3132, and has a non-rolling area on its back side. Because the game ball 3101 will not roll on the back side of the fourth area 3134, it is printed in white, for example, using non-transparent ink (light transmittance of 0% or lower than a predetermined standard), prioritizing the design. The fourth area 3134 may also be shared with the second area 3132.

As described above, in the attacca unit 3100 including the big prize slot 3110, the light transmittance of the design of each area in the design section 3130 displayed in front of the game board is adjusted depending on whether or not the area overlaps with the area in which the game ball 3101 can roll. As a result, the gaming machine according to this embodiment can have the following features.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the gaming ball 3101 overlaps at least partially with the printing (design portion 3130) on the front side of the gaming ball in a predetermined rolling area, the gaming ball as seen by the player is configured so that the reduction in transparency due to the overlap with the printing (design portion 3130) is less than 50%. More specifically, the gaming ball 3101 that overlaps at least partially with the design portion 3130 is configured to have at least one of the following: an area without printing on the front side, an area with printing on the front side that makes the gaming ball almost opaque (e.g., first area 3131, second area 3132 of the design portion 3130), and an area with printing on the front side that has a higher transparency than the above-mentioned almost opaque area (e.g., third area 3133 of the design portion 3130). The reduction in transparency due to the overlap with the printing is set to be less than 50% for the entire gaming ball, including the above-mentioned areas. By setting it up in this way, even if the front of the game ball 3101 is covered with a print (design part 3130) that reduces light transmittance, it can still be recognized as a game ball, allowing you to enjoy its movement without losing sight of the game ball 3101.

Specifically, for example, the gaming ball 3101 shown in Figure 82 (A) has a portion of the lower left corner overlapping the "enemy" design. In this case, of the design portion 3130 overlapping the gaming ball 3101, the first region 3131 and second region 3132 are opaque, so the transmittance of the gaming ball 3101 is 0%. On the other hand, the third region 3133 of the design portion 3130 overlapping the gaming ball 3101 is semi-transparent, so the transmittance of the gaming ball 3101 never becomes 0% (invisible). Although the transmittance is reduced by the design of the third region 3133, it remains largely visible through the back of the third region 3133. Furthermore, the gaming ball 3101 that is not overlapping the design portion 3130 is visible to the player without its transmittance being reduced. Therefore, when considering the entire gaming ball 3101, it is clear that the transmittance of the gaming ball 3101 reduced by the design section 3130 is less than 50%.

To further add, if the light transmittance of the first region 3131 is T1, the light transmittance of the second region 3132 is T2, and the light transmittance of the third region 3133 is T3 (T1, T2, and T3 are ratios where 100% light transmittance is 1), and the area ratio of the portion overlapping with the first region 3131 when the total area of the gaming ball 3101 is 1 is M1, the area ratio of the portion overlapping with the second region 3132 is M2, and the area ratio of the portion overlapping with the third region 3133 is M3, then the value of the transmittance (a ratio where 1 is the maximum value) by which the gaming ball 3101 is reduced by the design department, the "reduced transmittance R," can be calculated using the formula "M1 x (1-T1) + M2 x (1-T2) + M3 x (1-T3)." In other words, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the design of the design section 3130 can be adjusted so that the "reduced transmittance R" calculated from the above formula is less than 0.5 (less than 50%) regardless of the position of the gaming ball 3101 within the attacker unit 3100.

By setting the "reduced transmittance R to less than 0.5 (less than 50%)" as described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment can ensure visibility of the gaming ball 3101 rolling on the back of the design section 3130, providing the enjoyment of the movement of the gaming ball 3101, while also ensuring adequate visibility of the overall design of the design section 3130.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned restriction of "reduced transmittance R being less than 0.5 (less than 50%)" may also be applied to the area into which the gaming ball 3101 flows after entering the large prize opening 3110. When configured in this manner, the movement of the gaming ball 3101 after entering the large prize opening 3110 will also be visible to the player, which is expected to further enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the above description of each of the areas 3131-3134 included in the design section 3130, the light transmittance of each area was adjusted by adjusting the ink used to print the design. However, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, a method of adjusting the light transmittance of each area by adjusting the ink printing rate to print the design may also be used. Specifically, when designing a certain area, rather than printing ink on 100% of the area (so-called solid color), the area can be divided into a mesh shape and ink printed partially (so-called mesh color). In this case, the light transmittance of the entire area can be adjusted by adjusting the proportion of the extremely small areas in the mesh shape where ink is not printed (for example, by printing as a 50% mesh, the light transmittance of the entire area can be set to 50% even if opaque ink is used). When using this method, there is no need to adjust the ink used, making it possible to print designs with adjusted light transmittance while preventing the color and gloss of the design originally intended to be displayed in the design section 3130 from being impaired by adjusting the ink.

Furthermore, while it has been stated that the design section 3130 may have a region with low light transmittance (first region 3131) in part to enhance the distinctiveness of the design, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the proportion of the first region 3131 with low light transmittance using black ink relative to the overall design of the design section 3130 may be limited to a predetermined percentage (for example, 10%). If the use of black colors in displaying the design is excessively limited, problems such as the overall design becoming unclear may arise, but by allowing a certain degree of use as described above, it is expected that the effect of achieving both the distinctiveness of the design and the distinctiveness of the gaming ball 3101 can be achieved.

As described above with reference to Figure 82 (A), the third region 3133 is an area with high light transmittance to ensure visibility of the game ball 3101 as it rolls on its back surface. In the above explanation, the light transmittance of the third region 3133 was described as "semi-transparent (high or medium transmittance)." However, as another example, the light transmittance of the third region 3133 may be set to approximately 100%, and the third region 3133 may be configured to be transparent, so as not to reduce the transmittance of the game ball 3101 on the back surface, just like the area in which the game ball can roll that does not overlap the design portion 3130.

In this case, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the gaming ball 3101 overlaps at least a portion of the design portion 3130, the area in which the transmittance is reduced by the design portion 3130 (the overlapping area of the design portion 3130 excluding the third area 3133) may be set to be less than 50% of the entire area of the gaming ball 3101. By setting it in this manner, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, even if the front of the gaming ball 3101 is overlapped with printing (design portion 3130) that reduces light transmittance, more than half of the gaming ball 3101 can be seen by the player without a decrease in transmittance. As a result, even if it overlaps the design portion 3130, more than half of the gaming ball 3101 is presented to the player in its original color, allowing the player to enjoy its movement without losing sight of the gaming ball 3101.

Next, Figure 82(B) shows a situation in which gaming ball 3101 is passing through gate 3120. In the situation in Figure 82(B), gaming ball 3101 passes behind the gate member of gate 3120, and it can be seen that a portion of gaming ball 3101 is invisible to the player. In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, in order to prevent a significant decrease in the distinctiveness of gaming ball 3101 in such a case and allow the player to enjoy the movement of gaming ball 3101, it is preferable that the gate member overlapping gaming ball 3101 is configured to be less than 50% of the apparent area of gaming ball 3101 (i.e., the area when projected onto a two-dimensional plane parallel to the glass plate of glass frame 3). A specific method for achieving this is to ensure that the size of the gate member in the direction in which gaming ball 3101 passes is not excessively large. If it is desired to increase the size of the gate member, it can be formed from a light-transmitting material, for example.

Up to this point, it has been stated that the gaming machine according to this embodiment may have a design section 3130 in the attacca unit 3100 that displays a design in front of the gaming board. However, if the design uses a similar color (the same color or a similar color) to the color of the gaming ball 3101 (generally silver), there is a risk that the player may lose sight of the gaming ball 3101 when the gaming ball 3101 passes through a design section of the same color, which could lead to distrust of the game. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, if the design section 3130 uses a similar color to the color of the gaming ball 3101 in the rolling area, the proportion of the design of the same color covering the gaming ball 3101 may be set to a maximum of less than 50% of the area of the gaming ball 3101. With this configuration, even if the gaming ball 3101 overlaps a design of a similar color, more than 50% of the gaming ball 3101 is visible, allowing the player to identify that the gaming ball 3101 is passing through that area (improving the visibility of the gaming ball 3101), which also has the effect of preventing players from feeling distrustful of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a glossy color is used in the design section 3130, restrictions similar to those imposed on the use of similar colors may be imposed. That is, when the design section 3130 uses a predetermined glossy color (glossy color) in the rolling area, the proportion of the glossy color design covering the gaming ball 3101 may be set to a maximum of less than 50% of the area of the gaming ball 3101. This configuration, like the restriction on the use of similar colors described above, has the effect of improving the visibility of the gaming ball 3101 and reducing distrust of the gaming machine.

<Shrinkage processing for design printing>
In gaming machines, various designs such as characters, letters (character strings), patterns, backgrounds, etc. are applied (design printing) to various parts that are likely to be visible mainly to players, such as the surface of the gaming board, the surfaces of decorative accessories, the light-emitting surfaces of light-emitting accessories, the surfaces of gaming frames, etc. These design printings may be printed on an independent sheet member (so-called design sheet), or may be printed directly onto the base material of the board surface by silk printing or the like (other printing methods are also possible).

Furthermore, by further applying a specified surface treatment to the design print, when light emitted from or transmitted through a light source such as an LED hits it, the appearance to the player can be changed, enhancing the presentation effect. In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, a "shrinkage process" can be implemented as one type of surface treatment for the design print. Below, shrinkage process for the design print on the board will be explained in detail, using the base material of a gaming board as an example.

Figure 83 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the structure of the base material of a gaming board on which a design is printed. As shown in Figure 83, a printed layer 3220 made of multiple colors is formed on the base material 3210. Furthermore, a UV coating layer 3230 is formed on the printed layer 3220.

The base material 3210 is a plate-like member that serves as the base of the game board surface, for example. The material of the base material 3210 is, for example, acrylic resin, but is not limited to this and may be other resins or wood, etc. However, from the perspective of design visibility, etc., a material that is light-transmitting (translucent) is preferable.

The printed layer 3220 is a layer formed by printing a design. When the printed layer 3220 is formed by silk screen printing, for example, silk screen printing is repeated for each ink color and type, resulting in a multi-layer structure as shown in Figure 83. The multi-layer printed layer 3220 is formed in order from the layer closest to the substrate 3210, and the order in which the inks are printed may be predetermined based on the ink color and type. For example, starting from the layer closest to the substrate 3210, changing pearl ink, which can produce different gloss effects depending on the angle, and smoke ink, which can produce a smoky color effect, are printed in this order, and then blue (cyan: C), red (magenta: M), yellow (yellow: Y), and black (K) inks are printed in this order as color elements of the design. The thickness of the entire printed layer 3220 is determined to a predetermined size, specifically a fixed value of 0.007 mm (although it may also be determined to be a variable value within a predetermined range).

The UV coating layer 3230 is a layer that achieves the shrinkage process and is formed from ultraviolet-curable ink (so-called UV ink). A more specific method for forming the UV coating layer 3230 involves first applying a paste-like UV ink to a predetermined thickness. The applied UV ink is then irradiated with ultraviolet (UV) light of a predetermined frequency, causing a photochemical reaction (photopolymerization) in the UV ink. During the photochemical reaction, the UV ink hardens through a polymerization reaction in which monomers contained in the UV ink bond together. During this process, a series of wave-shaped convex portions form on the coated surface, resulting in shrinkage. It is known that when applying UV ink to shrink the UV ink using UV irradiation, the thicker the applied UV ink (the coating thickness), the greater the height difference (height) of the convex portions generated by the photochemical reaction. Furthermore, the longer the UV irradiation time, the smaller the angle of the convex portions (i.e., the more likely the shape near the apex becomes narrower). Furthermore, the shape of the convex portions produced by the photochemical reaction is random, as it depends on the result of the polymerization reaction of the monomer (low molecular weight compound).

In this embodiment, the UV coating layer 3230 is formed taking into consideration the characteristics of the photochemical reaction with UV ink described above. By appropriately adjusting at least one of the thickness of the initially applied UV ink and the UV irradiation time by varying the thickness depending on the location (rather than setting a uniform thickness or irradiation time), the UV coating layer 3230 is formed to a predetermined thickness while retaining randomness. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, the thickness of the UV coating layer 3230 is a fixed value of 0.04 mm (although it may be set to a variable value within a predetermined range). In the following description, the difference in thickness in the UV coating layer 3230 (in FIG. 83, the difference in height from the bottom layer of the base portion 3231 to the apex of the convex portion in the contracted portion 3232 (the vertical thickness distance of the UV coating layer 3230)) is sometimes referred to as the "contraction step."

The UV coating layer 3230 has a shrinkage portion 3232 where shrinkage due to a photochemical reaction occurs, resulting in differences in the coating thickness, and a base portion 3231 where no shrinkage occurs and a uniform coating thickness is maintained. The thickness of the base portion 3231 may be predetermined as a set value for the size of the UV coating layer 3230. For example, as shown in Figure 83, the thickness of the base portion is set to a fixed value of 0.03 mm (although it may be set to a variable value within a predetermined range, similar to the set value for the thickness of the UV coating layer 3230). In this case, as described above, since the thickness of the UV coating layer 3230 in the example of Figure 83 is 0.04 mm, the maximum thickness of the shrinkage portion 3232 is 0.01 mm.

Furthermore, one feature of the gaming machine according to this embodiment may be that the contracted portion 3232 of the UV coating layer 3230 is formed so that the maximum value of the contraction step is smaller than the thickness (vertical width in Figure 83) of the nearest light source 3240 (or the light source 3240 arranged to irradiate the UV coating layer 3230). In the example of Figure 83, since the contraction step is formed at 0.04 mm, the vertical width of the light source 3240 only needs to be greater than 0.04 mm.

The light source 3240 shown in Figure 83 is an example of a light source that illuminates a panel member (base material 3210, printing layer 3220, and UV coating layer 3230) on which a design is printed, and is, for example, an LED. As shown in Figure 83, the light source 3240 is positioned, for example, near a panel member that has been shrunk. Also, in Figure 83, the top is the player's side (the glass plate side), and the player's line of sight is directed from the top to the bottom of Figure 83. In the panel member, the UV coating layer 3230 is light-transmitting (translucent), and the printing layer 3220 is also generally light-transmitting (it may include a specified ink layer that does not transmit light in part). Furthermore, the base material 3210 is also light-transmitting if acrylic resin or the like is used. Therefore, when light is emitted from the light source 3240, the light is diffusely reflected or refracted by the shrinkage formed in the UV coating layer 3230 before reaching the printing layer 3220, creating a dramatic effect in which a design reflecting the random shrinkage pattern is visible to the player.

The position of the light source 3240 relative to the shrunk panel member is not limited to the example shown in Figure 83, and various arrangements can be used as long as it is near the panel member. Specifically, for example, the light source 3240 may be located within a predetermined distance above or below the panel member, or may be located within a predetermined distance diagonally from the panel member at a certain angle. As described above, if the base material 3210 is optically translucent, the light emitted from the light source 3240 is diffusely reflected or refracted by the shrunk formed in the UV coating layer 3230, passes through the design in the printing layer 3220, and then passes through the base material 3210. As a result, the player can visually recognize a design that reflects the random shrunk pattern.

The following describes in more detail the characteristics of this embodiment regarding the shrinkage that occurs in the UV coating layer 3230.

As shown in Figure 83, the UV coating layer 3230 has a continuous convex shape in the contracted portion 3232, but the shape of each convex portion (including not only the cross-sectional shape but also the three-dimensional shape) is random and each one is different. Therefore, the vertices of the multiple convex portions in the contracted portion 3232 form multiple peaks 3233 with different shapes, and the peak angles formed by each peak 3233 are all other than 90 degrees. Furthermore, the boundaries between adjacent convex portions among the multiple convex portions in the contracted portion 3232 form multiple valleys 3234 with different shapes, and the valley angles formed by each valley 3234 are all other than 90 degrees. As mentioned above, the shape of the convex portions during shrinkage processing is random, and it is possible that the height of the peaks 3233 of some of the convex portions may be lower than the height of the valleys 3234 of other convex portions. However, as this situation has only a minor effect (or makes no significant difference) on the effects obtained from the characteristics of the shrinkage processing according to this embodiment, it will not be mentioned in the following explanation.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the surface of the UV coating layer 3230 (the surface of the shrunken portion 3232) on a specific panel member that has been subjected to shrink processing may be formed so that it is entirely visible from the outside (for example, visible from the front, at the player's line of sight). "Visible" here may mean through a transparent member such as a glass plate, and by making the entire shrunken surface visible, the change in the appearance of the design due to the shrink processing can be fully conveyed to the player, enhancing the presentation effect.

Figure 84 is a diagram to explain what a player may imagine when viewing a panel member that has undergone shrinking processing. Figure 84 is an example of what the base material 3210 may look like when viewed from the player's eye level as shown in Figure 83.

In a panel member that has been shrunk, multiple convex portions are formed in the shrunk portion 3232, creating differences in the height of the shrunk portion. As a result, when light from the light source 3240 passes through the UV coating layer 3230, there is a difference in transmittance between the peaks 3233 and the valleys 3234, causing the design printed on the printing layer 3220 to appear differently when viewed by a player. More specifically, as shown in Figure 84, light transmittance is lower near the peaks 3233 than near the valleys 3234 due to refraction and diffuse reflection, so the design printed on the printing layer 3220 appears relatively dark in the areas overlapping with the peaks 3233 and relatively bright in the areas overlapping with the valleys 3234. This is the light and dark effect imparted to the design by the shrunk processing.

To achieve this effect, in this embodiment, the constricted convex regions (regions from valleys 3234 to peaks 3233) of the UV coating layer 3230 may be formed such that the width of each convex region, including peak 3233 (the width when the convex region is projected onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane, corresponding to W1 in FIG. 84 ) is different from the surface width of the light source 3240 (e.g., the width of the surface on which a light-emitting element (LED) is provided, corresponding to W2 in FIG. 84 ). The "width" direction here corresponds to, for example, the left-right direction in FIG. 84 , but may also be replaced with the up-down direction or other directions. Furthermore, "width" may also be replaced with "area." Furthermore, when the constricted regions 3232 are formed so that the width W1 of the convex regions and the surface width W2 of the light source 3240 are different, a more limited setting may be adopted, such that one is always larger (wider), or the other is always smaller (narrower). Figure 84 shows an example where the surface width W2 of the light source 3240 is always set to be larger than the width W1 of the convex region. In this case, a light and dark effect is created by shrinking the light source 3240 to a smaller size, preventing the light-emitting element of the light source 3240 located on the back side of the panel member from being clearly visible to the player, and allowing the design to be illuminated effectively.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contracted convex regions of the UV coating layer 3230 may be formed so that the width of each convex region, including the top 3233 (e.g., W1 shown in FIG. 84), is different from the width of the nail head of the obstacle nail planted in the playing area of the game board (e.g., width W3 of obstacle nail 3250 shown in FIG. 84). Furthermore, "width" may be replaced with "area." The obstacle nail 3250 is, for example, like obstacle nail 3301 shown in FIG. 85, which will be described later, hammered into the acrylic of the game board, and its top (nail head) generally has a hemispherical shape. Furthermore, the above-mentioned difference in area may be expressed as the respective areas as seen by the player (the areas when projected onto a two-dimensional plane parallel to the glass plate of the glass frame 3) or as the respective surface areas in three-dimensional space. Furthermore, when the contracted portion 3232 is formed so that the width (or area) of the convex region and the width W3 of the obstruction nail 3250 are different, a more limited setting may be made so that one is always larger (wider), or the other is always smaller (narrower). Figure 84 shows an example where the width W3 of the obstruction nail 3250 is always larger than the width W1 of the convex region. In this case, the light and dark effect created by the contraction process is smaller than the obstruction nail 3250, so that the presence of the obstruction nail 3250 is not hidden by the design, and the design can be effectively illuminated.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, shrinking the panel member on which the design is printed can change the appearance of the design and provide a powerful visual effect. Furthermore, shrinking causes diffuse reflection of transmitted light, which not only provides the visual effect described above, but can also be expected to have a blurring effect that makes the light-emitting elements of the light source 3240 less clearly visible.

<Measures against conduction of static electricity, etc.>
Since gaming machines are equipped with a large number of precision electronic components, when conductive materials are used, it is important to take measures to prevent unintended conduction when static electricity or other accidental charges are generated. The following describes in detail the conduction measures in the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

Figure 85 is an image diagram to explain the structure of planting obstacle nails. Figure 85(A) shows an example of a structure in which the holes in which obstacle nails 3301 are planted are through holes, and Figure 85(B) shows an example of a structure in which the holes in which obstacle nails 3301 are planted are non-through holes. It is possible to arbitrarily select either Figure 85(A) or Figure 85(B) to be adopted in a gaming machine.

The obstacle nails 3301 are planted in the play area formed on the game board 3310 with their heads raised (so-called "floating shot"), which changes the path of the game ball as it flows down the play area and enhances the game's enjoyment. More specifically, as shown in Figures 85(A) and 85(B), the game board 3310 is constructed by layering an acrylic plate 3320 on the front surface of a plate-shaped base material 3330, and the obstacle nails 3301 are planted in holes formed at predetermined positions in the acrylic plate 3320. Note that the obstacle nails 3301 are planted in a floating shot so that the distance from the nail head to the surface of the game board 3310 (more specifically, the surface of the acrylic plate 3320) is a predetermined length greater than the diameter of the game ball. In the following description, the point where the planted obstacle nail 3301 intersects with the surface of the game board 3310 (the surface of the acrylic plate 3320) is referred to as the "nail base." Although not shown in the figure, a painted surface that displays a design is provided on the surface of the base material 3330 (the acrylic plate 3320 side) by attaching a design sheet or by direct printing (see, for example, Figure 83).

In the case of Figure 85(A), the obstruction nail 3301 is planted in a through hole formed in the acrylic plate 3320 to a depth (for example, a depth less than half the depth of the through hole) so that the tip of the nail does not penetrate the acrylic plate 3320, and so that a predetermined length or more is secured from the nail head to the nail base. In the case of Figure 85(B), the obstruction nail 3301 is planted in a non-through hole formed in the acrylic plate 3320. Note that in either case, the hole in the acrylic plate 3320 is not parallel to the horizontal direction, but is formed at a predetermined angle (for example, 5 degrees) so that the front side (the side toward the glass frame 3) is higher.

While the obstacle nail 3301 is made of conductive metal, the acrylic plate 3320 is made of acrylic resin and is therefore not conductive. The base material 3330 may be conductive or non-conductive depending on the material used. The painted surface formed on the surface of the base material 3330 may also be conductive or non-conductive depending on the type of ink used to print the design.

In the case of the obstruction nail 3301 with an implanted structure shown in Figure 85(A), the electrical path from the obstruction nail 3301 to other conductive materials is expected to be a path that travels from the "base of the nail" along the surface of the acrylic plate 3320, and a path that travels from the tip of the obstruction nail 3301 via the through hole between the acrylic plate 3320 and the base material 3330. On the other hand, in the case of the obstruction nail 3301 with an implanted structure shown in Figure 85(B), the electrical path from the obstruction nail 3301 to other conductive materials is limited to a path that travels from the "base of the nail" along the surface of the acrylic plate 3320.

Figure 86 shows an example of the positional relationship between the obstacle nails and electronic components. Figure 86(A) is a schematic diagram of the game board viewed from the front, and Figure 86(B) is an enlarged perspective view showing the detailed configuration of the area surrounded by the dashed line in Figure 86(A).

As shown in Figure 86 (A), the game board 3310 has an opening 3311 in the center, and an LCD display screen (not shown) is placed in the opening 3311, further back than the game board 3310. The arrangement of the obstacle nails 3301A and LEDs 3341 is shown in detail in Figure 86 (B).

As shown in Figure 86(B), a plurality of obstacle nails 3301 (individually obstacle nails 3301A and 3301B) are planted on the surface of the game board 3310 (acrylic plate 3320 arranged in front of the base material 3330) (see Figure 85 for details). In addition, a light source device 3340 equipped with a plurality of LEDs 3341 (individually LEDs 3341A and 3341B) is arranged on the back side of the game board 3310. LED 3341A is hidden by the game board 3310 and cannot be seen (shown by a dashed line) in Figure 86(A), but as shown in the perspective view of Figure 86(B), it is visible beyond the opening 3311 of the game board 3310. LED 3341A is, for example, a full-color LED (RGB LED). A full-color LED is a light-emitting element that consists of three LEDs, R, G, and B, and can emit a predetermined number of colors according to the number of gradations of each color by combining the light emitted by each LED.

Furthermore, the base material 3330 shown in Figure 86 (B) is a non-conductive material, and no conductive painted surface is formed on the surface of the base material 3330. In this configuration, the obstacle nail 3301A and the LED 3341A are an example of an obstacle nail and an electronic component that are the shortest distance along the conductive path. Below, the positional relationship between the obstacle nail and other conductive components (electronic components, painted surfaces, etc.) in this embodiment will be explained in detail using the obstacle nail 3301A and the LED 3341A, etc.

Figure 87 is a side view showing a schematic representation of the positional relationship between the obstacle nail 3301A and the LED 3341A shown in Figure 86. Figure 87 can be thought of as a view of Figure 86(B) viewed from the right. The difference from Figure 86(B) is that a glass plate 3350 has been added to Figure 87. The glass plate 3350 is a glass plate fitted into the glass frame 3, and is located in front of (towards the player than) the game board 3310. Note that the structure of the obstacle nail 3301A embedded in the acrylic plate 3320 shown in Figure 87 may be the structure shown in Figure 85(A) or the structure shown in Figure 85(B).

As explained above, in the component configuration shown in Figures 86 and 87, the closest conductive member on the conductive path (conductive path) to the obstructing nail 3301A is the nearest LED 3341A. In this way, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, for a certain obstructing nail (obstructing nail 3301A) and a conductive member (LED 3341A) that is in a shortest distance relationship on the conductive path, the shortest distance on the conductive path between them may be configured to be equal to or greater than a "predetermined distance."

Here, the "predetermined distance" is preferably a distance that ensures that even if an electric charge is applied to a conductive component during operation of the gaming machine, the electric charge will not be transmitted to other conductive components. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 operates at a voltage of 24V (or 100V), and the CPU (main control CPU 101) of the main control board 100 operates at a voltage of 5V. Here, even if the 5V applied to the main control CPU 101 were applied directly to the obstructing nail 3301, it is preferable that the distance be a safe predetermined distance that would not energize nearby conductive components. An example of such a predetermined distance that takes safety into consideration is the distance from the front surface (the surface facing the player) of the glass plate 3350 to the rear surface (the surface facing the base material 3330) of the acrylic plate 3320 (corresponding to L0 shown in Figure 87). The distance from the front surface of the glass plate 3350 to the rear surface of the acrylic plate 3320 can be considered a distance designed with safety in mind to prevent unnecessary conduction from the player to the base material 3330 when there are no conductive members such as obstruction nails 3301 on the acrylic plate 3320, and is therefore a suitable example of a predetermined safe distance. Ensuring a predetermined safe distance prevents malfunctions in electronic components and protects them.

For specific numerical examples of the above-mentioned predetermined distance L0, refer to Figure 89 described below. The thickness of glass plate 3350 is 2 mm, the distance from glass plate 3350 to acrylic plate 3416 (which may be replaced with acrylic plate 3320 shown in Figure 86, etc.) is 18 mm, and the thickness of acrylic plate 3416 is 10 mm, so the total distance L0 is 30 mm.

In other words, the gaming machine according to this embodiment may be configured so that the shortest distance of the conductive path from the base of the obstructing nail 3301A to the nearest LED 3341A (L1 shown in FIG. 87) is, for example, 30 mm or more. By configuring it in this way, even if the obstructing nail 3301A becomes charged by static electricity or the like, it is possible to prevent electrical conduction from the obstructing nail 3301A to the nearest electronic component, the LED 3341A.

Note that the same technical concept can also be applied when the phrase "predetermined distance" is used in other explanations below regarding electrical conduction measures, with 30 mm being used as an example of a specific value. In other words, the distance "30 mm" can be interpreted as the sum of the thickness of glass plate 3350, the distance between glass plate 3350 and acrylic plate 3416 (acrylic plate 3320), and the thickness of acrylic plate 3416 (acrylic plate 3320).

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment may be configured so that the linear distance from the LED 3341A to the surface of the glass plate 3350 (or the back surface of the glass plate 3350 as seen by the player) is a predetermined distance (e.g., 30 mm) or greater. This configuration can prevent static electricity from the surface of the gaming machine from affecting the LED.

Furthermore, because LED 3341A is positioned on the back side of the gaming board 3310, unless special consideration is given to its placement, it may partially or entirely overlap the head (nail head) of a peg 3301A planted on the front side of the gaming board 3310 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. However, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86(A), the full-color LED 3341 (all R, G, and B LEDs) may be positioned so that it does not entirely overlap a peg 3301 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. This configuration ensures that each of the multiple LEDs 3341 positioned on the back side of the gaming board 3310 has a certain linear distance from any of the multiple pegs 3301 positioned on the front side of the gaming board 3310. As a result, it is possible to increase the distance on the conduction path, which has the effect of preventing conduction to LED 3341 when a peg 3301 becomes charged. As a variant example, when viewing the gaming machine from the front, at least one of the R, G, and B LEDs that make up LED 3341 may be positioned so that they do not overlap with the heads (nail heads) of the obstacle nails 3301, and the same effect can be achieved with this configuration.

Furthermore, as an example of a method for more reliably ensuring the distance between the obstructing nail 3301 and the LED 3341, the gaming machine according to this embodiment may be configured so that the linear distance from the head of the obstructing nail 3301 to the LED 3341 is a predetermined distance or greater (e.g., 30 mm). This configuration allows for a wider restriction range than when the LED 3341 is configured so that it is not positioned directly below the obstructing nail 3301 (in a position where they overlap when viewed from the front), thereby further enhancing the effectiveness of preventing electrical conduction from the obstructing nail 3301 to the LED 3341.

Figure 88 is a diagram showing another example of the positional relationship between a peg and an electronic component. Figure 88 shows a side view similar to Figure 87, but differs in that a conductive painted surface 3331 (for example, a character design using copper foil) is formed on the front surface of the base material 3330 (the surface on the acrylic plate 3320 side). Whether the painted surface formed on the front surface of the base material 3330 is conductive or not depends on factors such as the type of ink used to print the design.

When a conductive painted surface 3331 is present on the front surface of the base material 3330 as shown in Figure 88, the conductive member closest to the obstructing nail 3301A on the conductive path (conductive path) is not the LED 3341A, but the exposed surface of the painted surface 3331 at the opening 3311. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when attempting to configure the shortest distance on the conductive path of the nearest conductive member in the case of a positional relationship such as that shown in Figure 88 to be equal to or greater than a "predetermined distance," it is preferable to configure the shortest distance of the conductive path (path through which electricity can travel) from the base of the obstructing nail 3301A (the point where it intersects with the surface of the acrylic plate 3320) to the surrounding painted surface to be equal to or greater than a predetermined distance (e.g., 30 mm).

More specifically, when the obstructing nail 3301A is planted in a non-through hole in the acrylic plate 3320, the painted surface closest to the base of the obstructing nail 3301A in Figure 88 is the painted surface 3331 at the end of the opening 3311, and the shortest distance of the conductive path is "L2." Therefore, it is sufficient to configure L2 to be 30 mm or greater. With this configuration, even if the painted surface 3331 is conductive due to the use of conductive ink, for example, the conductive path from the painted surface 3331 to the nearest obstructing nail 3301A is ensured to be at least a predetermined distance, so that even if the obstructing nail 3301A becomes charged due to static electricity or the like, the charge can be prevented from being transmitted from the obstructing nail 3301A to the painted surface.

As another method of preventing conduction, when the obstruction nail 3301A is embedded in a through-hole in the acrylic plate 3320, the shortest distance of the conductive path from the tip of the obstruction nail 3301A (i.e., the through-hole portion) to the surrounding conductive painted surface 3331 may be configured to be a predetermined distance (e.g., 30 mm) or greater. To ensure this configuration, for example, the substrate 3330 may be configured so that the conductive painted surface 3331 is not formed in the surrounding area within a 30 mm radius of the through-hole of the obstruction nail 3301.

Furthermore, the placement of other components relative to the conductive painted surface 3331 may be configured so that the linear distance (L3 shown in Figure 88) from the painted surface 3331 to the rear surface of the glass plate 3350 fitted into the glass frame 3 (which may be the front surface of the glass plate 3350 as seen by the player) is greater than a predetermined distance (e.g., 30 mm). This configuration is expected to prevent electrical conduction to the painted surface 3331 even if a discharge occurs from the front of the glass plate 3350.

The above-mentioned painted surface 3331 may not only be a painted surface formed by printing directly on the base material 3330, etc., but may also be the painted surface of an independent sheet member (design sheet). Furthermore, design sheets are also frequently used for decorative accessories, and the painted surface of a design sheet attached to a decorative accessory may be configured, like the above-mentioned painted surfaces, to be separated from the gaming machine's surface components, such as the board surface (barrier nails 3301A) and glass plate 3350, by a predetermined linear distance (e.g., 30 mm) or more. A specific example of a design sheet attached to a decorative accessory is shown in Figure 89, described below. In this way, by configuring the design sheet of the decorative accessory to be separated from the gaming machine's surface components, it is possible to prevent electricity from flowing to the design sheet even if a predetermined charge (e.g., 5 V of the CPU input voltage) is applied to the surface component.

So far, we have explained the layout configuration for preventing electrical continuity around the obstructing nail 3301, but the electrical continuity prevention measures in this embodiment are not limited to the area around the obstructing nail 3301, and some additional examples are provided below.

Figure 89 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the structure of a decorative accessory. In Figure 89, the left side where the glass plate 3350 is shown is the player's side. In the following explanation, when explaining the multi-layer structure of the decorative accessory 3410, the left side of Figure 89 will be referred to as the upper side, and LED 3412 will be mounted on substrate 3411.

As shown in Figure 89, decorative element 3410 has LED 3412 mounted on substrate 3411, and inner lens 3413 positioned further above substrate 3411 at a predetermined distance (12.96 mm in Figure 89) from LED 3412. Inner lens 3413 is an optical element with optical transparency, and refracts or diffuses light emitted from LED 3412. In Figure 89, inner lens 3413 is formed with a thickness of 2 mm. Design sheet 3414 is positioned above inner lens 3413, and outer lens 3415 is positioned above design sheet 3414. Design sheet 3414 is a sheet material on which a design is printed, and has optical transparency according to the design. In Figure 89, the thickness of design sheet 3414 is 0.188 mm, but this is not limited to this. The outer lens 3415 is a light-transmitting optical element that refracts or diffuses light emitted from the LED 3412 and transmitted through the inner lens 3413 and design sheet 3414. The outer lens 3415 typically does not have a uniform thickness, as shown in the figure, because its thickness and surface shape are tailored to the desired lighting effect. However, it is typically formed with a thickness of, for example, 2 mm or less. Depending on the lighting effect desired for the decorative element 3410, some or all of the outer lens 3415 may not be present. An acrylic plate 3416 is then placed above the outer lens 3415, with a predetermined gap (0.5 mm or more in Figure 89 ). The acrylic plate 3416 is a plate-shaped member made of light-transmitting acrylic resin, and is 10 mm thick in Figure 89 . The above is the multi-layer structure of the decorative accessory 3410, and a glass plate 3350 fitted into a glass frame is placed a predetermined distance (18 mm in Figure 89) in front of the acrylic plate 3416 of the decorative accessory 3410 (towards the player). The thickness of the glass plate 3350 is 2 mm.

The structural example shown in Figure 89 demonstrates the following features of this embodiment:

In the decorative accessory 3410, a gap is formed between the acrylic plate 3416 and the design sheet 3414 (or, more precisely, the outer lens 3415 that covers the design sheet 3414, if present). Note that, although not shown in Figure 89, at certain locations, such as the ends of the decorative accessory 3410, the outer lens 3415 and the acrylic plate 3416 are joined to hold the acrylic plate 3416 in place, and naturally, there are no gaps at these locations. By forming this gap, static electricity generated outside the acrylic plate 3416 does not affect the design sheet 3414 or the LED 3412 behind it, which is expected to have an anti-conductive effect.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the gap formed between the above-mentioned acrylic plate 3416 and design sheet 3414 (which may be replaced by outer lens 3415) be thicker than the thickness of the paint (ink) on design sheet 3414. In the specific example of Figure 89, the thickness of the paint on design sheet 3414 is 0.188 mm or less, which is the thickness of design sheet 3414 itself, while the gap between acrylic plate 3416 and outer lens 3415 is 0.5 mm or more, which satisfies the above condition.

The painted surface (design sheet 3414) of decorative accessory 3410 may be configured to be a predetermined linear distance (e.g., 30 mm) or more from the front surface (or back surface) of glass plate 3350. In the specific example of Figure 89, the distance from the back surface of glass plate 3350 to acrylic plate 3416 is 18 mm, the thickness of acrylic plate 3416 is 10 mm, and the distance from acrylic plate 3416 to the front surface of design sheet 3414 is 2.5 mm. Therefore, the distance from the back surface of glass plate 3350 to the front surface (painted surface) of design sheet 3414 is 31.5 mm, which satisfies the above conditions. Furthermore, the distance from the front surface of glass plate 3350 to the front surface (painted surface) of design sheet 3414 is 33.5 mm, which is the sum of the thickness of glass plate 3350 (2 mm), and also satisfies the above conditions.

In addition to the above, as a measure to prevent conduction in this embodiment, a molded product molded with electronic components mounted thereon may be configured so that the shortest distance on the surface of the molded product from the outer surface of the molded product to the electronic component is a predetermined distance or greater (e.g., 30 mm). Specifically, the molded product may be, for example, a side lens device equipped with an LED board and lens that illuminates from the side of the opening in the gaming board. In this case, the light-emitting element of the LED board may be mounted at a position on the surface of the device that is 30 mm or greater away from the lens portion (the connection portion with the outside) of the side lens device.

Furthermore, conductive screws (holes) may be provided on the substrate along the path on the surface of the molded product from the outer surface to the electronic component. In the specific example of a side lens device, one or more conductive screws may be provided somewhere along the path of the LED substrate from the lens portion to the light-emitting element. A conductive screw can be achieved, for example, by applying copper foil to the inner periphery of the screw.

5. Fifth embodiment
The following describes a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. The description of the configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, which are the same as those of the gaming machines according to the above-described embodiments, will be omitted, and the following description will focus on the differences.

This embodiment can be applied as appropriate to the gaming machines of each of the above-mentioned embodiments, and in the following description, components described for the gaming machines of each of the above-mentioned embodiments may be reused. Here, the gaming machine will be described as, for example, a pachinko machine 1. Note that in this embodiment, if the electronic component is, for example, a DIP (dual in line package) component, inserting the leads of the electronic component into through holes in the printed circuit board and placing the electronic component on the printed circuit board will be referred to as "assembly," and cutting the leads of the electronic component after assembly (after performing clinching if necessary) and soldering the ends of the leads will be referred to as "mounting."

In this embodiment, a printed circuit board on which multiple electronic components are mounted will be described as a board (also referred to as a "control board") that controls gaming. The printed circuit board may be, for example, a PCB (Printed Circuit Board) on which electronic components have been mounted, or a PWB (Printed Wired Board), also known as a "bare board" before electronic components have been mounted. In this embodiment, such a printed circuit board will be described in detail, primarily using the main control board 100 described in the first embodiment. Note that the printed circuit board in this embodiment is not limited to the main control board 100, but may also be any other control board that can be mounted on a gaming machine, such as the presentation control board 200, payout control board 400, sub-control board 1200, image control board 300, lamp connection board 91, or board 3411, as well as the main control board 2060, sub-control board 2080, back lamp board 2312, or board 4040 shown in Figure 105, which will be described later.

90 and 91 are plan views showing an example configuration of the main control board 100. FIG. 92 is a plan view showing an example configuration of the back surface 4102 of the main control board 100. Here, the main control board 100 is, for example, a flat base material, with its surface and insulating layer (prepreg) as an insulator, and conductive copper foil (also referred to as the "copper foil layer"), some of which forms a pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "wiring pattern"), formed in multiple layers, and a resist formed on top of that. The resist is insulating and is also called solder resist. The resist is formed mainly on the copper foil layer on the surface 4101. If a portion of the copper foil layer is missing, part of the copper foil layer may be exposed through the missing portion of the resist. In the example configurations shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, at least some of the wiring patterns, resist, vias, through-holes, etc. may be omitted. Note that similarly, in each of the drawings from FIG. 92 onwards, wiring patterns, etc. may be omitted.

In the following description, the main control board 100 has a front surface 4101 as one of its board surfaces, and a back surface 4102 as the board surface opposite to the front surface 4101. For example, if the main control board 100 is a single-sided mounting board, the front surface 4101 is the board surface on which electronic components are mounted, and the back surface 4102 is the board surface on which electronic components are not mounted. On the other hand, if the main control board 100 is a double-sided mounting board, both the front surface 4101 and the back surface 4102 are board surfaces on which electronic components may be mounted, but the board surface on which more electronic components are mounted is referred to as the front surface 4101. Alternatively, if the main control board 100 is a double-sided mounting board, the board surface on which more DIP (Dual In Line Package) components are mounted may be referred to as the front surface 4101. In the following embodiment, the main control board 100 will be described as a single-sided mounting board.

The surface 4101 of the main control board 100 shown in Figure 90 has electronic components mounted on it, while the surface 4101 of the main control board 100 shown in Figure 91 is in a state preceding the state shown in Figure 90, i.e., a state in which no electronic components have been mounted (a state before the electronic components have been assembled). In this embodiment, when there is no need to distinguish between the surface 4101 and the back surface 4102, they are collectively referred to simply as the "board surface."

On surface 4101 shown in Figure 90, various types of electronic components are mounted, including resistors 4012, 4022, 4066, and 4067, connector sockets 4005 and 4013 (described below), as well as electronic components 4025 and 4026, which are ICs (Integrated Circuits) such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) and ROM (Read Only Memory), and capacitors 4011, 4055-4058.

These electronic components may be surface-mounted devices (SMD) or DIP components. For example, if a certain electronic component is a DIP component, the leads of the electronic component are inserted into through-holes formed in the thickness direction of the main control board 100 from the front surface 4101 on which the electronic component is located. The leads protruding from the through-holes are soldered to the back surface 4102, thereby mounting the electronic component to the main control board 100. At this time, the leads of the electronic component are electrically connected to a predetermined wiring pattern formed on the main control board 100 (more specifically, this may be a wiring pattern formed on the front surface 4101, a wiring pattern formed on the back surface 4102, or, if the main control board 100 is a multi-layer board, a wiring pattern formed on one of the internal conductive layers).

Here, in the case of surface-mounted components, placement and leads are soldered on the surface 4101 side, so mounting includes assembly on the surface 4101 side and the above-mentioned mounting. In this embodiment, a through-hole is, for example, a through-hole formed in the thickness direction of the main control board 100, with a cylindrical conductive portion formed on its inner surface. A via is a hole formed in the thickness direction to electrically connect at least one layer of a multi-layer board, with a conductive portion formed on its inner surface. Lands are provided on both ends of the through-hole or on the via on the surface 4101 or back surface 4102. The land has a larger diameter than the hole diameter of the through-hole, etc.

In this embodiment, a "through hole" refers to a through hole formed in the thickness direction of a printed circuit board from the front surface 4101 to the back surface 4102 to allow the insertion of leads when assembling an electronic component with leads, such as a DIP component, on a printed circuit board, and a cylindrical conductive portion is formed on the inner surface by copper plating or the like.

In addition, on the board surface (specifically, the front surface 4101 and back surface 4102 of the main control board 100), the copper foil (pattern) underneath the resist is exposed around the through-holes, forming circular lands. The lands of the through-holes are electrically conductive to the conductive parts of the through-holes, and are primarily used for soldering the leads of electronic components.

In this embodiment, a "via" refers to a hole formed in the thickness direction of a printed circuit board to electrically connect specific layers. In a single-layer printed circuit board, a via is a through-hole in the thickness direction. In a multi-layer printed circuit board, a via may be a through-hole (through-hole via) in the thickness direction, or a hole that connects specific layers in the thickness direction. As with a through-hole, a cylindrical conductive portion is formed on the inner surface of a via by applying copper plating or the like.

Furthermore, in the case of through vias, as with through holes, copper foil may be exposed around the via on the substrate surface, forming a land. In other words, through vias (vias formed by through holes) can also be considered as through holes with the same structure as through holes. Therefore, unless otherwise specified, "through holes" in this embodiment refer to either through holes or through vias. Note that, unlike through-hole vias, via lands do not need to be used for soldering. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, vias are not only used to conduct signals between specific layers, but are also sometimes used to stabilize grounding or improve heat dissipation. Here, vias in single-layer substrates do not need to be copper-plated on their inner periphery. Because no leads are inserted into vias, the hole diameter of a via (via diameter) is generally smaller than the hole diameter of a through hole (through-hole diameter). Furthermore, when a land is formed around a through hole, such as a through hole or via (through via), the diameter of the land (hereinafter referred to as land diameter) is naturally larger than the hole diameter of the corresponding through hole. Also known as a similar structure to a land is a pad, which is formed by exposing copper foil (pattern) for soldering surface-mounted components.

The rear surface 4102 of the main control board 100 shown in Figure 92 is also called the solder surface, and has soldered thereto the ends of the leads of electronic components inserted into through-holes from the front surface 4101 (the lead ends protruding from the through-holes to the rear surface 4102). These soldered leads include ends 4014A that have not been subjected to the clinching process described below, and ends 4014B that have been subjected to the clinching process.

While details will be provided later, generally speaking, on one main control board 100, there are more electronic components with clinched lead ends, such as end 4014B, mounted than electronic components without clinched lead ends, such as end 4014A. Furthermore, the main control board 100 is characterized in that the electronic components located first when viewing the inside of the board surface from the outer periphery of the board surface and the peripheral area adjacent to the periphery (hereinafter referred to as the "outer periphery area") (more specifically, this refers to the aggregation of electronic components located closest to several points along the outer periphery area, such as electronic component a1 located closest when viewing the inside from a certain point a in the outer periphery area, electronic component b1 located closest when viewing the inside from another point b in the outer periphery area, etc.) generally have more electronic components without clinched leads than electronic components with clinched leads. Specifically, for example, in the case of the main control board 100 shown in Figure 92, when viewed from the outer peripheral edge region inward, the electronic components arranged closest to each other on the top, right, and bottom sides of the back surface 4102 are clearly more electronic components whose leads are not clinched than electronic components whose leads are clinched, and it can be seen that even on the left side of the back surface 4102, there are more electronic components whose leads are not clinched.

As shown in FIG. 90, a large number of electronic components are mounted on the surface 4101. For example, an IC (Integrated Circuit) 4026 is provided at one end of the surface 4101 in the planar direction. Furthermore, for example, a connector socket 4005 and a resistor 4012 are provided at another end of the four corners of the surface 4101. Furthermore, for example, a resistor 4022 is provided at yet another end of the four corners of the surface 4101. In addition, electronic components 4025 and a connector socket 4013 are also provided on the surface 4101. The configuration in the vicinity of the IC 4026, the configuration in the vicinity of the connector socket 4005 and resistor 4012, and the configuration in the vicinity of the resistor 4022 will be described later.

<5-1. Test points>
This embodiment is characterized in that a plurality of test points are arranged within a predetermined range on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100, and the orientation of the character information printed on the surface 4101 corresponding to each test point in the same group is the same, i.e., the same. A specific description will be given below.

Figure 93 is a plan view showing an example configuration in which multiple test points TP1 to TP8 are formed in area S on the board surface (e.g., surface 4101) of the main control board 100 shown in Figure 90. Note that in Figure 93, the orientation of area S shown in Figure 90 is rotated 90 degrees to the left. Each test point TP1 to TP8 is a contact point that is separately arranged in a location where the probe pin can easily contact it when it is difficult to contact the lead, wiring pattern, etc. that is being tested in an electrical characteristic test. Note that each test point TP1 to TP8 may be replaced by a through-hole or other perforation formed along the thickness direction of the main control board 100, and further, these perforations may be filled with solder. Note that the test points are also sometimes called test lands (surfaces with exposed conductive portions), and solder may be placed on top of the test lands.

Electronic components that are high above the board surface (e.g., surface 4101) are not placed near each test point TP1 to TP8. This is to prevent surrounding components from getting in the way when applying probe pins or the like to each test point TP1 to TP8.

For example, electronic components such as ICs may have many leads, or the electronic component itself may be relatively small. This can make it difficult to properly contact each lead with a probe pin when testing its electrical characteristics. To address this issue, test points (e.g., test points TP1-TP8) are provided on surface 4101 in place of the leads to be tested, electrically connected to the leads. In other words, test points TP1-TP8 are electrically connected to each lead of the electronic component and are contact points for testing the electrical characteristics of the electronic component. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, multiple test points TP1-TP8 are arranged in a predetermined area on surface 4101. This collective arrangement of multiple test points is also referred to as a "group arrangement."

Specific examples of group arrangements include, for example, arranging eight test points TP1 to TP8 in a group, two vertically and four horizontally, or vice versa, as shown in the figure, or arranging them in a horizontal line. Furthermore, a standard example of an arrangement that constitutes a "group arrangement" is when adjacent test points are spaced apart at intervals shorter than the size of each test point (for example, the diameter of a circular test point, or the length of the diagonal for a square test point). Note that multiple test points TP1 to TP8 that belong to the same group and are arranged in a group may each be formed to be roughly the same size (for example, by using through holes of the same diameter).

In this embodiment, eight test points TP1 to TP8 are arranged in groups corresponding to electronic components 4026, such as ICs, in the vicinity of the capacitor 4011 located nearby.

The multiple test points TP1 to TP8 are electrically connected to corresponding multiple leads 4026A on the electronic component 4026 via the respective wiring patterns WR1 to WR8. The electronic component 4026 thus has multiple leads 4026A, and if the spacing between these multiple leads 4026A is less than a predetermined distance (e.g., 0.64 mm), the structure makes it difficult for the multiple probe pins used during the above test to come into contact with them.

In this embodiment, as described above, some of the leads 4026A of the electronic component 4026 that are necessary to perform the specified test are electrically connected to multiple test points TP1 to TP8 via the wiring patterns WR1 to WR8. Note that the test patterns (wiring patterns WR1 to WR8) may have one test point for each lead of the electronic component, or one test point for a set of multiple leads.

Specifically, at least some of the leads 4026A of the electronic component 4026 are electrically connected to the eight test points TP1 to TP8, allowing a test signal to be input to any of the eight test points TP1 to TP8 and the test results to be output from any of the eight test points TP1 to TP8.

As described above, in this embodiment, test points TP1 to TP8 are necessary because the spacing between leads 4026A of electronic component 4026, i.e., leads 4026A to which wiring patterns WR1 to WR8 are connected, is narrow. Because capacitor 4011 is located near wiring patterns WR1 to WR8 connected to leads 4026A of electronic component 4026, test points TP1 to TP8 cannot be located very close to electronic component 4026. Because there are no other wiring patterns or other electronic components below capacitor 4011 (between the bottom surface of capacitor 4011 and surface 4101), wiring patterns WR1 to WR8 are formed. In the orientation shown in the figure, there are no other wiring or electronic components on the left or right sides of capacitor 4011, but if wiring patterns WR1-WR8 were to be routed around these sides, they would have to be forcibly bent. Therefore, wiring patterns WR1-WR8 are extended to pass under capacitor 4011, and test points TP1-TP8 are arranged in groups. As a result, while wiring patterns WR1-WR8 are arranged in one row of eight, test points TP1-TP8 are arranged in two rows of four, which allows for a wider area per test point and makes it easier for probe pins to contact them.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, on the surface 4101, text information 4001P1 to 4001P8 indicating the names of the test points corresponding to each test point TP1 to TP8 is silk-screened in the area surrounding each test point TP1 to TP8. Here, silk-screen printing refers to a printing method in which, for example, ink is placed on a plate and then pressed and spread with a spatula-like tool called a squeegee to print letters, symbols, etc. on an object. When silk-screening information on the surface of a printed circuit board, the printing pattern is created in advance and printed on the surface of the board using a printing process using a dedicated machine, allowing for concise printing of the information.

The orientation of each piece of character information 4001P1 to 4001P8 corresponding to the same group of test points TP1 to TP8 shown in the figure is common (e.g., the same).

Each piece of character information 4001P1-4001P8 is positioned in the placement area near a respective test point TP1-TP8, and to an extent that it is possible to visually determine which test point TP1-TP8 it corresponds to. Additionally, a ring-shaped mark is silk-screened around each test point TP1-TP8. For some of the character information 4001P3 and 4001P5, leader lines are silk-screened on the surface 4101, leading from the ring-shaped mark. By enabling printing using leader lines in this way, the degree of freedom in the placement area for some of the character information 4001P3 and 4001P5 can be increased.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 100 can provide one or more test points TP1-TP8 for measuring the electrical characteristics of a specific electronic component 4026 mounted on it, using wiring patterns WR1-WR8 electrically connected to the electronic component 4026 on the board, and character information 4001P1-4001P8 corresponding to each test point TP1-TP8 is silk-screened on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100. Multiple test points TP1-TP8 corresponding to a given electronic component are arranged within a specified range as a group of test points TP1-TP8, and the character information corresponding to each test point TP1-TP8 in the same group of test points TP1-TP8 is printed in a common character orientation. This makes it easier to read each piece of character information 4001P1 to 4001P8, and the positions of test points TP1 to TP8 to which the probe pins should contact during testing can be accurately determined based on each piece of character information 4001P1 to 4001P8.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the test points TP1 to TP8 arranged in groups as described above correspond to the same type of electronic component (electronic component 4026 in the above example). In this way, when testing electronic component 4026, work can be performed within the layout area of the test points TP1 to TP8 arranged in groups, improving work efficiency and reducing work errors.

In addition, in this embodiment, test points TP1 to TP8 corresponding to electronic component 4026, which is, for example, an IC (Integrated Circuit), are placed near that electronic component 4026. This allows the wiring patterns WR1 to WR8 on surface 4101 to be shorter, and the closer they are, the more noise resistance can be improved. Note that electronic component 4026 is not limited to the IC described above; test points (or test points using through holes) may be provided for electronic components whose lead spacing is a predetermined distance, for example, 0.64 mm or less.

<5-2. Clinch Handling>
In this embodiment, when an electronic component is assembled on a printed circuit board, the ends of the leads protruding from the through holes may be bent by clinching, and such bent ends are referred to as "lead ends." No through holes, vias, ends of other leads, patterns, etc. are provided around the end of the lead.

A through hole is a through hole formed from the front surface 4101 to the back surface 4102 of the main control board 100 to allow the insertion of leads from electronic components. A cylindrical conductive portion is formed on the inner surface of the through hole using a metal such as copper. A via is a hole formed to electrically connect one of the layers in the thickness direction of the main control board 100, and a via that connects the front surface 4101 and back surface 4102 of the board surface is formed as a through hole (through via). A cylindrical conductive portion is also formed on the inner surface of the via using a metal such as copper. Through holes and through vias may have conductive lands, for example in a circular shape, formed around the outer periphery of the hole on both board surfaces (front surface 4101, back surface 4102) that they penetrate. At this time, in the through-hole or through via, the land formed on the outer periphery of the hole and the cylindrical conductive portion are electrically connected (i.e., the land and the conductive portion are continuous), so that the lands formed on both substrate surfaces (front surface 4101 and back surface 4102) are electrically connected via the conductive portion.

In this embodiment, in a so-called multilayer printed circuit board (PCB) consisting of multiple layers in which insulating layers and conductive layers are alternately stacked from the front surface 4101 to the back surface 4102, a through-hole formed from the front surface 4101 to the back surface 4102 for inserting leads when assembling a DIP component is referred to as a through-hole, and a hole formed between layers to connect at least one layer (and in some cases from the front surface to the back surface) is referred to as a via. In the case of a single-layer printed circuit board, a through-hole or via may be formed that penetrates from the front surface 4101 to the back surface 4102 of the board surface, but in this case, the inner surface of the through-hole does not need to have a conductive portion made of copper foil or the like.

Axial and radial components are known as types of DIP components that can be assembled to surface 4101. Generally, axial components have a structure in which one lead extends in a different direction from each end (often both ends) of the electronic component (the leads extend in two directions), while radial components have a structure in which two leads extend in the same axial direction from one end of the electronic component (the leads extend in one direction). Here, the bending direction during clinching differs between axial and radial components.

Axial components are cut to a predetermined length with their leads inserted into vias, and the ends of the leads remaining after cutting are clinched and bent toward each other (inner bending). Inner bending is a process in which each lead is bent toward the other lead (in other words, toward the electronic component), and after inner bending, the leads at both ends are coaxial with a portion overlapping the electronic component when viewed from above (or below). On the other hand, radial components are cut to a predetermined length with their leads inserted into vias, and the ends of the leads remaining after cutting are clinched and bent away from each other (outer bending, N-bending). Outer bending is a process in which each lead at both ends is bent away from the electronic component, and after outer bending, the leads at both ends are coaxial with the electronic component sandwiched between them when viewed from above (or below). N-bending is a process in which each lead is bent so that, when viewed from the center of the electronic component, the angles that the leads at both ends make with respect to the electronic component are the same (or approximately the same) in the same rotational direction. After N-bending, the leads at both ends are parallel (or approximately parallel). The length of the lead ends that remain after cutting the leads protruding from the back surface 4102 is determined depending on the structure, such as a case, underneath the back surface 4102.

The purpose of bending in this manner is that, due to the length of the electronic component itself, the leads of axial components (such as resistors) do not interfere with each other even when bent inward, but because the length of radial components (such as capacitors) is short, there is a risk that the ends of the leads may come into contact with each other when bent inward. Furthermore, when an N-bend clinching process is performed on an axial electronic component, the direction of the clinch (direction of lead bending) due to the N-bend is the same for identical electronic components. In other words, the angle formed by the leads at both ends of the electronic component will be the same whether the electronic component is assembled horizontally or vertically on the board surface.

As shown in FIG. 90, in central area A on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100, for example, resistor 4066 with part number "R1" and resistor 4067 with part number "R2" are mounted. Furthermore, in central area B, for example, capacitor 4055 with part number "C1" and capacitor 4056 with part number "C22" are mounted. Furthermore, in central area C, for example, capacitor 4057 with part number "C35" and capacitor 4058 with part number "C47" are mounted.

Resistors 4066 and 4067 are arranged so that they are parallel to each other in the horizontal direction in the illustrated orientation. Capacitors 4055 and 4056 are also arranged, for example, so that they are parallel to each other in the horizontal direction in the illustrated orientation. Capacitors 4055 and 4056 are arranged so that they are parallel to resistors 4066 and 4067. On the other hand, capacitors 4057 and 4058 are arranged, for example, so that they are parallel to each other in the vertical direction in the illustrated orientation. Therefore, capacitors 4057 and 4058 are arranged so that they are approximately perpendicular to the arrangement direction of resistors 4066 and 4067 and capacitors 4055 and 4056.

When viewed from the back surface 4102 shown in Figure 92, resistors 4066 and 4067 have their ends bent inward, i.e., bent in a direction that brings them closer to each other, as shown in area A.

When viewed from the rear surface 4102, capacitors 4055 and 4056 have their leads bent in an N-shape, i.e., bent in a direction away from each other, as shown in region B.

When viewed from the rear surface 4102, capacitors 4057 and 4058 have their leads bent outward, i.e., bent in a direction away from each other (for example, approximately 180 degrees), as shown in region C.

Here, we will explain pre-processing (pre-assembly processing) that can be performed on the leads of electronic components before assembly. Commonly known pre-processing methods for leads include lead forming, kinking, and cutting.

Lead forming is a process in which the straight leads of electronic components are bent into the desired shape using a lead processing machine before assembly.

Also, for example, if it is desired to raise an electronic component a predetermined distance from the board using a lead processing machine before assembly, kinks can be formed by bending the middle of the leads on both ends of the electronic component before assembling the electronic component (kink processing). In this kink processing, for example, the middle portion of the lead is bent so that a predetermined height from the board surface can be ensured from the electronic component when assembled. In this way, when the lead is inserted into a through hole, the distance between the board and the electronic component can be kept constant. This prevents the base of the lead from being subjected to a large force due to the principle of leverage, which could cause damage when an external force is applied to the electronic component, and also ensures a sufficient distance between the board and the electronic component, which generates a relatively large amount of heat.

Here, an automatic assembly machine is a device that automatically acquires a large number of electronic components with leads and inserts the leads into through-holes in a printed circuit board to assemble the electronic components to the printed circuit board. Once the leads of the electronic components have been inserted into the through-holes, the leads can then be simultaneously clinched and cut. However, lead forming and kinking processes, for example, are not supported by automatic assembly machines and may be performed in advance using a separate lead processing machine.

Before assembly, a lead processing machine performs lead processing (lead forming, kinking, and cutting). During assembly, an automatic assembly machine (or manual assembly) inserts the leads into appropriate through-holes required by the design (assembly). During mounting, after the leads are inserted into the through-holes and assembled as described above, cutting and clinching of the leads can be performed, and the automatic mounting machine performs soldering.

Here, the ends of the leads are formed by a clinching process, in which the leads protruding from the through holes to the backside of the board are bent and cut when an automatic assembly machine assembles the electronic components.

In this embodiment, for example, in order to ensure an insulating distance, no other through holes, vias, or patterns are provided within a predetermined distance from the tip of a lead whose end has been formed by clinching, other than the through hole into which the lead is inserted. Specifically, within a predetermined distance (e.g., 1 mm) from the through hole into which the lead of an electronic component is inserted toward the clinched end of the lead, no other through holes, vias, or lead ends are provided other than the through hole into which the clinched lead is inserted. The reason for not providing any such through holes within the predetermined distance is that the end of the lead is unlikely to come into contact with the other vias, lead ends, or patterns, eliminating the risk of accidental contact and a short circuit.

Automatic mounting machines are capable of cutting and clinching leads in one step, allowing them to adjust the lead orientation and length. While the orientation and length depend on the automatic mounting machine, as mentioned above, there are special features regarding the bending direction of the leads of axial and radial components.

Figures 94(A) to 94(D) are cross-sectional views showing an example of how the lead 4012A of a resistor 4012, which serves as an electronic component, is cut after being inserted into a through-hole 4001A, and the end of the lead 4012A is clinched. A through-hole 4001A is formed in the main control board 100. Here, a resistor 4012 is used as an example of an insert-mounted component that can be mounted on the main control board 100.

First, as shown in Figure 94(A), the resistor 4012 has a lead 4012A, which is inserted from the front surface 4101 into a through hole 4001A formed at the assembly position of the resistor 4012 as shown in Figure 94(B), and then clinched and cut as shown in Figure 94(C). The end of the cut lead 4012A is shown by a dashed line. As shown in Figure 94(D), the lead 4012A protruding from the back surface 4102 is filled with solder 4001H and soldered.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 94 (D), the ends of the clinched leads 4012A are spaced apart by a predetermined distance SL or more, which is sufficient as an insulating distance. The predetermined distance SL, which is sufficient as an insulating distance, is a distance that is determined in advance to prevent the ends of the leads 4012A from coming too close to other conductive bodies and causing a short circuit. The specific value of the predetermined distance SL may be a value calculated based on past knowledge, taking into account various factors such as the current flowing through the electronic component (and therefore the lead) and the materials of the various components mounted on the board, and can be set to, for example, 5 mm.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 100 has multiple through-holes 4001A formed therethrough in the thickness direction, and the multiple electronic components include a resistor 4012 as an example of an insert-mounted component that can be mounted on the main control board 100 by inserting the lead 4012A of the resistor 4012 from the front surface 4101 of the main control board 100 into the through-hole 4001A formed at the assembly position of the resistor 4012 as an electronic component, and soldering the lead protruding from the back surface 4102 (second surface) behind the front surface 4101 (first surface). When mounting the resistor 4012 as an insert-mounted component on the main control board 100, a clinching process can be performed to bend the end of the lead 4012A protruding from the back surface 4102 before soldering. Within a predetermined distance SL from the end of the lead 4012A bent by the clinching process, no through holes other than the through hole 4001A through which the lead 4012A is inserted are formed. This ensures an insulating distance and prevents the end of the lead 4012A that has been clinched from shorting out with other through holes.

Furthermore, if the end of lead 4012A is bent strongly toward the back surface 4102 by the clinching process, the end of lead 4012A inserted into through hole 1 and clinched may protrude farther in a direction parallel to the back surface 4102 than the solder 4001H applied to that through hole. In this case, the shortest distance of the conductor between through hole 1 and another adjacent through hole is not the distance between the solder 4001H, but the distance from the end of lead 4012A of through hole 1 to the end of solder 4001H or another lead 4012A in a nearby through hole. As a result, even if an insulation distance is secured between the solder 4001 of adjacent through holes, it may not be possible to secure that insulation distance. To avoid this situation, the solder 4001H in adjacent through holes can be spaced apart at a distance that is slightly larger than the insulation distance (for example, about twice the length of the bent portion of the lead), or the bending angle of the lead 4012A due to clinching can be prevented from exceeding a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees). Note that the "distance between solder 4001H" in adjacent through holes described above can also be replaced with the "distance between lands" in adjacent through holes.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the terminals of the leads 4012A that have been clinched from the through holes 4001A are spaced apart by a predetermined distance SL or more. This ensures an insulating distance and prevents the clinched leads 4012A from shorting out.

＜5-3. Whether or not there is a clinch＞
FIG. 95A is a cross-sectional view showing an example in which a lead 4012A has been subjected to clinching, and FIG. 95B is a cross-sectional view showing an example in which a lead 4005A has not been subjected to clinching.

In this embodiment, in one main control board 100, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the number of electronic components mounted by clinching the leads 4012A inserted into the through holes 4001A is greater than the number of electronic components mounted by not clinching the leads 4005A inserted into the through holes 4001A, as shown in FIG. 95(B).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the inside of the board surface of the main control board 100 is viewed from various points in the outer peripheral region of the board, electronic components mounted without clinching to leads 4005A are more likely to be present than electronic components mounted with clinching to leads 4012A. In other words, taking some point along the outer peripheral region of the main control board 100 as a starting point, the electronic components arranged closest to that starting point are, for example, more likely to be electronic components mounted without clinching to leads 4005A.

Electronic components that are mounted with leads clinched are, for example, electronic components (resistors, capacitors, etc.) that are assembled automatically. While many electronic components such as resistors can be assembled automatically, there may be resistors that cannot be assembled automatically. On the other hand, electronic components that are mounted without clinching are, for example, electronic components that are mounted by manual insertion (relatively important electronic components such as ROMs, segment displays, connector sockets, and IC sockets). Electronic components that are not clinched (mainly connectors, etc.) are mainly located in mounting areas outside the central area on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100, near the side edge faces of the board. The reason for arranging electronic components that are not clinched in this way is to prevent workers from injuring their fingers on the ends of the leads clinched when they grip the side edges of the main control board 100 with their fingers.

In this embodiment, when viewing the surface 4101 along its outer edge, the electronic components arranged on the outside are configured such that there are more second-type insert-mounted components (electronic components mounted without clinching) than first-type insert-mounted components (electronic components mounted with clinching). That is, electronic components mounted without clinching (e.g., connectors) are often provided primarily in the area near the side edges of the outer periphery of the surface 4101 of the main control board 100. Note that while the area near the side edges of the outer periphery includes a prohibited area where electronic components cannot be placed, another area also includes a mounting area where electronic components may be placed. The reason electronic components mounted without clinching are arranged as described above is to prevent workers from injuring their fingers on the ends of leads formed by clinching when gripping the side edges of the main control board 100.

Figure 96 is a plan view showing an example configuration in which region U of the back surface 4102 shown in Figure 92 is enlarged. Note that in the illustrated example, wiring patterns, through holes, vias, etc. are omitted for simplicity of explanation.

Figure 96 shows the back surface 4102 and does not illustrate the electronic components mounted on the front surface 4101, but in this embodiment, the electronic components mounted on the front surface 4101 include, as described above, first-type insertion-mounted components (electronic components mounted using clinching) and second-type insertion-mounted components (electronic components mounted without using clinching).

As described above, when a first type of insertion-mount component is assembled to the front surface 4101, the ends of the leads protruding from the back surface 4102 are bent and then soldered after undergoing a clinching process. In the illustrated example, the portion of the lead where the clinching process has been performed (the clinched end) corresponds to, for example, end 4017A.

On the other hand, as described above, in the second type of insertion-mount component, the end of the lead protruding from the back surface 4102 is soldered without being clinched. In the illustrated example, the soldered portion of the lead corresponds to end 4016A, for example. At end 4016A, the end of the lead is soldered without being bent in a specified direction.

As described above, in this embodiment, the multiple electronic components include insertion-mounted components that can be mounted on the main control board 100 by inserting the leads of the electronic components from the front surface 4101 into through-holes formed in the main control board 100 at the assembly positions of the electronic components and soldering the leads protruding from the back surface 4102 behind the front surface 4101. The insertion-mounted components include a first type of insertion-mounted component that, when mounted on the main control board 100, performs a clinching process to bend the ends of the leads protruding from the back surface 4102 and then solders the leads, and a second type of insertion-mounted component that solders the leads protruding from the back surface 4102 without performing a clinching process on the ends of the leads protruding from the back surface 4102. On a main control board 100 serving as a certain printed circuit board, more first-type insert-mounted components are mounted than second-type insert-mounted components, while the electronic components mounted closer to the outer edge of the surface 4101 of the main control board 100 are more second-type insert-mounted components than first-type insert-mounted components.

In this way, electronic components (first type of insert-mounted components) whose leads are clinched are compatible with automatic assembly, resulting in better work efficiency and fewer placement errors compared to electronic components that are manually assembled. Furthermore, by positioning electronic components (first type of insert-mounted components) whose leads are clinched closer to the center in the planar direction of the back surface 4102, workers can enjoy the following advantages. Specifically, workers often grasp the vicinity of the outer edge of the back surface 4102 of the main control board 100, but the ends 4017A of the clinched leads are (relatively) absent near these edges. This tactile sensation allows workers to detect errors in the installation of electronic components, reducing the number of such errors and improving productivity.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a specified electronic component whose leads are not clinched (a second type of insertion-mount component) is an electronic component into which another electronic component is inserted or removed, and the absence of clinched lead ends 4017A can be identified by touch. A specified electronic component whose leads are not clinched is the second type of insertion-mount component described above (e.g., a connector socket). The second type of insertion-mount component includes specific electronic components into which the specified electronic component can be inserted or removed. The following explanation will be given with reference to the drawings.

Figure 97 is a partial cross-sectional view showing an example of how the shape of the end of a lead of an electronic component is checked with a finger. In the illustrated example, parts not mentioned are omitted or simplified as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the insertion components can be distinguished into first-type insertion components and second-type insertion components by the difference in the tactile feel of the leads on the back surface 4102. The second-type insertion components include specific electronic components that allow a specific electronic component to be connected externally to the front surface 4101. "Connection" here can also be referred to as "fitting," for example. The insertion components include, for example, a resistor 4012 as a first-type insertion component in which, when assembled to the main control board 100, the ends of the leads 4012A protruding from the back surface 4102 are clinched and then soldered, and a connector socket 4005 as a second-type insertion component in which the leads 4005A protruding from the back surface 4102 are soldered without clinching the ends of the leads 4005A.

For example, if the connector socket 4005, which is one of the multiple connector sockets on the surface 4101, is a female connector, it is an electronic component that allows a male connector (not shown) to be inserted into or removed from the connector socket 4005. The presence or absence of clinched ends of the leads soldered to the back surface 4102, which serves as the solder surface, can be sensed by touch. For example, if the presence of an unclamped lead end can be sensed by touching the back surface 4102, it can be determined that the electronic component having the lead is an electronic component into which a corresponding electronic component can be inserted or removed; in other words, it can be determined that a second-type insertion-mount component (e.g., the connector socket 4005) is mounted on the back side of the lead (i.e., the surface 4101). The second-type insertion-mount component may be an electronic component other than the connector socket 4005 described above (e.g., another electronic component such as an IC socket).

As described above, in this embodiment, the multiple electronic components include insertion-mounted components that can be mounted on the main control board 100 by inserting the leads of the electronic components from the front surface 4101 of the main control board 100 into through-holes 4001A, which are through-holes formed in the main control board 100 at the mounting positions of resistors 4012, and soldering the leads protruding from the back surface 4102 behind the front surface 4101. The multiple insertion-mounted components mounted on the main control board 100 can be distinguished into first-type insertion-mounted components and second-type insertion-mounted components by the difference in the tactile feel of the leads on the back surface 4102, and the second-type insertion-mounted components include specific electronic components that allow a specified electronic component to be connected externally on the front surface 4101 side. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the lead has been clinched by touching the end of the lead. Therefore, if the presence of an unclamped lead can be determined by touching the back surface 4102, it is possible to identify that the electronic component having that lead is an electronic component into which a corresponding electronic component can be inserted and removed (i.e., a second type of insertion-mount component). Being able to identify the type of inserted-mount component thus installed makes it possible to prevent the installation of incorrect electronic components.

Furthermore, the first type of insert-mounted component is soldered after a predetermined lead processing is performed on the leads protruding from the rear surface 4102. The predetermined lead processing includes a process of bending the leads or a process of cutting and bending the leads. Furthermore, the first type of insert-mounted component may be subjected to at least one of lead forming, kinking, and cutting processing as "another lead processing" before being assembled on a printed circuit board (e.g., the main control board 100).

Of the lead processing methods described above that can be performed primarily on type 1 insertion-mount components, lead forming and kinking are performed on the lead portions that exist on the front surface 4101 side after assembly, while cutting and clinching are performed on the lead portions that exist on the back surface 4102 side after assembly. These lead processing methods are performed as appropriate depending on how the electronic component is mounted on the printed circuit board.

<5-4. Silkscreen printing (reference/index)>
Furthermore, in this embodiment, "information" relating to the electronic components to be mounted is printed on the resist on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100, and this "information" includes a first type of information (hereinafter also referred to as "reference") and a second type of information (hereinafter also referred to as "index"). Note that in the illustrated example, the resist on the surface 4101 is not shown. In this embodiment, the first type of information (index) is printed without any missing information, but the second type of information (index) may be printed with some missing information. This will be explained in detail below.

Figures 98(A) to 98(C) are plan views showing examples of electronic components mounted on the surface 4101 and their placement markers. Note that wiring patterns and the like on the surface 4101 are omitted from Figures 98(A) to 98(C). Figure 98(A) shows an example of the configuration of a capacitor 4011 when viewed from above (hereinafter also referred to as "the above") in the direction perpendicular to the surface 4101. Figure 98(B) shows an example of the configuration of a placement marker 4033A silk-screened with a portion missing due to the presence of a via 4031, indicating the placement position of an electronic component (not shown). Figure 98(C) shows an example of the configuration of a resistor 4012 when viewed from above the surface 4101.

A reference of the first type of information described above is, for example, the part number "C66" printed corresponding to capacitor 4011 in FIG. 98(A). Reference 4011Y of "C66" is silk-printed on the resist of surface 4101 around capacitor 4011, for example, near one of through-holes 4001A (on the right side in the illustrated example). The index is, for example, placement mark 4033A shown in FIG. 98(B), which is silk-printed on the resist of surface 4101 in such a way that a portion of it is omitted to avoid the ring-shaped land 4031B of via 4031, which serves as a through-hole. A reference of the first type of information is, for example, the part number "R34" for resistor 4012 shown in FIG. 98(C). For example, the reference 4012Y for part number "R34" is silk-printed on the resist on surface 4101 around the periphery of resistor 4012, for example, near resistor 4012 itself (on the right side in the illustrated example).

On the resist of surface 4101, references 4011Y and 4012Y (the above-mentioned "C66" and "R34") as first type information are silk-screen printed on the resist of surface 4101 without any missing parts.

On the other hand, on the resist of surface 4101, the index serving as the second type of information is, for example, a frame-shaped placement mark 4011Z silk-screened to correspond to capacitor 4011 shown in FIG. 98(A). Note that placement mark 4011Z does not need to be limited to a frame shape, and may have any shape that allows the location and orientation of the corresponding electronic component (electronic component to be mounted) to be recognized. Furthermore, placement mark 4011Z is formed by silk-screen printing a shape that resembles the electronic component to be mounted (for example, a frame that resembles the outline of the electronic component).

An index of the second type of information, taking the resistor 4012 shown in Figure 98(C) as an example, is a placement mark 4012Z in the shape of a circuit symbol silk-screened on the surface 4101. The placement mark 4012Z is a shape that can identify the resistor 4012 to be placed (specifically, the circuit symbol of the electronic component to be placed, etc.) silk-screened on the resist of the surface 4101. Note that when viewed from above the surface 4101 with the resistor 4012 assembled, the placement mark 4012Z shown is mostly covered by the resistor 4012. To clearly show this state, in Figure 98(C), the portion of the placement mark 4012Z that is covered by the resistor 4012 when viewed from above the surface 4101 is shown with a dashed line.

If an obstacle is present in the printing area, the index as the second type of information is silk-screened with a portion of the obstacle missing. Specifically, for example, in the case of placement mark 4011Z in FIG. 98(A), the frame-shaped printing area overlaps with through-hole 4001A into which lead 4011A of capacitor 4011 is inserted in two places, so placement mark 4011Z is silk-screened with these overlapping portions missing. Similarly, in the case of placement mark 4033A in FIG. 98(B), the linear printing area partially overlaps with via 4031 and land 4031B, so placement mark 4033A is silk-screened with these overlapping portions missing. Note that even if a portion of placement mark 4011Z or 4033A is missing as described above, it can be said that this does not affect the overall understanding of the placement area of the electronic component indicated by the placement mark. Furthermore, by allowing for parts of the placement markers serving as indexes to be missing in this way, it is possible to reduce situations where the area in which the index can be printed is restricted by the placement (design matters) of electronic components, wiring patterns, etc. on the board, thereby increasing the degree of freedom regarding the area in which the index can be printed.

As described above, in this embodiment, at least references 4011Y, 4012Y (e.g., "C66" and "R34" as shown) as first-type information or placement marks 4011Z, 4033A as second-type information (indexes) can be printed on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100 as information related to the mounted electronic components. References 4011Y, 4012Y (e.g., "C66" and "R34" as shown) as first-type information are printed without omitting any of the lines that make up the information, while placement marks 4011Z, 4033A as second-type information may be silk-screened with some of the lines that make up the information omitted. In this way, placement marks 4011Z, 4033A may be silk-screened with some of the lines omitted, which may reduce their identifiability, but their functionality as second-type information (indexes) is not impaired, and flexibility in the printable area can be improved (or maintained). It also improves the ease of identifying the position of electronic components during assembly and when checking after mounting.

In this embodiment, as described above, the placement mark 4011Z as the second type of information (index) may be silk-screened with some of the lines that make up the information omitted. However, for example, when the placement mark 4033A as the second type of information overlaps with the land 4031B that serves as a conductive area formed on the periphery of the via 4031 on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100, the placement mark 4033A may be printed in such a way that some of the lines that make up the information are omitted at the overlapping location.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 98 (B), when the placement mark 4033A as the second type of information (index) overlaps with a via 4031, a land 4031B, etc. on the resist on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100, the information (placement mark 4033A) may be silk-screened in such a way that part of the line constituting the information (placement mark 4033A) is missing at the overlapping location.

In this embodiment, a silkscreen printing pattern is prepared in advance with part of the placement mark 4033A missing (for example, the silkscreen ink does not land on the land 4031B). More specifically, just as the placement mark 4033A shown in Figure 98(B) is printed so that it does not come into contact with the land 4031B, the print pattern prepared in advance will be one that avoids any obstacles that overlap the printing range of the index (in this case, the land 4031B).

In addition, in this embodiment, second type information (index), such as the above-mentioned frame-shaped placement mark 4011Z, is printed on the resist of surface 4101 in a larger print format than first type information (reference), such as part number "C66." Here, first type information (reference), such as part number "C66," is sufficient if it allows the part number of the electronic component to be installed on surface 4101 to be visually recognized. In contrast, second type information (index), such as frame-shaped placement mark 4011Z, is required to allow the placement position and orientation of the electronic component to be installed to be visually recognized. Therefore, second type information (index), such as frame-shaped placement mark 4011Z, generally has a larger area when viewed from above in a direction perpendicular to surface 4101 than first type information (reference), such as part number "R34." Therefore, second type information (index), such as frame-shaped placement mark 4011Z, is printed in a more legible format than first type information (reference), such as part number "C66."

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 100 has multiple through-holes 4001A formed therein as through-holes that penetrate the board thickness direction, and at least a reference 4011Y or the like as first type of information or a placement mark 4011Z or the like as second type of information (index) can be printed on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100 as information related to the electronic components to be mounted. The reference 4011Y as first type of information is printed without omitting any of the lines that make up the information, and the placement mark 4011Z or the like as second type of information is silk-screened with some of the lines that make up the information omitted (i.e., in a missing form) in the overlapping areas if it overlaps with the land 4001A1 on the periphery of the through-hole 4001A on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100.

In this way, for example, the electrical function of through-hole 4001A shown in FIG. 98(A) is not impaired (it cannot be said that there is no electrical effect when impurities such as ink are printed on the conductive portion), while improving the recognizability of the position of capacitor 4011 to be assembled. Furthermore, if the silkscreen printing plate (original for platemaking) were to cover the surface of land 4031B, via 4031, or through-hole shown in FIG. 98(B), silkscreen printing would not be possible over via 4031 or through-hole, and at first glance, the silkscreen printing would not look good. However, if silkscreen printing can be performed in a manner that removes a portion, as in the present embodiment described above, the silkscreen printing will look good and its function as second-type information (index) can be reliably ensured.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the second type of information (index) is printed on the resist on surface 4101 in a larger, more legible format than the first type of information (reference). This makes it possible to make the index more visible than the reference, and also enables more accurate positioning of the electronic component to be assembled.

In this embodiment, the first type of information (reference) is information that allows the corresponding mounted component to be uniquely identified on the main control board 100, and the second type of information (index) is information related to the placement position of the corresponding electronic component on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100. Since some of these matters have already been explained, explanation of the overlapping parts will be omitted.

The first type of information (reference) includes at least, for example, letters, symbols, or patterns. Here, the reference is, as described above, for example, references 4011Y and 4012Y, and is information that can uniquely identify the corresponding mounted component on the board. The first type of information includes at least letters or symbols. On the other hand, the second type of information (index) is, as described above, for example, frame-shaped placement marks 4011Z, 4033A, etc., and is information related to the placement position of the corresponding electronic component.

In order to avoid overlapping with through-holes 4001A and the like on the resist of surface 4101, not only references such as the part number "C66" mentioned above, but also pin positions "▲" that indicate the lead positions and are silk-screened around electronic components such as ICs, can be included. In this way, accurate alignment can always be ensured when automatically assembling the electronic component on the resist of surface 4101.

Here, the size of reference 4011Y (e.g., "C66" in Figure 98(A)) and reference 4012Y (e.g., "R34" in Figure 98(C)) as first type information is made uniform regardless of their placement position on the resist on surface 4101 or the type of electronic component being assembled. In other words, each reference 4011Y, 4012Y is printed on surface 4101 so that the font sizes of each character unit in each reference 4011Y, 4012Y are approximately equal to each other.

As described above, in this embodiment, at least references 4011Y and 4012Y as first type information or indexes as second type information (e.g., the illustrated frame-shaped placement marks 4011Z and 4012Z) can be printed on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100 as information related to the electronic components to be mounted. The references 4011Y and 4012Y as first type information are information that uniquely identifies the corresponding electronic components on the main control board 100, and the indexes as second type information (e.g., the illustrated frame-shaped placement marks 4011Z and 4012Z) are information related to the placement of the corresponding electronic components.

In this embodiment, the first type of information (reference) is displayed including at least letters or symbols. This first type of information allows the information (part number, etc.) of the corresponding electronic component to be accurately represented using letters or symbols, making it easier to identify individual electronic components on the surface 4101 of a control board such as the main control board 100, and facilitating confirmation of the placement of electronic components by visual inspection or image search.

In this embodiment, the size of the references 4011Y, 4012Y as first type information may be uniform regardless of position or electronic component. This makes it possible to make each reference 4011Y, 4012Y easier to see. Furthermore, because the sizes of each reference 4011Y, 4012Y are uniform, certain references do not stand out, making it difficult to overlook individual references even when there are numerous references on the surface 4101. Note that the size of a reference does not refer to the overall size of a series of printed information (one reference) made up of multiple characters, symbols, etc., but rather to the size of each element (e.g., font size) of multiple characters, symbols, etc. that make up a single reference. Furthermore, while characters and symbols in a reference may be standardized to the same size, characters and symbols may be different sizes.

<5-5. Silkscreen printing (index type)>
In this embodiment, a first type of mark (e.g., a rectangular enclosure) similar to the external shape of the electronic component when it is placed can be printed in the placement area of a first electronic component having a height equal to or greater than a predetermined height, and a second type of mark (e.g., a circuit symbol-like line diagram that does not surround the placement area of the electronic component) different from the first type of mark that resembles the external shape of the electronic component when it is placed can be silk-screened in the placement area of a second electronic component having a height less than the predetermined height. This will be explained in detail below.

Figure 99 is a perspective view showing an example of the state after electronic components have been installed in area O on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100 shown in Figure 90, and Figure 100 is a perspective view showing an example of the state before electronic components have been installed on the surface 4101. Note that in both figures, wiring patterns and the like formed on the surface 4101 are omitted. Below, connector socket 4005 and resistor 4012 will be described as examples of electronic components.

A connector socket 4005 and a resistor 4012 may be mounted on the surface 4101 near the outer peripheral region of the main control board 100. As shown in FIG. 99, the connector socket 4005 is an example of a first electronic component having a height H1 equal to or greater than a predetermined height, and the resistor 4012 is an example of a second electronic component having a height H2 less than a predetermined height. The connector socket 4005 is configured to allow a connector (not shown) that can be fitted into the connector socket 4005 to be inserted and removed, and is therefore configured to be higher from the surface 4101 than the resistor 4012.

In the placement area of the connector socket 4005, a placement mark 4005Z in the form of a rectangular enclosure is silk-screened as an example of a first type mark that resembles the external shape of the electronic component when placed.

On the other hand, in the placement area of the resistor 4012, a placement mark 4012Z shaped like a circuit symbol representing a resistor (or a placement mark that does not take the form of an enclosure, as described above) can be silk-screened as an example of a second-type mark that differs from the first-type mark described above and has a different external shape when the resistor 4012 is placed. In this embodiment, in addition to such second-type marks, printing on the board to form, for example, the part number, symbol, or external shape of an electronic component may also be formed using a technique called a photography method in addition to silk-screen printing. This photography method involves applying ink to the surface of the board and then removing unnecessary portions, such as the portion that should be missing as described above. In this photography method, for example, ink is applied to the entire board, the ink is semi-cured, and then the ink is exposed to light (exposed) using film to harden, and then developed to fully harden the ink. This photography method can achieve printing accuracy superior to silk-screen printing.

As described above, in this embodiment, information regarding the placement of electronic components to be mounted can be printed on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100. For a connector socket 4005, a specific electronic component having a height H1 equal to or greater than a predetermined height, a placement mark 4005Z, a first type of mark similar to the external shape of the electronic component when mounted, can be silk-screened in the placement area of the electronic component on the surface of the main control board 100. For a resistor 4012, a specific electronic component having a height H2 less than a predetermined height, a placement mark 4012Z, a second type of mark different from the external shape of the electronic component when mounted, can be silk-screened in the placement area of the electronic component on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100. In this manner, first type marks can be presented in an easily identifiable manner according to the characteristics (e.g., height) of the electronic component. In addition to the height described above, other characteristics of the electronic component can include the size of the electronic component, such as the area of the electronic component. Note that while the height and size of the electronic component from the surface 4101 are exemplified as characteristics of the electronic component here, this is not limiting and, for example, the area of the electronic component when viewed from above in a direction perpendicular to the surface 4101 may also be used. In this way, in the placement area of an electronic component that has a large area when viewed from above, the area of the placement mark will also be larger in accordance with the size of the area of the electronic component, making it easier to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first type of mark remains visible even after the electronic component is placed, while at least a portion of the second type of mark becomes difficult to see after the electronic component is placed. This is explained in detail below.

Specifically, the placement mark 4005Z as a first type mark is visible before the connector socket 4005 as an electronic component is placed, as shown in FIG. 100, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. 99, the placement mark 4005Z is substantially entirely visible even after the connector socket 4005 is placed. In other words, the placement mark 4005Z does not significantly affect visibility before or after the connector socket 4005 is assembled.

In contrast, the placement mark 4012Z as a second type of mark is visible before the placement of the resistor 4012 as an electronic component, as shown in FIG. 100, but after the placement of the resistor 4012, at least a portion of the placement mark 4012Z becomes difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 99.

As shown in FIG. 101, the placement mark 4005Z, which is an example of the first type of mark described above, has a notch 4005Z1 as special information that represents information related to the placement of the target electronic component (here, the connector socket 4005).

As described above, in this embodiment, at least a first type mark or a second type mark can be silk-screened on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100 as information related to the placement of the electronic components to be mounted. The first type mark is substantially entirely visible, even after the corresponding electronic component has been placed, to the extent that the entire placement area of the electronic component can be estimated. The second type mark is at least partially inconspicuous, to the extent that the entire placement area of the electronic component is difficult to estimate, after the corresponding electronic component has been placed. Here, "inconspicuous" may include, for example, being impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, the placement mark 4005Z as a first type of mark has a notch 4005Z1 as an example of special information representing information related to the placement of the target electronic component (here, as an example, the connector socket 4005). This special information may be a thick line on one side or a notch at a specific corner. This special information specifies the placement orientation, the location of a specific pin, etc. This makes it possible to prevent assembly errors such as assembling an electronic component (connector socket 4005) with a mark indicating its orientation in the wrong orientation. Furthermore, even during automatic mounting, it can be visually checked during post-mounting confirmation.

In this embodiment, marks are silk-screened at the placement positions of electronic components to be assembled on surface 4101, and the mark corresponding to the first electronic component to be manually assembled visibly indicates its placement area (e.g., a first type mark), while the mark corresponding to the second electronic component to be automatically assembled may not visibly indicate its placement area.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 99, for example, placement mark 4005Z, which serves as a mark corresponding to connector socket 4005 as a first electronic component that is manually assembled, visibly indicates the placement area of that connector socket 4005. On the other hand, placement mark 4012Z, which serves as a mark corresponding to resistor 4012 as a second electronic component that is automatically assembled by an automatic assembly machine, is an area in which the shape of a symbol is expressed as its placement area, and does not need to be visibly displayed as a frame-shaped placement mark like placement mark 4005Z for connector socket 4005.

Figures 101(A) and 101(B) are perspective views each showing an example of a small electronic component (hereinafter referred to as a "small electronic component") arranged on surface 4101 in region P shown in Figure 90. In the following explanation, a connector socket 4013 is used as an example of a small electronic component. Figure 101(A) shows an example of a correctly assembled connector socket 4013, while Figure 101(B) shows an example of an incorrectly assembled small electronic component, where the connector socket 4013 is oriented in the wrong direction. In this example, in the case of a DIP component, for example, the multiple leads of the DIP component are not accurately inserted into their corresponding through-holes. Note that the wiring pattern formed on surface 4101 is omitted from both figures.

The coverage rate of the placement mark 4013Z, which is a mark indicating the position where the connector socket 4013 should be placed, differs between the correct placement of the connector socket 4013 as shown in Figure 101(A) and the incorrect placement as shown in Figure 101(B). The coverage rate here refers to the proportion of the area of the placement mark 4013Z that is hidden by the mounted and placed component.

For example, in the case of correct assembly, as shown in Figure 101(A), the placement mark 4013Z is almost completely exposed, with a coverage rate of nearly 0%, and is not hidden and is almost completely exposed. On the other hand, in the case of incorrect assembly, as shown in Figure 101(B), part of the placement mark 4013Z is hidden by part of the connector socket 4013, with a coverage rate exceeding 0%, and part of it is covered (partially exposed).

As described above, in this embodiment, the multiple electronic components include connector sockets 4005 as a first type of electronic component that is manually assembled to the main control board 100, and resistors 4012 as a second type of electronic component that is automatically assembled to the main control board 100. Layout information regarding the layout of the electronic components to be mounted can be silk-screened on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100. Layout marks 4005Z as layout information corresponding to at least the connector socket 4005 as a first type of electronic component are silk-screened in a manner that indicates the area where the connector socket 4005 should be placed during assembly. This allows the worker to easily recognize that a manually assembled electronic component (e.g., connector socket 4005) has been incorrectly placed on the surface 4101.

In this embodiment, as described above, the coverage of the mark indicating the position where the connector socket 4013 should be placed differs between correct and incorrect placement of the connector socket 4013 as a small electronic component. In other words, the coverage of the mark is higher in the correct placement. This makes it easier to visually confirm the placement of the connector socket 4013 after assembly.

<5-6. Silk printing (pin information)>
In this embodiment, a predetermined mark (symbol shape) corresponding to one of the multiple pins of the electronic component to be mounted is silk-screened on the resist on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100, and a first type mark (e.g., "▲") corresponding to one first pin (1st pin) includes information indicating the assembly position of the specific pin and information indicating that it is a specific pin, and a second type mark (e.g., "・") corresponding to one or more second pins (5n (odd-numbered) pins) includes information indicating that they are specific second pins. A specific explanation will be given below.

Figure 102 is a plan view illustrating an example of mounting different types of electronic components. Specifically, Figure 102 uses electronic component 4026, which is the IC shown in Figure 90, and resistor 4012 as examples of different types of electronic components. For convenience, electronic component 4026 and resistor 4012 are placed in a region close to surface 4101, as viewed from above in the vertical direction of surface 4101. Note that resist is present on surface 4101, and a placement marker for electronic component 4026 is silk-printed on that surface; however, the wiring pattern, resist, and placement marker have been omitted in the illustrated example. Electronic component 4026 is, for example, an IC (Integrated Circuit) such as a ROM (Read Only Memory) or a CPU (Central Processing Unit).

Specifically, on the surface 4101, near the placement area of a specific electronic component 4026 having multiple pins among multiple electronic components, a first mark 4026F (corresponding to "1" in the illustrated example) corresponding to the first pin as a specific pin and a second mark 4026H corresponding to the second or higher pin are printed, and the first mark 4026F indicates the assembly position of the specific pin, which can be identified by visually checking the electronic component 4026. Note that instead of or in addition to the first mark 4026F, a mark 4026G (corresponding to "▲" in the illustrated example) corresponding to the first pin may be printed on the surface 4101. Meanwhile, the second mark 4026H is a mark different from the first mark 4026F and indicates a specific pin (e.g., a pin that is a multiple of 5) that is different from the specific pin and corresponds to an integer multiple of a specific number (e.g., a pin that is a multiple of 5).

In addition, in this embodiment, the third type mark 4026I (for example, the bar-shaped mark "-" shown in the figure) corresponding to one or more third pins (10nth pins) contains information indicating that it is a specific third pin (for example, a pin that is a multiple of 10). Furthermore, on the resist of surface 4101, printed characters (reference) indicating the component number "IC2" are silk-screened near electronic component 4026, and printed characters (reference) indicating the component number "R34" are silk-screened near resistor 4012.

Here, pin numbers are determined according to a predetermined rule (e.g., counterclockwise). For pins that meet certain conditions (e.g., pins located near the vertices (ends of each side) of a rectangular electronic component among multiple pins), the pin number may be clearly indicated numerically in addition to other information such as marks (e.g., in the illustrated example, this corresponds to the printed character "1" on the first pin, the printed character "16" on the 16th pin, the printed character "17" on the 17th pin, and the printed character "32" on the 32nd pin). Depending on the layout of electronic components on the board, it may be difficult to print the numerical mark corresponding to a pin that meets the above-mentioned specific conditions immediately adjacent to the pin. In such cases, a leader line may be drawn to a printable location and the number printed (e.g., leader line 4041Z for pin 72 of electronic component 4041 in Figure 105, described below), or printing may be omitted.

As described above, in this embodiment, on the surface 4101 of the main control board 100, as shown in FIG. 102, in the placement area of a specific electronic component 4026 having multiple pins among the multiple electronic components, a first mark 4026F corresponding to the first pin as a specific pin and a second mark 4026H corresponding to second or more pins as one or more pins different from the specific pin are printed. The first mark 4026F indicates the assembly position of a specific pin that can be identified based on the specific mark affixed to the electronic component, and the second mark 4026H is a mark different from the first mark 4026F and indicates a specific pin having a pin number that is an integer multiple of a predetermined number of pin numbers predefined for each of the multiple pins. In this way, it is possible to present a lot of information about an important specific pin (e.g., the 1st pin), for example.

In this embodiment, the third type mark 4026I (e.g., "-") corresponding to one or more third pins (10nth pins) includes information indicating that the pin is a specific third pin. This improves the identifiability of a specific pin from among multiple pins.

<5-7. Via (size)>
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first via has a large hole diameter and the second via has a small hole diameter, the first region has a wide pattern width of the wiring pattern and the second region has a narrow pattern width of the wiring pattern. In a specific first region (e.g., a partial region of the first region), the formation ratio of first vias relative to the formation ratio of second vias is higher than in a predetermined second region (e.g., a partial region of the second region). In other words, in the specific first region, more first vias than second vias are formed than in the predetermined second region. This will be explained in detail below.

Figure 103 is a plan view showing an example configuration of region R on surface 4101 of main control board 100 shown in Figure 90. Note that the example shown is a simplified example for easier understanding and does not represent the exact configuration. Surface 4101 has a first region 4009A and a second region 4009B. Note that the example shown shows only a portion of surface 4101, and in this embodiment, as an example, a portion of first region 4009A (hereinafter referred to as "specific first region 4009A") and a portion of second region 4009B (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined second region 4009B") are shown.

The surface 4101 of the main control board 100 is formed with a first region 4009A in which multiple first wiring patterns 4007A with a pattern width W4 wider than the predetermined width are arranged, and a second region 4009B in which multiple second wiring patterns 4007B with a pattern width W5 narrower than the predetermined width are arranged.

The main control board 100 has multiple vias 4032A, 4031A formed as multiple through-holes that penetrate through the board thickness direction. Note that the multiple vias 4032A, 4031A may have solder 4001H on them. When viewed from vertically above the surface 4101, for example, the via 4032A with a larger diameter will be referred to as via 4032A as an example of a first type of through-hole, and the via 4031A with a smaller diameter will be referred to as via 4031A as an example of a second type of through-hole. Note that of the multiple vias 4032A, 4031A, those filled with solder 4001H are shown as open single circles, and those not filled with solder 4001H are shown as open double circles. In this double circle configuration, the space between the inner and outer circles indicates land 4032A1 in via 4032A, and land 4031A1 in via 4031A.

In the specific first region 4009A, the formation ratio of vias 4032A relative to the formation ratio of vias 4031A is higher than in the specific second region 4009B. In other words, in the specific first region 4009A, more vias 4032A are formed than vias 4031A than in the specific second region 4009B.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 100 has multiple vias 4032A, 4031A formed as multiple through-holes penetrating the board thickness direction. The multiple vias 4032A, 4031A include vias 4032A as first-type through-holes having a hole diameter larger than a predetermined size and vias 4031A as second-type through-holes having a hole diameter smaller than that of the vias 4032A. The surface 4101 of the main control board 100 has a first region 4009A in which multiple wiring patterns 4007A having a pattern width W4 wider than the predetermined width are arranged, and a second region 4009B in which multiple wiring patterns 4007B having a pattern width W5 narrower than the predetermined width are arranged. The ratio of the number of vias 4032A to vias 4031A formed in a predetermined first region 4009A is higher than the ratio of the number of vias 4032A to vias 4031A formed in a predetermined second region 4009B. This prevents potential imbalances, ensuring stable operation of the control board and improving heat dissipation performance. While this embodiment primarily uses vias as an example, vias that connect specific layers or layers in a multilayer board may also be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, on the board surface (at least one of the front surface 4101 and the back surface 4102) of the main control board 100, in a specific ground area where no wiring pattern is formed, more through holes with a diameter larger than a predetermined size are formed than in other areas. This is explained in more detail below.

First, as shown in Figure 96, a ground area 4032, in which no wiring pattern 4034 is formed, is formed over at least a portion of the outer peripheral edge area of the substrate surface.

Hereinafter, this at least part of the ground area 4032 will be referred to as the specific ground area 4032. As mentioned above, the ground area 4032 tends to have many vias 4032A as through holes.

As shown in FIG. 96, a specific ground region 4032 has more vias 4032A with hole diameters larger than a predetermined size formed therein than in other regions (e.g., a predetermined region 4039). Furthermore, the specific ground region 4032 may be configured to have a greater number of vias 4032A formed per unit area of the wiring pattern than in the predetermined region 4039 in which the wiring pattern 4034 is formed. In other words, the specific ground region 4032 is configured to have a greater number of vias 4032A formed per unit area than the predetermined region 4039, and the vias 4032A are more densely packed in the specific ground region 4032.

In the ground region 4032, there are more vias 4032A with large hole diameters than vias 4031A with small hole diameters, and more vias 4032A are formed. In other words, there are more vias 4032A with large hole diameters formed in the ground region 4032.

In addition, in this embodiment, the size of the vias provided for one wiring pattern in Figure 103 is all uniform. That is, in the first wiring pattern 4007A, which has a large pattern width W4 in the first region 4009A, a via 4032A with a large hole diameter is formed, and in the second wiring pattern 4007B, which has a small pattern width W5, a via 4031A with a small diameter is formed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 100 has vias 4032A, 4031A formed as multiple through-holes that penetrate in the thickness direction, as shown in FIG. 96, and on the board surface (at least one of the front surface 4101 and back surface 4102) of the main control board 100, in a specific ground area 4032 where no wiring pattern 4034 is formed, more vias 4032A with a hole diameter larger than a predetermined size are formed than in other areas (for example, a predetermined area 4039).

This prevents potential imbalances and ensures stable operation even in environments where noise is likely to occur. The reason for locating this specific ground region 4032 near the side edge of the outer periphery of the back surface 4102 is to improve noise resistance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the specific ground area 4032 has a larger number of vias 4032A formed per unit area than the predetermined area 4039 in which the wiring pattern is formed. By providing vias 4032A with a large diameter in the ground area 4032 in this way, the total surface area of the vias in the ground area 4032 of the main control board 100 is increased, and as a result, the heat dissipation area can be made as large as possible, thereby improving the heat dissipation effect.

In this embodiment, the ground region 4032 has more vias 4032A with larger diameters than vias 4031A with smaller diameters. This allows the reference potential of the ground region 4032 to be stabilized at, for example, 0 V.

In this embodiment, the outer peripheral area of the main control board 100 is surrounded by a ground area 4032. This allows the outer peripheral area to function as a shield against noise from further outside.

In this embodiment, it is preferable that all vias provided for one wiring pattern be of uniform size. This prevents potential imbalances in the wiring patterns and makes it easier for the main control board 100 to operate normally, even in environments where noise is likely to occur.

<5-8. Vias (filled with solder)>
In this embodiment, the main control board 100 has at least multiple types of vias of different sizes as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 103, multiple vias 4032A of a first size D1 and multiple vias 4031A of a second size D2 (however, first size D1 > second size D2), and in the first region 4009A where the vias 4032A are concentrated, the proportion of vias blocked with solder 4001H is higher than in the second region 4009B where the vias 4031A are concentrated.

The above-mentioned "concentration of vias 4032A" means that there are more vias 4032A than vias 4031A per unit area. Specifically, for example, in the range shown in Figure 103, in first region 4009A, there are six vias 4032A and one via 4031A. Note that for both vias 4031A and 4032A, as the hole diameter of each via increases, the width of the land in that via is generally also increased. As the area of the land increases, the amount of solder 4001H placed on that land also increases, making it easier for solder 4001H to fill (flow into) the vias. This is explained in detail below.

The main control board 100 has multiple vias 4032A, 4031A formed as through-holes that penetrate through the board thickness direction. The main control board 100 has a front surface 4101 as a first surface on which electronic components with leads are mounted, and a back surface 4102 as a second surface behind the front surface 4101 to which the leads are soldered.

As described above, the multiple vias include via 4032A having a hole diameter larger than a predetermined size and via 4031A having a hole diameter smaller than via 4032A, i.e., smaller than the predetermined size. That is, in the orientation of the illustrated example, the hole diameter of via 4032A is configured to be larger than the diameter of via 4031A. As described above, in first region 4009A, there are more vias 4032A than vias 4031A. In first region 4009A, a higher proportion of vias are blocked with solder 4001H applied to the back surface 4102 than in second region 4009B, where there are more vias 4031A than vias 4032A. This is because the lands around the vias become larger depending on the via size, and therefore more solder is placed on them. As a result, more solder flows into the area surrounded by the inner surface of the via (i.e., it flows more easily), making it easier for solder 4001H to penetrate and fill the area surrounded by the inner surface of the via.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 100 has a front surface 4101 as a first surface on which multiple vias are formed as multiple through-holes penetrating the board thickness direction and on which electronic components with leads are mounted, and a back surface 4102 behind the front surface 4101 to which the leads are soldered. The multiple vias include vias 4032A having a hole diameter larger than a predetermined size and vias 4031A having a hole diameter smaller than that of vias 4032A. In the first region 4009A as a specific region where there are more vias 4032A than vias 4031A, a higher proportion of vias are blocked by solder 4001H applied to the back surface 4102 than in the second region 4009B as a specific region where there are more vias 4031A than vias 4032A. This allows for improved heat dissipation performance depending on the size of the vias. This is because when solder 4001H is embedded in the vias, heat dissipation performance is improved due to the high thermal conductivity of the solder 4001H, and heat dissipation performance depends on the size of the vias (and the amount of embedded solder 4001H).

Here, when comparing the thermal conductivity of air and solder at room temperature (for example, 20° C.), the following specific example is shown.
Air: 0.0257 [W/(m·K)]
Solder (50Sn): 49 [W / (m K)]
As described above, solder has a higher thermal conductivity, and therefore, when the vias are filled with solder, the heat dissipation performance is improved compared to when the vias are not filled with solder.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 100 has a front surface 4101 on which electronic components with leads are mounted and in which multiple vias are formed as multiple through-holes that penetrate the board thickness direction, and a back surface 4102 behind the front surface 4101 and to which solder 4001H is applied when soldering the leads. The multiple vias include vias 4032A as first-type through-holes with a hole diameter larger than a predetermined size, and vias 4031A as second-type through-holes with a hole diameter smaller than that of vias 4032A. In the first region 4009A as a specific region where there are more vias 4032A than vias 4031A, the heat dissipation performance per via is higher than in the second region 4009B as a specific region where there are more vias 4031A than vias 4032A. In this way, heat dissipation performance can be improved based on the size of the vias.

Figures 104(A) and 104(B) are cross-sectional views showing configuration examples in which the land thickness of via 4001F formed on main control board 100 is different. Note that the land thickness here refers to, for example, the width of the annular portion of the land in the direction along surface 4101. Figure 104(A) shows a configuration example in which land 4001F1 is thin (the width of the annular portion of the land is small), and Figure 104(B) shows a simplified configuration example in which land 4001F2 is thicker (the width of the annular portion of the land is larger) than the thickness of land 4001F1 shown in Figure 104(A).

In this embodiment, in a multilayer structure such as the main control board 100, if multiple vias 4001F are the same size, and the thickness of the land (copper foil) formed on the front surface 4101 and back surface 4102 of the via 4001F is thin (the width of the annular portion of the land is small), less solder 4001H will be placed on the land than if the land is thick (the width of the annular portion of the land is large).As a result, the amount of solder 4001H that may flow into the interior of the inner surface of the via 4001F is also reduced (i.e., it is less likely to flow), and the solder 4001H is less likely to be embedded in the via 4001F.

<5-9. Recognition mark>
In this embodiment, two or more first-type reference objects and one or more pairs of second-type reference objects having uses different from the first-type reference objects are provided on the board surface (hereinafter referred to as "surface 4045") of a board 4040, which is another example of a printed circuit board. The second-type reference objects are provided at positions that are approximately diagonal on the surface 4045 and are not point-symmetric with respect to a predetermined point on the surface 4045. A specific description will be given below.

Figure 105 is a plan view showing an example configuration of the surface 4045 of another substrate 4040. The substrate 4040 is also an example of the control substrate described above. The surface 4045 of the substrate 4040 is provided with two or more reference holes 4023 (three reference holes 4023 are exemplified in this embodiment) as two or more first-type reference objects, and two or more recognition marks (three recognition marks 4019I, 4019J, and 4019K are exemplified in this embodiment) as one or more pairs of second-type reference objects having different uses from the reference holes 4023. Furthermore, the surface 4045 is provided with recognition marks 4019L and 4019M. Recognition marks 4019L and 4019M may be considered to belong to the second-type reference object, but strictly speaking, they have different characteristics from recognition marks 4019I, 4019J, and 4019K (details will be described later). Note that Figure 105 shows electronic component 4041, socket 4042 as an electronic component, electronic component 4043, and electronic component 4044 as examples of surface-mount type electronic components mounted on surface 4045.

The reference holes 4023 are provided at three of the four corners of the surface 4045 of the rectangular substrate 4040. The reference holes 4023 are used to determine the orientation of the substrate 4040 in the rotational direction about a center line that passes vertically through the center of the surface 4045 of the substrate 4040. The reference holes 4023 may also be used as positioning holes or holes through which screws are inserted when fixing the substrate 4040 to, for example, a substrate case (not shown). Note that, in addition to the reference holes 4023, holes may be provided at multiple locations on the substrate 4040 in order to fix the substrate 4040 to a case or the like with screws.

The three reference holes 4023 as two or more first-type reference objects are provided at predetermined locations on the surface 4045 of the substrate 4040 (for example, near any corner of the substrate surface, in a location where no copper foil layer or resist is formed). The reference holes 4023 can be used for various purposes, such as for gripping the substrate 4040 during the manufacture of a printed circuit board, or for attaching the manufactured substrate 4040 to a case or the like. The predetermined locations at which the reference holes 4023 are provided can be specified in various ways. For example, by providing two reference holes 4023 at diagonally opposite corners of a rectangular substrate 4040, when the reference holes 4023 are used to secure the substrate 4040, it is expected that the effects of suppressing vibration of the substrate 4040 and facilitating positional fixation can be expected. Note that the number of reference holes 4023 required for one substrate 4040 may be any number equal to or greater than two.

Of the recognition marks 4019I, 4019J, and 4019K serving as second-type reference objects, the paired recognition marks 4019I and 4019K are provided at approximately diagonal positions on the surface 4045 of the substrate 4040, but at positions that are not point-symmetric about a predetermined point on the surface 4045 (e.g., the center point of the surface 4045). More specifically, the recognition marks 4019I and 4019K are provided at approximately diagonal positions on the surface 4045 of the substrate 4040, for example, at approximately diagonal positions, but do not coincide when rotated 180 degrees (in the illustrated example, the recognition marks 4019I and 4019K do not coincide when rotated 180 degrees), i.e., are not point-symmetric. Note that recognition mark 4019J is a reference object provided for purposes such as supporting the pair of recognition marks 4019I and 4019K that are approximately diagonally spaced, and providing three recognition marks rather than two allows for more accurate positioning. In other words, when referring to a second type of reference object according to this embodiment, the terms "each pair or more" and "one pair or more" refer not only to cases where there are multiple pairs of one pair (two) recognition marks (i.e., two, four, etc. in total), but also to cases where there are three or more recognition marks that make up a set, such as one pair (recognition marks 4019I and 4019K) + α (recognition mark 4019J).

The recognition marks 4019I, 4019J, and 4019K, which serve as second-type reference objects, are, for example, global fiducials, and allow the relative position of the electronic components to be recognized with respect to the board 4040 when assembling them and when checking them after mounting. Global fiducials will be described later.

On the other hand, the recognition marks 4019L and 4019M are, for example, local fiducials, and are provided near the placement area of the electronic component 4041, for example, at positions that are diagonally symmetrical about the center point of the electronic component 4041 when the surface 4045 of the substrate 4040 is viewed from above in the vertical direction. Local fiducials will also be described later. Instead, these recognition marks 4019L and 4019M may be provided at positions that are diagonally symmetrical about the center point of the electronic component 4041 (i.e., not strictly speaking diagonally symmetrical) when the surface 4101 of the substrate 4040 is viewed from above in the vertical direction. Details of the electronic component 4041 will be described in detail below.

The electronic component 4041 is, for example, an IC (Integrated Circuit). When viewed from above the surface 4045 of the substrate 4040, the electronic component 4041 is rectangular and has, for example, 36 leads on each side, for a total of 144 leads across all four sides. The term "leads" here refers to pins (or legs) used to exchange signals between the inside and outside of the electronic component 4041. Similar to the configuration described above (see also FIG. 102), a first mark 4041F (corresponding to "1" in the illustrated example) and a first mark 4041G (corresponding to "▲" in the illustrated example) corresponding to the first pin as a specific pin, and a second mark 4041H (corresponding to "・" in the illustrated example, etc.) corresponding to the second or higher pin are printed near the placement area of the electronic component 4041. The first marks 4041F and 4041G indicate the assembly positions of the specific pins, which can be identified by visually inspecting the electronic component 4041. On the other hand, the second mark 4041H is a mark different from the first marks 4041F and 4041G, and indicates a predetermined pin (e.g., a pin that is a multiple of 5) that corresponds to an integer multiple of a predetermined number, separate from the specific pin.

In addition, in this embodiment, third-type marks 4041I (for example, the bar-shaped mark "-" shown in the figure) corresponding to one or more third pins (10nth pins) contain information indicating that they are specific third pins (for example, pins that are multiples of 10). Furthermore, on the resist of surface 4045, printed characters (reference) indicating the component number "IC1" are silk-screened near electronic component 4041, and printed characters (reference) indicating the component number "IC2" are silk-screened near socket 4042.

Here, for example, lead line 4041Z pointing to pin 72 is a lead line mark silk-printed to indicate that it is pin 72 from a somewhat distant position when the mark "72" indicating that it is pin 72 cannot be silk-printed near pin 72 of electronic component 4041 due to the presence of recognition mark 4019M. In this way, even if it is not possible to directly identify pin 72 using other electronic components such as recognition mark 4019M, it is possible to indirectly identify pin 72.

On the other hand, socket 4042 is, for example, a socket for ROM (Read Only Memory). When assembling socket 4042, it can be positioned using frame-shaped placement mark 4042A, and is placed inside frame-shaped placement mark 4042A. Marks corresponding to each of the pins mentioned above (for example, "27," "28," and "54" as shown) are also placed near the placement area of socket 4042, making it possible to identify each pin.

In addition, the surface of the electronic component 4041 is provided with a mark that can identify its orientation, and depending on the positional relationship between this mark and a pair of recognition marks 4019L, 4019M provided near the electronic component 4041, it is possible to confirm that the electronic component 4041 is positioned in the correct orientation on the surface 4045 of the substrate 4040 not only during positioning during assembly but also after mounting.

Equivalents to the first-type and second-type reference objects on board 4040 also exist in the main control board 100 described above. For example, the first-type reference object on the main control board 100 shown in FIG. 90 corresponds to reference hole 4021, and the second-type reference object corresponds to recognition marks 4019P, 4019Q, and 4019S. In the main control board 100 as well, the second-type reference object may include recognition marks 4019A and 4019B related to the orientation and position of electronic component 4025. Furthermore, in the main control board 100 described above, the second-type reference object may include recognition marks 4019Y and 4019Z related to the orientation of electronic component 4026.

Next, the appearance of the recognition mark will be described. When viewed from above in the vertical direction of the surface 4101, the recognition mark described above is formed (or colored) as a predetermined mark, for example, by forming a portion of the resist formed on the surface 4101 into a circular or rectangular outline (hereinafter referred to as the "outer outline"), so that the color of the predetermined mark within the outer outline differs from the color of the resist outside the outer outline. In this embodiment, the following three patterns are possible: The first pattern is the substrate 4009 + copper foil layer + (light green) resist; the second pattern is the substrate 4009 + (dark green) resist; and the third pattern is the substrate 4009 (for example, a narrow strip along the outer edge of the board itself, or a ring-shaped portion of a predetermined width around the reference hole 4021). The predetermined mark may also be covered with, for example, resist.

In addition to the configurations described above, these recognition marks may also have another circular or rectangular outline (hereinafter referred to as the "inner outline") inside the outer outline, and the color of the inner mark may be different from the color of the resist or substrate between the outer and inner outlines (i.e., part of the specified mark). Here, the recognition mark may be visually recognized in terms of the color due to the exposed color of the substrate 4009 itself (which may vary depending on the material), the color of the resist on the substrate 4009, the color of the copper foil layer itself exposed on the substrate 4009, the color of the copper foil layer itself on the resist formed on the substrate 4009, etc. Note that the inner mark may also be covered with resist, or the copper foil layer may be exposed.

Specific examples of applications of the above-mentioned recognition marks include the following. The first example is a so-called DIP (dual in-line package) board. For example, it can be used for alignment during automatic ROM assembly. It can also be used for alignment during image-based inspection (AOI: Automated Optical Inspection/AVI: Automatic Visual Inspection) of mounted electronic components. AOI is an inspection method that scans electronic components with a camera to automatically detect their presence and shape defects. AVI is a method of automatically inspecting their appearance. The second example is a surface-mount device (SMD) board. For example, it can be used as a mark for mounting. Furthermore, in the case of an assembly board, it can be placed on the scrap board. The third example is a mark for identifying a board when assembling surface-mount devices (SMDs). For example, when viewed perpendicular to the board surface, two marks can be placed asymmetrically around the surface-mount device in question. This is because even if the board is inserted into the mounter in the wrong direction by 180 degrees, the error can be detected because the positions of the two recognition marks are not the same. As a fourth example, the marks can be used as marks for highly accurate mounting of individual electronic components. For example, they can be placed on the diagonal of an individual electronic component when mounting a QFP (Quad Flat Package) or SOP (Small Outline Package) with a short pitch.

Here, we will explain the types and uses of recognition marks. There are three main types of recognition marks depending on the application, and their placement on the board surface varies depending on the application. More specifically, there are three types: global fiduals (reference marks), panel fiduals (imposition marks), and local fiduals (SMD (Surface Mount Device) marks). Global fiduals, for example, have recognition marks placed in three asymmetrical locations on the board surface. By making them asymmetrical, it is possible to detect whether the direction in which the board is being transported is correct. Panel fiduals, for example, are placed with the same purpose as reference marks. However, they are mainly placed on waste boards rather than on the board itself. Local fiducials are used when high precision is required when mounting small electronic components such as QFPs (Quad Flat Packages) and BGAs (Ball Grid Arrays), and recognition marks are placed on the diagonal of the electronic components themselves.

Next, the position of the recognition marks will be explained. In the main control board 100 shown in Figure 90, recognition marks 4019P, 4019Q, and 4019S are each positioned a predetermined distance or more inward from the side edge of the outer peripheral region of the surface 4101 of the main control board 100. On the other hand, in the board 4040 shown in Figure 105, recognition marks 4019I, 4041J, and 4041K are each positioned a predetermined distance or more inward from the side edge of the outer peripheral region of the board 4040. An example of this predetermined distance is 5 mm. The reason for setting the predetermined distance at 5 mm is that if the distance is less than 5 mm, the board may be included in the part that is gripped by the board transport device, which could reduce the recognition rate of each recognition mark.

In the board 4040 shown in FIG. 105, the recognition marks 4019I, 4019J, and 4019K may be formed, for example, on both sides of the board surface of the board 4040. In addition, in the main control board 100 shown in FIG. 90, the recognition marks 4019P, 4019Q, and 4019S may be formed, for example, on both sides of the board surface of the main control board 100.

In the example shown in Figure 105, an electronic component 4044 is mounted on the surface 4045 of the substrate 4040. A rectangular frame-shaped placement mark 4033A is silk-screened on the surface 4045 to surround the placement area of the electronic component 4044. A portion of the placement mark 4033A is formed in a manner that avoids vias 4031, etc. (See also Figure 98 (B)).

In addition, in Figure 105, an electronic component 4043 is mounted on the surface 4045 of the substrate 4040, and a rectangular frame-shaped placement mark 4043A is silk-screened at the placement position of the electronic component 4043. The placement mark 4043A is silk-screened so that the ink portion 4043Y on the right side of the electronic component 4043 is thicker than the ink portion 4043X on the left side of the electronic component 4043. This allows the electronic component 4043 to be assembled in the correct orientation at the position within the placement mark 4043A, even in cases where the left and right orientation is determined during manual assembly, which is common for electronic components 4043.

As described above, in this embodiment, the board surface of the board 4040 is provided with, for example, two or more reference holes 4023 as first-type reference objects, and one or more pairs of recognition marks as second-type reference objects having a different purpose from the reference holes 4023, with each pair of second-type reference objects being provided at approximately diagonal positions on the board surface, but at positions that are not point-symmetrical about a predetermined point on the reference surface. In this way, surface-mounted components such as CPUs can be accurately positioned using each recognition mark as a reference.

In this embodiment, one or more pairs of recognition marks serving as second-type reference objects provided in the outer peripheral region of the substrate are each positioned a predetermined distance (e.g., 5 mm) or more inward from the side edge surface of the outer peripheral region of the substrate. This improves the recognition rate of each recognition mark, enabling specific electronic components to be mounted with high precision.

Recognition marks are provided around the specific electronic component. Two or more marks are provided approximately diagonally per electronic component. This allows for more accurate placement of electronic components (ICs, CPUs, etc.) that require higher placement accuracy.

The second type of reference object may be double-sided mounted, while the second type of reference object corresponding to a surface-mounted component may be single-sided mounted.

<5-10. Color characteristics of outer edge area>
The following description will be given using the main control board 100 as an example. In this embodiment, the main control board 100 has a peripheral area outside the mounting area for electronic components, which has a different color due to a layered structure different from that of the mounting area. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the peripheral area may also have a configuration in which the color varies in multiple stages.

That is, the outer peripheral region of the main control board 100 (including, for example, screw holes) has a different color due to the combination of the base material, copper foil layer, and resist being different from the region further inside the outer peripheral region. Note that in the area with a different color, an area for a two-dimensional barcode sticker may be provided. This two-dimensional barcode sticker is, for example, a sticker indicating the number of times the main control board 100 can be reused. In other words, the color is intentionally changed in the area.

Figure 106 is a cross-sectional view showing an example configuration of the mounting area 4009C and peripheral area 4009D of the main control board 100. In the example shown, the mounting area 4009C is surrounded by the peripheral area 4009D. The mounting area 4009C is an area where electronic components can be mounted, and the peripheral area 4009D is an area where electronic components are not mounted. In the example shown, the main control board 100 has a multilayer structure in which a resist 4010, a substrate 4009 which is one or more insulating layers, a copper foil layer 4009Z which is one or more conductor layers, and the resist 4010 are stacked together; however, in the example shown, the detailed configuration is simplified, for example, by omitting the insulating layer. The resist 4010 is made of, for example, a green insulator, and can transmit some light. The substrate 4009 is made of a material such as translucent nonwoven fabric, CEM-3, FR-4, FR-5, metal such as aluminum, PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), or polyimide, and is light-transmitting. The insulating layer (not shown) is made of a material such as prepreg (carbon fiber sheet), and is light-transmitting. The copper foil layer 4009Z is made of copper, and is almost light-opaque.

In this embodiment, the layer structure of the board is illustrated as follows, in order from the right side edge of the board to the left side (center of the board) in the illustrated example: (1) base material 4009 only; (2) base material 4009 and resist 4010 (corresponding to predetermined area 4010A); (3) base material 4009 only (corresponding to peripheral area 4010B of reference hole 4021); (4) reference hole 4021 only; (5) base material 4009 only (corresponding to peripheral area 4010B of reference hole 4021); (6) base material 4009 and resist 4010; and (7) base material 4009, copper foil layer 4009Z, and resist 4010 (corresponding to mounting area 4009C).

In other words, in this embodiment, excluding the reference hole 4021 (4), three types of board layer structures are exemplified: (7) a first layer structure (layer structure when viewed from viewpoint E1) of the substrate 4009 (corresponding to the mounting area 4009C), copper foil layer 4009Z, and resist 4010; (2) and (6) a second layer structure (layer structure corresponding to the specified area 4010A) of the substrate 4009 and resist 4010; and (1), (3), and (5) a third layer structure (layer structure when viewed from viewpoint E4) of only the substrate 4009. Note that insulating layers are omitted in these examples.

As described above, the substrate 4009 is made of a material that allows some light to pass through, and is configured to allow some light to pass through when exposed to strong light, for example. A portion of the mounting area 4009C has a first laminated structure in which, for example, resist 4010, which is difficult for light to transmit, copper foil layer 4009Z, substrate 4009, and resist 4010 are laminated together. Therefore, when the first laminated structure is viewed from viewpoint E1 above in a direction perpendicular to the surface 4101, the resist 4010 appears very difficult to transmit light, resulting in a darker green color and a darker appearance (hereinafter referred to as the "first viewing appearance").

When the second laminate structure in the peripheral region 4009D is viewed from viewpoint E2 above in a direction perpendicular to the surface 4101, although the resist 4010 is present, compared to the first laminate structure in the mounting region 4009C described above, the absence of the copper foil layer 4009Z in particular makes it easier to see light than in the mounting region 4009C, resulting in a viewing pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "second viewing pattern") that is somewhat darker but allows some recognition of light from the base material 4009.

When the third laminate structure in the peripheral region 4009D is viewed from above, at viewpoint E3, in a direction perpendicular to the surface 4101, there is no resist 4010 and only the substrate 4009 is exposed. Therefore, compared to the second laminate structure in the peripheral region 4009D described above, light passing through the substrate 4009 is more easily visible, resulting in a brighter viewing aspect (hereinafter referred to as the "third viewing aspect").

Therefore, when viewed from viewpoint E1, viewpoint E2, and viewpoint E3, the following viewing patterns are obtained. First, from viewpoint E1, the presence of the copper foil layer 4009Z causes very little light to pass through the mounting area 4009C, resulting in a dark green first viewing pattern. From viewpoint E2, the absence of the copper foil layer 4009Z causes the presence of the resist 4010, resulting in a slightly darker green second viewing pattern. From viewpoint E3, the light only passes through the base material 4009, resulting in a bright green third viewing pattern.

Here, light can enter the interior of the substrate 4009 not only from the front surface 4101 and back surface 4102, but also from the inner surface of the reference hole 4021. Therefore, when viewed from the illustrated viewpoint E4 at the side edge on the right side of the substrate, light that has entered the interior of the substrate 4009 appears lighter in color, and therefore can be perceived as brighter than when the peripheral region 4009D where no reference hole 4021 is present is viewed from a direction parallel to viewpoint E4. Here, if the reference hole 4021 is formed in an incorrect position on the substrate 4009, it will not appear bright when viewed from viewpoint E4, even though it should appear bright. Therefore, by viewing from viewpoint E4, it is possible to determine whether the reference hole 4021 is formed in the correct position.

For the reasons described above, on the board surface of the main control board 100, outside the mounting area 4009C where multiple electronic components are mounted, there is a peripheral area 4009D which has a different color from the mounting area 4009C due to a different layered structure than the mounting area 4009C.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 100 has a multilayer structure in which the substrate 4009 as one or more insulating layers and the copper foil layer 4009Z as one or more conductor layers are laminated, and on the board surface of the main control board 100, outside the mounting area 4009C where multiple electronic components are mounted, there is a peripheral area 4009D which has a different color from the mounting area 4009C due to a different laminate structure from the mounting area 4009C. In this way, the extent of the mounting area 4009C can be easily grasped by the difference in color between the mounting area 4009C and the peripheral area 4009D.

In this embodiment, in the configuration example shown in Figure 106 described above, in the peripheral region 4009D, for example, in a specific region 4009D1 having a width TH in a direction parallel to the surface 4101, when the substrate 4009 is viewed from viewpoint E4, light within the substrate 4009 is visible through the substrate 4009 of width TH, and therefore the color appears different from the other peripheral regions 4009D where no reference holes 4021 exist.

In the illustrated example, the peripheral region 4009D, for example, the predetermined region 4010A, at least a portion of which is laser printed, does not have the copper foil layer 4009Z in the direction perpendicular to the surface 4101.

As mentioned above, some of the multiple regions on the main control board 100 that are different colors are basically painted with, for example, white resist. Furthermore, in other of the multiple regions, only in locations such as important components or densely packed component groups, a resist different from the white resist, for example, green resist, is painted. In other words, the multiple regions are each painted with a different color resist, allowing them to be visually distinguished from each other.

Here, for example, heat generated by electronic components that easily generate heat, such as resistors, capacitors, and GPUs (Graphic Processing Units), may cause the resist 4010 and substrate 4009 to deteriorate and discolor. In this case, the surface 4101 may have multiple colors, such as a first color and a second color.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 100 has a multi-layer structure in which one or more insulating layers and one or more conductor layers are stacked. The board surface has a peripheral area 4009D outside the mounting area 4009C where multiple electronic components are mounted, which has a different layer structure from the mounting area 4009C and has a different color from the mounting area 4009C. Of the peripheral area 4009D, a specific area 4009D1 near the reference hole 4021 has a different color from the other peripheral areas 4009D where the reference hole 4021 is not provided. This makes it easy to confirm that the reference hole 4021 is provided in the correct position on the base material 4009.

In this embodiment, the outer periphery of the reference hole 4021 in the peripheral region 4009D on the outer periphery of the surface 4101 does not have at least either the copper foil layer 4009Z or the resist 4010. By deliberately providing a peripheral region 4010B (region where the base material is visible) where the resist 4010 is not present, even if a printing misalignment of the resist 4010 occurs, it is possible to easily detect the printing misalignment of the resist 4010 at a glance by looking at the peripheral region 4010B and the peripheral region 4009D of the reference hole 4021 on the surface 4101, thereby ensuring high quality as a board product and reducing the weight of the main control board 100.

<5-11. V-cut on the board>
In this embodiment, the main control board 100 is, for example, separated from an aggregate board to form individual divided boards. It has a first side surface (side end surface) corresponding to a portion of one side surface cut out during board manufacturing, and a second side surface (cutout surface) formed by cutting out another portion of the side surface that will become the first side surface. These side end surfaces and the cutout surface have different cross-sectional shapes, and no electronic components or wiring patterns are placed within a predetermined range from the side end surface; in other words, a prohibited area is provided where such placement is prohibited. Furthermore, the side end surface has a different cross-sectional shape from the cutout surface and a different surface roughness from the cutout surface. A detailed description is provided below.

Figure 107 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration near the cutout 4009X formed in region T of the main control board 100 shown in Figure 90. Figure 108 is a side view showing an example of the configuration near the cutout 4009X shown in Figure 107. Note that in both figures, to make the structure easier to understand, the main control board 100 is illustrated as being thicker in the thickness direction than it actually is, and the configuration of the surface 4101 is also illustrated in a simplified manner.

In the example shown in Figure 107, in order to simplify the explanation of the configuration, there are some differences from the configuration example shown in Figure 90 and other figures described above. Also, in the examples shown in Figures 107 and 108, as in Figures 90 to 106, wiring patterns, resist, through holes, vias, etc. are omitted from the illustration.

The main control board 100 is a substantially rectangular board, with a rectangular cutout 4009X formed in at least one of its four corners. Note that the cutout 4009X is not limited to this rectangular shape and may be of other shapes.

The cutout portion 4009X of the main control board 100 has one side end surface 4009F and a cutout surface 4009G formed contiguous with the side end surface 4009F. The side end surface 4009F indicates the side end surface of the main control board 100 excluding the cutout portion 4009X.

The cutout surface 4009G is formed as a flat surface, for example, by processing using a router. As shown in the figure, the cutout surface 4009G is continuous in the direction along the front surface 4101 and the back surface 4102, but is bent almost vertically along the way. On the other hand, the side end surface 4009F is formed as a stepped surface, as described below, by processing it using, for example, a lathe with a V-shaped tip to make V-cuts from the front surface 4101 and the back surface 4102. The side end surface 4009F has a different cross-sectional shape from the cutout surface 4009G, and also has a different cross-sectional shape from the cutout surface 4009G.

Specifically, side end surface 4009F constitutes the side end surface of main control board 100 and has rough surface 4009F1 and inclined surface 4009F2. Excluding the cutout portion 4009X, side end surface 4009F has inclined surface 4009F2, rough surface 4009F1, and inclined surface 4009F2 from front surface 4101 to back surface 4102. Inclined surface 4009F2 on the front surface 4101 side constitutes a band-shaped inclined surface that slopes from the end of one side of front surface 4101 at an angle that follows the shape of the cutting edge of the V-cut.

On the other hand, the inclined surface 4009F2 on the back surface 4102 side forms a band-shaped inclined surface that slopes from the end of one side of the back surface 4102 at a position that pairs with the front surface 4101 at an angle that follows the shape of the cutting edge of the V-cut. The rough surface 4009F1 forms a band-shaped, approximately flat surface formed between the band-shaped inclined surface 4009F2 on the front surface 4101 side and the band-shaped inclined surface 4009F2 on the back surface 4102 side. Here, the rough surface 4009F1 is a band-shaped, approximately flat surface formed when the collective substrate of multiple main control boards 100 is bent and broken after V-cut notches are made on both the front surface 4101 side and the back surface 4102 side. Therefore, the surface feels rougher to the touch than the inclined surface 4009F2.

As described above, side end surface 4009F is processed, for example, by V-cutting, resulting in a rough, textured end surface. On the other hand, notched surface 4009G is processed, for example, by a router, resulting in a smooth, textured end surface. In other words, side end surface 4009F and notched surface 4009G have different surface roughnesses. Note that, while this embodiment has exemplified the case where an aggregate substrate is V-cut to obtain divided substrates (e.g., main control board 100) as described above, similar V-cutting may also be used when manufacturing a printed circuit board as a single single-sided substrate (e.g., main control board 100).

Furthermore, on the surface 4101, as shown in Figures 107 and 108, no electronic components such as resistors 4022 or wiring patterns are allowed to be placed within the prohibited areas 4009P and 4009R from the side end face 4009F. In other words, prohibited areas 4009P and 4009R are provided in the outer peripheral area of the surface 4101, where the placement of electronic components and wiring patterns is restricted. The electronic components mentioned above include not only the resistor 4022 already mentioned, but also electronic components such as connector sockets, capacitors, ICs, and resistors 4012.

As described above, in this embodiment, the side of the main control board 100 includes a side edge surface 4009F as a first side surface portion corresponding to a portion of one side of a divided board formed by cutting out the aggregate board, and a cutout surface 4009G as a second side surface portion formed by cutting out another portion of the side surface that becomes one side of the divided board. Within a predetermined range of the side edge surface 4009F on the main control board 100, prohibited areas 4009P, 4009R are provided, in which neither electronic components nor wiring patterns are to be placed. The side edge surface 4009F (specifically, for example, rough surface 4009F1) has a different cross-sectional shape from the cutout surface 4009G and a different surface roughness from the side edge surface 4009F. This improves the visibility of the cutout surface 4009G.

Furthermore, by providing such prohibited areas 4009P, 4000R, when multiple divided boards (main control boards 100) are integrated into an aggregate board, for example, when a V-shaped cut is made in the aggregate board and the portion between adjacent main control boards 100 is bent to form individual main control boards 100, it becomes less likely that electronic components on each main control board 100 will come into contact with each other. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 107, if the width of prohibited area 4009P is wider than the width of prohibited area 4009R, it becomes more unlikely that electronic components (for example, resistor 4022 in the illustrated example) on adjacent main control boards 100 on the aggregate board will come into contact when dropped and bent as described above.

As mentioned above, various conductive measures have been described for the gaming machine according to this embodiment, but the configurations relating to the individual conductive measures can be combined as appropriate within the scope of technical feasibility, and the more combinations there are, the greater the effectiveness of the conductive measures can be.

The above describes an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines or slot machines, and can also be applied to other gaming machines, such as a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine. It can also be applied to controlled gaming machines that do not require gaming balls or medals (sealed gaming machines, medal-less gaming machines), casino machines, etc.

1: Pachinko machine, 2: Outer frame, 2a to 2d: Frame, 2e, 2f: Hinge member, 2p: Door opening sensor, 3: Glass frame (door frame), 3a, 3b: Hinge mechanism, 3c: Locking device, 3d: Through hole, 3e: Base unit, 3f: Dish unit, 3g: Area, 3h: Frame lamp (LED lamp), 3i: Speaker, 3j: Performance button, 3k: Second performance button, 4: Front frame, 4a: Handle, 4b: Frame body, 4c, 4d: Hinge, 4e: Firing device, 4f: Locking unit, 4g: Board unit, 4h: Back cover, 4i, 4j: Hinge member, 4p: Door opening detection member, 5: Game board, 5a: Game area, 5b: Main control unit, 5c: Peripheral control unit, 8: Upper ball tray, 9: Lower ball tray, 10: Performance lamp (frame lamp), 11: Speaker, 12: Launch handle, 13: Ball feeding mechanism, 14: Launch mechanism, 15: Performance button, 20A: Play area, 22: Center decoration, 25: Performance lamp (board lamp), 29: First outlet, 31: Storage tank, 34: Prize ball payout unit, 61: First start port, 62: Second start port, 63: Gate, 64: Big prize port, 66: General prize port, 70: Performance display device, 91: Lamp connection board, 92: Motor driver, 100: Main control board, 100a: Front member, 100b: Play panel, 100c: Function display unit, 100d: Inner rail, 100e: Out guideway, 100f: Outer rail, 100h: Opening, 100m: Front unit, 100n: Main control board case, 100p: Harness cover, 100q: Setting key switch, 101: Main control CPU, 101B: Strobe signal output port, 102: Main control ROM, 103: Main control RAM, 104: I/O port circuit, 109: Performance control board connection connector, 110: Ball entry determination means, 111: Data bus, 112: Strobe signal bus, 120: Game lottery random number generation means, 123: Normal electric role solenoid, 124: Special electric role solenoid, 130: Hold control means, 131: Special symbol hold control means, 132: Normal symbol hold control means, 135: Advance determination means, 140: Special symbol lottery processing means, 141: Special symbol win/loss determination means, 142: Special symbol stop symbol determination means, 143: Special symbol variation pattern determination means, 145: Ordinary symbol lottery processing means, 146: Ordinary symbol win/loss determination means, 147: Ordinary symbol stop symbol determination means, 148: Ordinary symbol variation pattern determination means, 150: Special game control means, 155: Symbol display control means, 156: Special symbol display control means, 157: Ordinary symbol display control means, 160: Electric role control means, 161: First start port switch, 162: Second start port switch, 163: Operation gate switch, 164: Big prize port switch, 166: General prize port switch, 167: Out ball detection switch, 169: Game status control means, 170: Error monitoring control means, 171: First special symbol display device, 172: Second special symbol display device, 173: First special symbol hold lamp, 174: Second special symbol hold lamp, 175: Normal symbol display device, 176: Normal symbol hold lamp, 180: Main information storage means, 190: Command transmission/reception means, 195: Setting change means, 196: Setting confirmation means, 197: Setting display unit, 200: Performance control board, 200a: Opening, 200m: Back unit, 201: Performance control CPU, 202: Performance control ROM, 203: Performance control RAM, 204: I/O port circuit, 210: Performance lottery random number generation means, 220: Performance supervision means, 221: Performance mode control means, 222: Hold information display control means, 223: Advance notice control means, 224: Decorative symbol determination means, 225: Variable performance determination means, 226: Pre-announcement performance determining means, 227: Big win performance determining means, 230: Lamp performance control means, 240: Role-playing device performance control means, 250: Error performance control means, 260: Performance control information storage means, 270: Command sending/receiving means, 300: Image control board, 300m: LCD base, 301: Image control CPU, 302: VDP, 303: Sound source IC, 304: ROM, 305: RAM, 306: I/O port circuit, 400: Payout control board, 400p: RAM clear switch cover, 400q: RAM clear switch, 401: Payout control CPU, 402: Payout control ROM, 403: Payout control RAM, 500: Attacker unit, 600: Power supply board, 600p: Power switch cover, 600q: Power switch, 622: Ordinary electric role, 642: Special electric role, 700: Image display screen, 710: Main decorative pattern (decorative pattern), 711: Left pattern, 712: Middle pattern, 713: Right pattern, 720: Sub decorative pattern, 750: The variable icon, 760: Hold icon, 761: First hold icon, 762: Second hold icon, 763: Third hold icon, 764: Fourth hold icon, 770: Hold number display, 781, 782: Decorative role,
1000: Pachinko machine, 1200: Sub-control board, 1201: Sub-control CPU, 1202: Sub-control ROM, 1203: Sub-control RAM, 1204: I/O port circuit, 1205: Image etc. control device, 1211: Performance control means, 1212: Image control means, 1221: CG ROM, 1222: Audio ROM, 1231: Shared memory (shared area), 1232: Frame buffer, 1233: Command buffer, 1234: Read cache, 1251: Image control circuit, 1252: Index table circuit, 1253: Drawing circuit, 1254: Image filter circuit, 1255: Image decoder circuit, 1256: Preloader circuit, 1257: Display circuit, 1258: Prefetch circuit, 1259: Audio control circuit,
2000: gaming machine, 2017: display window, 2020: speaker, 2021: image display device, 2038: pattern display device, 2039: reel, 2040: motor, 2041: reel sensor, 2060: main control board, 2063: main control CPU, 2080: sub-control board, 2085: performance control CPU, 2086: image control CPU, 2087: performance control means, 2088: image control means, 2301: reel bracket, 2310: back lamp, 2311: back lamp house, 2312: back lamp board, 2313: LED element, 2320: reel tape, 2321: peripheral portion, 2322: adhesive portion, 2323: pattern background area, 2324: excess area, 2325: Boundary area, 2326: Identification information, 2330: Reel wheel, 2340: Reel frame, 2351: Bar design, 2352: Design portion, 2353: Mark, 2354: Background portion,
3100: Attacka unit, 3101: Game ball, 3102: Partition, 3110: Big prize opening, 3120: Gate, 3130: Design section, 3131: First area, 3132: Second area, 3133: Third area, 3134: Fourth area, 3210: Base material, 3220: Printing layer, 3230: UV coating layer, 3231: Base section, 3232: Shrinkage section, 3233: Peak, 3234: Valley section, 3240: Light source, 3250, 3301: Barrier nail, 3310: Game board, 3311: Opening, 3320: Acrylic plate, 3330: Base material, 3340: Light source device, 3341: LED, 3350: Glass plate, 3410: Decorative accessory, 3411: Circuit board, 3412: LED, 3413: Inner lens, 3414: Design sheet, 3415: Outer lens, 3416: Acrylic plate,
4001A, 4001Z: Through holes, 4001F: Vias, 4001F1, 4001F2: Lands, 4001H: Solder, 4001P1 to 4001P8: Test points, 4005: Connector sockets, 4005Z: Placement marks, 4009A: First area, 4009B: Second area, 4009C: Mounting area, 4009D: Peripheral area, 4009F: Side end face, 4009G: Notched surface, 4009X: Notched portion, 4011: Capacitor, 4012: Resistor, 4012A: Leads, 4013: Connector sockets, 4019A to 4019D, 4019F to 4019M, 4019P, 4019Q, 4019S, 4019Y, 4019Z: Recognition marks, 4019P, 4019Q, 4019S: Recognition marks, 4021: Reference holes, 4022: Resistors, 4023: Reference holes, 4026: Electronic components, 4026A: Leads, 4026F to 4026I: Marks, 4031: Vias, 4031A: Vias, 4032: Specific ground areas, 4032A: Vias, 4040: Board, 4045: Front surface, 4101: Front surface, 4102: Back surface

Claims (1)

A printed circuit board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted is provided as a board for controlling games;
The printed circuit board has a multilayer structure in which one or more insulating layers and one or more conductor layers are laminated,
a substrate surface of the printed circuit board having a peripheral region outside a mounting region in which the plurality of electronic components are mounted, the peripheral region having a different color from the mounting region due to a laminated structure different from that of the mounting region;
Reference holes that can be used to position or fix the printed circuit board are formed in the peripheral area,
In the peripheral region, a first region corresponding to an outer periphery of the printed circuit board and a second region surrounding the reference hole have a different laminate structure of the board from a third region of the peripheral region that is different from both the first region and the second region,
the third region is formed to have a lighter color and a higher transparency than the mounting region, and the first region and the second region are formed to have a lighter color and a higher transparency than the third region,
information relating to the layout of electronic components to be mounted can be printed on the board surface of the printed circuit board;
a first type mark resembling an outer shape of the predetermined electronic component when mounted is printed in an area of the board surface of the printed circuit board where the predetermined electronic component is to be mounted, as information relating to the placement of the predetermined electronic component having a height equal to or greater than a predetermined height among the plurality of electronic components;
a second type of mark that is different from the outer shape of the specific electronic component when mounted is printed in an area where the specific electronic component is disposed on the board surface of the printed circuit board, as information relating to the placement of the specific electronic component that has a height less than a predetermined value among the plurality of electronic components;
when the specific electronic component mounted in the arrangement area of the specific electronic component is viewed from above the board surface of the printed circuit board, a part of the outline of the second-type mark is shielded by the specific electronic component, and other parts of the outline of the second-type mark are exposed on both sides of the outside of the specific electronic component, with the specific electronic component sandwiched between them;
the second type of mark includes information other than the outer shape of the specific electronic component, and the type of the specific electronic component to be placed in the area where the second type of mark is printed can be identified based on the information;
The plurality of electronic components include insertion-mounted components that can be mounted on the printed circuit board by inserting leads of the electronic components from a first surface of the printed circuit board into through holes formed in the printed circuit board at assembly positions of the electronic components and soldering leads protruding from a second surface behind the first surface,
predetermined insertion-mounted components among the insertion-mounted components are subjected to clinching treatment to bend end portions of leads protruding from the second surface,
A gaming machine characterized in that no through holes other than the through hole through which the lead is inserted are formed within a predetermined distance from the end of the lead bent by clinching.